As our story begins, Marlena and Belle are in Aremid, staying with Stefano and Kristen. John has been cleared of the murder charges but it has been kept a secret so John can go to Aremid undercover in disguise and avoids everyone who might recognize him, including Marlena. An uneasy truce exists between Marlena and Kristen. Marlena firmly believes in John’s innocence and Kristen is firmly convinced he is guilty and the only feeling she has left for him is hatred. John finally decides that it is time to risk seeing Marlena. He discovers that Marlena, accompanied by Kristen, have taken Belle to the park. He locates them seated on a park bench, Belle’s carriage in front of them. He hides within listening distance. Kristen peeks into the baby carriage. “Oh look, she finally fell asleep.”
Marlena reaches into the carriage and tucks the blanket securely around Belle. “Yes, she has. I’ve been so worried about her. She hasn’t slept well since we left Salem. I think she misses her daddy.” Hatred enters Kristen’s eyes, her voice a notch cooler. “Marlena, I thought we agreed not to talk about John.” Marlena looks at her sharply. “I was making an observation, not opening a discussion about John.”
“I don’t even like hearing him mentioned.” “I’m truly sorry you feel that way, Kristen and I know we agreed not to discuss him but I still don’t understand how you could ever think he was capable of murdering Tony.” Kristen stands and looks down at Marlena, her voice bitter. “You didn’t see how John was acting, how much he hated Tony. Tony was dying, Marlena and the only thing he wanted for me was to be happy and he knew John would make me happy. He was as mistaken about that as I was and now he’s dead, murdered by John. He robbed Tony of what little of his life he had left. I hope he rots in jail.” She turns to leave but Marlena’s words stop her. “I pity you, Kristen. I pity you because you’ll never again know the kind of love you’ve so callously thrown away. I know how much John loved you and I’m finding it very difficult to believe that you truly loved him. I saw how many times you lost faith in him and when he needed your faith and trust the most, you turned your back on him and believed the worst. Tell me, were you just using John all along to get back at your father and Tony or was it to fulfill your own selfish needs?”
“I don’t have to stand here and listen to this,” Kristen practically shouts at her. Marlena’s calm voice is a glaring contrast. “No, you don’t and it would be typical of you to run away rather than face the truth about yourself and your actions. You’ve made me realize something, Kristen. You’ve made me realize that you’re more of a DiMera than I could ever have believed and John really is better off without you. He needs someone in his life who believes in him completely. Someone who won’t play games with his emotions. Someone who can share his life with an openness and honesty. No DiMera is capable of that.”
Kristen steps back as if hit by a blow but she recovers quickly, as she asks heatedly, “If you really believe that, then how do you explain your actions, Marlena? Just what are your motives for agreeing to be my father’s guest here? I thought you believed he was a different man, that you were starting to care for him. Or is this all some little plot for revenge to pay him back for everything he’s ever done to you?” “My reasons for being here with Stefano are none of your business. But I will tell you this, if I wanted revenge on Stefano – the old Stefano, I wouldn’t be living under his roof and I certainly wouldn’t have brought my daughter with me.”
“And you really expect me to believe that?” An edge creeps into Marlena’s voice as she gives Kristen a look of intense dislike. “I don’t care what you believe, except when it comes to John. I will keep to our agreement not to discuss him from now on but there is one last thing I would say to you – don’t let your hatred for John consume you to the point where you act on it. If you do, you will regret it.” “Is that suppose to be a threat, Marlena?” “No, Kristen, that was a promise.” She rises to her feet and places her hands on the carriage. “Now, if you will excuse me, I think I’ll take Belle for the rest of that walk – alone.” John moves away from his hiding place to follow Marlena, missing Kristen’s look of cold hatred and her final words. “It isn’t me who is going to regret things, Marlena.”
Marlena finds a calm, peaceful spot by a fountain to sit to still the emotional turmoil within her brought on by her argument with Kristen. She reaches into the carriage and caresses her daughter’s fair hair and sighs. “What are we still doing here, Belle?” “I was wondering the same thing, Doc.” Startled, Marlena jumps to her feet and turns to face a bearded, unkempt John dressed in beggar’s clothes. Her face fills with joy. “John!” He opens his arms and she rushes into them. His arms close around her as he hugs her tightly.
After a moment of companionable silence, enjoying the feeling of being in each others’ arms, Marlena looks up at him. “John, what are you doing here? I thought you were in jail.” He grins. “Does that mean you are or aren’t happy to see me?” “Well, of course, I’m happy to see you. I’m just surprised. I knew Abe and Bo were looking for evidence to clear you…” She stops as a sudden thought occurs to her and reaches up and grasps his shirt front in concern. “You didn’t escape from jail, did you?” His hands close over hers, his voice reassuring. “No, Doc, I didn’t escape from jail. I was cleared of the murder charges several weeks ago.” “Oh, I’m so glad.”
The last part of what he’d said sinks in and she pulls away from him. “Several weeks ago? And you’re just now letting me know? Do you know how worried I’ve been about you?” He reaches out and takes her arm and guides her back to the fountain. “There is a reason why I didn’t tell you and I’ll explain everything but first, I want to see my daughter.” As John looks down at his sleeping daughter, Marlena says softly. “She’s missed you terribly.” “I’ve missed her, too, Doc.” He reaches in and touches Belle’s cheek. “She’s even more beautiful than I remembered, just like her mama.” Marlena sits down on the edge of the fountain, covering how touched she is, she says firmly, “I’d like to hear that explanation now, John.”
He sits next to her. “I should have remembered how persistent you can be.” “Then stop stalling and tell me.” “To sum it up in a nutshell, I’ve been working undercover ever since I was cleared of the murder charges.” He pulls at his grimy shirt. “Hence my new fashion wear.” He grins to lighten the mood. “So, does it make a statement?” Marlena laughs as she wrinkles her nose and waves her hand in front of her face. “It’s making a statement all right. Just how long have you been wearing that thing?” “I’m insulted, Doc. You didn’t seem to mind when you first saw me.” “I was…surprised and overwhelmed and you haven’t answered my question. How long have you been undercover and why?” He rolls his eyes, she wasn’t going to give up. “I’ve been working undercover here in Aremid for three weeks and I think you know why.”
“Three weeks?” “Doc, no one but Abe and Bo know that the charges have been dropped and that I’m working undercover. I couldn’t risk telling you sooner.” The hurt evident in her eyes. “You didn’t trust me?” Takes her hand. “No, Doc, that isn’t it at all. You know I trust you with my life. I couldn’t risk Stefano or Kristen finding out that I was here and you were never alone long enough for me to approach you until today.” “How did you know I was here?” “I overheard your conversation with Kristen and followed you here.” She turns her hand in his and grasps his tightly. “Oh John, I’m sorry you had to hear what Kristen was saying.” Gives her hand a return squeeze. “Don’t be, I knew how she felt about me. I was just concerned about you. I got the distinct impression that your friendship with her has deteriorated quite a bit and I didn’t like her accusations about why you were here. Doc, why are you still in Aremid?”
She looks away from him. “I’m not sure about that anymore.” He lifts his hand to her chin and forces her to look at him. “Don’t tell me this uncertainty has to do with your feelings for Stefano?” She avoids answering his question by asking one of her own. “John, you said I knew why you were here undercover, but I’m not sure I do. Why are you here?”
“Oh no you don’t, Dr. Evans. I’m not telling you anything else until you answer my question.” His hands move to her shoulders. “Tell me you’re not falling for Stefano.” She tries to laugh it off. “Of course I’m not, John, don’t be ridiculous. I came here to help the man, that’s all. I’ll admit that I’ve been confused about him and my feelings toward him. I can never forget what he did to me, to you or to my family but I also can’t forget how much he’s helped me since the possession ended. And he has helped me, John. He was there when no one else was. He filled a void in my life. I just wanted to help him the way he helped me.” “He’s been walking for a month now, Marlena. Your “obligation” to him has been fulfilled. So why are you still here?”
“I thought I could help him regain his…memory.” She confesses quietly. Stunned, John releases her. “Help him regain his memory? Have you gone mad? How could you put yourself and our daughter in that kind of danger?” “Stefano has been very good to me and to Belle. I told you before, John, he’s not the same man and I don’t think he will be even if he does regain his memory. I truly believe that he wouldn’t do anything to hurt me.”
“Why? Because he says he loves you? Damn it, Doc, you just said you haven’t forgotten what he’s already done to you and we both know what he’s capable of. You’re only fooling yourself if you believe he isn’t going to revert back to the same old Stefano.” Marlena grabs his arm. “That’s why you’re here, isn’t it? You think he’s going to regain his memory and revert back and you’re looking for evidence against him.”
He looks her in the eye, his voice fills with conviction. “I’m going to see that he’s put away, far away, where he’ll never hurt you or anyone else again. Aremid holds a dark secret and Stefano is involved in that secret and my instincts tell me that if he does remember, you and Belle and many others will be in grave danger.” He lifts his hand to her face and touches her cheek, his voice softens. “I know you believe in the changes you’ve seen in Stefano, Doc. Seeing and believing the best in people is one of the things that makes you so wonderful. But, deep down inside, I think you know as well as I do that the changes in him won’t last. I don’t want to see you hurt by him again. I’ll kill him before I’ll let that happen.”
Fear in her voice and in her eyes. “John, please, don’t say that. I know you weren’t capable of murdering Tony but I know Stefano is a different matter. Tell me you won’t try to kill him. Tell me you’ll do no more than investigate him. Please, John, for Belle’s sake.” A warm glow lights his eyes as he realizes that she wasn’t pleading just for Belle. “All right, Doc, for Belle’s sake, I promise I won’t try to kill Stefano unless he forces me to.” Marlena nods in relief, knowing she wouldn’t get him to promise any more than that. She checks on Belle and is pleased to see that she is still asleep.
“Marlena, I want you to leave Aremid.” Her glance moves from Belle to Belle’s father. “I can’t do that.” John can’t hide the edge of jealousy in his voice. “Because Stefano needs you?” Marlena shakes her head and says softly, “No, because you need me.” “If you think what I think you’re thinking…” Marlena places her fingers on his lips and says with emphasis “You NEED me.” John’s fingers close around her wrist and he gently pulls her hand away, a warning note in his voice. “Doc…” She leans over and whispers in his ear. “You need me.”
John turns his head, their lips are mere inches apart. “No!” Marlena smiles. “Yes.” Their eyes lock and they move closer but before their lips meet, John jumps up and puts some distance between them. He had to break the spell she was weaving around him and he didn’t want to tell her just how much he really did need her – a need that had nothing to do with Stefano. Marlena knew she had derailed John for the moment and spoke up before he could pull himself together. “I’ll take Belle back to Salem to stay with Sean and Caroline and then I’m coming back here.”
Before John could lodge his protests, Stefano’s voice calling for Marlena reaches them. Marlena smiles as John’s sudden frustration is clearly evident on his face. She stands up and walks over to him and lightly brushes his lips with hers, “I’ll see you when I get back.”
Before John can stop her, she calls out to Stefano and takes the carriage and disappears from his view. He quickly follows her, keeping well out of sight. Marlena meets up with Stefano near the park benches where she’d been sitting earlier with Kristen. “There you are, Marlena. I was beginning to worry about you.” He looks around. “Where is Kristen?” “I thought she went back to the house. I decided to stay out here awhile longer. You really shouldn’t have worried about me.” Stefano frowns. “I would prefer it if you were not here alone in the future.”
Marlena’s suspicions are instantly aroused. “Why?” “I am told that there have been many strange occurrences here in Aremid lately. I would feel much more comfortable if I knew you and Belle were not alone.” He raises his fingers to her cheek. “I would be devastated if anything happened to you.” A sudden movement in the bushes captures his attention. Before he can move to investigate, Marlena puts her hand on his arm and says quickly, “Stefano, there is something I wanted to tell you.” “Yes?” “I’ve decided to take Belle back to Salem.”
“Marlena, if you have decided that because of what I just told you, I did not mean to frighten you.” She smiles to reassure him. “You didn’t. I’ve been thinking about taking her back for some time now. She hasn’t been sleeping or eating well and I think it’s because she’s been taken away from her family and everything that was familiar to her. She needs to be home again where she feels safe and secure.”
“Does this mean you will be staying in Salem, also?” A crestfallen look crosses his features. “Oh no, I’m planning to come back. We haven’t made much progress in your regaining your memory and I did promise to stay and help you until it has completely returned. I will want to drive back to Salem periodically to visit Belle, but that won’t interfere with your therapy sessions.” She starts to push the carriage back towards the house, Stefano falls in to step beside her. “When do you plan to leave?” Marlena glances up at him, relieved that he doesn’t appear the least suspicious. “I’d like to take her home as soon as we return to the house. I could get her all settled in with Sean and Caroline tonight and return tomorrow afternoon.”
“Why don’t you let me drive you back to Salem?” Stefano asks her. “I don’t think that is a very good idea, Stefano. With the memory flashes you’ve been having lately and the way they affect you, driving is out of the question.” “Then at least let one of my drivers take you.” Marlena stops and smiles at him. “I appreciate your concern, Stefano but I’d feel more comfortable driving myself. That way I won’t feel like I’m on a time limit if I need to stay with Belle a little longer than I planned. If it will ease your worries about me, I’ll call you the moment I arrive in Salem.” He returns her smile and nods his head. “Yes, that will help very much.”
They resume walking, and as they come to the drive of the house, Stefano says quietly. “I will miss you, Marlena.” She smiles at him again. “I’ll be back before you know it. Now if you’ll excuse me, I’d like to go pack Belle’s things. I’ll let you know when we’re ready to leave.”
John watches Stefano closely from his place of concealment as Marlena returns to the house. He isn’t able to glean a clue to Stefano’s thoughts. He ducks back quickly as Stefano turns around and scans the surrounding area, as if he knew he was being watched. Stefano shrugs and returns to the house himself. John slowly works his way to the garage and slips inside unnoticed. Halfway back to Salem on a deserted stretch of highway, Marlena has a flat tire…
Marlena slowly pulls the car off to the side of the road and turns off the ignition, then hits the steering wheel in frustration. “Not now, not here!” Belle, playing contentedly in her child seat, looks up at the sound of her mother’s voice. Marlena reaches over and caresses her hair. “It looks like we’re in trouble, Belle. We have a flat tire and I’m afraid Mommy doesn’t know the first thing about fixing one.” Belle points over Marlena’s shoulder, smiles and says “Daddy.” “Yes, sweetheart, I’m sure your daddy does know how to fix a tire but he isn’t here right now.” Belle tilts her head to look around her mother and waves, repeating. “Daddy.”
Marlena turns in time to see John standing next to the car, looking in her window smiling and waving at Belle. Without warning, she opens the car door, hitting him with it. John holds his nose as Marlena gets out of the car. “Ow! What was that for?” “John, how long have you been following us?” Works his nose to make sure it isn’t broken. “Ever since you left Aremid.” She eyes him suspiciously. “Tell me you didn’t tamper with that tire so we’d have to stop so you could come to our rescue.” Raising his fingers in a boy scout salute. “I swear to you, Doc, I didn’t tamper with that tire. You don’t think I’d be stupid enough to do something that would jeopardize you and Belle, do you?” Marlena brushes a wisp of hair from her face. “No, I don’t think you would do something that stupid.”
John moves over to the flat tire and looks it over. “I checked your car out myself before it even left the garage. There was nothing wrong with it. But someone has definitely tampered with this tire. It was cut to create a slow leak.” “Why would someone do something like that?” He looks up at her. “You tell me.” “John, if you’re thinking it was Stefano…” John moves back over to her side. “You don’t need to defend the man, Marlena. I know it wasn’t Stefano. The fact that he was anxious to have you return to him was more than obvious.”
“You were spying on us!” “I’m was merely watching over you and it’s a damn good thing I have been. This little incident could have been serious, Doc. Not to mention that there isn’t much traffic on this stretch of road this time of day. You and Belle could have been hurt or stranded here for who knows how long.” “Yes, of course, you’re right,” she concedes. “I’m sorry. I should be thanking you and I do thank you.”He ignores her thanks. “Why don’t you get Belle out of the car, Doc and I’ll see about changing this tire.” Before Marlena can release Belle from her safety seat and take her out of the car, John is reaching into the back seat pulling out the suitcases, startling her.
“John, what are you doing?” “Your spare has been cut to ribbons, Doc. I’m going to have to take you and Belle back to Salem in my car. You can call someone from there to tow your car back to town.” “You can’t do that. What if someone sees you? It will blow your cover.” John looks at her, exasperated. “If you think I’m going to leave you and Belle stranded here…Look, Doc, I don’t give a damn about my cover right now. I’m more concerned with getting the two of you back to Salem and then finding out who tampered with your car. In case it hasn’t sunk into that pretty head of yours yet, someone didn’t want you to make it back to Salem in one piece.” She snaps at him to cover her sudden fear. “Don’t patronize me, John.” She takes a deep breath and says more calmly. “I figured out that much when you said you’d checked the car over. But you don’t have to take us all the way back to Salem. You could call Abe or Bo and have one of them come get us.”
Walking back towards his rented car parked off the road behind Marlena’s car, his arms full of suitcases, he tells her firmly. “No way, Doc. I’m taking you both back. That way I can protect you both and see that you get home safely. End of discussion.” Marlena follows him. “I appreciate your concern and your wanting to protect us, John but it’s silly of you to want to destroy your cover when we’d be just as safe with Bo or Abe.”
John stops dead in his tracks and drops the suitcases on the ground. He spins around and grabs her, pulling her into his arms. Before Marlena can react, his mouth takes hers with a savage intensity. A dam of long pent up emotions bursts open, as Marlena surrenders to the forceful domination of his lips. Her arms curl around his neck and she moves even closer to him. Close enough to feel the beat of his heart thudding against her own. Her mouth yields all he demands and then demands from him in return as their tongues explore and collide. A moment, a lifetime later, his kiss became stirringly gentle. It was a kiss for her lonely soul to melt into. It was a promise of things to come.
A gurgle of laughter from Belle brings the pair back down to earth. Their lips part and their eyes meet and each saw the other’s filled with awe and wonder. Yet they weren’t ready to verbalize what they had just experienced or what they were feeling. “I think Belle wants some attention.” Marlena manages in a whisper. His voice was thick and unsteady. “Yeah…but before you go to her…have I convinced you to stop arguing with me?” Marlena nods. “Yeah.” She slips from his arms and retraces the few steps she’d taken as John picks up the suitcases and puts them in his car. A short time later, Belle is safely tucked into her car seat in the back seat of John’s car and the trio is on the road. An awkward silence falls between John and Marlena. The memory of their kiss still burning on each of their lips.
John breaks the silence as he reaches over and strokes her cheek with his knuckles and says gently. “You look tired, Doc. Why don’t you try to get some sleep?” She captures his hand to her cheek for a moment and then releases it. “Yes, I think I will.” She closes her eyes and it isn’t long before she is sound asleep. John glances over at her, his eyes fill with a love he hadn’t dared let show in a very long time. He smiles. “Sooner or later, we’re going to have to discuss what happened, Doc.” He glances at his daughter in the back seat. She too, was sound asleep. John felt a mantle of peace and contentment settle over him and he knew this was what he wanted.
Meanwhile, back at Aremid. Kristen enters her father’s study to find Stefano standing before the French doors looking out over the moonlit garden. “Good evening, Father.” Stefano turns to her with a smile. “Ah, Kristen, good evening. I was not sure if you were going to join me tonight.” Kristen moves to his side. “I would have been here sooner but I thought you and Marlena were spending the evening together and I didn’t want to intrude.” With a wave of his hand to indicate the empty room, he replies, “As you can see I am all alone. Marlena has returned to Salem.”
“I’m sorry, father, I know how much you care for her.” She gave his arm a comforting pat. “She is not gone for good, Kristen. She will be back tomorrow.” “Are you sure?” He nods. “Marlena gave me her word.” “I wish you had your memory back.” Kristen says suddenly. Stefano looks at her in surprise. “Why would you wish for such a thing? Even you hated the man I was.” Kristen sighs. “I thought I did but I’ve come to realize just how much that Stefano loved me and how very right he was about what was best for me.” Her voice hardens. “Now it is too late.”
“You are speaking of Tony, are you not?” She nods. “Among other things.” He takes her arm in his. “Come, let us sit down and discuss this. You sound very bitter, my Kristen.” He leads her to the sofa and they sit down together. Stefano turns to her and takes her hands. “Now tell me what you are feeling.” “I want revenge, father.” He eyes her speculatively. “Revenge on whom?” Her eyes fill with hatred. “John Black, your worst enemy. I want revenge for what he did to you and to Tony but I’m not sure how to go about getting it. If you had your memory back, I know you would be able to guide me in this.”
He shakes his head sadly. “This is not like you, Kristen.” “I think this is more like me than you know, father. Marlena said something to me today to make me realize that.””What did she say to you?” “She told me that I was more of a DiMera than she would ever have believed and I realized she was right.” She squeezes her father’s hands. “I’m not ashamed of that anymore.”
A frown knits his brow as Stefano inquires softly, an edge in his voice that Kristen misses. “Why would Marlena say such a thing to you?” A hint of her earlier anger in her voice. “We were discussing John Black. Marlena and I do not see eye-to-eye on that subject. She still defends him, even though he’s been found guilty of Tony’s murder and put in jail.” Her voice gentles to deliver something she knows will be painful for him to hear. “Marlena is still in love with him, father.” The pain is very evident in Stefano’s eyes. “She told me their relationship was over.” Kristen replies bitterly. “It might have been for a time, but now that I’m out of the picture, I’m sure it will only be a matter of time before they resume things. I know you love her, father, but surely you have realized by now that she will never return those feelings? How can she when she still loves him?”
Stefano releases her hands and rises, moving over to the chess board on the table beside his desk. He picks up the Queen. “So, I still have not been able to break the bond that exists between them?” Kristen’s head swings around and she stares at him in shock. “You remember!” His eyes glitter coldly. “I have remembered for quite some time now. I merely pretended my amnesia to keep Marlena by my side. I thought if I gave her enough time, the feelings of friendship she felt for me would deepen.” He slams the Queen down on the chess board. “And all the while, she was playing her own little game.”
“Then you were as suspicious as I was of her sudden decision to take Belle back to Salem.” He nods as his dark eyes take on a pensive look. He had to decide how he was going to handle Marlena when she returned and then there was the matter of John Black. He really didn’t want Kristen getting involved in his plans for revenge. She and Peter were all he had left now that Tony was gone, he would do whatever it took to protect them.
From across the room, Kristen could tell that the wheels were turning in her father’s head and he was scheming again. A cold, cruel smile settles on her lips. John Black and Marlena Evans would pay and pay dearly.
Marlena wakes up as the car slows and rolls to a stop. It takes her a moment to realize that they are not outside the Brady Pub nor anywhere near Salem. She is surprised and dismayed to see that it is snowing hard and had been for some time judging by the drifts building up around the cabin revealed in the car’s headlights. She turns her head and looks at John, saying the first thing that pops into her head. “This isn’t the Brady Pub.”
John glances out the window that was rapidly collecting snow and then looks back at Marlena, a hint of humor in his voice. “No? Really?” Irritation crosses Marlena’s face. “This is not a joking matter, John. When did this storm start and where are we?” Turning off the car, John says shortly. “It started just after you fell asleep. We’re at my place and before you ask me any more questions, I think we’d better take Belle inside. Okay?” Marlena answers him with a nod of her head.
A short time later, Marlena and Belle are wrapped snugly in a quilt seated in a rocking chair before a blazing fire. The lanterns flicker as the door flies open, brining in a gust of wind and snow. John enters with an arm full of logs. He kicks the door shut. “The storm is getting worse, Doc.” Marlena doesn’t hear him. She is lost in a vision of a shirtless John chopping wood outside another cabin. “Doc?” Then she sees herself inside that cabin running a cool wet cloth over her heated flesh. “Marlena!” The vision fades instantly. Marlena looks up to see a worried John standing over her. “I’m sorry, John. Did you say something?”
“Yes, I did but you didn’t hear me. You were a million miles away.” The lingering effects of the vision, leave Marlena feeling confused and she answers absentmindedly. “Was I?” He waves his hand in front of her face. “Earth to Doc.” Marlena gives herself a mental shake and tosses off the quilt. “You know, it’s a little too warm in here now.” John’s eyebrow lifts in surprise and a grin touches his lips. “That must have been one hot place you were visiting, Doc. It’s still pretty chilly in here.”
Wanting to change the subject fast, Marlena stands up and moves with Belle to look out the window. The snow storm continues to rage. “Why is it snowing out? It’s spring, the flowers are in bloom, the leaves are on the trees….” John moves up behind her and places his hands on her shoulders, his breath tickles her ear as he says in a low voice. “Think of it as fate, Doc.” She turns her head and looks at him, losing herself in the warmth of his gaze. Belle squirms in Marlena’s arms, breaking the spell between them. John chuckles softly and reaches out and gently ruffles his daughter’s hair. “I think someone is hungry. Why don’t you take her back over by the fire where it’s warm, Doc, while I handle the kitchen duties?”
Marlena nods and moves to the sofa, sitting Belle beside her with some of her toys. She watches John move comfortably around the kitchen area. “John, how long have you been living here?” Taking food out of the cupboard, he replies. “Since I got out of jail. I didn’t want to stay in Aremid. The people there aren’t very friendly and they’re suspicious of strangers.” “I thought we were closer to Salem.” Marlena says in surprise. ” ‘fraid not, Doc. When the storm hit, I decided to back track and come here rather than try to make it all the way to Salem. We’re about an hour away from Aremid.”
“Stefano!” Marlena says suddenly. John stops what he is doing and sighs. “Just when I think we’re finally having a pleasant conversation, you have to bring his name up.” He turns and looks at her. “What about Stefano?” “What if he calls the pub?” “He finds out you never made it to Salem. So what? He’s not going to come looking for you in this storm no matter how much he worries about you. Tell me, Doc, just what is it that has you so worried about ‘him’ all of a sudden?” “I don’t know. But I’ve had this unshakable feeling ever since we left Aremid that I should be worried.” She admits reluctantly. John turns back to the meal preparation and says lightly. “Maybe you’ve just had time to rethink what we discussed back in the park and you know that Stefano is still a very dangerous man.”
Marlena rises and sets Belle on the large bed with some of her toys and then moves to stand by the short end of the L-shaped counter of the kitchen area. “It’s not me I’m worried about, John.” John turns away from his work and moves over to her and cups her face with his hands as his eyes cling to hers to analyze her reaction to his next words. “Doc, can we forget about Stefano for tonight? I want to take advantage of this storm and just enjoy being with you and Belle. Is that too much to ask?” He wasn’t disappointed. Her eyes became misty and wistful and her voice softened in response. “No, that isn’t too much to ask. I’d like that too.”
At that moment, all of Marlena’s loneliness and confusion welded together in one upsurge of devouring yearning. A yearning to be with this man again for the rest of her life. To be kissed and held by him, loved, protected and cherished by him – forever. John sees the yearning in her eyes and it reaches out and touches his heart and soul and he knows that this is a turning point for them – their love would never be denied again. He breaths her name and slides his hands into her hair and lowers his mouth to hers. Marlena drinks in the sweetness of his kiss and as his tongue explores the recesses of her mouth, shivers of long pent up desire – now unleashed – race through her. His moist, firm mouth demands a response and she gives it. John’s hands slide down and settle in the curve of her back. He pulls her closer…and suddenly feels an insistent tug on his pant leg and hears his daughter’s voice “Belle hungry!”
John reluctantly raises his mouth from Marlena’s and says with a groan of frustration. “Hold that thought!” Marlena nods. “Um, hmm!” She moves from John’s arms and picks up her daughter. “All right, Belle, mommy will leave Daddy alone so he can fix us something to eat. Shall we read a book while we’re waiting?” Belle nods her head enthusiastically. A sigh of contentment escapes John as he watches them settle on the bed and become in engrossed in a fairy tale. Belle looks up and sees him watching them. She lifts her tiny hand and points at the kitchen. John’s eyes meet Marlena’s and they share a smile of amusement. John turns back to the kitchen, muttering under his breath. “I knew she’d turn out to be as bossy as her mother.”
*****
Stefano was concerned about Marlena when the snow storm hit only hours after she’d left. He knew she wouldn’t escape it before she got back to Salem. He wondered if she were there now and had to stop himself from picking up the phone to call to find out. The Bradys would not appreciate a phone call from him and Marlena did say she’d call when she arrived. But would she? Was he right to suspect her motives after his talk with Kristen? Marlena’s concern for him had seemed genuine, as did her desire to help him regain his memory. He’d often wondered why she would want to do that, given her hatred of him and all he had done to her. He hadn’t seen any signs of that hatred for quite some time but he knew it would return if she ever found out he’d already regained his memory and hadn’t told her. He’d lose her forever.
He didn’t count John Black as an obstacle. A thorn in his side, yes, but one that could easily be taken care of. The question was, how to take care of John Black and insure that Marlena turned to the Stefano she trusted for comfort and hopefully, a future? Stefano toys with the Queen he’d taken from the chessboard. “Ah, Marlena, I am faced with quite the dilemma. I should have realized that you still loved John very deeply, as I’m sure he does you. Could you ever be truly be happy with me after knowing that kind of love? I would be a fool to settle only for friendship from you when I know the passions that lie beneath the surface – passions that have, thus far, only been stirred for or because of John.” He turns from the window and sets the chess piece back on the board, then picks up a Pawn. His voice hardens. “One thing is clear, Marlena, there are secrets you must never learn. Secrets that would reunite you and John forever. Secrets that would take away any hope I would ever have of winning you.”
“What secrets are those, father?” Startled, Stefano drops the chess piece. “Kristen, I did not hear you come in. How long have you been standing there?” Kristen moves into the room. “Long enough to hear you say there were secrets that would take away your hope of ever winning Marlena. Was there something else besides your keeping the return of your memory from Marlena?” Stefano recovers quickly. “That secret is enough.” “Then you still intend to continue to try to win her?” Kristen turns away so her father cannot see how much she loathes that idea. “I love her, Kristen.” He replies simply.
“And what if you can never have her?” She asks casually, as she reaches down and flips through a book on a side table. “I will not allow myself to think of that possibility. I know she has started to care for me, I only need time to nurture those feelings and with John Black safely behind bars, there is nothing standing in my way.” Stefano says with confidence. Kristen turns back to face him. “Except the truth.” Stefano smiles. “Ah, but she will never hear it from either of us. So, my plans cannot help but succeed. Now, if you will excuse me, I would like to see what the cook is planning for dinner.” He leaves the room. Kristen slams the book shut. “I’m sorry, father. I can’t let you destroy your life too. You don’t see it now, but in the end you will thank me.”
*****
John and Marlena are seated on opposite sides of an old washtub placed before the fireplace. In the center of the tub, surrounded by bubbles, is their daughter splashing delightedly with a plastic cup. Marlena looks down at her wet clothes and then up at John, his face and hair still bearing traces of mashed carrots, his shirt ruined. She doesn’t hide the amusement in her voice. “Well, at least she didn’t get food all over me like she did the two of you.” John’s eyes are drawn to the way the wet blouse clings to Marlena. “Yes, but you wear the water much better than I did the food.” Belle picks that moment to fling a cup full of water into her father’s face. Marlena bites back her laugh at John’s startled expression. She reaches for a towel and says to Belle. “Well, young lady, I think you’ve had enough excitement for one day and I’m not sure how much more of your antics your poor father can take.”
Belle looks from her mother to her father and breaks into a big smile, then holds up her arms to her father. Marlena moves over to wrap the towel around Belle as John lifts her from the tub. Belle lays her head on John’s chest as he cradles her in his arm. His hand moves up to gently caress her wet hair as his eyes meet and hold Marlena’s gaze. “I don’t think I’ve ever been so happy and at peace, Doc.”
Marlena picks up the washcloth from the side of the tub and uses it to dab at a spot carrot on John’s cheek. “Children have a wonderful way of making everything right with the world, don’t they?” He reaches up and captures her hand. “It’s not just Belle, it’s you, Marlena. There is something so right about the three of us being here together.” Her voice fills with firm conviction. “Yes, there is.” The sound of the howling wind intensifies, causing Marlena to shiver. John rises to his feet and then pulls Marlena up. “I think you’d better get out of those wet clothes, while I clean up this mess and build the fire back up.” Marlena nods, then reaches for Belle who moves willingly into her arms. “As for you, my sweet baby girl, it’s bedtime.”
*****
A worried frown knits Marlena’s brow as she paces the floor and tries to see out the frosted window for the fifth time in the last minute. All she could see was darkness and the snow swirling across the outside of the window. Where was John? She was surprised that she had fallen asleep with Belle after the short nap she’d had in the car. She’d awakened a half an hour ago and had gotten up to hang the blanket as a makeshift privacy curtain between the bed and the sofa and realized instantly that John wasn’t there. She’d heard him say he was going to get some more wood just before she fell asleep. She went ahead and hung the blanket and then checked on Belle several times to give herself something to do besides pace.
Five more minutes pass. Marlena’s fears mount. She tries to look out the window again, to see any sign of movement, something. She saw nothing but the storm and the darkness yet again. John could not survive out there very long in this weather. The temperature had dropped considerably and the snow was blinding. Was he hurt? Should she risk trying to look for him? No, she couldn’t leave Belle alone. Frustration mixed with her fear. The chill from the window reaches out and envelopes her. She pulls her robe closer around her and goes to stand before the fire. She stares into the flames and whispers “Please let him be all right. I can’t lose him now. Oh please, God, you couldn’t be so cruel.”
A moment later, the cabin door opens and closes. Marlena swings around and sees John standing there. He had changed his clothing, the beard was gone and he was covered in a mantle of white snow. She didn’t care. In the space of time it took to draw in a breath, she was in his arms, dragging his head down and kissing him with a desperation born of her fear of losing him. John didn’t know what prompted her actions, he wasn’t even going to try to guess as he lost himself in the warm feel of her in his arms and her soft mouth under his, kissing him with a passion he had not forgotten.
Their lips part and their eyes meet and they knew that right now, at this moment, there was no need for words between them. Marlena helps John remove his coat. After he tosses it on the peg, she holds out her hand to him and leads him over to the quilts spread out before the fireplace. She lets go of his hand and they turn to each other, fighting the urge to fall into each others arms. They had been waiting a long time for this moment and they wanted to savor it.
Marlena’s breath catches in her throat as John reaches out and gently touches her face with a trembling hand. The world falls away and it is just the two of them. Their love for one another wraps them in an invisible circle that can never be broken. The very air around them is charged with electricity as passion flares between them.
John holds out his hand to her and Marlena slips her hand confidently into his signaling to him that she wants what is about to happen just as much as he does. In unison, they slowly sink to the quilts, both of them knowing that this is a significant moment in their lives. One in which, by silent communion of the heart, mind, soul and body they pledge everything that they are to the other now and forever. Bathed in the soft glow of firelight, they seal that commitment and fall into a contented sleep wrapped securely in each other’s arms.
Sometime during the night, the fire burns low and the cold chill awakens John. Marlena stirs beside him but doesn’t awaken. John reaches out and gently shakes her. “Doc, wake up.” She snuggles closer to him. “Hmm?” “Doc, I have to rebuild the fire or we’re going to freeze to death.” He reaches over and picks up her nightgown. “Come on, Doc, wake up and put this on.” Marlena sits up suddenly. “Belle!” “Yes, I imagine she’s getting cold about now too.” He helps her into her nightgown. “Why don’t you go climb into bed with her while I get this fire going again?”
A short time later, the fire is blazing in the fireplace. John slips into the bed beside Belle who is still sound asleep, curled up against her mother. Marlena reaches up and touches her fingers to John’s cheek and asks in a soft whisper. “Did I dream tonight?” He catches her hand and plants a light kiss on her palm. His voice low, so as not to awaken Belle. “No, Doc, it was very real.” Marlena threads her fingers through his. “I love you so much.” He leans over and caresses her lips with his, then says. “And I love you, Marlena.” Belle tosses in her sleep, her elbow catches John in the chest. John quickly retreats back to his corner of the bed. A soft chuckle escapes Marlena before she says. “Goodnight, John.”
John and Marlena are awakened the next morning as each receives a very slobbery kiss from Belle. They open their eyes to find their daughter sitting up between them, with an ear-to-ear grin on her face. John props his head on his hand, his ear-to-ear grin a mirror of Belle’s grin. “I think she approves.” “I don’t know. When you smile like that, you’re usually up to something.” Marlena replies with some amusement as she sits up against the pillows and lightly ruffles Belle’s soft blonde curls. “Maybe I should test my theory.” He sits up and reaches for Marlena, pulling her over to his side of the bed, trapping her against him, then looks at Belle. “Belle, should Daddy kiss Mommy?” Belle shakes her head no. Marlena laughs at John’s crestfallen look. “Why not, Belle?” She leans over and whispers loudly in John’s ear. “Daddy and Belle tickle Mommy.” Marlena squirms and tries to get out of John’s arms. “Oh no you don’t.” She doesn’t get loose and is at their mercy until she manages to turn the tables on the partners in crime. Their mingled laughter fills the cabin and they fall back, breathless, upon the bed.
Once he’s regained his breath, John turns to the two females in his life. “Now that we’ve gotten our morning calisthenics out of the way, how about some breakfast?” Belle gives her father a puzzled look until he reaches the word breakfast and nods her head enthusiastically. “I think that’s a yes.” Marlena replies, a thread of humor in her voice. She starts to get up from the bed. John reaches over and grabs her arm. “Whoa, Doc! Where do you think you’re going?” Marlena looks at him and says in a perfectly serious voice. “I was going to make breakfast.” He shakes his head, his eyes dancing. “Uh huh, you’re not getting near my kitchen. Belle and I want to be able to ‘eat’ our breakfast.” Once again, Belle is nodding her head enthusiastically. Marlena looks from daughter to father. “Why do I get this feeling the two of you have this secret pact going to conspire against me today?” John looks at Belle. “Belle, are we out to get Mommy today?” Belle grins and nods her head, then says. “Yes.” “Maybe you should stop while you’re ahead, John.” Marlena tells him as she fights to keep from laughing. John gives an exaggerated sigh and moves from the bed. Once again he is grumbling to himself as he heads for the kitchen. “Now she has a new favorite word and does she say “yes” to the kiss…nooooooo.”
After breakfast, Marlena is curled up in the warm circle of John’s arms as they sit on the sofa, watching their daughter play contentedly on the floor in front of them. Lifting her head from his chest, Marlena looks up at John. “John, where were you last night? When I woke up you were gone and you didn’t return for almost an hour. I was afraid that something had happened to you.” A slight flush of embarrassment tinges his cheeks as he admits reluctantly. “I got stuck in the car.”
“Stuck in the car?” He nods. “I went out to use the cell phone to call Abe and Bo to fill them in on our situation and make arrangements for your car to be towed back to Salem once the weather cleared. It took me a good ten minutes to get the car door open and then I had to listen to both of them read me the riot act for letting you know I was out of jail. By the time, they were finished raking me over the coals, the car door had iced back up. I thought I was going to have to spend the night out there.” He pauses. A smile lifts his lips and he lowers his voice a notch. “I’m very glad I didn’t have to.” Marlena returns his smile. “So am I.” She settles back against his chest. “What else did Abe and Bo have to say?”
“The storm should pass by tonight but it may be another day before the roads are clear enough to head for Salem. You won’t mind spending a few more days here, will you?” “What do you think?” He can’t help adding a note of hopefulness to his voice, even though he knows what her answer will be. “No?” A hint of laughter in her voice. “You always were such a good guesser.” Her laughter fades as she feels John tense and she knew he was about to become serious.
“Doc, you do realize that everything between us has changed now, don’t you?” She sits up and looks at him. “Yes, I do. We’ve finally admitted that we still love each other and I hope it means we’re going to have a future together.” He reaches up and brushes a lock of hair from her cheek. “It does mean that, sweetheart, but you know that’s not what I’m talking about.” Marlena sighs. “You’re talking about the situation with Stefano.” He nods. “John, if you’re asking me not to go back to Aremid, don’t.” “Doc…” Determination in her voice. “I made a promise, John and I intend to see that it is fulfilled.” “Damn it, Doc, we’ve been over this before. You’ve fulfilled your promise, you’ve paid your debt – Stefano is walking.” “Yes, he’s walking but he still doesn’t remember.” She reminds him, much to his frustration. “Why are you so determined to help him remember? We both know what will happen when he does. I’m not willing to let you take that risk.”
“It’s my risk to take, John and I don’t think he will revert back to the old Stefano, not completely. He won’t be left unaffected by what has happened to him or the changes that have taken place in him. And have you stopped to remember that he is the only one who knows your entire past? Or have you given up on that?”
“You know I haven’t but that doesn’t mean you have to put yourself in the line of fire to help me get my past back. Doc, you’ll never convince me that Stefano could ever change that much. He might treat you differently because of everything you’ve done for him but I’m always going to be his most hated enemy. If he does get his memory back and he finds out about us, he’ll do everything in his power to destroy us. I’m not going to give him that chance.” Marlena places a hand on his arm. “He’s not going to find out. At least, not until it doesn’t matter anymore.”
John grasps her chin gently in his hand, his eyes hold hers and his voice softens. “Marlena, you can’t hide the love you feel for me. Not any more. It’s in your eyes, in your voice and in your actions. Can you honestly tell me that you won’t react if he happens to mention my name or worse, discovers what I’m up to?” She lowers her gaze. “I didn’t think so.” She pulls away from him, her eyes flashing angrily trying to cover her fears. “And what if he does find out what you’re up to? Who will be there to protect you?” “I have Bo and Abe for back up.” He replies evenly. Her voice fills with sarcasm. “And do you think Stefano is going to listen to them?” “Are you trying to tell me you think he’s going to listen to ‘you’?” John counters heatedly. Before Marlena can reply, Belle stands up and yells. “Daddy kiss Mommy NOW!”
The pair are so startled by their daughter’s outburst, they look at her and then at each other and without wasting any more time, John pulls Marlena into his arms and follows his daughter’s orders.
John and Marlena are the hot topic of discussion at the Salem PD that morning. Bo marches into Abe’s office and closes the door and it’s obvious he isn’t happy. “What the hell was John thinking in bringing Marlena in on the Aremid investigation?” Abe sits back in his chair and says calmly. “I’m not any happier than you are about it Bo but John has his reasons.”
“If you’re going to tell me he’s still in love with her, save it, I already know that much. That’s not a good enough reason.”
A glimmer of humor touches Abe’s dark eyes. “He got her away from Stefano and out of Aremid, didn’t he?”
Bo paces the floor in frustration. “Yea, but for how long? We both know he isn’t going to be able to convince her to stay in Salem. Not when she knows he could be walking back into danger. Now she’s in potential danger too. He should have stayed away from her.”
“Asking John to stay away from Marlena, now, is like asking the tide not to come in. It’s taken him a long time to face up to his feelings, Bo, and although I wish he had waited to let her know what he was up to, I can understand why he didn’t. I’d think you’d be able to understand that too, given your current situation.”
Bo stops dead in his tracks and glares at Abe. “My situation is different.” “The only thing different about your situation and John’s is the fact that he’s realized he never stopped loving his ex-wife and wants to spend the rest of his life with her.” Abe says pointedly, then continues. “And the more I think about it, the more I’m beginning to think that John did the right thing in telling Marlena he was working undercover.”
Bo looks at Abe in disbelief. “I don’t believe I’m hearing this.” Abe sits forward and clasps his hands together on his desk. “Think about it, Bo. Marlena was trusting Stefano too much which alienated her family and friends and she thought John was in jail. Do you think she would have been in any less danger if Stefano had gotten his memory back before John told her the truth? Who would she have turned to?”
“She would have turned to us.” Bo says with less conviction than he intended. “I see you don’t believe that any more than I do. For whatever reasons, Marlena felt she had to help Stefano and was determined to see it through to the end. So she went to Aremid with him to do that and to get away from the opposition she was constantly facing here in Salem. And we were just as guilty as everyone else in pushing her to take that step.”
Bo drops into the chair across from Abe’s desk. “So you’re saying she would have dealt with it herself and by the time she realized she was in trouble, it would have been too late.” Abe nods. “Exactly and now she doesn’t have to deal with it herself, she has John and he has her. He’s going to be more cautious now that he has more than just himself to consider.” A reminiscent smile touches his lips. “They always did make a pretty good team when they were working together.” A chuckle escapes Bo. “Yea, as long as they weren’t arguing about their separate ideas on how things should be done.” Abe’s smile widens. “Now that also has a familiar ring to it.” Bo jumps up from the chair. “Before you get started on me and Hope again, I’m outta here.”
Abe waits until the door is closed before he makes a phone call that John had asked him to make this morning. “Caroline, it’s Abe. Is there some place we could meet and talk? There is something I need to discuss with you.”
***
In Aremid, Kristen turns from her contemplation of the storm out her bedroom window and resumes her frustrated pacing. “I’ve got to think of a way to destroy my father’s trust in Marlena, to make him see her as the enemy again. And I have to do it in a way that doesn’t implicate myself.” She stops in the middle of the room and frowns. She chews on her finger and taps her foot impatiently. “Come on, Kristen, think. You don’t have much time to start working on him before Marlena returns. Thank God this storm came along. I couldn’t have asked for a better delay.” She pauses a moment, then continues. “Maybe something in her room will give me a clue.”
She quickly moves to her door and opens it just enough to see if anyone is in the hallway. Seeing that the coast is clear, she slips through her door and moves down to the bedroom Marlena had been using. She stops short when she sees that the door is opened slightly and she can hear her father’s voice inside. Her hands curl into fists when she catches a glimpse of him standing there holding one of Marlena’s nightgowns in his hands.
“Ah, Marlena. I miss you terribly. All I want is to make you happy because I have come to realize that your happiness means everything to me. But you will never believe that if you learn the truth – the truth that my memory has returned. The past that exists between us will become a barrier once again….” Kristen slowly backs away from the door. Now she knew what she had to do and she didn’t know why she hadn’t thought of it earlier.
***
Caroline is just getting ready to leave the pub to meet Abe when the phone rings. She tells Shawn she’ll get it and picks it up. She barely manages to get out the words “Brady Pub” when a stranger’s voice says “Stefano DiMera’s memory has returned” and then the connection ends. Before Shawn can question her, Caroline practically runs out of the pub. He looks after her in puzzlement and says to no one in particular. “Now what do you be supposin that was all about?” Had the storm not abated, Shawn would have gone after her but he figured it was one of the grandkids that needed her. Why else would she have rushed off like that?
***
At a cafe around the corner from the pub, Abe looks up as Caroline enters. He notices immediately that she is pale and upset as she slips into the chair across from him. “Caroline, I didn’t mean to upset you by…” he begins. She interrupts him. “Abe, please tell me that Marlena didn’t decide to stay in Aremid when the storm hit.”
“No, she didn’t, that’s why…” Too upset to let him continue, she interrupts him again. “When she called and said she was bringing Belle home, we were all so relieved and were hoping we could convince her to stay too. And then the storm hit, we were afraid she’d change her mind about coming home by the time it cleared. She can’t go back there, Abe. Stefano’s memory has returned.” Abe is stunned. “His memory has returned? How do you know that?” “Just before I left the pub, I received a phone call telling me that his memory had returned and then the caller hung up.”
“You didn’t recognize the voice?” “No but I believe it’s true and I don’t think Marlena knows or she would have said something” She reaches over and grabs his arm. “Do you know where Marlena is, Abe? Can you call her and warn her?” Abe covers her hand with his and gives it a reassuring squeeze and says in his most calming voice. “Caroline, Marlena and Belle are safe. That’s what I wanted to talk to you about.” Caroline’s relief is immediate. Abe carefully looks around, then lowers his voice. “They’re with John.”
Caroline’s relief turns to surprise and she picks up on the sudden need for secrecy as she lowers her own voice. “With John? But I thought…” Abe explains. “He was cleared of the murder charge. We found out that Tony killed himself but set the whole thing up to make it look like John did it. He’s been out of jail for several weeks now and working undercover in Aremid. You’re the only one who knows besides myself, Bo and Marlena and she just found out herself. John is the one who convinced her to bring Belle back to Salem. The three of them were on their way back here when they got caught in the storm. John took them to his cabin until the storm passes and the roads are clear.”
“Thank God!” Caroline says in relief. “I know John will keep them safe and if anyone can convince Marlena not to return to Aremid, he can.” “He hasn’t been able to convince her of that yet, Caroline.” “Can’t you get a message to them and let them know about Stefano? Surely Marlena wouldn’t want to return after she hears that.” Abe shakes his head. “I won’t be hearing from John again until they arrive here. And I’m afraid learning that Stefano’s memory has returned won’t deter Marlena. In fact, it will make her more determined than ever to return, to protect John.”
Caroline pounds her fist on the table. “Why can’t that man just leave us alone? He’s caused so much pain and unhappiness…” “We’re going to get him this time, Caroline. He’s not going to hurt anyone again.” Abe says with firm determination. “And if it’s any consolation, something good has come out of all this.” “How can you say that, Abe? Nothing good ever comes of anything connected with Stefano.” Abe smiles. “In this instance, there is…that’s the other thing John wanted me to tell you…”
***
Unaware of events unfolding outside their cozy little world inside the cabin, Marlena tucks the covers up around the sleeping Belle and says softly. “Sweet dreams my precious Belle.” She feels John’s arms close around her. She leans back against him, relishing the feel of his warm embrace. John rests his head against hers and says in a low voice near her ear. “I think our daughter has enjoyed our undivided attention.” Marlena nods, hugging his arms to her. “Yes, she has…as long as we weren’t disagreeing, that is.”
“Hey, I thought we made a pact this afternoon not to talk about anything unpleasant.” He reminds her. “We did and I won’t say another word about it.” “Good, because I have a surprise for you.” She turns in his arms and looks up at him in the dim light. “A surprise for me?” He nods. “Um hmm.” He grins as his hand slides down her arm and he captures her hand in his. “Come into my parlor said the spider to the fly.”
Marlena laughs softly as he leads her around the blanket strung up again as a curtain. Soft candlelight glows from over a dozen candles placed around the area of the fireplace. Spread out before it are the quilts. On the far side of the quilts is an old metal pail filled with snow – a bottle of champagne nestled in the center of it. Next to the pail, two glasses. He leads her to the quilts and they sink down upon them, sitting facing each other. John reaches behind the stack of wood piled up next to the fireplace and produces a small vase containing a single red tulip and presents it to her with a tender smile, his gaze is as soft as a caress. “For you, Marlena.”
“How did you manage to find this in all that snow?” Marlena asks, her voice filled with wonder as she touches the red petals with her fingertip. “There was a small area in back of the cabin that wasn’t drifted over with snow and in the center, peeking up, was this single flower. It had survived everything mother nature had thrown at it. I knew it was a symbol, Doc. A symbol of our love – a love that has survived all the odds. Nothing will ever come between us again. We were meant to be together. The storm that brought us here, the wonderful time we’ve had with our daughter, the way we made love last night and now, this symbol of spring and new hope – it’s all proof of that.” Warm moisture fills her eyes, her voice a husky whisper. “Thank you.”
John reaches over and catches the lone tear that slides down her cheek with his fingertip. “Come on, Doc, that wasn’t suppose to make you cry.” “I know but you have a special way of touching me so.” John leans closer and says just before capturing her lips in an infinitely tender kiss, “As you do me, Marlena.” At last, reluctantly, they part a few inches. John runs his fingertip along the smooth line of her jaw. “There is something I want to ask you.” “All right.” When he doesn’t speak right away, she prompts him softly. “John?”
John takes both of her hands in his and turns them over and raises them to his lips, planting a warm kiss in each palm. He looks up at her. His eyes fill with a sudden vulnerability as they search her face and she wasn’t surprised to hear his words echo her own thoughts. “Doc, we both know that there is a lot that needs to be resolved before we can be together openly. After we leave here and return to Salem, we aren’t going to have any moments like this for quite some time. Just the thought of not being able to touch you or hold you in my arms again until then, is already killing me and I don’t want to leave here without our making a commitment to each other.” He pauses only a moment, then continues. “Will you marry me, Marlena?”
The tears that had been forming, slip down her cheeks as she nods her head. “Yes, John, I will marry you.” He brushes the tears from her cheeks. “I have one more surprise for you, Doc.” He reaches into his pocket and pulls out a small jeweler’s box. He opens it to reveal a teardrop diamond surrounded by emeralds. Marlena’s breath catches in her throat. “Oh John, it’s…beautiful but when…”
He takes the ring out of the box and raises her left hand and slips it on her ring finger as he says. “I bought this for you right after you first came back to Salem. I never had the chance to give it to you, so I’ve been saving it all these years. I knew when the time came that we would be together again, this would be your engagement ring.”
Her heart overflows with her love for him. “Oh John.” She moves into his arms. She had a burning desire, an aching need for another kiss. John senses it immediately and crushes her to him and presses his mouth to hers, kissing her devouringly. Marlena’s hands thread through his thick hair and pulls him closer, as if she couldn’t get enough of his kiss, of the warmth of his tongue mingling with hers and caressing the inner recesses of her mouth.
John raises his lips from hers and brushes a gentle kiss across her forehead, his eyes are moist with tears, his voice is thick and unsteady. “You are the only person that has ever made me feel so complete and so alive. I can’t even begin to tell you how much I love you, Marlena.” She places her fingers on his lips. “Shhh! You don’t have to, I already know because I love you that much too.” He captures her fingers and kisses them, then smiles and says. “How about a glass of champagne to celebrate?” Trying to keep the disappointment from her voice – she’d been hoping for more. “Just champagne, John?”
John’s smile widens to a grin as he reaches past her and dips his hand into the old pail. Instead of the bottle of champagne like she had been expecting, John pulls his hand back to reveal a mound of snow and before she can react, he reaches for the neckline of her sweater and drops the handful of snow down the front of it. “That should cool you off for a few minutes.” Marlena gasps and jumps back at the shock of the cold wet snow on her warm skin. John leans over and licks a spot of melting snow from her neck. “Can’t have you cooled off too much.”
“I’m going to get you for that.” She promises him. John laughs and reaches past her again. Marlena moves out of harm’s way until she realizes it wasn’t the snow he was after this time. He opens the champagne and pours them each a glass and then hands one to her. He picks up his glass. “To us and our future together with our family.” Marlena touches her glass to his and repeats softly. “To us and our future together with our family.”
Their arms entwine and they drink the champagne until their glasses are empty. John tosses his glass in the fireplace and then takes hers and does the same. He pushes her down on the quilts and covers her body with his, his voice a velvet murmur. “Now about that promise to get me back….” His last words were smothered on her lips.
All thoughts of paying him back vanish the moment his mouth touches hers. As Marlena’s lips part on a soft breath, John’s warm tongue plunges into her mouth sending ripples of desire racing through her. She could feel the heat of his body course down the entire length of hers and she knew she wouldn’t be able to wait for the preliminaries, she wanted him now.
She slips her hands under his shirt and rakes her nails lightly down his smooth back, down over the rough material of his jeans, grasping his buttocks and pulling him closer to her. He trembles in response and lifts his mouth from hers to look at her. She was a glowing image of fire, passion and love and he wanted her now. Her breathy whisper is an order. “Make love to me now, John.”
They eagerly help each other to undress. Marlena lies back down upon the quilts and pulls John down with her. The feel of his rough skin upon hers, exalts her and she rises to meet him as their bodies become one. Her body melts against his and her world fills with only him as they find the tempo that binds their bodies together. The hot tide of passion rages through both of them; Marlena’s breath escapes in long surrendering moans, John whispers her name on a harsh, ragged breath as they reach a shared ecstasy.
As their breathing slowly returns to normal, John’s arms close around Marlena and rolls onto his back, their bodies never breaking contact. His hand gently strokes her back, still moist from the heat of their lovemaking, as he says contentedly, a thread of amusement in his voice. “I could stay undercover like this forever, Doc.” Marlena lifts her head from his chest to look at him. “I don’t think this is what Abe had in mind.”
John grins. “What he doesn’t know won’t hurt him.” He runs his fingertip along her lips. “Have I told you lately how beautiful you are and how very much I love you?” She folds her arms on his chest and rests her chin on them. “Yes, but you can keep telling me. I like hearing you say it.” His fingertips move to stroke her cheek and her jaw. “I’m going to find ways to tell you that even when we can’t be together like this. I want to be in your every waking thought and your every dream, just as you will be in mine.”
Flashes of visions streak through Marlena’s mind. She sees herself in a red dress sprawled on her sofa with a shirtless John bending over her, she then sees herself in a white peignoir as John lifts her and carries her to his bed in the loft, and as the visions fade – herself lying wet and naked in his arms, on the beach on Smith Island. John feels Marlena’s body tense and sees the puzzled confusion on her face. “What is it, Doc?”
She shakes her head. “It’s nothing.” Her body trembles. “It isn’t nothing, you’re trembling. Tell me.” She unfolds her arms and reaches for her clothing. “I’m just cold, that’s all.” John pushes her clothing out of her reach and turns her over onto her back,breaking the contact of their bodies as he lays on his side propping his head on his hand and pinning her down with his other hand. “What aren’t you telling me, Doc?” She lies badly. “I was thinking about our return to Salem.”
“You never could lie to me and you can’t now, so you might as well tell me the truth, Marlena.” Belle’s sudden cry from the other side of the blanket saves Marlena from having to answer. John pulls one of the quilts up over Marlena and grabs his jeans and hurriedly puts them on and disappears around the corner of the blanket. By the time he comes out from around the corner carrying a listless Belle in his arms, Marlena is dressed again.
“She’s running a fever.” Marlena takes Belle from him and sits on the sofa. She places her hand on Belle’s head. “She’s burning up.” She looks up at John. “There is a thermometer and some medicine in the diaper bag.” While John is getting the thermometer and medicine, Marlena looks Belle over and discovers she also has a rash. John returns and hands the items to Marlena. “What do you think is wrong with her, Doc?”
“It looks like she has the measles. I should have realized she was coming down with something. She hadn’t been eating or sleeping well all week.” John sits down next to her on the sofa and places a comforting hand on her shoulder. “Don’t beat yourself up over it, Doc. You couldn’t have known.” “I should have, John. If I hadn’t been so busy trying to help Stefano and arguing with Kristen…” He places his hand over her mouth. “Forget them, Marlena.” He lowers his hand. “Now, tell me, did you know that Belle had been exposed to measles?” She shakes her head no. “Then you couldn’t have known.” He takes the thermometer from Belle’s mouth. “One hundred and four.”
A worried frown knits Marlena’s brow. “We have to bring it down. Would you get her something to drink while I get her to take the medicine?” John nods and goes to the kitchen. After several hours, Belle’s temperature is down two degrees. She is sound asleep in John’s arms as he rocks her gently in the rocking chair. He looks over at Marlena curled up on the sofa, fighting to stay awake.
“Why don’t you go to bed, Doc? Belle’s temperature is down some for the moment. I’ll bring her to bed shortly.” Marlena nods, yawns then rises to her feet. “John, do you think we could try to make it to Salem tomorrow?” “You can count on it, Doc. Now go get some sleep.”
***
The drive to Salem the next day is uneventful. The storm had cleared and the weather had turned mild. The snow was already melting away and the roads were clear. By the time they arrived in Salem, Belle’s temperature was back up again. John decided to go directly to the loft and gave Marlena one of those, “don’t argue with me” looks as he parked the car in the alley behind the building.
While Marlena tended to Belle, John made a phone call to Caroline and asked her to get in touch with Mike and bring him over to the loft. He didn’t give Caroline a chance to tell him the news about Stefano. He cuts her off, telling her he had to contact Abe. His phone call to Abe is just as abrupt as he tells him, he and Marlena are back in town and he’s coming down to the PD to see him. He hangs up before Abe can get a word in. John joins Marlena in Belle’s room. He finds Marlena standing next to Belle’s crib, looking down at their sleeping daughter. He slides his arm around her waist. “How is she?”
Marlena leans her head back on his shoulder. “Her fever is still high.” “I called Caroline. She’s going to bring Mike over to look at Belle.” Marlena turns and looks up at him. “You can’t let Mike see you, John.” He taps her chin lightly with his finger. “He won’t. I’m going down to the police station to see Abe.” He brushes her mouth with his lips. “I’ll be back soon.”
He releases her and starts to leave, she grabs his arm to stop him. “How are you going to see Abe at the police station without blowing your cover?” “Doc, right now, I don’t care who sees me. I’ve made a few decisions since last night and I’ll tell you about them after I’ve seen Abe. In the meantime, you just concentrate on Belle. Okay?”
She releases his arm. “Okay, but are you sure you’re not taking a big risk?” His gaze holds hers. “Doc, do you trust me?” “Of course I do.” “Then stop worrying,” He says before he leaves.
***
Marlena tried to do just that until Caroline and Mike’s arrival also brings the news that Stefano’s memory has returned. The women are downstairs waiting in the living room while Mike examines Belle. “Why didn’t you tell John, Caroline?” Caroline’s frustration is evident. “He never gave me the chance. He was so worried about Belle and getting Mike over here to examine her.” “Does Abe know?” Caroline nods.
Marlena moves to the window and looks out, her deep concern etched on her face. “Then if John is planning something crazy, I hope the news will change his mind.” Worry fills Caroline’s voice. “What makes you think he’s planning something crazy?” Marlena turns to look at Caroline. “He said he came to a few decisions last night and he didn’t seem to care that he was as good as throwing away his chance of not being seen by anyone. I think he’s decided to change his tactics with Stefano and that scares me.”
Caroline walks over and places a reassuring hand on Marlena’s arm “Marlena, I’m sure he isn’t going to take any foolish risks, not where Stefano is concerned.” Mike’s arrival downstairs captures their attention. “Marlena, I’d like to admit Belle to the hospital.” Marlena gasps. “Admit her? But I thought she just had the measles.” “She does but she’s becoming dehydrated and since she isn’t getting enough fluids combined with her high temperature, I’m concerned that her condition could worsen. I’d like to admit her and get her started on an IV”
Caroline gives Marlena’s arm a squeeze. “Go on, Marlena. Take Belle to the hospital, I’ll let Abe know.” Marlena gives Caroline a hug. “Thanks, Caroline.” Caroline whispers in Marlena’s ear. “You’d better take off that engagement ring before someone else sees it.” Marlena looks at her in surprise. Caroline smiles and nods her head.
Mike is puzzled by the by-play between the two women but doesn’t question it. He asks instead. “Marlena, would you like me to drive you and Belle over to the hospital?” A bit distracted as she works the ring off her finger behind her back and slips it into her pocket, Marlena nods. “Yes, please. I’ll go get Belle ready and meet you downstairs.”
***
At the Salem PD, Abe has just broken the news to John about Stefano. John punches the file cabinet. “Damn him! I should have known. All this time he was playing Doc along and if I hadn’t gotten her and Belle out of there when I did…” “The important thing is, you got them out of there.” Abe reminds him. “They’re safe now and we can proceed with our investigation. Unless, of course, you haven’t been able to convince Marlena not to go back.”
John moves over to Abe’s desk and sits on the edge of it. “No, she won’t be going back. Belle is sick, so Marlena won’t leave her and I don’t think she’ll want to go back when she finds out Stefano has regained his memory.” “She will if she thinks you’re in any kind of danger.” Abe points out. “Or am I wrong in assuming that things have progressed that far between the two of you?”
John grins. “I asked her to marry me and she said yes.” Abe smiles. “Congratulations, partner. I couldn’t be happier for the two of you.” “Thanks, Abe. It means a lot to me that you’re happy for us.” “I am and I think you’ll discover that everyone else will be too. Now, about Marlena following you back to Aremid…”
John’s next words surprise Abe. “She won’t because I’m not planning to go back there either.” “John, I thought you wanted to investigate Stefano undercover? Am I missing something here?” “No, partner, you’re not missing anything. I wasn’t getting anywhere with my investigation and have decided to leave the undercover business to someone else and fight Stefano on my own terms. That’s why I need you to leak a story to the press about my being released from jail. When they ask where I’ve been these past few weeks, tell them I’ve been in Europe taking care of some business matters and recovering from my incarceration. Hopefully, that will keep Stefano’s suspicions away from Doc.” “I can do that but what is to keep Stefano from coming back to Salem?”
A cold smile settles on John’s face. “Let the old man return to Salem. I’ll be ready for him.” A frown creases Abe’s brow. “Maybe you should consider some police protection for Marlena and the children.” The coldness leaves John’s face and he smile widens. “You’d better let me discuss that one with Doc, first, partner. You know how she gets when that subject comes up.”
A knock on the door interrupts them. Caroline opens the door at Abe’s bidding and peeks her head around the corner. “Am I interrupting?” Abe rises from behind his desk. “Not at all, Caroline. Please, come in.” She enters and looks at John as he rises and turns to face her. “John, I’m glad I caught up with you before you left.”
John is all concern when he sees how upset she is, he places his hands on her shoulders. “What is it, Caroline? Has something happened to Belle?” She nods. “Mike wants to admit her into the hospital. He said she’s dehydrating and needs to be on an IV to replenish her fluids. He drove Marlena and Belle over to the hospital. I told Marlena that I would let you know.” John gives her shoulders a squeeze. “Thanks, Caroline. I’ll head over there now.” He looks at Abe. “We’ll talk more later.” Abe nods and John escorts Caroline out of the office.
***
The phone rings at the Blake house in Aremid. Stefano picks it up on the third ring and replies. “Stefano DiMera.” “Stefano, it’s Marlena.” “Marlena, I have been so worried about you. When the storm hit, I was not sure whether or not you had made it back to Salem safely. Since you are calling, I am assuming that you did.”
“Belle and I found a place to stay until the storm passed. We arrived in Salem late this morning.” “Good, then I may expect you tomorrow?” “I’m afraid not. Belle is ill and had to be hospitalized. I don’t know for how long, so I’ve decided to stay in Salem. I’m just calling to let you know and to ask you if you’ll have the rest of my things sent to the penthouse.”
A dark frown settles on Stefano’s features, but he maintains the gentle concern in his voice. “I am sorry to hear that little Belle is ill and of course, I will send the rest of your things immediately. If there is anything else I can do…” “No…no, thank you. What you’re doing is enough. I’ll call you again soon.”
Stefano’s frown deepens as the connection is broken on the other end. He hangs up the phone. Kristen quietly pulls the door closed and smiles. Fate was playing right into her hands. It was time to start instituting the rest of her plan.
John arrives at the hospital in time to see Marlena putting her cell phone back into her purse. He lets it slide for the moment as he takes her into his arms. “How is she, Doc?” “Her temperature is up to 105 and they’re trying to bring it down.” A tear slides down her cheek. “Tell me she’s going to be okay.” He gently brushes her tear away and gives her a reassuring smile. “She’s a fighter, Doc, just like her parents. She’s going to beat this and we’ll be taking her home before you know it.”
Marlena nods as his touch and words reassure her. Then it dawns on her that John is not in disguise and they’re in plain view of everyone. “John, what are you doing?” A hint of amusement in his voice. “I thought I was comforting you.” Marlena looks around and is relieved to see that the lobby is fairly deserted. “Aren’t you worried about being seen?” John shakes his head. “Not anymore. As far as everyone is concerned, I’ve been in Europe since my release from jail and returned last night. Abe agreed to contact the press and pass that along.” He lifts her left hand. “So you can put your ring back on.”
She takes her ring out of her pocket. “If you would have told me what you were planning, I wouldn’t have had to take it off to avoid awkward questions.” “I’m sorry, Doc, I wanted to make a few phone calls and talk to Abe first.” He takes the ring from her and slips it back on her finger, then kisses her hand. “You won’t have to take it off again.” He pauses only a moment, then asks, taking her off guard. “Are you going to tell me what you said to Stefano when you called him?”
Was there nothing that slipped by him? “How did you know?” “I saw the look on your face when you were putting your phone away. So what did you tell him?” “I told him I wouldn’t be returning to Aremid because Belle was ill. I asked him to send the rest of my things to the penthouse.” “How did he take it?” Unable to hide her hurt and anger at being betrayed once again by Stefano. “If I didn’t know his memory had returned, I’d be convinced his concern was genuine.” John promises, “He’s never going to hurt you again, sweetheart.”
A look of fear crosses her features. “John, please don’t go after him.” He caresses her cheek with his knuckles. “Don’t worry, Doc. I’m not leaving you and Belle. But if Stefano decides to return to Salem, then I’ll be ready for him.” He smiles. “In the meantime, I’d like to concentrate on us and Brady, Belle, Carrie and the twins. It’s about time we were a family again, don’t you think?” She nods and returns his smile. “Yes, I do.” Mike approaches them at that moment. John slips his arm around Marlena’s waist and they glance at each other when they are unable to read Mike’s expression. “How is she, Mike?” John speaks up for both of them.
Mike smiles. “We’ve managed to get her fever down to a safe temperature and she’s already responding to the fluids.” Marlena melts against John in relief. “Can we see her now?” Mike nods. “I’ve asked the nurse to have a cot set up in Belle’s room for you, Marlena. I assumed you’d want to stay the night.” “Yes, thank you.” Marlena looks up at John in question. John nods to her silent question and then tells Mike. “I will be staying too, but a chair will suit me just fine.”
Mike eyes the pair curiously. “Is there something the two of you haven’t told me? I thought you were still in jail, John. How did you manage to get out to come to the hospital?” John grins. “Good behavior.” Marlena elbows him in the side and explains to Mike. “He was released several weeks ago when the police discovered that Tony committed suicide.” “I hadn’t heard.” “No one has, Mike. I wanted to keep my release and the reasons for it quiet until I got back to Salem.” Sensing Marlena’s impatience to be with Belle, John adds. “I’ll explain everything to you later. Right now, we’d like to go see Belle.” Mike nods. “Of course and I’ll come in later to check on her again.” Marlena smiles at him. “Thanks again, Mike.”
***
Kristen walks into Marlena’s old bedroom at the Blake house as Stefano is packing Marlena’s things into a suitcase. She is holding a folded newspaper behind her back. “Why are you packing up the rest of Marlena’s things?” Stefano turns to her, his voice is noncommittal. “Marlena will not be returning to Aremid. It seems that little Belle has become ill and was hospitalized.” Kristen cannot keep the edge of sarcasm out of her voice. “Isn’t that a convenient excuse.” “What are you saying, Kristen? Why would Marlena use that as an excuse not to return to Aremid? We both know how much she loves her daughter. Of course she would want to stay in Salem.”
“Yes, we know how much she loves her daughter but I happen to know that isn’t the only reason why she isn’t returning to Aremid.” Kristen informs him. “What other reason would she have?” “A friend from Salem called me and said that word of your memory return has spread through Salem like wildfire. I’m sure Marlena has heard by now and I’m sure she was relieved to have an excuse you would believe for her decision not to return.” Stefano is stunned. “How could it have gotten out? Only you and the staff knows….” Kristen interrupts him. “Yes, the staff knows and they aren’t the most loyal people you’ve ever had working for you, father.”
Stefano turns back to the suitcase and quickly tosses the rest of Marlena’s things into it. “I must go to Salem and try to explain things to Marlena. I have to make her understand that it was not my intention to hurt her.” Kristen is ready to play her trump card. “There is one more reason why Marlena isn’t coming back to Aremid.” Stefano turns back to her again and glares at her. “You are trying to make it sound as if her reasons are intentional. I refuse to believe that. Marlena has been nothing but honest with me.” She decides to bait him a little. “Has she, father? Or has she been playing her own little game all along?” “Kristen, why are you doing this? I thought Marlena was your friend.”
“Was, is the keyword, father. I told you that Marlena was still in love with John and that you didn’t stand a chance with her and it seems that she’s proven me right.” She moves her hand with the newspaper in it from behind her back and holds it out to him. The headlines jump off the page – “John Black Cleared of Murder Charges – Returns to Salem After Several Weeks Absence.” She can’t help adding. “Quite a coincidence in timing, don’t you think? Marlena must have known about it all along.”
Stefano snatches the paper from her hand and scans it quickly. His face is flushed in anger by the time he is finished. Kristen watches him in triumph. She bites back her smile just in time as Stefano looks up at her. His voice is as cold as the winter wind. “So, it is true.” Kristen manages a sympathetic tone. “I’m sorry, father. I really do wish it wasn’t and I only thought it fair to let you know.” Stefano crumbles the newspaper in his hands. “John Black will pay for this.”
A frown crosses Kristen’s brow at Stefano’s neglect in adding Marlena to that threat. Stefano misreads her frown and places a comforting hand on her arm. “Do not worry, Kristen. John Black will never get the best of me.” “I do worry and not just about John. I know you love Marlena, father, but you have to face the fact that she is not completely innocent in this. If you’re honest with yourself, you’ll admit that she and John were probably working together all along. You know Marlena never forgot what you did to her in the past.” A thoughtful frown creases Stefano’s brow. “This is true. She told me often enough how much she hated the man I was but she swore that she believed I had changed and would not revert back to that man. She must have believed it or she would not have been willing to help me regain my memory.”
“Are you sure, father? Or was it all a ploy to try to get you to remember to help John regain his past? Has your love for Marlena really blinded you to the truth?” Stefano is as still and silent as stone as Kristen’s words sink in. She is startled, when a moment later he picks up Marlena’s suitcase in a rage and tosses it across the room and then stalks out slamming the door behind him. When she is sure he is out of hearing distance, Kristen’s maniacal laughter echoes around the room.
***
Caroline relieves John and Marlena at Belle’s bedside so the pair can get something to eat. The phone rings at the nurse’s desk as John and Marlena enter the lobby. The nurse calls out to them. “Dr. Evans, you have a phone call.” Marlena walks over to the desk, with John following. “Do you know who the caller is?” The nurse shakes her head. “She wouldn’t say, Dr. Evans. Just that it was important that she speak to you.” Marlena turns to John. “Why don’t I meet you at the cafe around the corner after I take this call?” He kisses her and says. “Don’t keep me waiting too long.” He heads for the elevator as Marlena picks up the phone. “This is Dr. Evans.”
“Marlena, it’s Kristen. I’m sorry I was so mysterious, I didn’t think you’d talk to me if I left my name after the argument we had.” Marlena’s voice is cool. “What can I do for you, Kristen?” “Stefano told me Belle was in the hospital and I wanted to let you know how sorry I was to hear that she was ill. We may not have seen eye-to-eye on her father, but I do care for Belle and I know how worried you must be.” “I appreciate your concern. Belle is in good hands and she’s already improving.” “That’s wonderful news, Marlena.” There is a pause on Kristen’s end of the phone and then she continues, her voice more serious. “I think there is something that you should know. Stefano read the article about John in the evening edition of the paper. He has his memory back, Marlena. I didn’t know until then that he had it back. He went into such a rage and he has vowed revenge on you and John.”
“Why are you telling me this, Kristen? You’ve made your feelings about John perfectly clear, as well as your suspicions about my motives in helping Stefano.” “I read the article too, Marlena. It made me realize how wrong I’d been about John. I was a victim too, you know. Tony set me up to believe the worst. I’ll always regret my part in what happened and I wanted to try to make it up to the two of you somehow. That’s why I’m warning you about Stefano.” Marlena asks quietly. “Is he coming back to Salem?” “I don’t know. I haven’t seen him since he read the article. Marlena, if there is anything I can do…” “There is something you can do. Get away from Stefano before you end up hurt. He’s not going to like it if he finds out you’ve warned us. I’m grateful that you did but I don’t want to see you caught in the middle.””I think Stefano is coming, I have to go. Give Belle a kiss for me.” Kristen breaks the connection.
***
Marlena slides into the cafe booth across from John. John reaches across the table and takes her hand in his. “Judging by the expression on your face, Doc, that wasn’t a pleasant phone call. Can you talk about it?” She nods. “It was Kristen.” John can’t hide his surprise. “Kristen? What did she want?” “Believe it or not, she called to warn us about Stefano. Apparently he saw that story you had Abe give to the press and went into such a rage, he revealed to Kristen that he had his memory back.” John frowns. “Don’t you find it a little odd that she called to tell us that after what she said to you in the park just a few days ago?”
“Yes, I do but what ulterior motive could she possibly have? She hated Stefano as much as we did and now that she’s read that newspaper article, she knows that Tony set you both up. She’s feeling a lot of regret now, John and I have to give her the benefit of the doubt when she says her warning was an attempt to try to make amends.” “Maybe you’re right, Doc, but I can’t help being suspicious of her sudden change of heart and given Stefano’s reaction, I’d like you to consider the idea of police protection for you and the children. Abe offered it earlier but I told him I wanted to discuss it with you first.” Marlena sighs. As much as I hate the idea, I’m not going to argue against it. The last thing I want is for any of us to be at risk because of Stefano and that includes you.”
The waitress comes to take their order and when they are alone again, Marlena asks John a question that had been on her mind since they’d talked earlier. “Why Europe, John?” John explains. “I didn’t want Stefano to think that you and I had been plotting against him. If he believes I was in Europe while you were staying with him, he’ll know that you never contacted me there. And if he does check with his contacts in Europe, they will be told that I was in Europe – complete with places, dates and times.”
“If you think I’m going to let you face him alone, you’re mistaken.” Marlena warns him. “Doc, I didn’t go through all of this…” She picks up a bread stick from the basket on the table and pops it in his mouth to shut him up. “And you aren’t going to change my mind.” She continues as John pulls the bread stick out of his mouth after taking a bite. “Stefano has separated us for the last time. I’m not going to let him do that again. So you might as well accept the fact that we’re in this together.” The beginning of a smile tips the corners of his mouth. “Are you through?” She challenges him. “Are you going to try to talk me out of it?” “Would it do me any good?” She shakes her head no. “Then I’d be a fool to try, wouldn’t I? ” She smiles and nods her head. “Um, hmm.”
Stefano paces his study. Despite his earlier reaction with Kristen, he didn’t believe for one moment that Marlena would turn so completely against him. No, she had shown a generosity and compassion towards him that he did not deserve and never would have expected. She had believed in him enough to risk everything in helping him regain his memory. A memory he never wanted to return but the fates had decided otherwise.
He stops in front of his desk and picks up a framed picture of Marlena that she had given him. “Is it too late, Marlena? Has John already poisoned your mind against me? What must I do to regain your trust and convince you that I would never intentionally hurt you again?”
Kristen silently enters the room to hear Stefano’s last question. Her face is twisted in hatred. Couldn’t the man forget his obsession with that woman? He was going to ruin all her plans. She had to stop him, but how? Secrets! Stefano said he had secrets that would bring John and Marlena together forever. If she could find out what those secrets were, she knew she could find a way to use them to her advantage. She composes her features into a look of concern. “Father, are you all right? I’ve been worried about you ever since you left Marlena’s room.”
Stefano sets the picture carefully back on the desk and turns to Kristen. “I am fine, Kristen.” Kristen moves closer to him. “I can see that you aren’t and if anything I said upset you, I apologize.” “I was not upset with you, Kristen. It is John black who deserves my hatred and my anger. He will destroy whatever trust Marlena has left in me. He is also answerable for my son’s death. John may not have pulled the trigger, but he is responsible for Tony taking the desperate measures that he did.” He lifts his hand and caresses her hair. “And then, there is you. He has hurt you terribly and for that, he will also pay.”
“I want to help you, Father.” Stefano shakes his head. “No, Kristen, it is better if you are not involved. What I must do, I will do alone.” Kristen forces tears to her eyes. “I know you only wish to protect me, Father but you can’t do this alone. I’ve lost Tony, I can’t risk losing you too. I almost did once, when I turned against you. I want to help you to make that up to you.” “What can you do that will not put you at risk?” “I don’t know but I want to try.” She pauses a moment. “Maybe I could help you regain Marlena’s trust. Despite my differences with her, we’re still friends. I could convince her to talk to you, to give you a chance to prove your sincerity.”
“It is a very good of you to want to do that for me, Kristen but I do not think you will ever be able to convince Marlena to speak with me.” “Won’t you at least let me try, Father? Marlena has always been a fair person. If she knows you only wish to talk to her, to apologize, she will listen.” Stefano looks at her curiously. “You puzzle me, Kristen. One moment you are trying to convince me that Marlena has been working against me and the next you are offering to speak with her on my behalf. I want to know why.”
“Because I can see how much you are hurting with the thought of losing Marlena.” Stefano is still suspicious. “And that is your only motive?” Kristen laughs suddenly and then says. “All right, you’ve found me out. I do have another motive. I know if Marlena can be convinced of your sincerity, it will reopen that wedge that was between her and John.” He gives this a moments thought. “Yes, you could be right.”
Kristen injects a casual note to her voice. “Father, you do realize that this plan won’t work if there is anything that you are keeping from Marlena.” Stefano turns from her and walks over to the window. “You aren’t keeping anything from her, are you?” Stefano says slowly. “There is something….” He checks himself and turns to her with a smile. “You know what I would like to do?”
Kristen hides her frustration and returns his smile. “What’s that?” “I would like to forget about Marlena and John for tonight and just enjoy your company. We have not spent an evening alone together in a very long time. Why don’t you have the chef cook up something special for dinner and afterwards, we can enjoy a quiet game of chess.” “That sounds nice, Father but have you forgotten? I don’t play chess.”
“Then it is time I taught you.” Seeing no way out of it, Kristen agrees. “All right, chess it will be. I’ll go talk to the chef about dinner.” Kristen leaves the room. Stefano waits a moment after the door closes, then turns to his desk and picks up the phone. Kristen silently opens the door a fraction and is relieved to see her father’s back turned toward her. She listens as he makes his call.
“This is Stefano DiMera. Do not talk, just listen. It is time for you to move our guest and erase all trace of him back to me. Be sure he contacts no one and you will discuss this with no one.” He pauses, listening to the voice on the other end of the phone. He responds in anger. “No, you fool. I do not want him killed, he is valuable to me alive. Just see to it that you have moved him by the end of the week.”
Stefano slams the phone back in its cradle and turns just in time to see the door to his study close. He rushes over and pulls the door open to expose the spy in his household, but the hallway is empty. The look that settles on Stefano’s face does not bode well for the spy.
***
At the hospital the next morning, Mike walks into Belle’s room and finds John and Marlena seated on opposite sides of Belle’s bed. Belle is sitting up, wide awake with a picture she colored in her hands pointing to different areas saying “Belle… mommy…daddy.” Marlena leans closer and looks at the spot Belle had pointed out for her daddy. “Belle, how come daddy is orange?” Belle looks up and grins. “Carrots.”
Marlena laughs as she remembers John covered in carrots at the cabin. She exchanges and amused glance with John. “At least she got the color right.” “I don’t even think I want to know the story behind that one,” Mike says as he walks up to the bottom of the bed. John grins. “You don’t.” Marlena smiles. “Good morning, Mike. I hope you’re going to tell us we can take Belle home today.” He returns her smile. “Good morning.” Mike looks at Belle. “She certainly looks well enough but I’m not going to give my final word on that until I’ve examined her.”
John stands. “Doc, why don’t you stay here while Mike examines her. I need to make a couple of phone calls and then I’ll be back.” Marlena nods, then rises and walks John to the door and says in a low voice. “What are you up to?” “It’s a surprise and that’s ‘all’ I’m going to tell you, Doc.” He gives her a quick kiss and slips out the door. Mike looks up from his examination of Belle. “I haven’t seen the two of you this happy in a long time.”
Marlena moves around to the opposite side of the bed. Belle holds out her hand and Marlena takes it in hers. “We haven’t been this happy in a long time.” Mike notices the engagement ring. “I can certainly see why. You didn’t tell me the two of you had gotten engaged.” Belle reaches out for the end of Mike’s stethoscope and holds it up to her mouth. “Mommy ‘n Daddy ‘gaged.” Mike laughs, then says. “I guess I’ve been told.”
Marlena smiles. “I guess you have.” She caresses Belle’s head. “Belle, why don’t you let Dr. Mike have that back now so he can listen to your heart.” Belle holds the end of the stethoscope up to Mike. He takes it from her. “Thank you, Belle.” Belle grins. Mike finishes his examination of Belle and then leans down next to her. “Would you like to go home, Belle?” Belle nods. “Then you can go home just as soon as your mommy signs some papers.”
Belle claps her hands. Mike straightens and says to Marlena. “The paperwork should be ready for you to sign by the time John returns.” “Thanks for everything, Mike.” “It was my pleasure, Marlena.” He heads for the door and then turns and looks back. “I almost forgot…congratulations and I expect an invitation to the wedding.” Marlena smiles. “You’ll have one.”
***
The afternoon sun slants through the loft window as Marlena joins John on the sofa. There was a trace of laughter in her voice as she relays Belle’s latest antics. “Belle finally fell asleep. She kept insisting that she wouldn’t take her nap without Brady. When I explained to her that she had the measles and couldn’t see Brady until she was better, she asked me why she couldn’t share them.”
Amusement flickers in John’s eyes. “She gets that from you.” “Not when she’s saying it with your grin.” She snuggles up against him and his arm slides around her shoulders. “So when are you going to tell me about that surprise you were planning?” John looks at his watch. “You’re getting better, Doc. You waited a whole 45 minutes before you got around to asking me about it again.”
A seductive smile touches her lips as she slowly slides her hand down his chest towards his waist. “You’d better tell me.” John captures her hand before it reaches below his waistline. “Behave yourself, Doc. We’re expecting company.” Disappointed, she pulls back a little from him. “Company? That’s not your surprise, is it? I was hoping we’d be able to spend some time alone together while Belle was sleeping.”
“No, our expected visitor isn’t the surprise. Caroline is coming over to sit with Belle while we go someplace and I guarantee, we’ll be alone.” She brightens. “Really?” He pulls her back into his arms. “Really! Now shut up and kiss me.” “John, I thought you said Caroline…” The rest of her words are lost as John covers her mouth with his in a kiss that chases all thoughts of Caroline from her head. Neither one of them hears the knock on the loft door.
John and Marlena are in the Cherokee driving to a destination known only to John. Marlena looks over at him, a hint of exasperation in her voice as she realizes he’d kept her talking so she wouldn’t notice where they were going. “John, we’ve discussed Belle, we’ve discussed Brady, the twins, Carrie, the family and probably half of Salem. When are we going to discuss where we’re going?” He turns the car down a long drive. “We don’t have to, Doc, we’re here.” Marlena’s exasperation turns to surprise as she sees Donovan Manor come into view. “This is Kim and Shane’s old house. What are we doing here?”
John doesn’t answer her until he pulls the car to a stop and turns to her. “Visiting.” “I didn’t know Shane was in Salem.” “He isn’t.” He opens his car door and walks around and opens hers. “Care to join me, Doc?” She takes his hand and steps out of the car. “John, what if Shane sold this place. We could be trespassing.” He leads her up to the front door. “As a matter of fact, he did but we aren’t trespassing. I happen to have the new owner’s permission to be here.”
“You just called up the new owner and asked him if we could have a romantic tryst in his house, is that it?” He takes out a key, unlocks the door and pushes it open. “Come on, Doc, where is your sense of adventure?” “John!” He turns to her in exasperation. “Yes, I had a conversation with the owner and he loved the idea. So much so that he couldn’t wait to get his fiancée here.”
Marlena is speechless and before she can get another word out, John sweeps her up into his arms and carries her across the threshold saying “Welcome to your new home, Mrs. Black-to-be!” His voice echoes around the large empty foyer. “Hmmm, I guess Shane wasn’t kidding when he said he had everything shipped back to England. Just think of all the fun we’ll have redecorating, Doc.” When Marlena doesn’t reply, John looks at her and sees that she is crying. He sets her on her feet, keeping his arm around her and tilts her chin up with his finger. “Hey, sweetheart, why the tears? I thought you’d like your surprise.” She manages a watery smile. “I do…I love my surprise…I’m just feeling a little overwhelmed…I never expected this.”
He brushes her tears away with his fingertips, his voice turns husky. “This is just the beginning, Doc. I want to fill your life with love, laughter and lots more surprises. I want us to make a warm and loving home for us and our children – to be a family again.” “I want that, too, more than anything.” She says and then buries her face against his throat and whispers. “Thank you.”
His hands move up to her hair, he inhales its fragrance as he caresses the silken locks. “You don’t need to thank me, Marlena. You deserve to be happy and I intend to see that you’re happy and pampered and very well loved for the rest of our lives.” He slides his hands into her hair and tilts her face up, his lips lightly brush hers. The smile in his eyes contain a sensuous flame and there is a trace of laughter in his voice as he continues. “Now, how about we take a tour and decide which room we want to christen first?” Her lips curve in a tantalizing smile. “I thought you’d never ask.” In one fluid motion, she is swept up again into his arms and he heads for the wide staircase. “Let’s start with the upstairs.”
As they reach the top of the stairs, Marlena asks teasingly. “If you insist on carrying me from room to room, are you going to have the energy to christen a room?” He grins. “I’m cheating and taking a short cut because I already have the perfect room in mind.” She laughs softly as John carries her down the hall and into a room at the back of the house. He walks over to the french doors and sets her on her feet. He opens the doors and takes her hand and pulls her out onto the balcony. The setting sun reflected on the lake is a blaze of fiery glory, a cooling breeze caresses them.
John moves behind her and slides his arms around her waist, pulling her back against him and whispers in her ear. “What do you think?” Her voice is filled with awe. “It’s perfect.” He turns her in his arms and pulls her even closer. “No, Doc, you’re perfect.” He lowers his head and showers kisses around her lips and along her jaw. Then his tongue teasingly traces the fullness of her lips before capturing her mouth in a kiss that left no doubt in her mind how much he loved her and how very much he wanted her.
Marlena felt herself wrapped in an invisible warmth as his kiss and the feel of his long lean body against hers conveyed all of that to her and she offered him everything in return. She wound her arms inside his jacket and around his back and molded her soft curves even closer to him. Dear God, she never wanted to let this man go out of her life ever again. She wasn’t complete without him. When their lips part, they are both breathless. Marlena’s eyes grow large and liquid as their gazes lock. John’s eyes search her face, reaching into her thoughts and he knew what she was thinking…neither of them was completely whole without the other. It had taken them a long time to realize that and neither would ever again dwell on the past or regret what they had lost during all those years apart. They were together, they had a bright and wonderful future ahead of them and each felt the urge to become one before God and nature in the light of the setting sun.
Slowly, they undressed one another as the sun slid down below the horizon. They savored each intimate caress as their hands and eyes worshipped each others bodies until the only thing that existed between them was the soft, sighing wind that danced between and around them. The first night star appeared as John lifted her into his arms. Her long slender legs wrapped around his waist; with a moan he reclaimed her mouth as they christened their new home on the balcony under the stars.
They say ignorance is bliss and while John and Marlena were enjoying the bliss of their day and night together, Kristen was furthering her plans. She had spent the long previous evening with her father, silently tossing around schemes to learn more about the person Stefano had hidden away. She knew she had all ready aroused his suspicions, so subtle questioning wouldn’t work. It wasn’t until Stefano finally realized her inattention and gave up trying to teach her chess and called it a night, that an idea came to her. Stefano hadn’t used the phone again that evening, which meant the last number dialed was still in memory. The moment Kristen re-dialed the number, she recognized it and knew exactly where her father’s guest was hidden. Stefano was slipping and it was all because of his infatuation for Marlena. Just one more thing she must pay for.
Knowing time was of the essence, Kristen quickly wrote her father a note telling him she was going to Salem to talk to Marlena on his behalf. Then she dashed upstairs, packed her bags and headed out to the airport to catch the first available flight to Europe. What she found there was the last thing she expected and she knew she now had a tool to control her father and get her revenge on John and Marlena.
Stefano spent the day restlessly pacing the rooms of the Blake house, trying to dispel the haunting dreams of the night before. Dreams in which a tearful, sobbing Marlena begged him “not to do this to her” while he stood by and coldly and cruelly informed her “she left him no choice, because it was obvious she would never agree to stay with him.” He could not shake the dream. Everywhere he turned in the house, he saw her – not just as she was when she was there but a Marlena in pain and heartache because of what he’d done to her over the years. And for the first time since his memory had returned he felt a remorse down to his very depths.
His love for her had brought her nothing but torment and misery and in return she was able to get beyond that and consider him a friend. She had given him back his conscience. A very small part of him wanted to curse her very name for that, but he could not. Her friendship and everything she had done for him meant a great deal to him and he valued it more than he ever thought possible. Then he remembered the final secret he had kept from her and he knew if she ever learned the truth, it would destroy everything he had gained. Even if Marlena never returned his love, he wanted to be a part of her life in some way.
By the time he found Kristen’s note, he was in the very depths of despair and never questioned it but found it to be a ray of hope. If Kristen could convince Marlena to meet with him, he knew he could make Marlena see his sincerity and regret. It would be some time before he found out that Kristen had betrayed him and his chance might be lost forever.
***
Since they were worried about Belle having a relapse, John and Marlena returned home within hours after their arrival at Donovan Manor. Caroline assured them that she was sleeping peacefully and said her good-byes. After Marlena looked in on Belle, she and John went to bed and fell into an exhausted sleep in each others arms.
The next morning dawned bright and early for John as he felt an insistent tug on his arm and heard a loud whisper in his ear. “Daddy, wake up!” He opens one eye and looks down at his daughter at the side of the bed. “Shhhh, don’t wake Mommy.” She nods and pulls on his arm, encouraging him to get out of bed.
John slips from the bed without waking Marlena. He glances down at her and smiles tenderly, then takes Belle’s hand and leads her from the room and quietly closes the door. He stoops down in front of her and smiles. “Okay, what is so important?”
“Belle all better. See Brady now.” He picks her up in his arms and stands. “Belle, you might feel better but you still have the measles.” Belle tilts her head and looks up at him. “Why?” John explains patiently as he carries Belle downstairs. “Because they usually last a week and you don’t want to make Brady sick too, do you?” She nods her head. “You miss Brady, don’t you, Belle?” Belle nods her head again. John hugs her. “We miss him too and I promise, just as soon as we know you won’t give Brady your measles, he’ll come home. Okay?” Belle sighs forlornly and lays her head on his shoulder. ” ‘kay.”
“I have an idea. How would you like to go see our new house, Belle?” When she doesn’t respond, he continues. “We can surprise Mommy with a picnic and you can pick out your new room. Would you like that?” She perks up at that and lifts her head and nods. “Mommy likes ‘prises!” John smiles, remembering last night. “Yes, she does, Belle so you can’t tell her we’re planning a surprise or it won’t be a surprise anymore.” Belle raises her finger to her lips. “Shhh!”
***
Later that morning, Marlena carries Belle into their new home with John beside them. Belle squirms wanting to be let down. The moment Marlena puts her down, Belle starts looking around, peeking behind curtains, in the corners of the room and trying to look under the corners of the Persian carpets still covering the floors. John and Marlena exchange puzzled glances and John asks. “What do you suppose she’s looking for?”
Marlena shakes her head. “I don’t know.” Belle walks back over to them, a frown on her face. John lifts her up in his arms. “What are you looking for, sweetheart?” “Ants.” Startled, Marlena asks. “Ants?” Belle nods. “No ants, no pickle.”
John starts laughing and manages to get out. “She means….picnic, Doc!” Belle nods again. He continues around his laughter. “I think she’s trying to say…you can’t have…a picnic…without ants.” Belle grins and throws up her hands. ” ‘prise, Mommy!”
Marlena manages to hold back her own laughter, but her eyes dance with amusement. “Are the two of you trying to tell me you planned a surprise picnic with ants?” Belle shakes her head. “Ants all gone.” John kisses his daughter’s head, then asks. “Can we have the picnic anyway, Belle?” Belle gives it some thought and then nods her head. “Esplore first.” “I was wondering when you’d get around to that.” John says then looks over at Marlena. “I promised her she could pick out her own bedroom.” Marlena smiles. “Did you tell her the attic and the basement are off limits?” He nods. “As well as the caretaker’s house, the stables and the garage.” Belle tugs on John’s jacket. “Daddy! Esplore!”
John shifts Belle into one arm and takes Marlena’s hand with his free hand. “All right, Belle, we’ll explore now.” He says in an under voice to Marlena. “She gets that from you, you know?” As John leads her up the stairs, Marlena replies in an affronted voice. “She does not. I have lots of patience.” “I know that, Doc, there is a whole hospital full of them. I’m talking about not being able to wait.” “Cute, very cute. I think you’ve forgotten that you’re the one who isn’t willing to wait for things to happen, for answers to questions….”
They reach the top of the stairs and John stops and turns to Marlena but says to Belle. “Belle, what do we tell Mommies who like to argue?” Belle grins. “I love you.” Marlena laughs as John says, “That works for me.” He leans over and kisses Marlena lightly. “I love you, Doc.” “I love you too and before your daughter exhibits any more of your personality traits, lead on, daddy.” John lets that pass for now as he sets Belle down. “Okay, Belle, it’s time to explore.”
After she has finished exploring all the bedrooms with her parents following behind her, Belle turns to them in the hallway. “Belle ‘cided.” She leads them back to a bright airy room overlooking the garden. Belle announces proudly. “Belle’s room.” And then turns and walks back out to the hallway. John and Marlena look at each other and then at Belle who is impatiently waiting for them. They follow her to the next room, directly across the hall. It is a large paneled room that overlooks the woods. “Brady’s room.” Once again she goes out to the hallway, John and Marlena follow immediately as John says to Marlena “I can’t wait to see what she’s picked out for us.”
Belle stops at the room next to the one she picked out for herself. It was obviously once a nursery. “I think you spoke too soon, John.” Marlena says with a hint of laughter in her voice. They watch as Belle walks into the room, takes another look around and stops in the center of the room with a satisfied grin on her face. “Baby’s room.” The surprise is evident in their voices as John and Marlena ask in unison. “Baby’s room?” Belle nods. “Belle want baby.”
John and Marlena look at each other, completely speechless. Belle slips past them out into the hallway. In bemused silence, they follow her to the back of the house to the room they were both very familiar with. “Mommy and Daddy’s room.” John is still stuck on Belle’s stunning announcement in the last room. “Belle, why do you want a baby?” “More Belles and Bradys.” She says simply and follows it by a yawn.
Marlena picks Belle up in her arms and effectively changes the subject. “I think it’s time for you to take a nap, Belle, and when you wake up, we’ll have that picnic.” Belle nods and settles her head in the curve of her mother’s neck. Marlena looks at John. “I hope you remembered to bring extra blankets.” “They’re in the car. I’ll meet you back in Belle’s room.”
After Belle is settled in her room on several blankets, John and Marlena find themselves drawn back to the nursery. John watches her in silence as Marlena walks over to the window and looks out over the garden. He finally breaks the silence. “What are you thinking, Doc?” Her voice is quiet, almost subdued. “I never realized just how lonely Belle has been for Brady this past month. I should never have taken her away from Salem.”
John walks over to her and takes her arm, turning her to face him. He places his hands on her shoulders. “You did what you felt in your heart was the right thing to do when you stayed in Aremid to help Stefano and no one, not even me, would ever blame you for taking Belle with you. She needed you as much as you needed her. And she won’t be lonely for long, by the end of the week she’ll be with Brady again.” Marlena nods, then asks. “John, do you want more children?”
“If more children are in our future, then that’s fine with me but if they aren’t, that’s fine with me too, Doc.” He pulls her closer. “Right now, all I can think about is how much I love you, our wedding day and making this house a home.” He grins. “And which room we should christen next, of course.” A thread of laughter enters her voice. “You’re insatiable.” “I know. However, I can wait to christen more rooms after we’re moved in. What happens when we get back to the loft is another story.” He replies and then captures her mouth with his, satisfied that he’s taken her mind off Belle’s loneliness for Brady.
***
John and Marlena spend the rest of the afternoon until Belle wakes up, planning the changes they want to make in the house. After their picnic, they head back into town. When they arrive at the loft, John takes Belle upstairs to bathe her while Marlena puts the picnic things away.
There is a knock on the loft door. Marlena moves to the door and slides it open to find a delivery boy holding a small package. “I have a package for Dr. Marlena Evans.” “I’m Dr. Evans.” The delivery boy holds out his clipboard and points half way down. “Could you sign here please?” Marlena signs her name and he hands her the package. “Just a minute please.” She tells him as she sets the package on the counter and retrieves her purse. She pays him a tip and thanks him, then closes the loft door. Setting her purse back on the counter, she picks up the package and realizes that it has no return address. She starts to go after the delivery boy but changes her mind and slowly opens the package instead.
A heart shaped gold pendant on a fine link gold chain falls out of the box into her hand. Marlena frowns and holds the locket up for a closer look. It is then that she notices the initials “T.J.” engraved on it. With an anguished cry, Marlena slowly sinks to the floor as darkness closes around her, the pendant still clutched in her hand.
John descends the stairs as he’s buttoning up a fresh shirt. “You know, Doc, as much as Belle loves playing in water, we should think about having a pool put in at the house.” He reaches the bottom of the stairs and looks around, not seeing Marlena. “Doc?” He moves toward the living room area and sees Marlena unconscious on the floor and cries out. “Marlena!” He rushes over and kneels down beside her and quickly checks her over. Relieved that she doesn’t appear hurt and is still breathing, he lifts her in his arms and carries her over to the sofa. The pendant slips from her fingers and slides behind a cushion. John sits beside her and shakes her gently. “Marlena…come on, baby, wake up and talk to me.”
Marlena’s eyes slowly flutter open. “John? What happened?” The relief on his face is evident as he reaches out and strokes her hair. “I don’t know. I came down after bathing Belle and putting her down for a nap and found you unconscious on the floor. Don’t you remember what happened?” She shakes her head. “No…the last thing I remember was putting the picnic things away.” John checks her forehead and cheeks. “You don’t appear to be ill but something made you faint. You didn’t hit your head, did you?” Marlena checks her head. “No, I don’t think so. It doesn’t seem to be tender anywhere.”
John frowns and looks at the floor where he’d found Marlena and immediately sees the empty box. “What’s this?” He retrieves the box as Marlena sits up on the sofa. “It’s addressed to you, Doc, but there’s nothing in it.” He rejoins her on the sofa and hands it to her. “Was this delivered while I was upstairs?” Marlena turns the box over in her hands and frowns. “Yes…I think it was but who would send an empty box?” “Maybe it wasn’t empty and you dropped whatever it was.” She shakes her head. “I don’t even remember opening it. When I noticed that it didn’t have a return address, I was going to go after the delivery boy. That’s all I remember.”
“Doc, there was obviously something inside the box and it upset you so much, you fainted. You have to try and remember.” John insists. A wave of painful anguish takes hold of Marlena. She shakes it off and snaps. “John, I don’t remember.” Seeing how upset she is, he takes the box from her and sets it on the coffee table and then takes her in his arms. “I’m sorry, Doc. I didn’t mean to push you. We’ll forget about it for now and maybe something will come to you later. Now, why don’t you go upstairs and lie down for awhile? Maybe all you need is some rest.” She nods. “Sure, okay.” John walks her to the bottom of the stairs and kisses her. “Try not to dwell on it, sweetheart.”
She nods again and then goes up stairs. John waits until she’s disappeared from view before he begins searching the floor. His frustration mounts as he comes up empty handed. He picks up the box again and examines it looking for some type of clue. Nothing. Then he picks up the phone and calls the messenger services to try to find out where the box came from. He finally reaches the right service on the third phone call. “Sure, I remember that delivery. Our messenger just called in a short while ago to say he’d just finished up for the day and Dr. Evans’ package had been his last stop.” The messenger service manager informs him. “Can you tell me who sent the package?” “Hold on and I’ll check.”
John only has to wait a moment before the manager comes back on the line. “I don’t have an individual but I can tell you what city it was sent from…a town called Aremid.” A dark look crosses John’s face. “Thanks.” He hangs up the phone. “Damn you, Stefano DiMera!”
***
In Aremid, Stefano DiMera was doing some cursing of his own as he practically shouts into the phone. “What do you mean he is gone? How in the hell did that happen?” He pauses listening to the voice on the other end. “No, I want no excuses. You find him and you find him now!” He slams the phone down.
***
Marlena tosses and turns in her sleep. Her dreams are filled with kaleidoscope images from the past. She relives the last moments before the plane crash and hears Stefano’s voice “I rescued you, cared for you, made you well again.” She protests in return. “I belong with Roman and my children.” The scene shifts to the mountain top in West Virginia. She is showing John the picture from the plastic surgeon. Again she hears Stefano’s voice. “He is not Roman, Marlena.” The scene fast forwards to her hospital room after her coma caused by the fall from the window when John as Roman is proposing to her and then their wedding. Stefano’s voice overlays the scenes again. “It was not in my plans for you to fall in love with John Black.” Now she is in Orpheus’ garden telling him he can’t touch the love she and Roman feel for each other. Stefano intrudes again. “I used Orpheus to take you away from John.”
The past recedes and she finds herself seated across a chess table from Stefano as he is saying. “Have I finally convinced you that John Black is not Roman Brady?” “Yes, you have but if you think that lessens my love for him, you are mistaken.” She replies calmly, making a move on the chess board. “He believes you are dead, Marlena.” She sits back in her chair and says confidently. “For now.” Stefano looks up from his study of the chessboard. “You will never see him again.” Marlena smiles serenely. “That’s where you’re wrong, Stefano.”
The scene shifts again. This time she is seated across a candle lit dining table from Stefano. She tosses her linen napkin on the table and rises to her feet. “I’m not going to sit here any longer and listen to any more of your talk of ‘our’ future together, Stefano. There isn’t any future for us – ever!” A cold determination fills Stefano’s voice. “Marlena, if you walk out of this room, you will force me to do something we will both regret.” “What more can you take away from me, Stefano?” “I could take ‘him’ away from you.” He threatens. Marlena shakes her head. “No, you won’t because you know he is the only hold you have left over me.” A darkness fills her dream as she hears herself crying and pleading with Stefano. “Please, Stefano, don’t do this.” “You have left me no choice, Marlena.” His hand reaches out of the darkness and grasps the gold heart shaped pendant with the initials “TJ” engraved on it and yanks it from her neck. Marlena feels the prick of a needle in her arm as he continues. “You are going to sleep, Marlena and you will not awaken until I decide the time is right. You will remember nothing of this time.”
Her scream and cries for John in her dream mingles with her consciousness. Downstairs, John hears her scream and then call out to him. He dashes up the stairs and finds her sitting up in bed looking dazed and confused, tears are chasing each other down her cheeks. Marlena feels John’s strong arms close around her and she buries her face against his shoulder and weeps softly. John strokes her hair and rocks her gently. “I’m here, sweetheart. Everything is going to be okay.” He waits until her weeping has stopped and she relaxes against him before he speaks again. “What happened, Marlena?” She pulls back a little and looks up at him. Her hand reaches up and touches his face. “I knew before I came back to Salem that you weren’t Roman.”
John looks at her in stunned surprise. That was the last thing he expected her to say. “What did you say?” She tries to explain. “I was dreaming about us, about our past together and I kept hearing Stefano’s voice. He was telling me that you weren’t Roman and that he never intended for us to fall in love. He said that he used Orpheusto tear us apart and that I’d never see you again.” “It was all a dream, sweetheart.” She shakes her head. “No, John, it happened. It happened during those five years after Stefano rescued me from the plane crash. I knew you weren’t Roman and it didn’t matter to me because I still loved you. Stefano did everything he could to convince me to give up on you and stay with him. I refused him. I refused him even when he used Diana Colville to prove to me that you truly believed I was dead.” “My God, Doc, then you ‘were’ there.”
She nods. “Not at the cabin, but I was on the island.” John leans his forehead against hers and says hoarsely. “If I’d only known.” Marlena loops her arms around his neck. “You couldn’t have known, John and it’s in the past.” John raises his head and searches her face. “Is it, Doc? It’s obvious Stefano brainwashed you to forget all that when you continued to refuse him and something has triggered those memories. I have a feeling it was whatever was delivered in that box.”
Marlena doesn’t answer him right away. She remembered the pendant but the memory of what the pendant and those initials signified still alluded her. All she knew was that those initials had left her feeling hallow, afraid and her heart ached unbearably. Something very important had been taken from her and she didn’t know what it was, but Stefano did and she was determined to talk to him about it. “Doc, do you remember what was in that box?” “Yes, it was a pendant. I wore it during the time I was with Stefano and he took it from me just before he placed me in the coma.” “Who gave you the pendant?” “I don’t remember. I don’t even remember why I wore it or why it was so important to me.” She says in frustration. “Why do I remember everything else and not the significance of the pendant?” “I don’t know, Doc. Maybe if we can find it, you’ll remember something else when you see it again. Although, I did look for it while you were sleeping and couldn’t find it anywhere.” Marlena frowns in concentration. “I had it in my hand before I blacked out.” John releases her then rises to his feet. “Then it’s still down there somewhere.” He holds out his hand to her. “Let’s go see if we can find it.” She slips her hand in his and they go downstairs to search for the pendant.
***
Kristen starts to reach for the phone and pulls her hand back. She didn’t want to play her hand too soon. If only she knew how Marlena had reacted to the pendant, she’d have a better idea of when the timing would be right. She walks over to the bed and flips through the file spread open on top of it. Judging by Stefano’s notes, the pendant was the key to triggering part of Marlena’s memory of those five years he held her. But would she be anxious to talk to Stefano when those memories returned? Kristen believed she would because Marlena would sense there was something else she should remember and would know that Stefano had the answers.
She laughed out loud. She had never known Stefano to be so careless before, he usually hid his records where no one would find them. Finding TJ and learning all there was to know about him had been easier than she expected. Getting him away from his guards had been a little more difficult but she’d done it and now he was here, with her, in Salem. His presence would insure Marlena’s complete cooperation, when she finally lured her into her trap because TJ himself was the final trigger to Marlena’s memories. Kristen knew her trap had to be sprung soon because it would only be a matter of time before Stefano figured out that his beloved daughter had betrayed him.
***
After fifteen minutes of fruitless searching, John and Marlena look at each other. “It has to be here, John.” He nods and then looks around the room and replays in his mind what happened after he came downstairs and found her lying on the floor. Then he realized there was one place they hadn’t looked – the sofa. He moves over and starts pulling off the cushions and sees a glimmer of gold. He reaches down and retrieves it and holds it up. “I found it, Doc.”
John turns to her and is shocked by the look of complete despair and deep pain on her face. His hatred for Stefano doubled in that single instant and he rushed over to catch Marlena as her knees started to give out from under her. “Come on, baby, stay with me. Don’t faint again.” “I won’t.” She manages in a small voice. John leads her over to the sofa and sits down with her, keeping the pendant out of sight as he takes her hand in his. “Doc, tell me what you’re feeling when you see the pendant?” She whispers. “I feel so empty and afraid and my heart…it feels like it’s breaking.”
Before John can ask her another question, the phone rings. Thinking it might be Abe, John reaches over and picks it up. “John Black.” “John, this is Kristen. I’d like to talk to Marlena.” “It’s not a good time, Kristen.” He informs her coldly. “It’s important, John. It’s about Stefano.” She insists. Marlena places a hand on John’s arm. “Let me talk to her, John.” He places his hand over the receiver. “Are you sure that’s such a good idea, Doc. You’re upset enough.” “She might be able to tell me what Stefano is up to.” “If that’s the case, then she can tell me.” Marlena shakes her head. “You know how she feels about you, John. She won’t tell you anything.” John hands her the phone without a word.
“Kristen, it’s Marlena.” “Marlena, I’m sorry if I’m interrupting anything. I needed to talk to you about Stefano.” “Go on.” “Stefano wants to talk to you. He said he sent you something. Something that will clear up some of the secrets of your past and he’s anxious to tell you the rest to prove to you once and for all that he’s changed and that he regrets, deeply, everything he’s done to you.”
Marlena was torn between her hatred of Stefano and the man he was when he had no memory, between the feelings the pendant evoked in her and the need to know what it all meant. She knew that John would never agree to let her meet with Stefano but she had to meet with him anyway. Stefano held all the answers. She says one word. “When?” “Tomorrow afternoon. He’ll met you at the DiMera Mansion.” And to insure Marlena wouldn’t change her mind, she adds. “He said to tell you he’ll be bringing someone with him, someone with the initials TJ.”
The phone slips from Marlena’s hand. John who had been watching her in some concern takes the phone from her and hangs it up, then takes her in his arms. “Tell me.” “Stefano wants to meet with me at the DiMera Mansion tomorrow afternoon to tell me everything.” “Doc…” She grasps his shirt front, there is a desperation in her voice he hadn’t heard before. “Don’t try to talk me out of it, John. I have to go. I have to know.” He places his hands over hers. “All right, Doc, I won’t try to talk you out of it but I can’t let you meet with him alone.”
“He won’t talk to me if you’re there, John.” He reassures her. “He won’t know I’m there. I’ll go to the mansion ahead of you and hide out until he’s had his say. Okay?” She nods. “Okay.”
***
The following afternoon, John glances at his watch again. Marlena should have arrived a half an hour ago and there was still no sign of Stefano. He emerges from his hiding place and takes a look around. The house was as quiet as a tomb. He pulls out his cell phone and calls the loft. Caroline answers. “Caroline, it’s John. Is Marlena still there?” “No, she isn’t, John. She left about an hour ago. Is something wrong?” “I hope not, Caroline. I’ll talk to you later.” John heads for the front door to take a look outside to see if Marlena is coming up the drive. It is then that he notices the envelope with his name on it lying at the base of the door. He picks it up and tears it open and the words, written in Stefano’s hand, jump out at him. “Marlena is mine now.”
John’s yell of rage reverberates around the mansion.
Kristen ties the final knot in the ropes that bind Marlena to an old wooden chair, then stands back to admire her handiwork. “That should hold you for the time being.” She picks up the pistol, she’d laid aside. “I understand the last time someone kidnapped you, they threw you in a pit.” She laughs and waves the gun around indicating the dusty attic littered with items Shane had left behind. “I’m sure you’ll like these accommodations much better. After all, this is going to be your new home. John will never think to look for you here.” Marlena’s voice is calm. “Why are you doing this, Kristen?”
Kristen begins pacing the floor. “Why am I doing this? There are so many different answers to that question.” She stops in front of Marlena and points the gun at her. “Why do you think I’m doing it?” Marlena doesn’t flinch. “Because you believe you need to have revenge on John.” A cold smile crosses Kristen’s face. “Yes, that’s one reason.” She lowers the gun and resumes her pacing. “But he isn’t the only person I want revenge on. There are three of you who destroyed my life and deprived me of ever having children.” She stops again in front of an old trunk and tosses back the lid and says conversationally as she leafs through its contents. “Do you know how much I’ve come to hate you, Marlena?” She looks at Marlena when she receives no reply. “I can see that doesn’t surprise you. Do you want to know why I hate you?”
Marlena refuses to play her game. “I’d rather know why you set up your own father.” Kristen’s laugh has a hysterical edge to it. “He’s the third person.” She pulls a couple of old comforters out of the trunk. “Ah, these should do just fine. Did you know that there was a hidden room up here? It took me awhile to find it in my search for the ideal place to keep you locked up. After all, I had to make sure you were comfortable. I’m not completely heartless, you know.” She walks over to the wall on the other side of Marlena and reaches up and slides a small panel open and presses a button, a door springs open to reveal a fair sized room containing a bed with an iron work head and footboard, night stand and a small table and two chairs. “See, all the comforts of home…almost. I’m afraid there isn’t any electricity or running water, but the walls are sound proofed.” She giggles as she steps inside the room. “Makes you wonder what kind of guests the previous owners had hanging around.” She tosses the comforters on the bed. “Hmm, there seems to be something missing.” She walks back out into the attic and continues talking, not caring if Marlena was listening to her or not, but she was sure Marlena hadn’t missed a word. “Now where did I leave them? No self respecting kidnapper would….”
Marlena finally interrupts her. “Kristen, you do realize that John will confront Stefano and he’ll discover you’re behind my disappearance. It’s only a matter of time before he finds you.” Kristen replies as she continues her search. “That’s very true, Marlena but John won’t find Stefano right away. You see, I’ve taken something from Stefano that he wants back very badly and I happen to know that he left for Europe this morning. I’ve left him quite a trail to follow. I’d say by the time John does catch up with Stefano, he’ll be ready to kill him. It’s such a shame I can’t be there for that moment and maybe this time, John will stay in jail.” She stops and looks at Marlena and smiles. “And if he doesn’t, there is always plan B.”
“I assume by plan B, you mean whatever it is you have planned for me.” Kristen sits on a stool. “You know, Marlena, that’s what I’ve always admired about you, your ability to stay cool, calm and collected. Oh wait, I do seem to recall seeing you fall apart at least once…you were begging my father not to hurt Belle. I’ve never forgotten that moment and I’ve never forgotten that the surest way to control you is through your children. Stefano knew that too.”
She finally gets a reaction from Marlena as she struggles against the ties that bind her. “I won’t let you hurt my children and you’ll never get to Belle and if you’ve really been taking lessons from the past, then you know what extremes I can go to, to protect my children.” Kristen rubs the barrel of the gun on the side of her face. “It’s not your children I intend to hurt, Marlena and I don’t need Belle.” She jumps up. “Now I remember where I left them!” She walks over to an old dresser at the head of the attic stairs and opens a drawer, removing a chain and manacles. “The idea for these came to me when I remembered how you humiliated me in the church. Oh, excuse me, I should say the possessed you. I, on the other hand, will allow you your dignity and your clothing. I’m generous that way.” She walks back into the secret room and attaches the chain to the bottom of the bed. “There, I do believe it’s all ready for you to take up residency.”
Marlena tries to reach a rational part of Kristen as she says calmly. “Kristen, don’t do this. You still have time to change your mind and let me go. No one ever needs to know what happened here.” Kristen looks at her a moment and then walks over and starts to undo the ropes. “Maybe you’re right, Marlena, maybe I should just forget about the whole thing.” She lowers her head and whispers in Marlena’s ear. “Of course, if I do, you’ll never learn the answers you’re looking for about TJ.” Marlena gasps. “You sent the pendant.”
Untying the last of the ropes, Kristen places the end of the gun against Marlena’s back. “Yes, I did and I also knew that the pendant was a trigger to restore some of your memory from your missing five years and I’ll bet you’re just full of questions about what you can’t remember. Now stand up.” “Kristen, are you going to give me those answers?” Marlena asks curiously as she rises to her feet. Kristen urges her forward with the gun. “That all depends on how cooperative you prove to be, Marlena. Now move into the room.”
Marlena takes a few steps forward and then turns around to face Kristen. She knew Kristen wasn’t going to shoot her but she did want to make her play out her hand. Kristen pulls back the hammer on the gun. “Don’t do something stupid, Marlena. You won’t like the consequences.” “Won’t shooting me defeat your whole plan to torment me?” Kristen laughs wildly. “Whatever makes you think I’m going to shoot you, Marlena? I have another target in mind entirely, should you chose not to cooperate.” Her voice hardens. “So why don’t you be a good little shrink and get in to that room.” Marlena stands her ground and folds her arms across her chest. “You’re going to have to shoot me first.”
An ugly sneer crosses Kristen’s face. “No, I don’t think so, Marlena.” Still holding the gun on Marlena, she turns her head slightly and calls out over her shoulder. “You can come out now, TJ.”
***
After making arrangements for Carrie to stay with Belle and filling Abe in on what had happened, John heads for Aremid to confront Stefano only to find him gone. His rage and frustration mount. Several hours pass before he finds someone willing to talk and learns that Stefano had left Aremid in his private plane but they couldn’t say whether or not he was alone. John heads for the airport. There he learns that Stefano’s pilot had filed a flight plan for Europe and after some further checking, the flight controller narrows it down to a city in northern Italy. Knowing he’s learned everything he can from Aremid, John heads back to Salem to make arrangements to follow Stefano.
The moment he steps aboard Victor’s private plane, memories of the night Belle was conceived assail him. There had been so much emotion that night, their love could no longer be denied and their passion had blazed out of control – at first, until they took control of their passion. They couldn’t get enough of the feel or the touch of each other and the fire between them was laced with an infinite tenderness. Neither one of them had realized that they had re-pledged their hearts and souls to one another that night.
John forced himself to shake off the memories. He’d drive himself crazy if he didn’t. He needed to think, to concentrate on finding Marlena and getting some answers. But his mind couldn’t help but dwell on everything that happened after the night they made love on this plane. He had almost convinced himself that he and Marlena would never have a future together. They had had to overcome so many things and now when they finally had their chance, Stefano was trying to take it all away from them again.
John opens his hand and looks down at the heart shaped pendant and wonders again why it had such a profound affect on Marlena. Who was TJ and what role did he or she play during Marlena’s missing five years? Whether Marlena had realized it yet or not, it had been more than obvious to John that on a subconscious level this TJ meant a great deal to her. Is that why Stefano took away all of her memories of this person? As a means of punishing her? Or did this person hold the key to destroying Stefano once and for all? If that was the case, why did Stefano suddenly decide to send her the pendant? None of it made sense and he didn’t think it would until TJ’s identity was revealed.
John’s hand closes around the pendant. There were just too many unanswered questions and his worries about Marlena grew. He had a gut feeling that Marlena was on the verge of confronting a past she might not be able to handle and he had no idea what plans Stefano had in store for her. “Hang in there, baby. I’m going to find you.” He promises her. He turns his head and looks out one of the plane’s windows, realizing they were in the air and had been for some time. John’s vow to Stefano is as cold as winter. “I’m coming after you, old man, and if you’ve hurt her, in any way, you’re a dead man.”
***
The moment TJ stepped out of his hiding place, the last of the darkness surrounding Marlena’s memory melted away and she fell to her knees, held out her arms and sobbed out his name. The dark haired, blue eyed eight year old boy ran into her arms, crying “Mommy!”
Kristen was taken aback, she hadn’t expected the boy to remember his mother. The touching reunion only had one affect on her, she became enraged and walked over and tried to pull TJ out of his mother’s arms. He turned and pushed Kristen backwards almost causing her to lose her balance, but she remained on her feet and raised the gun and pointed it at the pair of them. Marlena rises to her feet and TJ stands in front of her in a defensive stance. “You leave my mother alone! I heard what you said to her. You’re evil and you lied to me. You only brought me here to hurt her.”
Marlena looks at Kristen as she places a protective hand on TJ’s shoulder. “You didn’t expect him to remember me, did you?” Kristen sneers. “No, and why should he? It’s been over four years since you’ve seen each other.” TJ looks up at his mother. “Stefano gave me pictures and videos of you and me from when I was little. He said he didn’t want me to forget you and I didn’t. Not once.”
Kristen tries to drive a wedge between them. “You might not have forgotten about her, but she forgot all about you, TJ. And why should she have remembered you? She has other children that are more important to her. You were just a mistake from her past.” A triumphant smile curves her lips as she witnesses the pain that flickers momentarily in Marlena’s eyes, then glances down at TJ and is startled at how much he looks like John in that moment.
The boy was so angry he was shaking. Marlena squeezes his shoulder gently to keep him silent and says calmly. “Tell me, Kristen, what are your plans for us?” Kristen laughs coldly. “Oh, I still plan to lock you in my little hide-away, Marlena and I think it’s time I did just that. So step away from the boy.” TJ locks his arms around his mother’s waist. “I’m not going to let you hurt her.”
“I’m not going to hurt her, TJ. I’m just going to keep her locked up for awhile and if you’re a good little boy, I might even let you visit her. If you’re a bad little boy, then I might have to hurt her after all and you wouldn’t want that would you?” Marlena gives her son a reassuring hug. “Kristen, have you considered locking us up together? If you try to separate us now, you’ll get no cooperation from TJ and I know you don’t want to use that gun on either one of us.”
Kristen snaps back sarcastically. “Oh, you’d just love that, wouldn’t you? Sorry, Marlena, giving you time to bond with your long lost son isn’t a part of my plans.” She looks down at TJ. “Contrary to what your mother wants to believe, TJ, I will use this gun. If you don’t let go of her and move over here, I will shoot her.” She pulls back the hammer on the gun and aims it at Marlena’s heart. TJ looks up at his mother. “Mom?”
Marlena smoothes back a lock of his hair that had fallen across his forehead and says sadly. “I’m sorry, TJ. I’m afraid we’ll have to do as she says.” She leans down and hugs him and whispers in his ear. “Be brave, sweetheart. We’ll find a way to get out of here.” He gives her a ferocious hug in return and whispers back. “I love you, mom and I’ll never believe anything she says.” She says tearfully as she gives him a final hug, “I love you, too, baby.” She releases him and TJ steps away from her. Kristen reaches out and pulls him in front of her and aims the gun at his head. “It’s time, Marlena.” Marlena looks at her coldly. “I’ll cooperate with you for now, Kristen but if you hurt TJ in any way, you’ll have to answer to me and I will find a way to get you, gun or no gun.” She turns and enters the room with Kristen, still holding the gun on TJ’s head, following at a safe distance.
The moment they enter the room, TJ stumbles causing Kristen to let go of him as he falls to the floor. Before Marlena can make a move, Kristen steps out of the room and slams the door shut. Marlena rushes over to TJ but he gets to his feet before she reaches him. He looks up at her and grins. “I’m okay, mom. I did that on purpose so she’d lock us up together.” Marlena hugs him but says in a stern voice. “You took a very dangerous chance, TJ. Kristen is becoming more unstable every moment and I’m not so sure she isn’t prepared to use that gun. Promise me you won’t try anything like that again.”
He crosses his fingers out of her line of vision and says. “I promise.”
***
Kristen frantically paces the dusty attic. Everything was going wrong. She had expected the boy to hate his mother for abandoning him. Damn Stefano anyway. What reason would he have to deprive Marlena of her memories but keep her memory alive for TJ, especially when it appeared that Stefano had never intended to reunite the pair? And why didn’t the boy say he remembered his mother when she told him she was taking him to see her? The small rational part left of her mind tells her that she should have seen it when the boy made no demur in accompanying her after she’d convinced him that his mother was alive. That angers her further.
Now the two of them were locked up together and she was almost sure the boy had tricked her into it. But she couldn’t risk Marlena attacking her because she wasn’t prepared to use the gun, not yet. So how was she going to separate the two of them and use TJ to control Marlena like she’d originally planned? And why the hell wasn’t Marlena more devastated upon seeing her son? Nothing, nothing was going right.
She stopped her pacing and stared at the door to the pairs’ prison, running the tip of the gun’s barrel along her temple. “Think, Kristen, think. How can you get them weak enough to keep them from trying anything the moment you open the door?” And then she started laughing. They had no water or food. She lowers the gun and moves over to the door and runs her hand along it. “We’ll see how long you’ll let your son starve, Marlena.”
***
John arrives at Stefano’s home in northern Italy only to find his quarry had already come and gone. Unable to get any further information from the butler, John bides his time until he can find someone more willing to talk. He hides out by the delivery entrance when he sees a delivery truck coming up the long drive.
His patience was wearing thin by the time the delivery man emerged from the house. The man was accompanied by one of the maids. He gives her a hug and says something comforting to her in Italian. As he emerged from his hiding place, John hoped one of them spoke English. “Excuse me, I was wondering if you could answer a few questions.” The pair broke apart guiltily and turned to face him in unison. John continued. “Do either of you speak English?” The woman nodded and asked. “Who are you and why do you trespass here?” Hoping to allay her suspicions, John replies. “I work for Mr. DiMera.”
It worked. She was filled with relief and looked hopeful, providing him with more information than he had hoped for. “Has he hired you to find his son? We are all so worried about the little one and Mr. DiMera was beside himself with concern. The boy was kidnapped from his very bed a few days ago. We all love the child very much. Tomaso Giovanni has had such a sad life. His father’s business keeps him away all the time and he lost his mother when he was only four. His only company has been the staff and of course, his tutor – a foreign priest who lives in seclusion at the monastery. Not even news of the boy’s kidnapping will bring him here.” She finally falls silent.
The moment the woman had mentioned the boy’s name, John knew she was talking about the mysterious TJ. Tomaso Giovanni – Thomas John. The same TJ whose initials affected Marlena so drastically. Had Marlena gotten close to Stefano’s son? What reason would Stefano have to erase all memory of the boy from her mind? And who was the boy’s mother? A dozen more questions leaped into his mind and he knew he had to have more answers before he could make sense of this new development. He pulls the heart shaped pendant out of his pocket and holds it up. “Have you seen this before?”
The woman cups the pendant in her hand to take a closer look and then nods enthusiastically. “Si! It is the same pendant Tomaso’s mother was wearing in her photographs. Tomaso treasured this necklace. Whoever took him must have taken this also.” John wasn’t at all sure he liked where this was leading. “Do you still have the photographs?” She nods. “I’d like to see them.” The maid says something to her boyfriend in Italian and with a nod of his head, he goes back to his delivery truck and leaves. She then turns to John. “If you will please follow me, I will take you to Tomaso’s bedroom.”
She gives John a running commentary about TJ as she leads him up to the boy’s room. He learned that the boy was eight years old and was brought here shortly after his mother died and what his life had been like growing up. The boy seemed to have formed a deep attachment to the “foreign” priest who never left the monastery. “His father did not stay with him for very long and has only been to see him once since then. It is not good for a child to be without a parent.” She concluded as she opened the door to TJ’s room. “There is a photograph of Tomaso’s parents next to his bed and he keeps his photograph albums in his bookshelves. Now, I must leave you here, Senor. I have chores that I must attend to and I can give you no other information.”
John delays her a moment. “I only have one more question. Was Mr. DiMera alone when he arrived?” She nods. “Si and he did not stay long after he talked to the staff.” “Thank you, you’ve been very helpful.”
With a final nod to him, she leaves him alone. John steps into the boy’s room and was surprised at what he found. It was like walking into a typical 8 year old American boy’s bedroom with it’s baseball memorabilia everywhere but it was the framed photo beside the boy’s bed that drew him. He kept telling himself it couldn’t be true but the closer he moved towards the photograph, the less he could deny it. The woman in the picture, wearing the pendant, standing next to Stefano, his arm around her, was Marlena. His hand shook as he picked up the photograph. “Oh God, Doc, no! It can’t be true. You and Stefano can’t have a child.” He dropped the photograph on the bed as if it burned his fingers and walked over to the bookshelves and began pulling out the photo albums. He found more pictures of Marlena with Stefano and with the boy. All of the ones of the boy and Marlena were taken from a distance, so John could not make out his features clearly. As he flipped through the last album and arrived at the last page, he found a letter written in Marlena’s hand. It was a goodbye letter written to her son.
‘My darling TJ, By the time you read this, I will be long gone from your life. It breaks my heart to have to leave you and I wish it didn’t have to happen. Just knowing that I will never hold you in my arms again, hear you say ‘I love you, Mommy’ or to do all the wonderful things we used to do together, hurts me more than you will ever know. Your father has promised to give you my pendant after I’m gone so you will have something to remember me by. Whenever you hold it, always remember how very much I loved you. Mommy.’
John felt as if he’d been struck by a blow to the solar plexus and his rage rolled through him like blazing inferno. Marlena’s letter to TJ confirmed his fears. That bastard had gotten her pregnant, given her time with their son and then took the child away from her and now she and the boy were missing. Had Marlena remembered the truth about TJ and that’s why Stefano kidnapped her? If that was true, who had taken the boy and why? Or did Stefano have his own son kidnapped as just another ploy to throw him off track?
His main concern was Marlena. If she did remember the past and her life with Stefano and the son they shared, she’d be devastated. Not only by the missing years with her son, but also because Stefano had forced her into a position where she’d had to let him touch her. John didn’t believe for a moment that whatever happened between Marlena and Stefano had been voluntary on Doc’s part. Stefano must have found a way to coerce her into it – more like threatened her into it, he thought as his rage continued to climb. She hated the man too much and had apparently refused to stay with him or he’d never have found her on the pier that night several years ago. And he could see now that Stefano had been systematically destroying Marlena’s life in the hopes that she’d return to him, only it had backfired. So Stefano finally had to resort to using TJ to try to get her back. For some reason, that line of logic didn’t make sense to him. Something didn’t fit.
John tries to shake the rage and hatred that is consuming him. If Stefano were standing before him at this moment, he wouldn’t have given him the chance to say a word. The man would be dead. He had to concentrate on Marlena and his love for her, otherwise, he’d never get the answers he needed from Stefano when he caught up with him and he might never find Marlena. He removes the letter from the album, as well as a picture of Marlena and the boy and tucks them into his pocket with the pendant. He takes a final look around the room and leaves.
***
Marlena watches in puzzlement as TJ moves around the room feeling the walls and knocking on them along the way. The small window set high on the wall opposite the door provided the room’s only light and it was waning rapidly. “TJ, what are you looking for?” He stops a moment and looks at her. “A way to open the door from this side.” He resumes his search. “My tutor used to tell me stories about his brother who was a famous detective. One story was about the time he was trapped in a room that had no way out but he searched and searched and finally found a hidden mechanism that opened the door.”
Marlena smiles. “And you think there is one here?” He nods. “I think this room was used to hide people, not keep them inside. So there has to be a way to open the door from the in here.” She joins him by the wall. “You may be right. Do you mind if I help you look? There isn’t much light left and with two of us looking, we may find it.” “Okay. How about if you start over there?” He points to the wall on the other side of the door. As Marlena begins her search, he asks. “Mom, how come that woman hates you so much?” “She blames me for things that haven’t gone right in her life.” “How did she know where to find me?” She glances over at him. “I don’t know, TJ. Why didn’t you tell her you remembered me?”
“At first I didn’t believe her when she told me she was going to bring me to see you. Stefano told me you had died when I was four and I told her so. She finally made me believe you were alive but then she took the pendant away from me and wouldn’t give it back. I didn’t trust her much after that but I didn’t let her know because I wanted to see you.” He is quiet and still for a moment, then asks. “Mom, why did Stefano make me believe you were dead?”
“He didn’t want you to look for me, TJ and I couldn’t look for you because he took away my memories of you. Stefano isn’t a very nice man.” TJ mulls this over as he resumes his search and then asks abruptly. “Mom, who are John and Belle?” Before Marlena can answer, TJ says excitedly. “I found something.” Marlena joins him as TJ pulls away a panel in the wall to reveal a stairway going downward. “Oh wow! This is even better than a hidden mechanism to open the door!” He grabs her hand and says with a grin. “Come on, Mom. We have to make our escape before the witch comes back to boil our bones in oil.”
Marlena bites back her smile as she follows TJ through the opening, hoping that the stairway led to freedom. Once they were free, she’d have to decide where to take TJ so that Kristen wouldn’t find them and then she had to try to contact John. They feel their way down the winding staircase in the dark and Marlena’s hopes are short lived as they reach the bottom. The door is locked. She sinks down on the steps and says. “I’m sorry, TJ.”
He reaches for her in the dark and hugs her. “Don’t give up, Mom. We’ll find a way out of here. I’ll bet this stairway has some hidden tunnels along the way. If we could convince her to give us some light, we might be able to find them.” Not wanting to dash his hopes, Marlena agrees and then says. “We’d better go back up before she finds us missing.”
The room is shrouded in shadows when they return. Marlena moves to the bed and sits on it. “TJ, I think we’re going to have to face the fact that she isn’t going to be coming back anytime soon and that means no light and no food or water.” He sits on the bed next to her. “She’s not a very nice person either, Mom. Is she related to Stefano?”
She slides her arm around his shoulders. “In a way. She’s his adopted daughter.” “Sort of like I’m his adopted son?” He asks, his voice suddenly woeful. “No, TJ, it isn’t the same. I refused to let Stefano adopt you. Kristen didn’t have any choice, her parents were dead.” “Then why did he insist that I call him my father and why did everyone call me Tomaso DiMera? Didn’t he want anyone to know my real name?” She gives him a comforting hug. “I’m afraid not, sweetheart. He was probably afraid someone would find out who your parents were and would try to contact us.” “Mom, who is my dad?” He sees her face light up in the semi-darkness.
“Remember when you asked me earlier who John and Belle were?” He nods. “John is your father and Belle is your sister. Your last name is Black and you were named after a very special man named Tom Horton and your father.” TJ’s voice holds a sudden urgency as he asks, needing to hear the answers again. “Mom, did you say my last name was Black and that John Black was my dad?” A bit surprised she replies. “Yes, I did. Have you heard his name before?”
He jumps from the bed and says excitedly. “Boy have I! My tutor’s name was Fr. Black and he talked about his brother John all the time. You know, the famous detective I was telling you about.” His excitement dies. “Mom, he thinks his brother is dead.” Marlena reaches out and touches his arm. “TJ, I think the names might just be a coincidence. John’s brother’s name is Lawrence Alamain so his real last name isn’t really Black and he has no memory of his past.”
TJ jumps back onto the bed beside his mother and says smugly. “Fr. Black said his brother used a lot of different last names because it was a part of his undercover work and I’ll know the truth when I see my dad.” “But you don’t know what he looks like, TJ and you won’t have any proof.” “Oh yes I will, Mom because Fr. Black and his brother are twins!”
Marlena is stunned speechless.
Kristen decides it’s time to check on her prisoners and lights a lantern, picks up her gun and heads for the attic. She had to be very careful in case they had something planned. She couldn’t let them overpower her and escape. She’d been doing a lot of thinking since locking them up together and she knew that Marlena and TJ had to die, there was just no way around it and she couldn’t think of a better way to get her revenge on John. She been tossing around ideas for the past few hours on how to do away with them – each one more gruesome than the last until she finally settled on one she liked. She laughs wildly as she reaches the attic. She was going to burn the house down – the house that John and Marlena planned to start their future in – the house that would burn to a crisp with Marlena and her son trapped inside. Drool runs out the corner of her mouth and down her chin and she swipes at it with her gun hand. “Get a grip, Kristen. You can’t let them know they’ve only got a very short time left to live!” She starts giggling to herself and sings. “Ashes, ashes, they all burn up!”
Marlena and TJ both shade their eyes as the lantern light nearly blinds them. Kristen walks over to the table and sets the lantern on the table, holding the gun on them the whole time and then says conversationally. “I’m sorry, did I forget to leave you a light?” She stifles the giggle that tries to escape and then eyes the pair with amusement. “My isn’t this a cozy mother and child reunion. I hope you’ve been enjoying yourselves.”
Marlena shoots TJ a warning glance to remain silent as she slides a protective arm around his shoulders. She could see that Kristen had truly gone off the deep end and she was afraid of what might set her off. Kristen’s amusement turns to an ugly snarl. “You’d better answer me or I might just decide to shoot you both right now.”
Marlena’s voice is calm in comparison. “I didn’t realize you’d asked a question, Kristen. What do you want?” “I want you…to tell me what you’d like for dinner.” Kristen says before bursting into another wild peel of laughter. Then stops just as suddenly and glares at Marlena. “Unless, of course, you prefer to starve. It really doesn’t matter to me.” Marlena maintains her calm. “No, we wouldn’t like to starve and I’m sure whatever you bring us will be fine, Kristen.” Kristen nods her head. “Good, good, you’re being very cooperative. I like that and to reward you, I’ll leave you the lantern while I go fetch your food.” She backs out of the room and slams the door shut. TJ says in a small voice. “She’s going to kill us, isn’t she, mom?”
Marlena looks at the door thoughtfully. “She has something planned but I’m not sure what.” She looks down at her son. “We’ll have to try to find those secret tunnels you think are in the stairway after she brings our food.” The boy shudders. “We don’t have to eat it, do we? What if she poisons it?” “I don’t think she will. Whatever she has planned, I think she’ll watch from a safe distance. So that eliminates poisoning or shooting us.” “Can’t we try to escape before she comes back? She gives me the creeps!” Marlena shakes her head. “We won’t have enough time. I have a feeling she’s just making a trip downstairs and she’ll be back shortly.”
At that moment the door swings open to reveal Kristen toting the gun and a picnic basket. “Heeeeere’s Kristen!” She tosses the basket on the table and grins. “If you think I poisoned it, think again. That’s such an unimaginative way to kill someone and would be a terrible waste of food besides. So I’d eat it, if I were you. You never know when your next meal will be tossed your way.” She moves towards the door and then stops and looks back. “Oh, I almost forgot. It’s your favorite prisoner fare, Marlena – turkey with all the trimmings.” Her wild laughter lingers in the room even after the door closes quietly behind her.
Mother and son exchange glances and don’t waste another moment in trying to make their escape as they retrieve the lantern and head for the hidden stairway. They didn’t know that it was already too late. Kristen tossed a match into the gasoline soaked foyer on her way out the front door as she hummed an off key rendition of “Light My Fire.”
***
Victor is sitting in his study reading a paper when Henderson rushes in to tell him that the old Donovan house is on fire. Knowing that John had just purchased the house from Shane, Victor leaps to his feet. “Call the fire department, Henderson. I’m going over there.”
Victor arrives to find the bottom floor of the house fully engulfed in flames and a hysterical Kristen standing outside. She couldn’t help but think how perfectly Victor had fallen into her plans as she falls into his arms and sobs. “Marlena…she’s trapped inside…I tried to get to her but the fire started so quickly.” Victor gives her a shake and holds her at arms distance eyeing her suspiciously. “What was Marlena doing here this late at night?”
Kristen tries to talk around her big gulping sobs. “We came…here…she wanted…wanted to…show me…the house…and it got…later than we…thought.” “How did the fire get started?” “I…I…don’t…know. Oh God…she’s never going…to make…it.” Hearing the approaching sirens, she pulls away from Victor and runs off toward the woods. She has to put her hands over her mouth to stifle her laughter.
A few moments later, the fire department arrives, accompanied by Abe and two squad cars. Abe walks up to Victor. “What happened here?” Victor shakes his head. “I’m not sure. I found Kristen here when I arrived. She was hysterical and all I could get from her was that Marlena brought her here to show her the house and it caught fire trapping Marlena inside.” “Where is Kristen now?” “She ran off into the woods.” Abe directs his men to go after her and bring her back.
“Abe, what is going on?” Abe turns back to him. “Marlena was kidnapped earlier today. John thought Stefano had done it and he’s off looking for him but if Marlena is in that house and Kristen was with her, then John is chasing the wrong person. It also means this fire was no accident.” He looks up at the burning house as the firemen appear to be fighting a losing battle. “My God, how are we going to tell John?”
***
After flying all night and the following morning, making several fruitless stops in between in his search for Stefano, an exhausted and unkempt John finally catches up to him in Mexico late the following afternoon. He discovers Stefano’s private plane sitting fueled and ready to go, awaiting it’s owner, at a small airport outside Cancun. John decides to wait there for Stefano’s return. He takes care of the pilot and co-pilot to make sure his enemy doesn’t have any advance warning but promises to release them before he leaves the plane.
An equally exhausted and unkempt Stefano returns to his plane and is startled to find John waiting for him. He expected the man to attack him and was even more startled when John didn’t even get to his feet but said with a cold calmness. “Have a seat, Stefano.” Stefano remains on his feet. This was a side of John that he had not seen in a very long time and he knew he was facing a very dangerous man. “What are you doing here, John?”
John’s eyes harden and his gaze never leaves Stefano. “I’ve been asking myself that same question for the past two hours, old man. I’ve followed you to hell and back and it finally dawned on me that one of us is being led on a wild goose chase. Tell me where Marlena and the boy are.” Stefano hadn’t been expecting that but covered well. “I do not know what you’re talking about, John.”
John pulls the pendant out of his pocket and lets it swing to and fro on it’s chain in front of him. “I am sure this will jog your memory and don’t bother denying that you’ve seen it before, I’ve been to your estate in northern Italy. You did a very sloppy job of covering your tracks and that isn’t like you, Stefano. You’re very lucky I didn’t catch up with you sooner because this conversation would never have taken place – you’d be dead. Now are you going to tell me where they are?” An edge of anger creeps into Stefano’s voice. “Where did you get that pendant?”
John puts the pendant away in his pocket. “It arrived at the loft just as you’d planned and Marlena had the reaction to it that you probably expected. She was devastated and didn’t know why. You did too good of a job on brainwashing her, Stefano because not even seeing the pendant made her remember her own son.” Stefano finally sinks into the seat. “John, I did not send her the pendant.” John laughs bitterly before he asks. “And you expect me to believe that?”
“It is the truth. Whoever kidnapped Tomaso sent that pendant.” “Fine, let’s assume you are telling the truth. That still doesn’t answer my question about Marlena. You lured her into meeting you and she disappeared. You’re going to tell me where she is even if I have to beat it out of you.”
“I have not spoken to Marlena since shortly after she returned to Salem. So how could I lure her into a meeting?” John is out of his seat like a shot and grabs Stefano’s jacket front and pulls him up. “Unless you want to die right here and now, old man, you’d better stop playing games with me and tell me where she is.” Stefano’s hands lock on to John’s wrists and their gazes clash as he replies coldly. “Killing me will gain you nothing, John. I do not have Marlena.”
John pulls his hands free of Stefano’s grasp and then gives him a push, knocking him back into his seat. He places his hands on either side of Stefano and leans in, a chilling smile crosses his lips. “Killing you would give me infinite satisfaction, Stefano. So if I were you, I’d start talking. We can start with your putting Kristen up to calling Marlena to arrange a meeting with you at the DiMera mansion.” Stefano’s face pales. “Kristen! My God, she is behind it all.” John grabs his shirt front and twists it in his hand. “What the hell are you talking about?”
Stefano yanks John’s hand away. “I do not know which one of us has been the bigger fool. Kristen is responsible for Marlena and Tomaso’s disappearance. I do not know why I did not see it sooner.” John straightens, his voice is skeptical. “Why would Kristen kidnap either one of them?” The older man glares at him. “Because of her hatred for you.”
John folds his arms across his chest, a hint of cold amusement enters his voice. “That might explain why she’d want to kidnap Marlena but not the boy. Unless, she hates you as well and considering the goose chase she’s led you on, I’d say that’s a pretty accurate guess. She must have had you completely fooled to find out about the little bastard you had tucked away.” The amusement drops from his voice, leaving only the coldness as he unfolds his arm and reaches into his pocket and pulls out a gun. “I’m going to see you rot in hell for everything you’ve done to Marlena but I’m going to make sure it’s a very painful trip for what you did to her during those five years you held her prisoner. You should never have touched her, Stefano.”
Stefano looks at John as if he’d grown another head and had to fight the urge to burst out laughing. John thought Tomaso was his son! There was a bright spot in all of this after all and he wasn’t about to tell him any differently. If they ever found Marlena and the boy, he’d find out soon enough. In the meantime, it wouldn’t hurt John to suffer. He manages to keep the amusement from his voice as he says evenly. “John, you can do what you want with me later. Right now, I think we should concentrate on finding Marlena and Tomaso.”
“You want me to work with you?” John asks incredulously. “You must be out of your mind, Stefano.” Stefano nods. “That could very well be true, however I think we will stand a better chance of finding them if we work together.” John eyes him suspiciously. “What are you up to now, old man?” “I know you will find this hard to believe, John, but Marlena’s safety and happiness are my first concern. And it may come as a surprise to you but that includes sacrificing my love for her to see the two of you together. It is no secret to me that the two of you still love each other.”
“You’re right, I do find it hard to believe. You’re nothing but a sick old man with a very twisted view of love and you’re even crazier than I thought if you ever thought you stood a chance with Marlena.” John practically spits out at him, then concedes grudgingly. “But I do agree with you that we have to work together to find her.” John waves the gun in Stefano’s face. “Just remember, I won’t be taking my eye off you for one second.” Stefano raises his hand and pushes the gun aside. “Good, then we can leave here immediately.” He starts to rise. “I will inform my pilot.” John shakes his head. “I don’t think so, Stefano. We’ll use my plane.” Stefano shrugs. “Have it your way.”
“John…where are you?…there is so much smoke…please…don’t let us die!”
“Mom! Mom, wake up. You’re having a bad dream.” TJ shakes his mother frantically. Marlena sits up in the bed suddenly and sees by the glow of moonlight shining through the window high in the wall that she and TJ were still locked inside the attic room. She hugs him to her in relief as she says apologetically. “I’m sorry, TJ. I didn’t mean to frighten you.” He hugs her back. “I wasn’t frightened. I was worried about you because you sounded so scared.” She reassures him. “I’m okay now.” TJ asks in a quiet voice. “You were dreaming that she set the house on fire, weren’t you, mom?”
Marlena lies back against the pillow. “Yes, I was and it seemed very real.” A slight edge of fear enters his voice. “You don’t think she really plans to do that, do you?” “No, sweetheart, I don’t. Since she hasn’t come back, I think she plans to withhold our food and water until we’re weak so that she can separate us.” She tells him truthfully. “We can’t let her do that, mom. I want to stay with you.” He sits up in the bed. “Maybe we’ll have enough light in the morning to explore the stairway again.” Marlena reaches up and caresses his hair. “In that case, we’d better get some sleep. We don’t want to be so tired that we’ll miss something.” TJ lies back down. “Okay. Goodnight, mom.” “Goodnight, TJ.” They both fall into a deep sleep.
***
Marlena awakens groggy and headachy the next morning and vaguely remembers having another dream, this one about a feeling of being suffocated by Kristen and TJ’s cries of “let me go” before everything became a blank. Reality hits her as she raises her hand to try to soothe her aching head and meets with resistance. Around her wrists are manacles and there is a very faint odor of chloroform in the air. Despite the pain in her head, she sits up and looks around the room. She is alone. She lies back down against the pillows and closes her eyes as the room begins to spin dizzily around her. She had to let the lingering effects of the chloroform wear off.
***
Kristen takes her eyes off the road long enough to glance over at TJ. He’d finally stopped struggling against the ropes around his hands and feet and trying to yell at her from behind the gag around his mouth. Feeling that he’d calmed down enough, she reaches over and pulls the gag down. He launches into a tirade immediately. “You’ll never get away with this. Take me back to my mother – NOW!.”
Without glancing his way, Kristen smiles. “I’m afraid I can’t do that, TJ and yes, I will get away with this. You see, no one is ever going to find your mother unless I want them to and I’m not ready for that to happen, if it happens at all.” “My father will find her, you just wait and see.” Kristen starts laughing. “Maybe, maybe not but then, you’ll never know because you’ll never see your mother again and you’ll certainly never meet your father.”
TJ starts struggling against his ropes again. “You’re crazy and I’ll find a way to get away from you. I’ll tell everyone what you did and then they’ll lock you away forever.” That makes Kristen laugh harder and when she’s finally able to reply, she tells him. “Oh, I’m not going to be the one locked away forever. However, there is a crazy bad little boy named TJ who needs some serious help. You see, doctor, I work for the Horton Center in Salem and TJ is an orphan and has been in and out of serious trouble for quite some time. Dr. Marlena Evans has been working with him and the poor delusional little boy thinks she’s his mother. And now he thinks that I’ve kidnapped her and locked her away somewhere because she hasn’t had time to see him lately. So you can see why she’s having him sent here for further treatment.” She pauses a moment, then continues. “Yes, I think that will be convincing enough.”
“They won’t believe you.” He shouts at her. “Well, yes, TJ, they will. I have a sworn statement from the good Dr. Evans to give to the doctors where we’re going. They won’t have any reason not to believe it. And if you’re really good and don’t fight your treatments, why, I may just come back to get you. We can go away some place together and you can be my little boy. In time, I know you’ll like that. I’ve always wanted a little boy and I can give you anything you want.” “I’d never go any place with you. I hate you!”
Kristen sighs. “Yes, you’ve told me that a dozen times already and it’s getting on my nerves. TJ.” She reaches over and tries to pull the gag back over his mouth. TJ bites her. An ugly snarl crosses her face. “You do that again you little brat and I’ll make sure your mother dies and it will be all your fault.”
“I’m not going to let you hurt her anymore!” TJ yells before twisting on the seat and lashing out at Kristen with his bound feet. She loses control of the car and screams as the car careens off the road and smashes head on into a tree.
ohn, who had been dosing, wakes up with a jerk and looks around. Stefano says with some amusement. “Yes, John, I am still here. I do not make a habit of jumping from moving airplanes, even when they are on the ground.” John ignores him, snatches up his cellular phone and calls Abe at the police station. “Abe Carver here.” John’s voice is urgent. “Abe, it’s John. Something has happened to Marlena and the boy.” Thinking John was losing it, Abe replies. “I know that, John. You called me from Mexico and filled me in, remember?”
“It’s not that, Abe. Something has happened recently, I can feel it.” He pauses. “Look, we’ve just landed at the Salem airport. We’ll be at your office shortly, wait for us.” Stefano asks impatiently as John hangs up the cell phone. “What do you mean something has happened to Marlena and the boy?” John shoots him an irritated glance before looking out the window to see how close they are to arriving at the terminal. “You wouldn’t understand.” “John, I know you and Marlena share an unusual bond. If your instincts have told you that something has happened to her, I would like to know.” Stefano insists.
John turns and looks at him coldly. “I brought you along for one reason and one reason only, Stefano – to help me find Kristen. Once we’ve found her, your job is done and then I want you gone from Salem.” “You are not going to be rid of me that easily, John. I will not rest until Marlena and Tomaso are found.” Stefano warns him as the plane comes to a stop.
The two men’s gazes lock as John replies, his voice like steel. “Don’t tempt me to do something to insure you stay out of my way, old man and if you’re even thinking about employing any of your thugs, forget it. I don’t trust you and I don’t trust them.” Without giving him a chance to reply, John pulls out his gun and motions for Stefano to get off the plane. After giving John an amused glance, Stefano proceeds him off the plane.
John and Stefano arrive at the Salem PD and learn from Bo and Abe that Marlena’s car had been found abandoned on an old service road near the DiMera Mansion. Another set of tire tracks were also found, so they assumed Kristen and Marlena had switched cars. They were still checking out the car rental agencies, but so far had come up with no further leads.
Stefano’s voice is filled with sarcasm. “I see that the Salem police department is as competent as ever.” “Can it, DiMera. I don’t need you making this more difficult than it is.” John snaps at him, then says to Abe. “Have you had a chance to check out the DiMera Mansion to see if Kristen has been there?” Abe shakes his head. “I couldn’t spare the extra men, John. Besides checking the car rental agencies, I’ve had them scouring the city.” Bo turns to John. “John, what makes you think they’re still in Salem?”
John explains. “When she returned to Salem, Kristen had to have brought the boy with her and locked him away someplace before she kidnapped Marlena. Once she had the two of them, I don’t think she would have risked going very far with two uncooperative captives. That’s assuming she’s even brought the two of them together.” Stefano chimes in, “She would have brought them together. Tomaso was the key to unlocking Marlena’s memories.”
John’s glance spears Stefano at the inadvertent reminder of what Stefano had done to Marlena. “Say another word, DiMera and I’ll have Abe toss you in a cell and throw away the key.” He then turns back to Abe and Bo and pulls the picture of Marlena and TJ from his pocket. “This is the only picture I have of the boy and it’s not a very clear one. I’d appreciate it if you’d have copies made and pass it around. In the meantime, we’ll check out the DiMera Mansion.” Indicating Stefano with a nod of his head. “He should be able to tell if Kristen has been there.”
***
The second time Marlena awakens, she is clear-headed but beginning to feel the affects of two days of no food or water. Her throat is dry and raspy and as she sits up, she sees a glass pitcher filled with water sitting on the table across the room. She also notices by the slant of the sun that she’d been out for most of the day and it was approaching late afternoon – early evening. Her thoughts turn to TJ and a terrible foreboding fills her. Something had happened to him. She calls out, her voice hoarse. “Dear God, let John find his son before it’s too late.”
She swings her legs off the bed and pulls up the slack on the chains attached to the manacles. Her goal is the pitcher of water across the room. She nearly slumps to the floor when she discovers the chain is two feet too short. She could almost hear Kristen laughing at her. Anger fills her. “I’m not going to let you do this to me!” She pulls on the chains hoping to move the bed. It doesn’t budge and all she gets are severely chaffed and bruised wrists and a wave of light-headedness for her efforts. She moves back to the bed and sits down. She wasn’t going to give in to the wave of fear that was trying to overtake her as memories of her time in a dark pit come back to haunt her. She had to remain strong for John and her children. She knew John would find her. Until then, she needed to conserve her strength. Her glance went back to the pitcher of water and then down at the manacles on her wrists. It was then, that she noticed her engagement ring was missing.
***
Three hundred miles from Salem, an ambulance, followed by a police car a short time later, arrives at the scene of a car accident. They find a blonde woman, critically injured, her face a mass of cuts and blood horribly disfiguring her face, deliriously murmuring about her son. While the paramedics work on her, the officer tries to question her. “Ma’am, can you tell us your name?”
Kristen coughs harshly, blood slides out of the corner of her mouth as she whispers. “My…son? Where is…my son?” One of the paramedics shakes his head. “There wasn’t anyone else here when we arrived.”. The officer leans closer to Kristen. “Are you sure your son was in the car with you?” She manages a slight nod and then starts coughing again and with a gasp, falls unconscious. One of the paramedics says. “We’re losing her.”
The officer leaves them to their work and walks back to the car to investigate. He sees no sign of there having been another occupant in the car. He does find the car rental agreement. The name on the agreement is Dr. Marlena Evans of Salem. He looks over at the paramedics in time to see them pull a sheet up over the woman’s head. One of them looks up at the officer and shakes his head. The rental agreement in hand, the officer walks back over to his car and calls a report into his superior.
***
Abe is just arriving back in the office, several hours later, when the accident report arrives. His face pales as he reads that Dr. Marlena Evans was declared DOA There was no mention of Kristen and only a brief mention that the woman had asked about her son before she died. “This can’t be true!” Abe says out loud and refuses to believe it until he speaks to the officer in charge of the accident investigation, himself. He picks up the phone and places the phone call.
Ten minutes later, Bo arrives to inform Abe that they’ve got a lead on the rental car, only to find his boss sitting behind his desk, his head buried in his arms. “Abe?” Abe looks up, his eyes wet with unshed tears. “She’s gone, Bo.” Puzzled, Bo asks. “Gone? Who’s gone?” Unable to say it out loud, Abe hands him the accident report. Bo sucks in his breath as he reads it and then tosses it on Abe’s desk and says vehemently. “It’s a lie.”
“I didn’t want to believe it either, Bo, but I spoke to the investigating officer. His description matches Marlena’s.” Abe says quietly. “What about Kristen? What about the boy? Where were they?” Bo demands angrily. “And why would Marlena be out driving by herself, three hundred miles from Salem?” Abe tries to rationalize it. “Maybe she got away from Kristen and found out where she’d hidden the boy and was going after him.” “Without telling anyone? That doesn’t make sense, Abe.”
“Bo, we don’t know what state of mind Marlena was in or what Kristen did with the boy. Marlena might not have time to stop and tell anyone.” Bo picks up the report again and crumbles it into a ball and tosses it in the garbage can. “This is bull. I’m going out there to see for myself. I suggest you keep this from John until you’ve heard from me.” Abe glares at Bo and then retrieves the report from the garbage can. “I’m not sure I can do that, Bo. John has a right to know.”
“Damn it, Abe. What if it isn’t Marlena? All we have is the reporting officer’s description and a car rental registration in Marlena’s name. We don’t have a positive ID and until we do, you’ll never convince me it was Marlena in that car.” Bo slams out of the office.
Abe shakes his head sadly. He hoped Bo was right. He didn’t know how he was going to keep the news from John when he came back asking for a progress report. Abe and Bo didn’t know that news of “Marlena’s death” had reached the wire service and was already being reported on the radio and television.
***
After a thorough search of the DiMera mansion, John and Stefano find no sign that Kristen had been there. His frustration and anger mounting, John nearly comes to blows with Stefano when he continues to berate John and the Salem police department for their incompetence and vowed to bring in his own people to investigate. Pushed to the limit, John calls for an officer to be sent to the premises to keep an eye on Stefano. The moment the officer arrives, John stalks out of the house.
John knew he had to calm down and decided to head home to check on Belle before he continued his investigation. He arrives at the loft to find Carrie and Caroline in tears and assumes something had happened to Belle. He is frantic, thinking that Kristen had gotten to her too. “Where is Belle? Is she all right?” Carrie nods and then breaks into a fresh bout of tears and runs from the room. John looks at Caroline. “Caroline, if Belle is all right, why are you and Carrie so upset?” “We…we just heard the news about…Marlena.”
John takes her in his arms to comfort her. “I’m sorry, Caroline, I should have told you and Carrie sooner about Kristen kidnapping Marlena, but I promise you I’m going to find her. She’ll be home before you know it.” Caroline pulls back a little and looks up at him, aghast. “Kristen kidnapped Marlena?” He nods. Her voice turns hopeful. “Then maybe the news report was wrong.” “What news report?”
Caroline wipes her tears away with her handkerchief. “The one Carrie and I just heard on the radio before you came in. They said that Marlena had been involved in an automobile accident.” John pales and a sinking sensation hits the pit of his stomach. “What else did they say, Caroline?” She replies, her voice filled with relief. “It couldn’t have been Marlena, John, not if she’s being held somewhere by Kristen. In fact, I should have realized it wasn’t when they mentioned her asking about her son before she died. The report said there was no sign of anyone else having been in the car. I’d forgotten about that until just now and I know Eric is in Colorado because I just spoke to him this morning.” John’s fear mounts. He reaches out and grasps her arm. “Tell me what else the report said. I have to know.”
Caroline places a comforting hand over his. “They said she died in the accident, John.” John staggers as if hit by a blow and says in an anguished whisper. “No!” Caroline’s relief fades quickly. “John, you can’t believe it was Marlena.” John doesn’t answer her but the stark pain on his face tells her he does. Before she can say anything else to him, he turns and stumbles out of the loft. Afraid of what John will do, Caroline calls the one person she thinks he might listen to – Abe. She feels somewhat reassured when Abe tells her that they don’t have a positive ID on the woman and promises to find John.
***
Bo arrives at his destination to find out there had been a mix up and the woman’s body had been cremated before an autopsy could be performed. He shows Marlena’s picture to the officer, paramedics and anyone who came in contact with her. They all tell him that although the woman’s face was almost unrecognizable, they’re positive that she’s the woman in his picture. The final blow comes when one of the doctors hands Bo a ring they’d taken from her after she’d been officially pronounced dead – it was the engagement ring John had given Marlena.
From his hiding place, TJ can’t hear what is being said but he assumes the man talking to the police and doctors was a friend of THAT woman’s because he was so upset. TJ knew Kristen was dead. He’d hidden in the woods and watched as they’d pulled the sheet up over her head and loaded her into the ambulance, while he’d used the sharp edge of a rock to cut through the rest of the ropes binding him and praying they wouldn’t come looking for him. He had taken Kristen’s purse when he’d jumped out of the car before it had made impact. He ripped the letter to the sanitarium to shreds, removed the money from the wallet and then buried the purse and the rest of it’s contents. He watched the ambulance and police car leave and started walking in the direction they had gone in. Now, all he wanted to do was get back to Salem to find his father and rescue his mother. Without another glance at Kristen’s friend, TJ slips from his hiding place and out of the hospital and finds a pay phone and makes a long distance call to Italy.
***
John is sitting on the floor of the balcony he and Marlena had made love on only days before. His cheeks are wet with tears as he stares up at the moon. “Doc, even though my mind is telling me that it must be true, my heart refuses to believe it. It doesn’t feel like you’re gone. Maybe it really is some horrible mistake and if I keep looking for you I will find you.”
Marlena couldn’t see the moon from where she was sitting but she sensed that John was nearby, looking up at the moon and thinking of her. Even though she knew the walls of the room were sound proof, she moves from the bed and calls out for him anyway. “John! John, I’m here!”
A shiver runs down John’s spine and gets to his feet and looks around. “Marlena?” He strains to hear something, anything and the only sound that comes to him is that of the wind through the trees and then the sound of a car coming up the drive. He is suddenly struck with an idea and races downstairs to the living room. Abe finds John searching the walls of the living room. “John, I’ve been looking every where for you.”
“If you’ve come to tell me the bad news, you’re too late, Abraham.” He continues to pound on the walls as he works his way around the room. Abe is a little concerned. “John, what are you doing?” “I’ve been doing a lot of thinking and then it came to me – where would be the last place Kristen would hide Marlena? Naturally, it would be the last place I would think of looking – this house. I know from the days when Shane lived here that there were some hidden passages but the only one I knew about was the one to his computer room.”
“John, if you’ve heard the news, then you know that you’re not going to find anything.” Abe says sadly. “I don’t know any such thing, Abe. Marlena is still alive, I can feel it.” Abe walks over and grabs John’s arm stopping him. “You have to listen to me, John. Bo went out to investigate the accident and he showed Marlena’s picture to the officers and paramedics – they all made a positive ID”
John shakes his head in denial. “She’s not dead, Abe.” Knowing he has to convince John of the truth but hating like hell to do it. “They gave Bo her engagement ring, John.” That throws John for a moment. In the hidden room two floors above him, Marlena drops to her knees and sobs, her voice almost gone. “John, please, don’t give up on me!” John looks around. “Abe, did you bring someone with you?” “No, I came alone.”
John moves to the window and looks out. “I could have sworn I heard someone calling my name.” He pauses a moment and then continues. “As a matter of fact, it sounded like Marlena.” “John, you have to stop this and accept the fact that Marlena is gone.” John turns back to Abe. “You’re not going to convince me she’s dead, Abe. Don’t you see. It’s just like it was years ago when Orpheus tried to convince me Marlena was dead. It’s that same feeling.” He runs his hands through his hair. “When Caroline first told me the news, I believed it was true but ever since I’ve been in the house, my heart keeps telling me that it isn’t. Doc is alive and I believe she’s somewhere in this house and if I have to tear it apart piece by piece, I’m going to find her.”
Abe sighs. “If it wasn’t Marlena in the accident, then who was it?” “I don’t know and I don’t care.” John replies as he moves over to the wall where he’d left off. Abe makes one last attempt to reason with John. “She was asking about her son before she died, John. Tie that in with the positive ID and Marlena’s engagement ring and it’s too much of a coincidence not to be Marlena.”
John punches the wall in frustration. “I’m going about this all wrong. I need to contact Shane and have him send me a blueprint of the house showing me where any hidden passages and rooms might be.” He snatches his jacket up off the floor and looks at his friend. “I’m going to prove you wrong, partner.” John walks out leaving Abe standing there shaking his head.
***
Unlike John, Stefano believes the reports of Marlena’s death are true and an immense rage overtakes him and he blames John. If John had left Kristen alone like he’d wanted him to years ago, none of this would have happened. Whether he liked it or not, Marlena would probably be happily married to his most hated enemy but at least she would be alive. And then he thought of Tony – yes, his son would still be alive too. The two things he loved most in this world had been taken from him and all because of John Black. Stefano vowed, then and there, to find a way to destroy him once and for all.
***
John’s plans to reach Shane are thwarted when he is told that Shane left on an ISA mission and would be incommunicado indefinitely. His only other option was City Hall, perhaps they had a current blueprint of the house. They were closed until Monday but he wasn’t going to wait that long. If he had to wake up every city official, he was going to get his hands on a copy of the blueprint before the night was over.
***
Marlena could no longer feel John’s presence nearby but she knew he hadn’t given up on her and was comforted by it. As she curled up on the bed, she hoped he’d find her soon. Her thoughts turn to TJ and she wonders where he is and if he’s safe.
***
Thanks to the one person he knew he could trust, TJ arrived in Salem safely aboard a small commuter flight. The airport officials escorted him to a private waiting area to await the arrival of a flight from Italy. He thought about trying to contact his father, but he decided to wait until his beloved tutor arrived. He was so tired and didn’t think he’d be able to find his father on his own but Father Black would know what to do. He’d help him find his father and free his mother. With a huge yawn, TJ lies down on a sofa and promptly falls asleep and dreams of happy reunions.
As the sun crests the horizon the following morning, John finally admits defeat in his search for the blueprints. He’d manage to roust and anger several city officials but the search was fruitless, there were no blueprints on file for Donovan Manor. Abe and Bo catch up with John before he leaves to return to the house. Bo holds up Marlena’s engagement ring.
“John, I know I don’t have to ask you if you recognize this and this should be proof enough for you that it was Marlena in that accident.” John takes the ring from him and pockets it. “The only thing it proves is that, somehow, Kristen took it from her.” Abe places a hand on John’s arm. “John, you’ve been up for days now, you need to get some sleep. Once you’re rested, you’ll come to accept the truth.” John shakes his head. “Sleep is the last thing I need and as far as accepting the truth – the truth is, Marlena is still alive. Now if you’re not going to help me find her, then get out of my way.” He brushes past them, leaving Abe and Bo staring at each other helplessly.
***
TJ feels a gentle hand shake his shoulder and wakes up with a start. “Mom?” Father Black smiles down at the boy. “I’m sorry, Tomaso, it’s just me.” TJ jumps up and gives him a big hug. “I’m so glad you’re finally here, Father Black.” He looks up at him. “You’ll help me find my mother and father, won’t you?” The priest sits down on the sofa and encourages TJ to sit beside him. “Maybe you should start from the beginning, Tomaso.”
TJ nods as he sits down, barely able to contain his impatience to be off. “I was kidnapped by a very bad lady and she brought me here to try to hurt my mother. And then she locked the two of us up in a secret room in my parents house. We tried to escape but the lady drugged my mom and took me away before we could. And then there was a car accident and the lady died and I got away and that’s when I called you.”
“Why didn’t you go to the police?” TJ explains, “I was afraid to because Stefano is here too and I didn’t want him to find me. That’s why I called you, I knew you wouldn’t let him get me and you’d help me find my father so we could rescue my mom.”
“Tomaso, do you even know what your father looks like?” An ear to ear grin splits TJ’s face. “Father, do you remember all those stories you told me about your brother, John?” Father Black smiles. “Yes, I do but I don’t understand what they have to do with your father.” TJ can barely contain his excitement as he announces. “My father is your brother and that makes you my uncle!”
Father Black is stunned. Finding out that his brother was still alive after all these years was the last thing he’d expected to hear from his pupil. “Tomaso, are you sure?” “Well, almost sure. Mom said his name was John Black and from what she told me about him, he sounds just like your brother.” TJ laughs, then continues. “We’ll know for sure when you come face-to-face, won’t we?” Still trying to take it in, the priest only manages a nod. TJ jumps to his feet and grabs Father Black’s arm. “Can we go now? I want to find him right away so we can free mom.” With another nod, Father Black allows TJ to lead him out of the airport.
***
John arrives back at the house to find a very unwelcome visitor waiting for him. What are you doing here, Stefano?” Stefano pulls a gun out of his pocket. “You are responsible for Marlena’s death and for that you will pay.” “If you don’t get out of my house, old man, you’re going to be the one who is going to pay.” “Oh, I have every intention of leaving, John, but you will be coming with me.” Stefano replies calmly.
John laughs shortly, leans against the wall and folds his arms across his chest and says sarcastically. “If you believe that, then you’re every bit as crazy as Kristen is. I’m not going anywhere with you. And I should warn you that if you pull that trigger, your life won’t be worth a plug nickel.” It’s Stefano’s turn to laugh, only his voice is laced with amusement. “Oh no, John, I do not intend to kill you. You should know by now that there are far worse things I can do to you.” TJ races in and runs into Stefano, jarring the gun loose, and starts beating on him. “You leave my father alone!”
John stares in shock at TJ. The moment the boy had come charging in, John knew he was his son – the boy was a miniature version of himself. And that bastard, Stefano had stolen his and Marlena’s son from them all these years. If anyone was going to pay for what they’d done, it was going to be Stefano DiMera. In the meantime, he wanted him out of his house and away from his son, Marlena and everyone else that he loved. “TJ, that’s enough.” John said quietly.
TJ stops immediately and backs away from Stefano and then runs into his father’s arms. John catches him up in his arms and hugs him as tears gather in his eyes. Stefano uses the moment of distraction to retrieve the gun and turns it on father and son. “Release the boy, John.” John sets TJ on his feet and moves his son behind him. “Get out of my house, Stefano. You’ve done everything you can do to this family.” “I’m not leaving without you and the boy.” Stefano says coldly.
Father Black picks that moment to step into the living room. “I’m afraid you don’t have any choice, DiMera.” Stefano swings around and it’s hard to tell whose shock is greater upon seeing the priest, John’s or Stefano’s. John was struck speechless as he stared at his twin. “Who are you?” Stefano asks in a low voice, his shock and confusion evident.
Father Black smiles and says politely as he walks up to Stefano and relieves him of the gun. “Father Christopher Black, tutor extraordinaire, at your service. And now, I think you’d better do as my brother asks before he changes his mind and doesn’t allow you to leave in one piece. I’d be happy to escort you out.”
Stefano looks from one brother to the other and then his gaze settles on John. “It is not over between us, John.” He then turns and walks out. The trio remains suspended until they hear the door close behind him. TJ comes out from behind his father and walks over and hugs his uncle. “Your timing was perfect, Uncle Kit.” Christopher returns the boy’s hug and then looks at his brother, saying sadly. “You don’t remember me, do you, John?”
John shakes his head slowly. He still hadn’t recovered from the shock of discovering TJ was his son, let alone being face to face with an identical twin brother. “No…not really…DiMera took my memories away from me but the name “Kit”, it has a familiar ring to it.” Christopher nods his head. “You called me that when we were boys. I can’t tell you how much I’ve missed hearing it all these years. I believed you were dead and I understand we have Stefano DiMera to thank for that. On the other hand, I also have him to thank for discovering you’re very much alive. If DiMera hadn’t kept Tomaso in Italy and I hadn’t been his tutor, we probably never would have met up again in this lifetime.”
John can’t keep the anger for his voice. “Don’t expect me to thank him for that. He robbed TJ of his mother for five years and me for eight years and that’s only a small fraction of the things he’s done.” His voice loses its anger as TJ moves to his side and slips his hand into his. “I wish I did remember you, Kit.” Father Black smiles. “John, it doesn’t matter if you remember. We have the rest of our lives to get to know each other again and I’ll be happy to fill in the blanks but I do believe that Tomaso has something rather pressing to tell you.”
John looks down at his son. “What is it, TJ?” The boy’s face fills with relief at finally getting his chance to speak. “It’s mom, I know where she is.” John drops to his knees and places his hands on TJ’s shoulders an urgency in his voice. “Where is she, TJ?” “In the attic in a hidden room.” John springs to his feet. “Show me.”
TJ leads the two brothers up to the attic and stops before the hidden door. “There is some kind of mechanism along the top that opens the door, but I’m not sure where it is.” He then asks in a scared voice. “She’s going to be all right, isn’t she, dad? She hasn’t had any water or anything to drink since Kristen locked her in there.” John caresses his son’s dark curls and seeks to reassure him. “Your mom is a survivor, TJ. She might be a little weak at first but she’ll gain her strength back before you know it. Now why don’t you sit down over on that trunk and rest while your uncle and I try to get this door open.” TJ nods and does as his father asks. John and Christopher search the door and finally locate the mechanism but the door won’t open.
John’s voice fills with frustration. “She must have jammed the mechanism.” He starts banging on the door. “Marlena! Marlena, can you hear me?” His is met with only silence. Christopher places a calming hand on John’s arm. “John, TJ told me that the room was sound proof, she probably can’t hear you. Why don’t we look for something to try and pry the door open?” TJ joins them. “There is another way in.” The two men look at him and ask in unison. “There is?” TJ nods. “Mom and I found a secret passage leading out of the room but the door at the other end of the passage was locked.” “Do you think you could figure out where the door is by the layout of the house?” John asks. TJ nods again. “I think so. It was pretty much a straight walk down and then two short turns to the right and one to the left.” “Then lets go find that door.”
Marlena fights to stay awake. Lack of water and food had left her feeling weak but she knew that John was nearby again and that he would find her soon. Maybe if she got up and moved around a little, she wouldn’t succumb to the darkness creeping in around the fringes of her consciousness. A wave of dizziness hits her as she sits up and swings her legs off the bed. She waits until it passes and then rises to her feet, pulling the chain with her. And then she heard voices, muted voices and she couldn’t make out who they were or what they were saying. She shakes her head, thinking she’s hallucinating. This was a sound proof room, she couldn’t really be hearing them. And then she heard them again, closer this time coming from the direction of the secret panel that she and TJ had found. She marshaled up her last reserves of strength and called out. “John!”
And then he was there, bursting through the secret panel. “Marlena!” He moves quickly and catches her as she loses consciousness. He swings her up into his arms and carries her back to the bed as TJ and Christopher enter the room. Without taking his eyes off Marlena, John says. “We need something to get these manacles off her wrists.” Christopher volunteers immediately. “I saw some tools in the attic.” He leaves as TJ moves to his father’s side. “Is she going to be all right?”
John glances up at his son briefly. “Yes, she’s just weak right now but as soon as we free her, I’m taking her to the hospital just to make sure. Okay?” TJ nods, fighting tears of relief, and reaches out and touches his mother’s hand for reassurance. John turns his attention back to Marlena and gently brushes the hair from her cheek. “Doc, can you hear me?” TJ adds his pleas. “Mom, it’s us. Please wake up.”
Her eyes slowly open and she sees the two of them looking down at her in concern. Her voice is barely above a whisper. “I knew you would find me.” John leans over and brushes her lips with his. “You can thank our son for that.” Her glance moves to TJ and she smiles. “You’re as brave as your daddy.” TJ returns her smile with an ear-to-ear grin just before Marlena’s eyes close again.
The next time Marlena wakes up, she’s in the hospital hooked to an IV and her wrists are bandaged. She looks around and sees John, sound asleep in a chair beside her. She discovers her voice is still little more than a raspy whisper when she says his name but it is enough. He is awake instantly. He moves closer and takes her hands in his, raising one at a time to his lips. “Hey, pretty lady. How are you feeling?”
She smiles at him. “Better. I’d like some water, please.” John releases her hands and retrieves a glass of water for her. After she takes a couple of sips, she asks. “What time is it?” John glances at his watch. “Four in the morning. You’ve been asleep for over 12 hours.” “Where’s TJ?” “He’s with Shawn and Caroline.” He smiles. “It was all I could do to convince him to leave your side, Doc but I promised him he could spend the day with you today and he finally agreed to go with them.”
“How did you find him?” John shakes his head. “I didn’t, he found me but all the explanations can wait. Mike said he didn’t want you talking too much until your voice was back to normal. And I know you, you’ll have a hundred questions.” He reaches into his jacket pocket. “There is something I’d like to give back to you.” He holds up her engagement ring. Her eyes light up. “My ring! Where did you find it?”
John takes her hand and slips it back on her finger and then leans closer, his lips mere inches from hers. “Later.” He captures her mouth in a gentle, stirring kiss and says softly as their lips part. “I love you, Marlena.” She raises her hand to his cheek. “And I love you, overwhelmingly so.” John captures her hand with his and plants a kiss in her palm and then grins. “How would you like some company in that bed?” Her soft laughter envelops him. “I thought you’d never ask.”
An hour later a nurse starts to enter the room until she sees the pair of them sound asleep in each others arms. She smiles and quietly backs out of the room and notes in Marlena’s patient chart that her 5 am vital signs were not taken because the patient was in good hands and sleeping peacefully.
Several hours later, the door to Marlena’s hospital room opens a fraction. “Is it safe to come in?” Mike calls out from the hallway. Marlena laughs as she and John part from a very passionate kiss. John quickly scrambles from the bed. He buttons his shirt up, tucks it in and then sits in the chair, while Marlena smoothes down her hair and then straightens the blankets around her. “Now it is.” John finally replies back.
Mike enters to see the pair trying to look innocent and grins. “Next time, ask for a “Do not disturb sign.” John and Marlena look at each other and John says. “Now why didn’t we think of that?” Marlena shakes her head and bites her lip to keep from laughing again as Mike approaches the bed. “So how are you feeling this morning, Marlena?” Her voice only slightly raspy. “Fine. Can I go home now?” “I’ll let you know as soon as I’ve finished examining you.” John takes Marlena’s hand. “Doc, do you mind if I go take care of something while Mike is examining you?” She shakes her head. “You won’t be long?” He leans over and kisses her and then says, a promise in his voice. “I’ll be back before you’ve had time to miss me. Okay?” “Okay.”
John gives her hand a final squeeze and then leaves. As the door closes behind him, Marlena looks at Mike. “He’s up to something.” As he checks her pulse, Mike asks with a smile. “How can you tell?” Marlena smiles in return. “He had that look in his eye, the one that reminds me of the children when they’re up to something.” She glances at the door. “I just wish I knew what it was.”
John heads for the pay phones but is saved from making a phone call when Caroline steps off the elevator into the hospital lobby. “Caroline! I was just going to call you.” “I came in to see how Marlena was doing. How is she, John?” John grins from ear to ear. “She’s just fine. Mike is examining her now and hopefully, he’ll give her the okay to go home.” Caroline is relieved. “Oh, I’m so glad. I was afraid this experience would bring back some horrible memories for her.” John’s grin fades. “So far it hasn’t and I want to make sure it doesn’t. Which is why I wanted to talk to you. There’s something I’d like you to do.” “Name it.” John puts his arm around her shoulder and leads her to the staff lounge. “This is what I had in mind…..”
John returns to Marlena’s room as Mike is finishing up his examination. “What’s the verdict, Mike?” John asks as he moves to the other side of the bed and takes Marlena’s hand. She looks up at him and they exchange loving smiles. Mike puts his stethoscope in his pocket. “As far as I’m concerned, you can take her home as soon as she’s finished filling out her release papers.” He looks at Marlena. “However, I don’t want you overdoing and you need to rest your voice for another day or two.”
Marlena nods and Mike leaves the two of them alone. John retrieves Marlena’s clothes from the closet and sets them on the bed. “I talked to Caroline, she wanted me to tell you that the kids are fine. Belle is no longer contagious and she was thrilled to be reunited with Brady.” He adds with a laugh. “Caroline also said that Belle was a little disappointed at first that her new brother wasn’t a baby, but she adores him already and hasn’t let either one of the boys out of her sight.”
Marlena’s eyes tear up. “I can’t wait to see the three of them again.” John runs his finger lightly along her jaw line. “Then how about I go rush those release papers while you get dressed and we’ll do just that?” She nods and before he leaves again, John leans over and captures her lips in a kiss that leaves her breathless.
However, John doesn’t take her to see the kids right away much to Marlena’s disappointment. He takes her to the loft first. “I thought you might like to take a shower and change before we go see the kids.” He explains as he pulls at his own wrinkled shirt and grins, adding. “I know I certainly could use both.” Marlena gives him a seductive look. “You could lessen my disappointment if we took a shower together.” John takes her in his arms. “Mike said you shouldn’t overdo.” “Showering isn’t strenuous,” she says with a teasing smile, running her hands across his chest.
John’s hands slide down her back and come to rest on her bottom, pulling her closer. Her eyes widen appreciatively as she feels his desire for her. John says huskily. “Oh yes, it will be.” Marlena’s hands slide up around his neck and she pulls his head down to hers and whispers. “I need the exercise.” The moment she touches her mouth to his, he groans in defeat and lifts her into his arms and carries her upstairs.
***
At the Brady Pub, Caroline looks at her watch for the fifth time in as many minutes. “I wonder what can be keeping them? They should have been here by now.” Shawn pats her shoulder. “They probably just got held up at the hospital.” He looks around at the family and friends gathered putting the final decorations up around the pub and sees that Carrie and Sami were standing off in a corner arguing. “I’d better go see what those girls are arguing about. Can’t have them spoiling the party before it’s even gotten started.”
“Sami, you’d better not ruin this party for John and Marlena.” Carrie says heatedly. “I wouldn’t even be here if Grandma hadn’t blackmailed me into it. You know how I feel about John,” Sami snaps back. Shawn’s hand clamps down on Sami’s shoulder. “Then you’ll enjoy this party for your mother’s sake, Sami. She’s had a difficult time of it lately and she needs those she loves around her for support and that includes you.”
But Sami isn’t listening to him, she is staring at the boy who had just come down from upstairs with Belle and Brady, each holding one of his hands. “Who is THAT?” Sami demands. “That is your half-brother.” Shawn says bluntly. “His name is TJ and he was taken from your mother when he was a baby and John never knew about him until yesterday.” “You mean he’s John’s and my mother’s child?” Sami yells, outraged. “Isn’t one bastard enough for them?” Before Shawn can stop her, Carrie slaps Sami hard across the face and then leans in and whispers. “Is one enough for you, Sami?”
Sami pales as her hand moves up to hold her stinging cheek. She stares at Carrie in speechless shock. Caroline rushes over and grabs Sami’s arm. “I think you’d better come with me, Sami.” Sami, meekly allows her grandmother to lead her away and is in for another shock when she takes her upstairs where Father Christopher Black is helping Hope and Maggie in the kitchen. The trio senses that Caroline and Sami need to be alone but Caroline asks Christopher to stay, much to Sami’s dismay.
Carrie turns to Shawn. “I’m sorry, Grandpa. I didn’t mean to cause a scene but Sami’s been asking for that for some time now.” Shawn slides his arm around her shoulders and gives her a hug. “I just hope your Grandmother can talk some sense into her.” Carrie nods and then joins TJ, Belle and Brady.
Bo walks over to Shawn. “I thought Sami’s feelings toward John would have softened by now.” Shawn sighs. “I don’t know if they ever will, Bo and I suppose I shouldn’t have told her about TJ like that, it had to have been a shock for her.” “She would have found out one way or another anyway, Pop. Better it happened before John and Marlena arrived. And speaking of those two, where are they?”
***
John and Marlena didn’t make it as far as the shower before they were tearing each other’s clothes off and fell upon the bed. Marlena slid on top of John and pinned his hands to the bed and began planting kisses all over his face, neck and chest as she moved against him seductively. With a growl, John managed to turn the tables on her and Marlena found herself on her back, surrendering herself to him completely. His mouth caught her sigh of satisfaction as his lips claimed hers and what began in a frenzy turned into a slow, sweet dance of love.
In the aftermath, John breathes raggedly. “I think we’d better skip that joint shower, Doc.” “Oh, I was looking forward to showering together.” Marlena replies, managing to keep a straight face and interjects a note of disappointment in her voice. John lifts his head and looks at her. “You can’t be serious?” She nods. His head drops to the pillow and he groans. Marlena chuckles softly and pats his arm. “All right, I’ll let you off the hook this time.” She leans over and kisses him. “But I expect a raincheck and while you’re recuperating, I’ll go take my shower.” As she moves from the bed, John reaches over and gently whacks her on the behind. “Don’t use all the hot water.” Marlena laughs and disappears into the bathroom.
***
Carrie peeks out the window at the Brady Pub and says excitedly. “Here they come!” She dashes off to the side to hide with the others. Marlena looks at John just before he opens the door. “It’s awfully quiet around here for a lunch hour, don’t you think?” John nods. “Now that you mention it…..” The door swings open and a chorus of voices yell. “Surprise!” Marlena falls back against John, his hands slide around her waist as she says. “Oh my!” And then they are surrounded by family and friends congratulating them on their engagement.
Stefano stands outside the pub and watches John hover protectively over Marlena as she is embraced by family and friends. His hands curl into fists as he witnesses the three Black children reunited with their parents. Celeste creeps up behind Stefano. “Now will you finally admit defeat and give up on your foolish fantasies about Marlena?
Stefano turns to her with a snarl. “Never. I will never give up on Marlena.” Celeste shakes her head. “Then you are a fool, Stefano. Now that they are together again, nothing will ever separate them – not even you.” “Do not underestimate me, Celeste. I have already set the wheels in motion to destroy John once and for all.” “Stefano, don’t you realize it yet? Marlena will never look upon you as more than a friend, if she still does, whether or not John is in her life.” She waves her hand toward the pub, then continues. “She would lose all of that, she would lose herself and everything she believes in. And then she would not be the Marlena you desire. Is that what you want?”
“I will not discuss this with you any more, Celeste.” He turns his gaze back to the pub. “Tell me, Stefano. Just how many chances do you think you have left to try to destroy John Black? You have failed repeatedly to get the best of him and have been very lucky to have escaped unscathed each time. I am afraid that if you persist in this now, you will be the one who is destroyed.” Stefano gives her a dark look and then walks away.
Inside the pub, Marlena is holding Belle in her arms and listening to her, TJ and Brady all trying to talk to her at once. Carrie joins them as John looks over and sees his brother emerge through the door from upstairs. “Doc, there’s someone I want you to meet.” Carrie, also sees Father Christopher. “Why don’t you let me take Belle, Marlena and I’ll get her and the boys something to eat.” Marlena hands Belle over to Carrie. “Thank you, Carrie.”
John takes Marlena’s arm and leads her over to Christopher who is in conversation with Shawn. “Kit.” Christopher turns around and Marlena’s eyes widen as she looks from one brother to the other. John smiles. “Kit, I think it’s time you and Marlena were introduced. Kit this is my fiancée and love of my life, Dr. Marlena Evans. Doc, my brother, Father Christopher Black.” Kit takes Marlena’s extended hand and raises it to his lips. “It’s a very great pleasure to finally meet you, Marlena. I’ve heard so much about you from Tomaso.”
Marlena smiles. “It’s a pleasure to meet you too. TJ told me he thought you and John were brothers. I’m so glad the two of you have been reunited.” She laughs softly. “It’s going to take some getting used to though. Were the two of you dressed alike, it would be difficult to tell you apart.” Kit grins. “Maybe it’s fortunate then that John and I outgrew the urge to try to trick people by pretending we were each other.” John slides his arm around Marlena’s waist. “I don’t think we’d be able to fool, Marlena, Kit. She was a twin herself.” Kit’s grin deepens. “Then that would definitely be a challenge, but alas, I’m not in the position to try but if I were….”
Marlena shakes her head and laughs again. “I can see the two of you have more in common than just your looks.” “Oh, I don’t know about that. I’m afraid I’m not as adventuresome as my brother. I was always content to live vicariously through tales of his adventures.” “When was the last time you saw, John?” Marlena asks curiously. John places his fingers over her lips. “No you don’t, Doc. Mike left strict orders that you were to keep your talking to a minimum. You’ll have plenty of time to ask Kit questions later.” He lowers his hand. “But John, I feel fine.” “It’s shut up or I’ll drag you home, Doc. The choice is yours.” Marlena’s eyes sparkle as a mischievous smile touches her lips. “Well, I am getting a little tired…maybe we should go home now.” John laughs and whispers in her ear. “You’re insatiable.” She nods.
Sami picks that moment to walk up to the trio. She gives Father Christopher a defiant glance, ignores John and pastes a pleasant smile on her face for her mother. “Mom, could I talk to you alone for a few moments?” Marlena turns to Sami with a warm smile and hugs her. “Sami, I’m so glad you’re here. Of course we can talk.” She looks at John. “I promise to keep it to a minimum.” A worried frown creases John’s brow as he watches Marlena and Sami go upstairs. “You’re worried about what Sami will say to Marlena, aren’t you, John?” John looks at his brother and nods. “Sami and I were once very close but that changed and now she won’t have anything to do with me. I don’t blame her for that but I wish she’d find it in her heart to forgive Marlena.” Kit places a comforting hand on John’s arm. “She will, John and in time, she’ll forgive you too.” “I’ve always hoped so, for Marlena’s sake. Especially now that we’re together again.”
Upstairs, Marlena turns to face her daughter. “What did you want to talk to me about, Sami?” “I just wanted to tell you how glad I am that you’re all right.” Marlena looks at her curiously. “And you couldn’t tell me that downstairs?” Sami fidgets nervously, her expression defensive. “There’s more.” Determined not to let Sami upset her, Marlena says evenly. “I thought so. Does this have to do with TJ or John?”An edge of sarcasm fills Sami’s voice. “Is there a difference?”
Marlena sighs. “Look, Sami, I’ve apologized to you in every way I know how and whether you believe it or not, I truly am sorry that things didn’t work out between your father and I. Roman will always have a very special place in my heart but my future is with John. I love him and I intend to marry him, whether I have your blessing or not. I would hope that you could find it within yourself to forgive John and I, but if you can’t, then you will miss out on so much. We want you to be a part of our lives, Sami. As for TJ, yes, he is mine and John’s son, conceived when John and I were still married and stolen from us by Stefano DiMera. Don’t turn your hatred on TJ, he doesn’t deserve it. And I think it’s about time you stopped throwing my mistakes back in my face. I admitted a long time ago that what John and I did was wrong but it’s in the past. It’s time for all of us to move on with our lives. Time for all of us to be happy again.”
“That’s easy enough for you to say, you have the man you love.” Sami practically shouts at her and then runs out the back entrance of her grandparents apartment. Marlena feels John’s arms slide around her and she leans her head back on his shoulder. “I hurt so much for her.” “I know you do, Doc and when she’s ready, she’ll come to you again.” Marlena turns in his arms and captures his face in her hands. “Have I told you lately just how much I love you?”
A gentle smile settles on John’s face and he captures her hands in his. “Yes and unless you want me to gag you, you can hold off telling me again until you rest that voice of yours – it’s starting to go again.” She nods. John kisses her hands. “Are you ready to go home now? I’ve already said our good-byes to everyone.” She nods again and then says, “What about the children?” “Caroline will bring them home later, after you’ve had a chance to get some rest. Okay?” “Okay.”
By the time they return to the loft, Marlena is more exhausted than she realized. She doesn’t argue with John when he insists on tucking her into bed and joins her, cradling her in his arms as she falls asleep. When Marlena awakens, the afternoon sun is slanting through the window and she is alone. Before she can slide out of bed to look for him, the bedroom door opens to reveal her children. TJ is carrying a tray piled high with food and Brady is carrying a single rose in a bud vase. Belle runs in ahead of them and stands at her mother’s bedside, hands on hips, a stern look, reminiscent of John, on her face. She speaks up just as Marlena is about to say something. “Daddy said I have his ‘mission to tell you to shut up.”
Marlena bites her lip to keep from laughing and nods her head. TJ admonishes his little sister. “Belle, he didn’t tell you to say it like that.” Belle grins. “Say it Belle’s way.” TJ rolls his eyes and sets the tray on his mother’s lap. “Are you feeling better, mom?” She nods. Brady hands her the bud vase as he smiles up at her shyly. “Daddy said this would make you feel even better.” “Yes, it does. Thank you, Brady. Thank you to you too, TJ and Belle.” Belle folds her arms and taps her little foot. “No talking.”
John enters the room, his eyes alight with amusement. “I can see the troops are handling the situation just fine.” Marlena shoots him a “I’m going to get you” look. John grins back at her. Belle and Brady giggle. TJ lifts Belle and then Brady up on the bed where they curl up at Marlena’s feet, then sits in the chair next to her. John settles in on the bed next to Marlena and reaches over to pick a piece of fruit off her plate. Marlena slaps his hand. John’s eyebrow lifts. “Did they forget to tell you that we planned to help you eat all that?”
Marlena glances at each one of them as they nod in agreement with their father. Belle’s look dares her to say a word. Marlena laughs softly and sets the tray on the bed within easy reach of everyone and the family enjoys their little impromptu picnic.
Later that evening, after the children are all tucked into bed and sound asleep, John and Marlena take advantage of the quiet moment. John takes her up on the rooftop, sliding his arms around her waist and pulling her back against him. Marlena sighs contentedly as she gazes up at the stars.
John buries his face in her hair and asks quietly. “Happy, Doc?” She nods. “Very happy and I want to thank you for today.” “You don’t have to thank me. I enjoyed today just as much as you did.” A hint of laughter in her voice. “Actually, I think you enjoyed it more, especially your daughter’s bullying.” Gentle laughter shakes John. “She gets that from you.” Marlena turns in his arms and looks up at him. “She does not.” John’s eyebrow lifts. “No?”
Marlena shakes her head and then reaches up a brushes her lips slowly across his. “She reminded me of you all those years ago when you dragged me through the West Virginia wilderness.” “Hmm, that’s funny. She reminded me of you all those years ago when you kept after me to discover who I was, not once, but twice.” John counters as he slides his hands up and threads his fingers through her hair. He kisses her lightly.
Marlena slides her hands under his shirt and up along his back. “That was being persistent.” John kisses her nose. “A bully.” “A psychiatrist.” She plants a kiss on the base of his neck. He nibbles her ear. “Just a psychiatrist?” Marlena rakes her nails gently down his back. “A woman who was and is wildly in love with you.” John chuckles. “I was hoping you’d say that.” She rests her hands on the small of his back and pulls him closer. “Why?” He brushes his thumbs across her cheeks. “Because Dr. Evans, we still haven’t set a date for our wedding.” A beautiful smile touches her lips. “Is tomorrow too soon?” He grins. “It’s not soon enough but I don’t think even we can pull that one off. So what do you say to the end of the week?” “I say yes. Now shut up and kiss me.” “Bully.” He murmurs before capturing her lips with his. As they part from their kiss, he continues. “What do you say we take this downstairs in front of that nice cozy fireplace?” “I thought you’d never ask.”
They settle in before the fireplace, John holding Marlena in the warm circle of his arms. “Doc, I’d like to ask Kit to perform the wedding ceremony.” She nods. “I think that’s a wonderful idea but you don’t want a big church wedding, do you?” “Don’t you?” She shakes her head. “I’d be content marrying you anywhere with just our friends and family gathered around us. We don’t need a big wedding.” He agrees. “No, we don’t. So where do you want to have the wedding?” She looks up at him. “I’d like to have it in our new home.” “Sweetheart, I’m not sure we can have the house ready in time for a wedding at the end of the week.”
Moves slightly away from him and turns to face him. “Sure we can. The gardens are in perfect condition, we can have the ceremony there. As for the house itself, it’s just a matter of filling it with furniture.” Runs his finger along her cheek. “Oh yea? What about all those redecorating ideas we had?” “We can still do those, later.” “You have your heart set on this, don’t you?” Marlena moves back into his arms. “Yes, I do. I want to wipe away whatever bad memories still linger there. Afterall, it is where we intend to spend the rest of our lives together and with our children.”
John holds her closer. “So you have been thinking about Kristen?” She nods. “John, you never said what happened to her.” He caresses her hair. “Do you really want to talk about her right now, Doc?” “No but I need to. So tell me what happened to her and don’t sugar coat it, please.” John sighs and reluctantly fills her in. “From what I’ve been able to piece together, she was planning to take TJ to a sanitarium quite some distance from here and have him committed and she was planning to leave you in the attic room to die. TJ risked his life to stop her and barely managed to escape from the car before it crashed. Kristen died at the scene and with Kit’s help, TJ made it back to Salem and the three of us rescued you.” He falls silent and Marlena doesn’t respond.
John is concerned as he captures her chin and tilts her face up to him to see tears gathered in her eyes. “Doc? Are you okay?” She nods. “Yes, I’m all right but I can’t help feeling sorry for Kristen.” John is a bit surprised at that. “Sorry for her? After what she did to you and TJ? Why?” “Because of how and who she was raised by and because all she ever wanted was to be loved and to have a family. She just didn’t know how to go about it.” “I think you’re being too forgiving, Doc.”
“No, I could never forgive her for what she put you and our children through but I can and do feel sorry for what she became and how she died. No one deserves that.” John hugs her. “You are an amazing woman, Dr. Evans.” “Not so amazing. Just a woman who feels very loved and very lucky to have the arms of the man she loves most in the world holding her and six beautiful children in her life.” John captures her face in his hands. “You are loved, sweetheart, more than I could ever tell you in words.”
A seductive smile lights Marlena’s face as she slips her hands inside his shirt and runs them slowly across his muscled chest. “Then why don’t you show me?” “Gladly.” His kiss leaves no doubts in Marlena’s mind as they slowly sink to the floor and John loves her with an intensity that leaves her shaken to her very soul.
***
The next few days are a whirlwind of activity as family and friends jump into the wedding preparations and getting the house ready. Much to their mutual dismay and frustration, John and Marlena are not allowed a moment alone together – not even at night as their children secretly conspire to keep them apart. John finally takes action when he spies Marlena, all alone, entering a florist shop the day before the wedding.
Marlena hands the clerk a list. “I hope it’s not too late to add these to the order.” The clerk looks over the list. “Not at all, Dr. Evans. We just happen to have more of those flowers on hand.” “Oh good! I was afraid…” Marlena doesn’t get a chance to finish her sentence as John comes charging through the door and grabs her arm and starts heading toward the back of the shop, asking the clerk “You have a back door?”
He doesn’t wait for the reply as he drags an un-protesting Marlena behind him. She doesn’t say a word until they are through the back door and in the alley. “Where are you taking me?” She asks with a hint of laughter in her voice. “Someplace we can be ALONE!”
***
They burst through the penthouse door like a couple of kids on the run, close it and fall back against it breathing heavily. “Do you think anyone spotted us?” John grins as he reaches across her, locks the door and sets the security alarm. “It doesn’t matter now, Doc.” He pins her against the door and kisses her thoroughly. Their lips part and their gazes devour each other. John’s voice deepens. “Do you know how much I’ve missed having you all to myself like this?” Marlena’s eyes sparkle. “As much as I’ve missed having you all to myself like this?”
John nods and then scoops her up in his arms and carries her upstairs. He drops her on the bed and then falls on her, pinning her hands above her head. His eyes travel slowly over her face and just as he is about to kiss her, he pulls back, releases her and sits on the bed beside her. “We can’t do this.” Marlena’s expression is one of comical dismay as she sits up next to him. “Why can’t we do this?” John pulls her into his lap and sighs heavily. “Do you realize how much trouble everyone has gone to, to keep us from being alone like this until after we’re married?”
“Too much trouble. Even our children are in on the plot.” Marlena admits gloomily and then a hint of a smile touches her lips as she asks. “Do you feel as guilty as I do?” John doesn’t hide his smile. “Yea and even though I feel guilty, I’d still like nothing more than to ravish you at this very moment.” “But you won’t?” Her smile wars with the slight disappointment in her voice. He shakes his head. ” ‘fraid not, Doc. I keep picturing the disappointment on three little faces, especially after all those creative nightmares they took turns having.”
Marlena’s laughter surrounds him. “Did you get the one about the furry blue monster with the big pink eyes in the closet?” “Last night, Brady. How about you?” “The first night, Belle. She embellished hers a little. Said the monster gave her a tummy ache.” John grins. “That’s our Belle baby.” “TJ wasn’t about to be outdone, he came up with the dragon in the lake.” “He must have decided to spare you. I got a wild man-eating beast, complete with blood and gore. That one gave ME nightmares.” He shudders for emphasis.
Marlena laughs again. “Well, one thing is certain, it’s never going to be dull around the Black household.” “Not for a second, Doc but I wouldn’t have it any other way.” “Me neither.” Their eyes meet an hold and there mouths drift closer and neither one of them pulls back as their lips meet in a tender kiss.
Marlena lays her head on his shoulder and slides her hand inside his shirt. “I suppose we should go now before they come looking for us.” John’s hand slowly drifts up her leg. “Yea, I suppose we should.” Marlena stops him as he reaches her inner thigh. “Behave yourself.” He laughs, removes his hand and gives her a quick kiss before setting her on her feet. “Then we’d better leave now because I don’t have much ‘won’t power’ left.” Marlena holds out her hand to him. “Promise me one thing.” He takes her hand and rises to his feet. “What’s that?” “You’ll toss that ‘won’t power’ right out the window the moment we’re alone together after the wedding.” He pulls her to him and steals another kiss. “You can count on it, Doc.”
John and Marlena arrive at the house separately to find it full of family and friends lending a hand to get the house ready. John arrives an hour behind Marlena and the moment he walks in, their gazes meet across the room and a smile passes between them. They immediately gravitate toward each other and meet in a quiet corner of the room, oblivious to the fact that the room full of conspirators are watching them like hawks and with considerable amusement.
“Hello, beautiful.” He says with a smile, unable to resist stealing a quick kiss. He catches his daughter’s frown of disapproval and takes a step back as Marlena laughs softly. “We’re not going to get away with anything, you know?” “I’m beginning to see that.” John winks at Belle who is still watching them. Belle grins from ear to ear and turns away to join her brothers. Marlena lowers her voice. “Where have you been? I thought you’d be right behind me?”
“I got tied up making the arrangements for the last of the furniture to be delivered. They aren’t going to be able to deliver it until later this evening. Which works out fine, since I’d already decided to spend the night here tonight.” Marlena says teasingly. “The children will be so disappointed. No nightmare stories tonight.” John grins. “I think TJ and Brady are trading them in for ghost stories. They’ll be spending the night here with me and Kit and they’ve already decided they want to camp out in sleeping bags rather than in their beds.” She laughs. “Oh no! Well, at least one of us is going to get a good night’s sleep tonight.”
He leans over and whispers in her ear. “No you won’t, Doc because I’m going to make sure by the time you leave here that the only thing on your mind and in your dreams is what I’m going to do to you tomorrow when I get you alone.” “Promise?” John looks around quickly and sees that his daughter is occupied elsewhere and pulls Marlena into his arms and kisses her hungrily.
“John Black, what do you think you’re doing?” The pair break apart guiltily and they turn in unison to find Alice standing there. “Belle put you up to that, didn’t she?” John asks, trying not to squirm under Alice’s stern glare. Alice doesn’t relent. “Don’t try to pin the blame on that sweet little girl of yours, John. You should be ashamed of yourself.” “What? I was only kissing my fiancée.” John says in his defense, looking to Marlena to back him up. She shrugs helplessly.
A twinkle enters Alice’s eye. “You were devouring her, John. Now go find something to do, I need Marlena’s help upstairs.” Marlena’s bites her lip to keep from laughing as John makes a hasty escape. “Alice, he’s going to be uncontrollable by the time the wedding is over tomorrow.” Alice loops her arm through Marlena’s and smiles. “Good, then he’ll be like all the other bridegrooms on their wedding night. Now, about that something upstairs that needs our attention…”
John and Marlena resign themselves to being interrupted or finding a chaperone close by whenever they find the need or the excuse to talk to each other. Caroline thwarts their plans to steal a moment alone in the kitchen. Bo, Kit, or TJ appear every time they’re near an empty room. Shawn and Abe take turns dragging John off to consult with him, Lexie and Carrie do the same to Marlena. Maggie surprises them in the garden and they find Belle and Brady peeking at them from around corners.
They are finally given a few moments alone just before the Brady and Horton women whisk Marlena away. John closes the door to the den and turns to Marlena. “They’re driving me crazy, Doc. I’m afraid to touch you now for fear someone will jump out from behind a curtain or a chair.” Marlena walks up to him, grabs the lapels of his jacket and pulls him close, giving him a hungry kiss to match the one he’d given her earlier. John slides his arms around her waist and pulls her closer as he returns her kiss. At last, reluctantly, they part a few inches and they find themselves suddenly at a loss for words.
Gentle amusement threads her voice as Marlena breaks the silence between them. “Here’s a thought for you to hold on to, in less than 24 hours you can have your way with me and no one will try to stop you.” He captures her face in his hands. “Right now, Doc, that feels like a lifetime away but you’re worth the wait and not because I can have my way with you. Because I love you and marrying you and spending the rest of my life with you means everything in the world to me.” Marlena’s eyes well up with tears. “Oh John!”
Brushing away the tears that fall to her cheeks with his thumbs. “Hey, I didn’t intend to make you cry.” She gives a little shake of her head. “You didn’t. I just feel so overwhelmed with love and happiness…after all we’ve been through…tomorrow is going to seem like a dream come true.” John releases her face and wraps his arms around her and hugs her close. “For me too, sweetheart but the dream won’t end there…” He runs his finger slowly along her jawline and across her lips, then continues. “Because I plan to fill your life with new and wonderful dreams and each day will be better than the one before.” He seals that vow with a gentle, stirring kiss.
A loud knock on the door signals the end of their time alone. Marlena reaches up and caresses his cheek with her hand. “I’m going to miss you tonight.” John takes her hand and links his fingers through hers. A half grin touches his lips and he gives her an exaggerated leer. “And I’m REALLY going to miss you.” Marlena laughs as John kisses her hand and then John calls out as the knocking becomes more insistent. “All right already, we’re coming.” John smiles warmly at his bride-to-be and says as they reach the door. “Until tomorrow, Doc and then it’s you and me forever.” “Forever.” She repeats firmly.
***
John and Kit find themselves alone when TJ and Brady decide to explore the house after everyone leaves. “Nervous?” Kit asks with a grin as he watches John pace back and forth in front of the fireplace. John looks at him, an incredulous expression on his face. “Nervous? Why should I be nervous? I’ve been waiting a long time to make Marlena my wife again.” “I see. Then why are you pacing?”
A frown mars John’s brow as he takes a seat across from his brother. “Truthfully, I’m a little worried.” Kit is a little surprised. “Worried about what? I’ve never seen a wedding planned so smoothly in four days time.” “That’s just it, Kit. Everything has gone too smoothly. My instincts tell me that there is something…or I should say, someone, we’ve forgotten about.” “You wouldn’t happen to be talking about Stefano DiMera, would you?” Kit guesses correctly.
“Bingo. He’s been much too quiet since he’s been back in Salem and that’s not like him. Especially when you consider how he feels about Marlena and his hatred for me. And if he knows about the wedding tomorrow….” John jumps to his feet. “She shouldn’t be alone tonight.” “I agree, which is why I took the liberty of making arrangements to have someone stay with her and Belle and several plain clothed officers to watch over them.” Kit informs him calmly. It is John’s turn to be surprised. “You did?”
Kit grins. “One of us had to be thinking clearly and it certainly wasn’t you. You were too busy trying to find ways to get Marlena alone all afternoon.” John sits back down. “Thank you.” “Don’t mention it. It was the least I could do for being a party to thwarting your plans to get Marlena alone.” John laughs suddenly. “Actually, my plans to get her alone weren’t thwarted. I kidnapped her from the florist this afternoon while no one was looking.”
Kit shakes his head. “I should have known.” “Yea, well, then you also know that I felt so guilty after all the trouble the children went through to keep us apart these past few days, that we ended up doing nothing more than talking.” John admits ruefully. Kit grins. “That reminds me of an incident when we were kids. Mom had baked our favorite pie and you couldn’t wait to have a piece of it, so you took the whole pie when she wasn’t looking. Then you had a guilt attack and put it back but you never did get a piece of that pie.” “Why not?”
“Because I went in after you put it back and took it and ate it all myself. Mom thought the dog got it and I wasn’t about to tell her differently. You guessed the truth and I ended up with a black eye for two weeks.” John grins. “Sounds like it served you right.” His grin fades. “Did we have many of those incidents?” Kit nods. “All the time and you wouldn’t know it today, but I was the ring leader back then. In fact, I think I shocked everyone when I decided to become a priest. They would have expected that of you, not me. Of course, once I joined the priesthood, I’d settled down considerably and you were the one off having all the adventures and getting into trouble.”
“I wish I could remember those days, Kit.” John says regretfully. “Maybe you will some day but I wouldn’t dwell on it, John. We have a lifetime ahead of us to get to know one another again and make new memories. Not to mention that you’re going to be starting a whole new life tomorrow with Marlena and your children. That’s what you need to concentrate on.” John rises to his feet again. “Speaking of the children, I’d better go see what the boys are up to and after that, I’m going to call Marlena to make sure everything is okay.” He glances at his watch. “She should have left the Brady Pub and gotten home by now.”
***
Marlena, carrying Belle, and Hope are getting ready to leave the pub when Hope spots Stefano standing outside. Hope places a hand on Marlena’s arm. “We can’t leave just yet.” “Did you forget something?” Hope shakes her head. “No. Stefano is outside.” Marlena turns around and looks out the window to confirm it. A sudden surge of anger fills her. “Hope, would you mind taking Belle a moment. I want to talk to him.” “Marlena, don’t. You don’t know what he might do.” Hope finds Belle in her arms and Marlena on her way out the door before she can protest any further.
Stefano is a little taken aback to see Marlena step outside alone. He wasn’t expecting her to make the first move. “What are you doing here, Stefano?” “I wanted to speak with you, Marlena.” Keeping her distance from him, Marlena tells him coolly. “We have nothing to discuss. You’ve lied to me and hurt me and my family for the last time. You have done many despicable things and I was willing to put them in the past when I saw that there truly was a good side to you. But that was before I remembered TJ and how you stole him from John and I all those years ago. You weren’t even going to tell me about him, were you?”
He moves closer and reaches for her arm. “Marlena…” Marlena pulls her arm away but doesn’t back away. “No, Stefano. No more lies. No more games. It’s time you ended this obsession that you have for me. I offered you my friendship, nothing more. I told you that I loved John and our love is the one thing you haven’t been able to destroy and you never will. But even if John wasn’t in my life, I would never have considered a life with you. If you truly care for me, as you say you do, then you will leave me and my family alone and that includes John. And as strange as it may sound, I don’t even hate you. If anything, I pity you, Stefano. All your plots and schemes have gained you nothing and they’ve left you a man alone. And you will continue to be alone as long as you let the old Stefano rule your life and I’d like to think that there is enough of the changed Stefano left within you not to let that happen.” She falls silent and turns to go back into the pub. Stefano starts to go after her until he sees two men move out of the shadows. He turns and walks away. Marlena enters the pub and closes the door. She leans back against it and closes her eyes.
“Marlena, are you all right?” Caroline asks, her voice filled with concern. Marlena nods and then opens her eyes. “I’m not sure if I made matters worse or better.” “You shouldn’t have confronted him.” “I had to, Caroline. I had to try to reach the Stefano I had come to know, for John’s sake and for my children’s sake. I won’t let that man try to destroy my life any more. John and I deserve some happiness and peace in ourlives and I’m going to do everything in my power to see that it happens.”
Caroline’s voice is doubtful. “I hope you did the right thing and he leaves you alone.” “So do I.” Marlena’s voice isn’t any more sure than Caroline’s. Shawn calls over from behind the bar. “Marlena, you have a phone call. It’s John.”
Marlena takes a deep calming breath. “I hope he didn’t say anything to John about Stefano.” She walks over and picks up the phone, her voice softens. “Hello. Are the boys driving you crazy yet?” “Hello, yourself beautiful and no, not yet. I thought you’d be home by now. Is everything okay?” John can’t hide the worry in his voice. “Of course everything is all right and it will be even better once I get your daughter home and tucked into bed. I have a feeling she’s going to be a handful at the wedding tomorrow.” Marlena says with a hint of laughter in her voice.
John’s gentle laughter warms her. “She wouldn’t be our Belle if she was any different. How about I call you a little later? I miss you.” “I miss you too and I’m going to hold you to that phone call.” “Then hurry home.” “I will. Talk to you then.” Marlena hangs up the phone and finds Shawn, Caroline and Hope all looking at her. “What?” Shawn speaks up for all of them. “You should have told him about Stefano.”
“I will, tomorrow after the wedding. There’s no reason to worry him tonight.” Marlena tells them all, her voice telling them she won’t be swayed differently. “Now, I’d like to get my daughter home and in bed.” She hugs Shawn and Caroline and gives them a confident smile. “Thank you, for worrying about us but everything is going to be all right. John and I will be married tomorrow evening and I’m not going to let anyone or anything interfere with those plans – not even Stefano.”
After Marlena and Hope leave with Belle, Shawn and Caroline look at each other and shake their heads. Caroline glances over at the closed door. “I wish we had the same confidence that she does but I know we haven’t heard the last from Stefano. He never lets go of anything that easily.”
The next morning, at the Penthouse, Belle climbs up on her mother’s bed and shakes her mother awake. Marlena opens one eye and looks at her daughter. “Good morning, Belle. Why are you waking mommy up?” “Belle miss daddy.” Belle says woefully. Marlena sits up slowly, hides a yawn and then takes her daughter in her arms and hugs her. “Me too but we’ll see him later today.” Belle’s eyes light up. “We marry daddy today!”
They are interrupted by a knock on the door. Belle scrambles out of Marlena’s arms, off the bed and runs to the door. She opens it to reveal Hope and says with a grin. “I waked mommy.” Hope lifts Belle up in her arms. “I was afraid of that.” She enters the room and offers Marlena an apologetic smile. “I’m sorry, Marlena. She got away from me. I was going to let you sleep in.” Marlena yawns again. “That’s okay. I still have a lot to do before the wedding anyway. What time is it?” “Seven.” Marlena moans and falls back against the pillows. “It’s going to be a very long day.”
Hope smiles. “Well, I do have a surprise for you that might help speed along part of the day. You have a visitor.” Marlena asks hopefully. “I do?” Hope laughs, then says. “No, it isn’t John but I think you’ll enjoy this visitor almost as much.” “Are you going to tell me who it is?” Marlena asks with a hint of humor in her voice. Belle raises her finger to her lips. “Shhh! It’sa ‘prize!” Hope nods at Belle then shrugs. “There you have it and I don’t think Belle would ever forgive me if I spilled the beans.” “Belle, come on, you can tell mommy. I’ll still be surprised.” Marlena tries to cajole her daughter. Belle just shakes her head and grins. Surrendering, Marlena slides from the bed, murmuring. “And John says she’s just like me.” “What was that, Marlena?” Hope asks, trying to keep from laughing. Marlena calls back as she reaches the bathroom. “Tell my visitor that I’ll be down shortly.”
***
Marlena descends to the living room to find Hope sitting on the sofa, Belle curled up in her lap, in animated conversation with a fair haired young man. He turns as Marlena approaches and rises to his feet, giving her a huge smile. “Hello, mother.” “Eric!” Mother and son hug, then Marlena puts her hands on his arms and holds him at arms length. “Let me look at you.” Her eyes look him over with warm pride. “Oh my! You’ve grown to be such a handsome young man.” “And you’re still the best looking mother in the world.” Eric counters with a grin to hide his embarrassment at her compliment.
Marlena hugs him again, then takes his hand and leads him over to the sofa. “I was afraid you weren’t going to make it in time for the wedding.” Marlena sits next to Hope. Belle crawls into her lap as Eric takes a seat in a chair across from them. “I almost didn’t make it. I still had two finals left to take but my instructors took pity on me and let me take them early. Grandma and Grandpa Evans already had my plane reservations taken care of and Grandma Caroline picked me up at the airport and dropped me off here. If I’d known you were still sleeping, I would have waited.” He leans over and taps Belle’s nose. “I didn’t think the squirt would wake you up anyway.”
Belle glares at him. “Not squirt – me Belle!” “You’re a little squirt, but a cute little squirt.” Eric teases his little sister. Hope laughs. “They’ve been at that for the past hour. Belle, why don’t you come into the kitchen with me and help me fix breakfast?” Belle nods and hops off her mother’s lap and leads the way into the kitchen. After the pair have disappeared into the kitchen, Marlena turns back to Eric. “I’m glad you made it for the wedding and I know John will be as equally surprised and happy.” “I can’t wait to see him again and Carrie and Sami and to meet my new brothers and nephew. I guess I shouldn’t have stayed away so long, huh?” He asks apologetically.
“No one blames you, Eric. You didn’t have too many happy things to come back to before this and it’s relieved my mind to know that you’ve been happy in Colorado.” Eric nods. “I have been but I’ve missed everyone all the same. So I was going to ask you if you’d mind if I stayed in Salem.” Marlena’s face lights up. “Mind? Of course I don’t mind. I would love to have you home again, you know that.” “Yes, I guess I did but I still had to ask and that brings me to my next question. Can I live with you and John?”
Tears gather in Marlena’s eyes as she nods. “Oh mom, don’t start crying on me.” Marlena wipes at her tears. “I’m sorry. I didn’t think this day could make me any happier but you just did.” “Well good, because this is supposed to be a happy day for you.” He gets to his feet. “I hope you don’t mind if I don’t stay for breakfast. I’d like to go get reacquainted with the rest of the family before the wedding this evening.” Marlena rises and they hug again. “I don’t mind because I know how happyeveryone else will be to see you.” She walks him to the door. “Will I see you again before this evening?”
Eric shakes his head. “Probably not. I’d like to go over to the house and see if there is anything I can help out with.” He grins. “That and tease John unmercifully for waiting so long to get you back to the altar.” “Don’t tease him too much, Eric. There are a lot of reasons why we didn’t get married sooner.” Marlena says seriously. “I know, mom.” Eric replies soberly. He hugs her again. “I’ll see you later.”
Marlena closes the door after the departing Eric as the phone rings. She calls out towards the kitchen. “I’ll get it.” She picks up the phone but before she can say a word, John’s warm voice chimes in. “Good morning, Mrs. Black-to-be. Marlena’s voice is softly seductive. “Good morning. I missed you last night.” John’s voice is perfectly serious but Marlena can almost see the grin she knows is on his face. “Want me to come over so I can make it up to you?” She laughs, then says. “Don’t you dare!” She hears his long drawn out sigh of regret. “Okay, Doc, if you insist.” “I do. How are the boys?”
John’s voice is deadpan. “They have Kit tied up in the playroom and are threatening to scalp him if he doesn’t tell them where the cavalry are located.” Marlena bites her lip to keep from laughing. “Aren’t you going to rescue him?” John chuckles. “Not me. He’s the one that sat up telling them wild stories about cowboys and Indians last night. How’s our Belle baby?” “She’s just…” Marlena suddenly falls silent as a flour-covered Belle marches out of the kitchen and announces triumphantly “Belle a ghost!””Doc? Doc, is something wrong?” John asks in concern.
Hope, covered with little white flour handprints, dashes in behind Belle. “Isabella Black, you come back here!” She stops short, sees the amusement in Marlena’s eyes, then scoops Belle up in her arms and says to Marlena as she passes her on the way up the stairs. “We’ll be in the bathroom.” Marlena starts laughing. “Dr. Evans!” John raises his voice slightly. Trying to contain her laughter, Marlena continues. “I’m sorry, John…I was…distracted…it looks like Belle is going to be more creative in the kitchen than her mother.”
“She can cook?” John asks with a surprised laugh. “Let’s just say she knows how to whip up a mean ghost.” She changes the subject on him before he can question her further. “Oh, I had a surprise visitor this morning.” Relieved to hear no hint of concern in her voice, he asks. “Who?” “Eric. He flew in this morning. In fact, he just left and should be stopping by the house in a few hours. He asked me if he could stay in Salem – with us, specifically.” “I hope you told him yes.”
“Of course, I did.” She sighs happily, then continues. “This day couldn’t be more perfect.” “Yes it could, Doc.” Suddenly concerned by the sober tone in John’s voice. “Don’t tell me something’s gone wrong.” “Not wrong exactly. That’s the other reason I’m calling. We forgot to hire a singer. I’ve been calling around and can’t get anyone on such short notice.” “Oh no! What are we going to do?” Amusement in his voice. “WE aren’t going to do anything. Alice stopped by here after I’d exhausted all the possibilities and said she’d take care of it and if anyone can conjure up a singer, Alice can.” “Oh you!” John chuckles again. “Sorry, Doc, I couldn’t resist teasing you. You still love me, right?”
“Well, I suppose I don’t have much choice now.” She says with a hint of laughter in her voice. “Okay, okay, I deserved that.” He pauses a moment, then continues in a serious vein. “Doc, you haven’t been bothered at all by Stefano, have you?” She avoids his question by countering with one of her own. “Is that why I suddenly have a couple of plain clothed policemen shadowing me?” “Uh huh. You’re not upset are you?” “No and I’m glad they were around last night because Stefano showed up outside the pub before I left AND before you get upset, nothing happened.” John is upset anyway. “Why didn’t you tell me about it last night, Doc?” Marlena sighs. “Because I knew how you’d react. Can’t we forget about Stefano today and concentrate on our wedding?”
“I’d like nothing better, sweetheart but I don’t trust him not to try to pull something.” John tells her, an edge of anger in his voice. Knowing his anger wasn’t directed at her, she tries to tease him out of it. “Would it help if I promised not to leave the penthouse until the limo arrives later and call Abe and tell him to surround the place with the rest of the force?” It doesn’t work. “This isn’t a laughing matter, Doc.” “I know. I just don’t want you to let any thoughts of Stefano to ruin this day for us. I love you and I’m not going to let Stefano or anyone else stop our wedding. So will you just concentrate on this evening, for me, please?”
John’s voice softens. “All right, Doc, for you and you know, calling Abe and having some extra men patrol the building isn’t such a bad idea after all.” “John, I was only…” She begins. John interrupts. “Humor me, sweetheart.” “All right.” “I love you.” He says warmly. “I love you too.” She says with equal warmth.
“And now that we’ve agreed upon that, I suppose I should go rescue Kit.” John replies with a hint of laughter in his voice. “I’ll see you tonight, Doc.” Marlena hangs up the phone and starts to head for the kitchen to survey the damage but is stopped short by a knock on the door. She opens it to reveal Caroline, Carrie, Maggie and Lexie. Each one of them has arms full of boxes and garment bags. Caroline speaks for the group. “Are we too early?” Marlena resists glancing at her watch and feels suddenly overwhelmed. “Too early?” “I told you we were too early, Grandma.” Carrie says with a touch of laughter in her voice. “Aren’t you going to ask us in, Marlena?” Maggie asks, trying to hide her own laughter.
Flustered, Marlena steps back. “Oh, yes. Please come in.” She takes a few boxes from Carrie. “My goodness, I didn’t realize there were so many of these.” “We decided to bring everything over here and spend the day with you and then we could all leave for the house together.” Lexie informs her as she sets her load of garment bags on a nearby chair. Marlena looks around. “Where is Sami?” Caroline shakes her head and smiles. “We couldn’t tear her away from Eric but he did promise to drop her off here later this morning.” Carrie nods. “I think he wanted to talk to her about her attitude anyway.” A frown creases Marlena’s brow. “I hope he doesn’t say anything to upset her.”
Caroline puts her arm around Marlena’s shoulders and hugs her. “Don’t worry, Marlena. Eric knows how to handle his sister.” Maggie and Lexie start opening boxes. Maggie glances over at Marlena. “Alice will be here later too. She said she had something important to take care of.” Hope descends the stairs with a squeaky clean Belle in her arms. “I thought I heard voices.” Marlena takes Belle from Hope and says with a laugh. “We’ve been invaded.” Belle claps her hands. “We party now?” Everyone laughs and then turns their attention to emptying the boxes and garment bags.
***
Eric and Sami, with Will in her lap, are sitting on a bench in the park. Eric asks his sister point blank. “Don’t you think it’s time you forgave mom and John?” Sami hugs Will closer to her and lowers her eyes. “I want to…” “But?” Eric prompts her. Sami looks up at him. “I’ve said so many hurtful things to both of them.” “And you don’t think they’ve forgiven you for that?” Sami sighs. “That’s just it, they all ready have – a long time ago. I’m the one who kept the distance between us.” “Then it’s up to you to close that distance.” Sami kisses her son’s head and then says in a small voice. “I don’t know how.”
Eric holds his finger out to Will who grabs it and tries to pull it towards his mouth. Eric chuckles, then says gently to his sister. “All you have to do is think about how much you love your son and then remember how much mom and John love you. We were all happy once, Sami.” “I know but I can’t help think about dad and all the pain he went through.” Sami says a little defensively. Eric takes her chin in his hand. “If you’ll admit the truth to yourself, Sami, you’ll admit you were partly responsible for that pain and so was dad. I’m not saying mom and John are blameless but I know how much they’ve always loved each other. You wouldn’t see it and dad, well, he did but didn’t admit it to himself until it was too late and that’s because he was trying so hard to recapture what he and mom had.”
Sami pulls her chin away and says bitterly. “You can’t blame him for that. He loved mom.” “I don’t blame him and I know how much mom loved him too but she shares more than love with John. What they have goes deeper than that.” Letting anger get the best of her. “How would you know? You haven’t even been around.” Eric shakes his head sadly. “No, I haven’t been around but that doesn’t mean I haven’t kept up with what is going on. I know how many times mom and John have risked their lives for each other and I know too, that no matter what they’ve been through their love has only grown stronger. Their love has survived the very worst that could be tossed at them, Sami. Don’t you think they deserve to be happy?”
“Yes, I suppose they do.” She admits reluctantly. “Then don’t you think it’s time you let the past go and looked towards the future? I don’t know about you, but I want to be a part of their lives.” Sami can’t help but ask. “What about dad?” Eric replies easily, no trace of any bitterness or anger in his voice. “If Dad ever decides to become a part of our lives again, then I’d welcome it. I’m not going to feel guilty one way or the other and neither should you. So what do you say about going over to mom’s and mending that fence?” Sami nods and Eric hugs her. “You won’t be sorry, sis.”
Marlena, wrapped in a robe her wet hair up in a towel, is practically being dragged down the stairs by Carrie. “I can’t meet anyone at the door looking like this.” “I’m sorry, Marlena but this person was insistent and wouldn’t talk to anyone but you.” Carrie says, managing to keep a straight face as Hope, Maggie, Lexie and Caroline watch in amusement.
Marlena takes a quick look around as they reach the bottom of the staircase and doesn’t see anyone new in the room. “Carrie, don’t tell me you left whoever it was standing in the hall outside?” Hope chimes in and raises her hand to rescue Carrie. “My fault. I wouldn’t let anyone else in.” Marlena gives them all a puzzled glance and then walks over and opens the door and is speechless with shock as Liz Chandler says, “I understand you need a singer for your wedding.”
“Liz!” Marlena cries out excitedly and the two women hug. “How did you know? I mean, when did you….? Oh goodness, my manners. Please, come in.” Alice, Sami and Eric move into view. Alice asks with a laugh. “Does that invitation include us?” Marlena smiles. “Oh my yes!” Sami slips in behind Alice, who is being escorted in by Eric, to join Caroline and Hope across the room. Liz turns to Marlena. “You can thank Alice for my being here, Marlena. When she called me and told me you and John were getting married and desperately needed a singer, I took the first flight to Salem. I missed out on singing at the first wedding, I wasn’t about to miss this one.”
Marlena hugs Alice. “Thank you” and then says to Liz. “I’m so glad you did. You’re the perfect choice and besides, I’ve missed you.” Liz smiles. “Just point me to your music selections so I can get some practicing in before the wedding.” Maggie holds up several sheets of sheet music. “I have them here.” Caroline heads for the stairs with Carrie and Sami in tow, calling out. “Marlena, you only have a few hours left to get YOU ready.” “Don’t remind me! I’m already nervous as it is.” Marlena replies, then turns to Eric standing just inside the door.
Eric gives her a reassuring smile. “Don’t worry, mom, I didn’t upset Sami. Just give her a little time, okay? She loves you and she wants you to be happy.” Mother and son hug as Marlena nods. “I know she does Eric and that’s what I want for her too. Now, don’t you think you should be heading over to the house?” Belle appears at her mother’s side and tugs on her robe, saying imperiously. “Upstairs now, mommy!” Marlena scoops Belle up in her arms. “All right, my little tyrant. I’ll see you later, Eric.”
Eric nods and watches his mother ascend the stairs, Hope and Lexie following. He walks over to Alice, Maggie and Liz who are discussing the music. “Excuse me, Ladies.” Alice smiles at him. “Yes, Eric?” “I wonder if I could have a few moments alone with, Miz Chandler.” Liz links her arm in Eric’s. “Let’s go into the kitchen. I’m dying for something to drink anyway.” Maggie and Alice exchange glances as the pair disappears into the kitchen. “I wonder what that was all about?” Maggie asks. Alice shrugs. “I have no idea.”
In the kitchen, Eric pulls away from Liz and asks angrily. “What are you doing here? I told you I was planning to come back to Salem.” Liz looks at him suspiciously. “You didn’t tell your mother the real reason why you came home, did you?” “Of course not. I wasn’t about to spoil her wedding to John. Don’t you realize what you’ve done by showing up in Salem too?” He asks in a low angry voice, afraid of being overheard. “Will you relax, Eric. No one even knows I’m here and I’m only going to stay long enough to sing at the wedding and the reception and then I’m gone.Besides, I didn’t want to disappoint Alice and I have missed everyone here. This is a chance to see everyone again and to sing at your mother’s wedding.”
Eric looks somewhat relieved. “You promise you’ll leave after the reception?” Liz gives him a thoughtful look. “On one condition, you sing a duet with me at the wedding.” Eric’s relief turns to panic. “Are you crazy? If I do that, there will be questions asked I don’t want to answer.” Liz shrugs. “It’s that or I stay, the choice is yours.” She smiles at him. “And just think of how much it would mean to your mom and John if you did do the duet with me at the wedding.”
“That’s blackmail.” Eric snaps at her, his anger returning. Liz pats his cheek, her smile widening to a grin. “Yes, it is.” Then continues in a serious tone, “if you’re smart, Eric, you’ll tell your mom and John the truth. They can help you, you know.” Eric shakes his head. “They have enough to deal with, I’m not about to dump my problems on them too and I plan to leave Salem again long before those problems catch up with me.” “Does that mean you’ll do the duet?” Liz prompts, not about to let him off the hook. She was going to make sure that Marlena and John asked a lot of questions, then Eric would get the help he needed whether he wanted it or not.
Eric was equally determined to get Liz out of Salem before his mother got a chance to question her. “Yes, I’ll do the duet but I don’t want anyone to know about it until it happens and you have to keep your promise to leave after the reception.” He holds out his hand to her. “Deal?” Liz takes his hand and they shake on it. “Deal.”
***
At the house, John is like a man obsessed going back and forth between the garden and the rooms decorated for the reception to make sure that everything is perfect and checking on security to make sure everything is quiet and secure. The hired help is about to revolt and before the men assigned to security threaten to do the same, Abe steps in John’s path on his fifth trip out to the garden in less than 10 minutes. “Hey buddy, what are you trying to do? Exhaust yourself? I don’t think Marlena would appreciate it if her bridegroom fell asleep half way through the wedding night.”
John tries to step around Abe. “I have to make sure everything is perfect, partner. I want this to be a day Marlena will never forget.” Abe sighs and allows John to pass him, then follows him out to the garden. “John, she’s never going to forget this day because she’s *marrying* you, not coming over for an inspection tour of the house and gardens.” He grabs John’s arm and forces him over to a couple of chairs off to the side. “Come on, sit down and try to relax for a few minutes.”
John sinks into a chair next to Abe but he looks anything but relaxed. “Do you realize that Doc and I will be getting married in less than two hours?” Abe smiles. “Do you? You’ve been so busy worrying about how everything looks and double and triple checking security, you haven’t even started getting yourself ready.” “I told you, Abe, I want everything to be perfect and I also want to make sure nothing goes wrong and that includes taking measures to insure we don’t have any unwanted guests show up at the wedding.”
“Stefano isn’t going to get past my men. So why don’t you leave that part of it up to me?” Abe waves his hand towards the rest of the garden, then continues. “As for the rest of it, you’ve hired a competent staff to do that. So how about you start concentrating on *your* part?” John smiles sheepishly. “Yea, I guess you’re right. Thanks, partner.” Abe grins. “Hey, what is the best man for if it isn’t to try to calm those pre-wedding jitters?”
There is a sudden commotion from the far side of the garden. Abe and John are instantly on their feet as two of the plain clothed officers arrive with a struggling tall blonde headed young man between them. “What’s going on here?” Abe asks his men. “Sir, we caught this person trying to sneak in the back way.” One of the officers explains. Suddenly the young man stops struggling and looks up and grins at John. “Hi, Dad!” John shakes his head and laughs, then says. “Eric, there is a shorter way to get to the gardens. You could have tried the front door.”
Abe silently indicates to his officers to release Eric and return to their posts. The moment Eric is released, he walks over to John and they hug. “Sorry, dad. I wanted to surprise you and I was told you were out here. So I circled around the back of the property – nice view of the lake by the way. Anyway, I didn’t realize you had half of Salem’s finest patrolling the grounds.” Abe looks at his watch, then at John. “I’ll give you two fifteen minutes alone and then I expect you upstairs to get ready, John.” He adds with a grin. “And don’t make any more inspection tours on the way up, let the people you hired do their jobs.”
As Abe walks away, Eric asks, a twinkle in his eye. “So why all the security? Afraid mom will try to get away before the priest can pronounce you man and wife?” John glances around and lowers his voice to a conspiratorial whisper. “How did you know?” Eric lowers his voice and whispers back. “Because I remember how you used to look in the mornings when you stumbled out of bed to get Carrie, Sami and I up for school.” He shudders for effect. “I still have nightmares.” John gets a bit defensive. “I’ll have you know your mother…”
Eric interrupts him, laughter brimming in his eyes. “Before you launch into a dissertation on what she thinks of your morning mug, remember she IS my mother and there are some things I don’t want to know.” John bites back a grin and says seriously. “You do know that I love her and I would do anything for her?” Eric nods. “Yes, you’ve already proven that and if I haven’t thanked you before for saving her life and her soul, then let me thank you now. If it hadn’t been for you and your love for her, mom wouldn’t be here and I’ll always be grateful to you for that.” John smiles. “Does that mean we have your blessing?” Eric returns his smile. “You’ve always had that. Now, don’t you think you should go upstairs and get ready before Abe comes looking for you again?” “Good idea!” John starts to leave the garden and stops and looks back at Eric. “Welcome home, Eric.”
Eric grins. “Better save that welcome. You have no idea what having me around is going to be like. I’m just full of surprises.” John laughs and says in parting. “Somehow, I don’t doubt that.” Eric’s grin fades as John disappears from the garden. “I just hope you and mom don’t find out the worst of those surprises, John.”
The moment John dons his black tux and gets the final stamp of approval from Abe and the males in the family, he slips away unable to resist make a final inspection of the garden. He arrives there before any of the guests begin assembling. Darkness had fallen and the garden was lit with hundreds of candles – it looked like the stars had fallen from the sky and danced among the flowers and around the altar. A white carpet ran a path between the rows of chairs leading from the house to the altar at the back of the garden. Placed around the altar were huge vases spilling over with exotic light salmon colored orchids and tiny ivory star flowers. John walks slowly up the carpet path until he reaches the altar and sinks to his knees.
“God, they say time heals all wounds and for Marlena and I, that is especially true. Time and love have healed the wounds we have given to each other and to those we love. Through each moment of trial and separation, our love has been as constant as the sun rising each morning and setting each night. Despite that, I didn’t think this day would ever come – when the two of us would have a second chance to stand before you, our family and our friends to celebrate and seal our love. But it has, and it is the happiest day of my life because from this day forward, I will live my life with my best friend, my protector, my soul mate and my love. She has always been the one person who has given me complete faith and trust and for that, I get down on my knees every day and thank you, God. And I thank you too, for the loving and wondrous gift you have given me – that gift is Marlena. I will love her, cherish her and protect her each and every day for all the days of our lives.”
John is startled when a hand falls on his shoulder. He quickly brushes his tears away and rises and turns to find Sami standing there, her cheeks wet with tears. John opens his arms to her and Sami steps into them. “I’m sorry, John, for everything. I never realized just how much you loved my Mom or how much she loved you.”
John takes a handkerchief from his pocket and wipes her tears away. “Sami, you don’t have to apologize. We’ve all made mistakes and it hurt me more than you will ever know that I caused you pain and unhappiness. I’m hoping that tonight will be a new beginning for all of us.” He smiles, then continues. “It means a lot to me that you’re here. The wedding wouldn’t have been the same without you.”
Sami gives him a watery smile and kisses his cheek. “I do love you, John and I wouldn’t have missed the wedding for anything in the world.” John gently pushes a stray strand of hair back that had fallen across Sami’s cheek. “I love you too, Sami, I always have.” She gives him a final hug. “I’d better get back to Mom. There is something I need to tell her too.” John watches Sami skip down the aisle in her haste to go talk to her mother. A smile lifts his lips as he sees her flash a grin at Christopher as he emerges from the house.
“I see you’ve healed the last of the wounds.” Kit says as he reaches John’s side. John nods. Kit slaps him on the back. “Still nervous?” “No, just anxious.” John replies as he glances at his watch. “The guest should be arriving soon.” Kit grins. “Some of them are already here. I was just coming out to see if you were ready for the onslaught.” John grins in return. “Bring them on!”
***
Sami enters the bedroom her Mom and John will be sharing to find her mother alone. Marlena is standing before the mirror adjusting the delicate circlet of tiny star flowers woven around the crown of hair piled on her head. “Let me help you with that, Mom.” Marlena turns to her with a smile. “Thank you, Sami. I don’t think it’s on quite straight.”
Sami makes a few adjustments to the circlet and then stands back to admire her mother. The ivory off shoulder wedding gown hugged her mother’s torso and flared out gently from just below her hips ending in a swirl of material around her feet. The long tight fitting lace sleeves came to a point on the back of her hands. There was an unmistakable glow that surrounded her and her eyes shined with happiness. Sami had never seen her mother look more beautiful and felt compelled to tell her so. “You look beautiful, Mom. More than beautiful, you look radiant.” Marlena hugs Sami. “Thank you, Sami.”
“Mom, there is something that I wanted to tell you and I wasn’t sure how until a few moments ago when I saw John in the garden. I’m glad you’re marrying John because I’ve finally realized how much you love each other. I love you both and I never meant to hurt either of you. I want to see you happy more than anything in the world and I know, now, that John makes you happy.”
Tears gather in Marlena’s eyes as she cradles Sami’s face in her hands. “Oh Sami, I love you so much and I never wanted to hurt you either. You’re a part of me and the one thing I have always wanted for you too, is your happiness and I know someday you will find it. Having you here makes my marriage to John complete.”
The tears slip down Sami’s cheeks as mother and daughter hug each other. The door bursts open and Belle is the first to enter followed by a pack of laughing women. Sami and Marlena, arms around each other’s waists, turn as Belle reaches them. She is covered in tiny flower petals. “Look, Mommy. Belle a flower girl.”
Marlena and Sami exchanges glances and laugh. Marlena stoops down in front of Belle and brushes the flower petals from her eyelashes and cheeks. “Belle, honey, you’re not suppose to wear the flower petals. You’re suppose to sprinkle them as you walk down the aisle.” Belle’s eyes grow big and round. “Oh!” Caroline’s voice is filled with amusement. “I guess we all forgot to tell her that.” Sami takes Belle’s hand. “I’ll take her and clean the rest of the petals off of her and see what we can do about finding her some more for her basket.”
Maggie walks up to Marlena and hugs her. “You look stunning, Marlena. You’re going to take John’s breath away.” Marlena’s eyes twinkle. “Just as long as he gets it back in time to say ‘I do.'” Carrie laughs then says. “He’ll probably say it the moment he sees you.” Maggie adds to that, “Yes, if I remember correctly he was anxious to skip the ceremony and go right for the kiss last time.” Marlena smiles as that moment flashes through her mind. “Yes, he did.”
Alice points to the clock. “Ladies, we have fifteen minutes left to make sure Marlena is ready. Now, my dear, do you have something borrowed?” “Right here.” Maggie speaks up as she removes a delicate gold chain with a cluster of diamonds in a star shaped pendant from a jewelers box. She places it around Marlena’s neck and fastens the clasp. “Mickey gave this to me on our first wedding anniversary the second time we were married.”
Alice nods in approval. “Something blue?” Carrie steps up twirling a blue satin and lace garter around her finger and says with a grin. “I’ve got that.” Marlena lifts her skirt and Carrie slides the garter up her leg to rest just above her knee. Caroline shakes her head. “Not high enough.” Marlena laughs and moves the garter higher, then looks at Caroline who grins.
“Something new?” Alice asks. Caroline opens another jewelers box to reveal a slender gold bracelet engraved with shooting stars. “From Sean and I.” She slides it over Marlena’s hand, onto her wrist and they exchange hugs.
“And now for something old.” Alice says as she removes yet another jeweler’s box from her pocket. She opens it to reveal delicate star shaped diamond earrings. “This is the first gift Tom bought me. He was still going to medical school at the time and really couldn’t afford them. We were window shopping one day and stopped in front of a jeweler’s window. He asked me if I could have anything I wanted, what would I choose. There was a lot of beautiful jewelry in that window but these, tucked off in a corner, were what caught my eye. I must have cried for a week after Tom gave them to me.” She places the box in Marlena’s hand. “He’s here with us in spirit and I know he’s as happy for you as I am, my dear.” Marlena brushes at her tears and hugs the older woman. “Oh, Alice, I know he is and thank you.” She looks around the room. “Thank you, all of you.”
Suddenly there is a loud whistle from somewhere outside and then John’s voice shouts “Hey Doc, let’s get this show on the road!” Alice marches over to the window and leans out to see John standing below. “John Black, if you don’t want a bucket of cold water dumped on your head, you’d better practice a little patience and get back where you belong.” John laughs and shouts up. “Aww come on, Alice. I’m anxious to start the *honeymoon.*”
Alice sails a pillow out the window and it hits John square in the face. John whistles again and shouts up. “All right now we’re getting someplace.” Alice removes the flowers from a nearby vase and dumps the water out the window saying as she slams the window shut. “That should cool him off.” “Alice, you didn’t?” Marlena asked, fighting the temptation to run to the window. “Well, it was dark down there so I can’t be sure….”
They are interrupted by the sound of running feet then an urgent knock on the door. Carrie calls out. “Who is it?” “It’s TJ.” Carrie opens the door. TJ stands there a wide grin on his face and says all in one breath. “Dad needs a towel and he said to tell you he still expects you downstairs on time, and Grandpa Sean said that you’d better hurry because Brady keeps saying something about trading his penguin suit for his birthday suit ever since Dad whispered something in his ear.” He pauses to catch his breath. “And golly, Mom, don’t you think the two of you have waited long enough?”
Lexie quickly fetches a towel as Marlena moves to her son. She leans over and whispers in his ear. “Tell your Dad the waiting is over.
John, looking none the worse for his slight soaking takes his place at the altar daring Kit or Abe to say a word. He immediately notices that someone is missing. “Where’s Bo? If he thinks I’m going to delay…”
Bo rushes in from the back garden gate, straightening his tuxedo jacket. “I’m here,” he says slightly out of breath as he takes his place beside Abe. “Sorry, John. Hope and I ran into Laura at the hospital. She was tied up with her last patient and we offered to wait and give her a ride.” John smiles in relief. “I’m just glad you made it.” Bo grins. “Are you kidding? Do you think I’d miss this wedding?”
The first strains of the wedding march begins and a hush falls over the garden. John’s attention is riveted to the back of the house, a lump forming in his throat. The French doors slowly open to reveal Belle, gowned in a long pink frilly dress with an ivory sash tied around her waist. She nods her head at someone in the house, then tosses back her little shoulders and steps onto the white carpet. Her dignified beginning crumbles as she grins from ear to ear and half runs, half skips down the aisle tossing her flower petals straight up into the air getting as many on herself as she leaves in her wake.
The assembled guests chuckle. John winks at Belle and she tries to wink back, scrunching up her nose and blinking both eyes. She scrambles up into a chair between Caroline and Sami and swings her feet happily to and fro.
Next to appear is Brady, bearing the ivory satin pillow holding the rings. He looks very nervous until his father gives him a reassuring smile. He cradles the pillow in his hands as if it were the most precious treasure on earth and then begins his descent down the aisle. His audible sigh of relief is heard when he looks down to see the pillow is still in his hands as he reaches the altar.
Bo’s attention is captured as Hope steps onto the white carpet. He couldn’t help remembering their own wedding. Her dark curls framing her face tumbled around her shoulders. The off shoulder pink satin gown threaded with delicate iridescent ivory threads shimmered as she walked. Ivory star flowers spilled from her hands. She exchanges a loving smile with Bo as she reaches the altar.
John starts to fidget impatiently. Abe lays a hand on his shoulder and leans over and whispers. “Patience, partner, just a few more minutes.” John nods, never taking his eyes off the back of the house as Maggie makes her way down the aisle. Her gown of ivory threaded with iridescent pink framed her matronly beauty. She smiles at Mickey seated next to the aisle, then winks at John as she takes her place beside Hope.
There is a brief pause in the music and then the fan fare of the bridal march begins. John’s wait was at an end as Marlena stepped into view. The sight of her literally took John’s breath away. Their gazes met and held and the special smile that she had always reserved just for him lit her face. John felt truly blessed and his eyes welled with tears as he returned her smile.
As she walked down the aisle, Marlena could feel John’s love wrap itself around her. She was deeply touched when she saw his tears. She was not doing a very good job of fighting her own tears. They had waited for this moment for so long and now it was here. John steps in front of the altar and holds out his hand. Marlena slides her hand into his and he turns it over and lifts it to his lips, placing a kiss and his heart in her palm. In unison, they turn to face Father Black.
Christopher clears his throat and then begins. “We are gathered here today to celebrate the love shared by John Black and Marlena Evans, to receive God’s blessing and to unite them in Holy Matrimony. I’d like to begin with a prayer.”
The assembled guests rise and bow their heads. Christopher continues. “Dear Lord, John and Marlena stand before you today to commit themselves to you, to each other and to their family. They have endured many trials and separations yet their love has endured and strengthened to bring them to this moment where they stand before you to tie that bond forever as they exchange their vows. I would ask that you protect and keep them and their loved ones in your care for all the days of their lives. In the name of the Father, the Son and the Holy Spirit. Amen!”
There is a hearty echo of “Amen.” Christopher looks over the assembled guests. “At this point, it’s traditional to ask if there is any reason why these two should not be married.” He grins as John glares at him. “However, I don’t think we’ll hear any objections….” As if she’d been waiting for a cue, Belle stands up in her chair, puts her hands on her hips and faces everyone. “Better not!” Caroline bites back her laughter as she settles Belle back into her seat. Christopher isn’t as successful containing his laughter. “Thank you, Belle.” Belle grins up at him. “You welcome, Uncle Kit.” That does earn a laugh from everyone. Marlena leans over and whispers in John’s ear. “Did you put her up to that?” John looks at her in mock innocence. “Me? I thought you did.” He starts to move in to kiss her.
Christopher quietly clears his throat to gain John and Marlena’s attention and says in a low voice. “Would the two of you like me to continue?” They both look guilty as they nod their assent. “John and Marlena would like to begin the ceremony with a song, one that they feel embodies the love they have for each other.”
Liz rises and steps up to the altar. “Before I begin, there is someone who has agreed to sing with me. Eric, will you join me?” Eric, looking very uncomfortable about being thrust into the spotlight joins Liz and manages a smile for a surprised Marlena and John. Jamie nudges Sami in the ribs. “THAT’s your brother?” Sami nods. “Now hush. I’ve never heard him sing before.”
The opening strains of the music begins and Liz and Eric, their voices blending beautifully together sing * “After All” as John and Marlena remember the moments in their lives leading up to today.
*After All*
(Love theme from ‘Chances Are” written by Tom Snow and Dean Pitchford)
Well, here we are again
I guess it must be fate
We’ve tried it on our own
But deep inside we’ve known
We’d be back to set things straight
I still remember when
Your kiss was so brand new
Every memory repeats
Every step I take retreats
Every journey always brings me back to you
After all the stops and starts
We keep coming back to these two hearts
Two angels who have been rescued from the fall
After all that we’ve been through
It all comes down to me and you
I guess it’s meant to be
Forever you and me
After all.
When love is truly right
It lives from year to year
It changes as it goes
And on the way it grows
But it never disappears
After all the stops and starts
We keep coming back to these two hearts
Two angels who have been rescued from the fall
After all that we’ve been through
It all comes down to me and you
I guess it’s meant to be
Forever you and me
After all.
Always just beyond my touch
You know I needed you so much
After all, what else is living for?
After all the stops and starts
We keep coming back to these two hearts
Two angels who have been rescued from the fall
After all that we’ve been through
It all comes down to me and you
I guess it’s meant to be
Forever you and me
After all.
As the music dies away, John reaches up and brushes the tears from Marlena’s cheeks. They thank Liz and Eric, Marlena giving Eric a hug and a whispered “I’ll talk to you later.”
After Liz and Eric retake their seats, John and Marlena face each other as Christopher begins the ceremony. “Marlena, will you take John to be your husband, to live together after God’s Holy ordinance? Will you love and honor, comfort, protect and cherish him, forsaking all others as long as you both shall live?”
Marlena nods and smiles at John. “Oh yes, I will.”
“John, will you take Marlena to be your wife, to live together after God’s Holy ordinance? Will you love and honor, comfort, protect and cherish her, forsaking all others as long as you both shall live?”
John reaches up and caresses Marlena’s cheek. “I will!”
“Will you please join hands?” Marlena hands her bouquet to Maggie and places her hands in John’s hands. “Marlena, please repeat after me. I, Marlena take thee John…”
Tears gather in Marlena’s eyes. “I, Marlena take thee John to be my lawfully wedded husband. To have and to hold from this day forward for better or for worse, for richer, for poorer, in sickness and in health, to love and to cherish as long as we both shall live.” She leans forward and kisses his cheek. “I love you.”
Christopher gives them a silent moment before he continues. “John, please repeat after me. I, John take thee Marlena…” John’s voice is firm and vibrant as he states his vows. “I, John take thee Marlena to be my lawfully wedded wife. To have and to hold from this day forward for better or for worse, for richer, for poorer, in sickness and in health, to love and to cherish as long as we both shall live. And beyond.” He can’t resist brushing her lips with his to seal that promise. “I love you, Marlena.”
They turn to Christopher and nodded in unison, and he picks on the ceremony again. “The exchange of rings is a custom that dates back to ancient times. They represent an unbroken circle of love, faith and trust and symbolize the giving of everything that each is to the other. They represent forever.”
Brady steps forward with the satin pillow holding the rings and Christopher says a blessing over them. Then Brady turns to Marlena and holds the pillow out. She removes the ring for John and thanks Brady. She takes John’s hand in hers and slowly slides the ring onto his finger saying, “John, I give you this ring as a symbol of our love. It is my promise to you that I will *always* cherish this day and hold each and every moment of our lives in my heart, my mind and in my soul and I will be yours forever.” She places a warm kiss on his hand and then reaches up and captures the tears on his cheek with her fingers.
Brady holds the pillow up to his father who takes Marlena’s ring and then thanks Brady with a hug. He turns to Marlena, takes her hand and slides the ring on her fingers as he says, “Marlena, I give you this ring as a symbol of our love. It is my promise to you that I will *always* cherish and protect you with every ounce of strength I have within me. All that I have and all that I am is yours now and forever.” He kisses both her hands and then pulls her into his arms and hugs her.
After a moment, they turn to the assembled guests. John slides his arm around Marlena’s waist. “Marlena and I have a poem we’d like to share with each other and with all of you. It is called ‘Marriage Fulfills the Dreams and Love Two People Share’ by Glenda Willm.'” They turn to each other and their hands entwine.
Marlena: Everyone searches for one special person they can share their lives with
John: The other half who makes them whole
Marlena: like two notes blending together to make a beautiful song
John: or the colors that compliment each other to form a rainbow
Marlena: It is everyone’s wish to have a lifetime of sunny days
John: a rainbow after every storm
Marlena: a lifetime of loving and living
John: and growing and giving
Marlena: of sharing and caring
John: a lifetime of days together
Marlena: learning from the bad times
John: and cherishing the good times
Marlena: Marriage is everything your heart desires
John: and the strength, courage, and determination to work for it
Marlena: In marriage you take care of each other’s heart
John: and hold on to what you share
Marlena: You hold it gently, so it doesn’t smother
John: and firmly, so it doesn’t slip away
Marlena: Hold it so that it can grow
John: and you can grow together
Together: and live and laugh and love together always.
Christopher takes over. “And now that John and Marlena have signified their love with the exchange of vows and the exchange of rings, with much joy, I now pronounce them husband and wife. John, you may now kiss your bride.”
“Finally!” John says triumphantly before pulling Marlena into his arms and kissing her with several days worth of pent up passion. Marlena melts into his embrace and returns his kiss with equal fervor. Sean yells out. “Hey you two, better save the rest of that for later!”
A chuckle ripples through the guests as a breathless John and Marlena part. John takes Marlena’s hand in his as Christopher announces, “It is my very great pleasure to present to you, Mr. & Mrs. John Black.”
At the same moment, Bo looks up and sees the shadow of a man standing on one of the balconies overlooking the garden.
As Marlena and John receive congratulations and best wishes from family and friends, Bo pulls Abe aside. “Don’t look up there, but Stefano is up on one of the balconies.” Abe nods. “I’ll alert the men.” Bo nods in return. “I’ll work my way towards the house.” Abe grabs his arm. “Be careful, Bo.” Bo doesn’t reply as he slips away from Abe and weaves his way inconspicuously through the garden.
Up on the balcony, Stefano laughs softly as he sees Abe slip out the back of the garden and Bo’s maneuverings to get to the house. It didn’t matter, they wouldn’t catch him nor would they be able to stop his plans this evening.
After Sami hugs her mother and John, Jamie pulls her away from the crowd. “Sami, I want you to introduce me to your brother.” Sami stalls by asking. “Why?” Jamie’s look is one of exasperation. “Why do you think?” Hoping to quell Jamie’s interest, Sami says lightly. “He has a girlfriend in Colorado and I don’t think he’s interested in meeting someone new. In fact, he’s not even planning to stay in Salem that long.” “Sami, if you don’t introduce me to Eric, you won’t have a secret left,” Jamie warns her. Sami is taken aback. She’d never seen her friend like this before. “You wouldn’t?” Jamie smiles. “Try me.”
A scowl creases Sami’s brow and she has no choice but to give in when Eric approaches them. “Eric, you’re just the person I wanted to talk to.” “Must be something unpleasant judging by that frown you’re wearing, Sami.” He chides her and then his gaze strays to Jamie. He holds out his hand. “Hi, if you haven’t guessed by now, I’m Eric.” Jamie laughs and then shakes hands with him. “Yes, I did,” she shoots Sami a grin, then continues “even if you aren’t anything like your sister. I’m Jamie.”
“Ah, Sami’s confidant. So Sami, should I wrestle all your secrets from her?” Eric teases his twin. Sami squirms and counters “How come you didn’t tell anyone about your singing? That was some surprise you sprung on Mom and John.” Eric looks over at his parents. “Tell you what, Sami, you don’t bring that up again and I won’t bring your secrets up again. Okay?” The twins exchange a mutual smile of conspiracy. Jamie taps her foot impatiently but Sami ignores her as she asks Eric about their grandparents. Finally, Jamie walks off in a huff. The trio doesn’t notice Marlena’s curiosity.
John does and captures his wife’s chin in his hand. “Mrs. Black, I’m crushed, we haven’t been married five minutes and already you’re ignoring me.” Marlena smiles at him. “I wasn’t ignoring you. I was just…” “…ignoring me,” he finishes with a laugh. “So what is it about Sami and Eric that has you so intrigued?” “They have that ‘they’re up to something’ look on their faces.” John grins, an invitation enters the smoldering depths of his eyes as he lowers his voice. “Is that look anything like this?” Marlena’s breath catches in her throat and John doesn’t give her a chance to reply as he kisses her very thoroughly chasing thoughts of everyone but him from her mind.
Belle tugs on her daddy’s jacket and demands. “Stop that! You have to start the conception!” John and Marlena part quickly choking back their laughter as TJ pipes in. “That’s *reception*, Belle!”
Belle stomps her foot. “That’s what I said!” Brady chimes in, “Did not!” Marlena’s gentle voice diffuses the sibling argument. “We all know what Belle was trying to say and she’s right, it’s time to get the party started.” John scoops Belle and Brady up in his arms and Marlena slides her arm around TJ’s shoulders. John and Marlena exchange glances and John can’t help but grin again and whisper. “I kind of like what she said.” Marlena elbows him in the ribs. “Don’t encourage her.” John’s grin widens, then he looks around. “Someone seems to be missing.” Marlena looks around. “Two someones, your best man and Bo.”
Abe and Bo along with several officers meet up in the foyer. Bo is looking frustrated. “Any luck, Abe?” Abe shakes his head. “None. I don’t know how he managed it but he’s gone.” Bo nods. “From the house but that doesn’t mean he isn’t still lurking in the area. I don’t like this, Abe. He has something planned, I can feel it.” “I agree, which means we have to come up with a plan to keep him from being successful. John and Marlena have waited too long to be happy.” Abe turns to his officers. “Do another search of the grounds. Have Jenkins and Miller report to me here.” They nod and move off. Abe isn’t sure he likes the thoughtful look on Bo’s face. “What are you thinking, Bo?” “I have an idea on how we can thwart Stefano.” He looks around to make sure no one is within listening distance. “This is what I have in mind.”
Stefano, doing some plotting of his own, meets with several men in the woods some distance from the Black house. “I do not want Dr. Evans harmed. You are only to take John Black. Is that understood?” The men nod and disappear into the woods. Stefano looks towards the direction of the house. “I’m sorry, Marlena that it has come to this but John has left me no choice. Enjoy your last few hours of happiness with him because you will never see him again.”
Marlena is hit with a sudden feeling of dread and looks toward the back of the garden. John notices immediately and slides his arm around her waist. “What is it, sweetheart?” She looks up at him, unable to hide a slight edge of fear in her eyes. “I…I just had this terrible feeling that I was going to lose you.”
“You’re worried about what Stefano might do, aren’t you?” She nods. “I don’t think he’s through with us, John.” John turns her towards him and wraps his arms around her. “Doc, I’m not going to let him ruin this day for us and I promise you, you aren’t going to lose me.” He smiles. “I did say forever and I meant it.” Marlena returns his smile. “I love you.” A twinkle enters John’s eyes. “Show me.”
Marlena smiles seductively, slides her arms around his neck and melts against him but before she can go any further, Abe’s voice interrupts them. “The two of you are going to have to stop sneaking off in corners. Everyone is waiting for you to cut the cake.” Marlena’s arms fall and she leans her head against John’s chest in frustration as she mumbles. “He’s as bad as Belle.” John’s chest rumbles with laughter as he turns Marlena to face Abe and Lexie. “Oh yea, the cake. What do you say, Doc?” “When does the honeymoon start?” She asks hopefully. Lexie smiles and slips her arm in Marlena’s and leads her away from John. “I think you two need to be separated for a few minutes to cool off before you cut the cake.”
Marlena looks back helplessly at John, who rolls his eyes in equal frustration. Lexie brings Marlena’s attention back to her. “So Marlena, you haven’t said where you and John are going on your honeymoon.” Marlena admits ruefully. “I don’t know where we’re going.” Lexie is surprised. “John didn’t tell you?” Marlena’s voice is hopeful. “No. Did he tell you?” Lexie shakes her head and smiles. “I’m afraid not. So how did you know what to pack?” “I didn’t.” She glances back at John and notes he’s deep in conversation with Abe. “Actually, he told me not to pack anything. He said he’d buy whatever I needed when we got there.” Lexie laughs. “He’s always been very good at surprising you.”
They are joined by Maggie, Mickey, Alice, Liz and Carrie with the Black children in tow. “Are you and John ever going to cut the cake, Marlena?” Maggie teases. John walks up behind Marlena and slides his arms around her waist. “Yes, Maggie, we’re going to cut the cake. You ready, Doc?”
She smiles up at him and nods. Abe and Lexie get everyone’s attention as John and Marlena move over to the table with the wedding cake sitting upon it. John dips his finger in the frosting and tastes it. A devilish twinkle lights his eyes and he winks at Marlena. “It’s whipped cream, Doc.”
Abe moves over to the bridal couple. “Before John and Marlena cut the cake, I’d like to propose a toast. So if you’d all help yourself to a glass of champagne the waiters are passing around…” After everyone has a champagne glass in hand, Abe continues as he raises his glass. “John, Marlena, I’ve never seen the two of you happier than you are at this moment. I think I can speak for all of us when I say that it has been a joy sharing that happiness with you and we wish you many years of the same with each other, your family and your friends.” “Here, here!” Family and friends shout in unison.
John and Marlena’s arms entwine and they drink from each other’s glasses, then John kisses her. They set their glasses aside and cut the cake together. They’re eyes meet as Marlena raises a small piece of cake to feed to John. John is suddenly wary. “Doc, I don’t like that look in your eyes.” Marlena smiles, raises the cake to his lips but before he can take a bite, she smears the frosting over the lower half of his face and then pops the frostingless piece of cake in his mouth saying innocently. “Oh, you didn’t get to taste any of the whipped cream.” A ripple of amusement passes through the guests. Marlena leans close to John and asks in a low seductive voice. “Would you like me to clean that off for you?” John throws his arms open, a look of anticipation on his face. Marlena picks up a napkin and proceeds to wipe the whipped cream from his face, biting her lip to keep from laughing at his obvious disappointment. “You don’t play fair, Marlena.”
It’s John’s turn and the guests watch in anticipation to see what he’s going to do. He picks up a very large slice of cake and holds it up before her, testing it for balance. Marlena doesn’t flinch, but the smile that lights her eyes and face melts his heart. In one swift motion, John pitches the cake over his shoulder not caring where it lands, grabs Marlena and pulls her up against him. His mouth moves over hers and devours its sweet softness, at the same time he dips his hand into the cake. When they part, Marlena staggers a bit from the intensity of their kiss and before she can recover, John raises his hand and smears the lower half of her face with frosting. Marlena laughs softly. “I’m going to get you for that.”
Featherlike laugh lines crinkle around John’s eyes as he grins. “I’m counting on it, Doc.” He reaches up and slides his finger along her lower lip, wiping away some of the frosting. He raises his finger to his mouth and tastes it. “Hmm, I think I preferred the kiss.”
Marlena gasps at the same time John feels a tap on his shoulder. He turns to find Mike standing there, one side of his head covered in dripping cake and frosting. Mike’s voice is filled with amusement. “Nice aim, John. Next time you decide to have a cake toss, give me a little warning, will you?” John looks a little sheepish. “Sorry, Mike but you know how it is when Marlena looks at me just so, I get a little carried away.” Mike laughs as he accepts the towel Carrie hands him. “You don’t have to explain, John.” Mike moves away with Carrie as John turns back to Marlena. He picks up a napkin and gently cleans the frosting from her face, then kisses her. “So, Doc, do you want to get the garter and bouquet out of the way so we can head out of here and be alone? We can slip out the front when no one is looking.”
She nods enthusiastically. John turns to the guests. “Okay, all you single men, line up.” Abe produces a chair. Marlena sits down and raises the hem of her gown to her knee. John gets down on one knee before her and slowly slides his hand up her leg, a mischievous grin on his face as his hand disappears beneath her dress. It takes all of Marlena’s will power not to squirm when his hand moves above the garter high up on her thigh. She is rewarded when she notices the beads of moisture appearing on John’s brow. She smiles sweetly as he slips his finger in the garter and slides it down her leg. Marlena doesn’t say a word as John has a little difficulty getting to his feet. Her smile widens as she silently holds out her hand to him to assist him. Her skin prickles pleasurably as his firm hand closes over hers. “Hurry!” She finally whispers.
John didn’t need to be told twice. He releases her hand and flings the garter high over his shoulder, then turns in time to see Mike catch it. Marlena rises to her feet and stands next to John. “Judging by the expression on his face, that was more of a surprise than the cake was when it hit him.” John chuckles softly then snatches the bouquet from the table and places it in Marlena’s hands. “Ready?” She nods. John says to the guests. “Okay, ladies, it’s your turn.”
After the single women are assembled, Marlena turns her back to them and tosses the bouquet over her shoulder. She turns as John says. “Now there is a possibility I hadn’t thought of before.” Marlena doesn’t need to ask what he means when she sees the bouquet in Carrie’s hands. She smiles at him. “Are you going to add matchmaking to your list of skills?” John looks at her. “You don’t think they would work out?”
Before Marlena can answer him, Maggie walks up to them. “Liz wanted me to tell you she has another song planned for your first dance as husband and wife.” John and Marlena exchange glances, each seeing the hint of frustration at having their plans to be alone thwarted once again. Marlena smiles at Maggie. “Thanks, Maggie. Would you tell her we’re ready?” Maggie gives them both a knowing grin. “I will.”
The area is cleared for dancing. John leads Marlena out as the first strains of the music begins. John holds Marlena close as Liz sings “The Power of Love” and their need to be alone grows as their bodies sway to the music. As the song ends, everyone gives Liz a resounding round of applause and the band strikes up another song. Other couples join the bridal pair on the dance floor. John and Marlena pick their moment carefully and slip away while the song is still playing.
A short time later, the get-a-way limousine is on it’s way to the airport when a car swerves in front of them and cuts them off. Before the couple in the car can react, the doors are pulled open and John is dragged from the limo at gunpoint.
John looks from one thug to the next. He glances into the back seat of the limo and questions its occupant, a hint of amusement in his voice. “Yo, Doc, what do you think of Stefano’s little going away gift?”
Marlena gathers up the skirt of her wedding dress and slides out of the limo, showing off a good portion of leg. All eyes are glued to her little display. She slowly allows her skirt to fall and has to bite back her laughter at the look of disappointment on John and the thugs faces. She moves closer to John and slides her arm through his as she looks at the men Stefano had hired to do his dirty work. “I’m disappointed, John. He’s usually much more imaginative than this.”
One of the men starts to reach for Marlena to pull her away from John. John’s voice is cold and deadly. “Touch her and you’re a dead man.” The man snatches his hand back and waves his gun. “We don’t want to hurt her. We just want you.” Marlena smiles sweetly. “I’m afraid you can’t have him. He’s mine.” The two thugs exchange glances. This wasn’t going the way they planned. They decide to get tough. “Our boss didn’t say we had to bring him John Black alive. We won’t hesitate to shoot and my partner here doesn’t have such a steady hand. If you don’t want to see your wife take a stray bullet, Mr. Black, you’ll move away from her and come with us.”
John grins as Abe and his men quietly take up positions behind the two thugs. “You might want to take a look over your shoulder before you decide that’s what you really want to do.” The man practically growls. “If you expect me to fall for that trick, you deserve to be shot.” Marlena shakes her head in mock pity as a smile plays along her lips. “Stefano must have found these two in the bottom of the barrel. They’re not very bright.”
One of them men jumps toward Marlena. John quickly pulls her behind him as Abe and his men move in and disarm the two thugs. While Abe and the officers take care of the thugs, John turns to Marlena an gives her an exasperated look. “Doc, when I said play along, I didn’t mean say something that might have gotten you hurt. Did you have to toss in that final insult?” She grins and nods. He continues. “What am I going to do with you?” She leans close and whispers in his ear. “Take advantage of me?” He laughs, says a quick “later” and then turns to Abe. “Is our escort to the airport here?” Abe nods. “They’re waiting for you around the next bend. So get out of here and enjoy yourselves.”
***
From his hiding place, Stefano hits the steering wheel of his car in frustration and shuts off his listening device. Damn that John Black! He wasn’t going to make this easy for him. He starts up his car and says aloud. “You have not won yet, John. I still have a few plans in store for you and Marlena and then I will have her.”
***
After assuring himself that they’d picked up their escort, John turns to Marlena. “Take off your dress, Doc.” Her eyes widen. “You’re going to make love to me here?” She pauses only a moment, not giving him time to reply and says eagerly. “Okay.” John sighs as she presents her back to him to help her with the buttons down the back of her gown. “I hate to disappoint you, sweetheart, but we don’t have time to make love right now. Someone else needs your dress.”
Marlena turns around and looks at him in surprise. “Someone else needs my dress? Whatever for?” He places his hands on her shoulders and gently turns her back around and finishes undoing the buttons on her gown as he explains, “Hope and Kit are waiting for us another mile up the road. They’re going to take our places.” “You think Stefano will be waiting for us at the airport, don’t you?” “I’m sure of it, Doc.” Marlena slides out of her wedding gown with John’s help, “Isn’t that putting Kit and Hope in danger?”
“Abe, Bo and a small force of officers will be there to protect them and to stall Stefano long enough for us to get away.” He leans over and kisses the swell of her breast above the satin and lace corset, “Hmm, I think I might like to keep you dressed like that.” Marlena is affected by the kiss but still manages to protest, “John, if you think I’m going to…”
He chuckles, interrupting her, and leans down and opens a compartment and pulls out a large box, “Relax, Doc. You, dressed like that is for my eyes only.” He places the box in her lap, “You didn’t think I’d forget to provide you with clothes, now did you?” She smiles at him, “I know how anxious you’ve been to get me out of my clothes.” John taps the box and grins, “You’d better put that on before I change my mind. We’re almost to the rendezvous point.”
***
The plan to get John and Marlena safely aboard their plane goes off without a hitch and they’re in the air before Stefano realizes he’s been duped. Marlena, blindfolded is sitting on the sofa. “John, I feel a little silly sitting here with this blindfold on. Are you sure it isn’t time to take it off?” After a final word with the pilot, John returns to Marlena’s side and joins her on the sofa. He reaches up and removes the blindfold as he says, “Sorry, sweetheart. I had to take care of a few things first and didn’t want to spoil the surprise.”
Freed of the blindfold, Marlena immediately recognizes the interior of the plane. “This is Victor’s plane. The plane we…” She falls silent. John takes her hand in his and finishes for her, “The plane we made love on? The plane our daughter was conceived on? The plane I wanted to make love to you again on? Yes to all of those.” “But John, those memories are painful ones.” He rubs the back of her hand with his thumb. “Yes and no, Doc. This is the place we finally let down our guard and showed each other how we really felt and how we’d always feel about each other. We’ve survived the pain and suffering we’ve gone through since then. It’s behind us now and it’s time we came full circle and started again – the way it should have been.”
Tears gather in Marlena’s eyes. “Oh John, we’ve lost so much time, so much…” John stops her with a kiss. “No, Doc, no regrets, no looking back. We have a lifetime ahead of us to enjoy.” He slowly looks her up and down, his eyes devouring her. “So what do you say we start enjoying it?” A smile lifts the corners of her lips as Marlena’s hand travels up his thigh. She leans closer, her lips mere inches from him. “Give me your mouth.”
John’s body jumps in surprise as her hand reaches its target. With a growl, he pulls her into his arms and gives her his mouth. Moments later their clothing is flung haphazardly around the cabin. Marlena is lying full length on top of John showering his face, neck and chest with kisses. She slides her body seductively against his and when he reaches up to hold her, she pins his hands above his head. Their eyes meet and hold – passion flares between them. Marlena’s seductive voice caresses him like silk, “I’m going to make love to you like you’ve never been loved before.”
John wasn’t so sure he could handle that at the moment. Just the feel of her soft warm flesh pressed against him was driving him crazy. He starts to reply, his voice hoarse with desire, “Doc, I don’t think…” She shuts him up with a kiss that seems to go on forever as her fingers leave silken trails along his heated flesh. When their lips finally part, they are both gasping for air. John tries to think of something else, anything else, to quell his driving need to become one with her immediately but the spell she was weaving with her hands and lips was too much. All he could think of was the feel of her and what she was doing to him. When her hand glides down his belly, John sucks in his breath and manages a raspy whisper, “I need you now, Marlena.” A satisfied smile touches her lips and she replies softly, “Now.” Her reply broke the last of the restraint John held over himself. Their bodies seal the commitment already made with their hearts, minds and souls when they’d exchanged their vows earlier that evening.
Afterwards, John holds Marlena in the curve of his arm, her head is lying on his chest. A light blanket covers them. John caresses her hair and asks quietly, “Are you awake, sweetheart?” She nods her head. John tilts her head up and brushes her lips with his, ‘I love you, Marlena.” A teasing smile lifts her lips. “And you did a wonderful job proving it too.” John chuckles and replies. “You weren’t too bad yourself, Mrs. Black.”
Marlena half sits, pulling the blanket up with her. “John, you still haven’t told me where we’re going on our honeymoon.” He runs his finger slowly up and down her arm. “What? You don’t want to spend our entire honeymoon making love in the clouds?” She hits him playfully, “Tell me.” He shakes his head. “Nope. It’s a surprise.”
“John, you know how I hate to be kept in suspense.” He grins. “Yes, I do.” He relents a little and continues, “Okay, I’ll tell you this much – we’ll be landing in Hawaii long enough to do some shopping and to change our mode of transportation.” Wanting more information, she asks eagerly. “Change our mode of transportation? Does that mean we’ll be staying in Hawaii?” He laughs, knowing very well what she’s up to and then tells her. “No, we won’t be staying in Hawaii and that’s *all* I’m going to tell you.”
“John…” He interrupts her by quickly changing the subject. “I’m hungry. Are you hungry? I had a whole feast catered from the Penthouse Grill.” Before Marlena can protest, John slides off the sofa snatching up his boxers and slides them on. He leans over and gives her a quick kiss, “Cheer up, sweetheart. I guarantee you’re going to love where we’re going.”
“So are you going to tell me where we’re going?” Marlena asks as she adds several more shopping boxes and bags to the steadily growing pile in front of John. John eyes the pile in dismay. “Doc, if you buy anything else, *we* aren’t going to fit in the limo.” Marlena replies in all innocence. “If I knew where we were going, I’d know exactly what kind of clothes to buy instead of trying to buy something to cover every occasion.”
John leans over before she can catch the gleam of mischief in his eye and whispers in her ear. “Where we’re going, you don’t have to wear a thing.” Marlena blurts out in shocked dismay. “You’re taking me to a nudist colony?” Several people look in their direction. John fights to keep the grin off his face. “Doesn’t that idea appeal to you?” Marlena says calmly, a wicked gleam in her eye. “Well, if you don’t mind all those other men….” Her voice trails off. John begins gathering up boxes and bags to avoid answering her. She would have to remember his “for his eyes only” remark. “John?”
He peeks around the boxes stacked head high in his arms and asks meekly, “Yes, dear?” “Tell me.” He stoops down slightly under the weight of the boxes and pants deliberately, “I can’t…I need to…conserve my breath…to carry this ton of stuff you bought.” He turns and walks, as if he’s carrying a 100 pound weight, heading toward the entrance. Marlena waits until their purchases are loaded into the limo before she says anything else. Amusement threads her voice as she playfully slaps him on the back, “Catch your breath yet?” John turns to her, “Marlena, have you been disappointed by any of the surprises I’ve given you?”
“Well, no, I haven’t. I’ve loved them all. Why do you ask?” John folds his arms and leans back against the limo, “Oh, no particular reason, except maybe an explanation for why you wouldn’t want any more of them.” Marlena isn’t quite sure where he is leading with this, “What gave you that impression?” John doesn’t look at her as he picks a piece of lint off his sleeve, “You did.” Marlena eyes widen in false innocence, “Me? How?”
He looks her directly in the eye. “Have you or haven’t you been pestering me to tell you where we’re going?” “Pestering you? I haven’t been…” John unfolds his arms and pushes away from the limo as he cuts her off. “You know what I think you need, Doc? I think you need some exercise to take your mind off *where we’re going*!” Before Marlena can say anything, John walks around and speaks briefly to the limo driver. When he rejoins her, he takes her hand. “Let’s go for a walk.”
Marlena pulls back as John starts to walk. “We’re not done discussing the fact that you think I’ve been pestering you.” John pulls her into his arms. “Yes we are, Doc.” He kisses her very thoroughly, then lifts his head and looks at her and grins. “Ready for that walk?” A twinkle enters Marlena’s eyes, “I’m not sure. Maybe you’d better kiss me again.” This time his kiss leaves her breathless. John’s voice is husky as he says, “I think we’d better start walking before I can’t walk.” Marlena doesn’t say a word, just grins at him and slips her hand back into his.
Their walk takes them to a pier filled with boats of all sizes. They stop and lean against a rail and watch a sailboat leaving the marina, it’s sails unfurling to catch the off shore breeze. The backdrop on the far curve of the shore is a tropical wonder of emerald greens and a riot of color, the water a crystal blue. The breeze carries the fragrance of exotic flowers, mingled with salt spray.
Marlena sighs, “It’s beautiful, isn’t it?” John’s eyes on Marlena. “Yes, it certainly is.” She smiles up at him. “Why do I get the feeling we’re not talking about the same thing?” John returns her smile and leans over and brushes her lips with his. “Ready to walk some more?” She eyes him suspiciously, “You’re up to something, aren’t you? He doesn’t reply, just grins and takes her hand and leads her further into the marina.
They stop occasionally to admire a boat or talk to other couples strolling along the walkways. When they reach the last pier where the largest yachts are anchored, John points to one that is busy with activity. “Now that’s what I call a beautiful boat. Let’s go take a closer look.” Marlena replies doubtfully. “Maybe we shouldn’t, John. It looks too busy over there, we’d only be in the way.” John gives her one of his heart stopping smiles, his eyes warm with love, “Humor me, sweetheart.” She laughs softly, “When you look at me like that, how can I possibly resist?”
As they draw closer to the yacht, they find themselves weaving in and out of the people coming and going. John pulls Marlena close to him to make sure she isn’t accidentally knocked off the pier into the water. They finally stop when they’re within then feet of the yacht. “It looks like it’s getting ready for departure,” Marlena observes. John nods, “It will be as soon as its passengers board.” Marlena looks up at him in surprise, “How do you know that?” John turns to her and takes her hands in his and grins, “Because we’re the passengers.”
Marlena looks from John to the yacht and back at John again. “You chartered a yacht?” John, chuckles and shakes his head, “No, I bought a yacht.” Marlena is speechless. John continues, “And I’ve named her after you, after everything you mean to me and will always mean to me.” He lifts her hands one at a time and plants a warm kiss in each palm. “You have touched my heart so very deeply and you’ve become so much a part of me, I’d be lost without you.” He smiles and captures her face in his hands, “You’re everything my heart will ever desire, Marlena.”
Marlena finally notices the name of the yacht, “Heart’s Desire”, through her tears. “Oh, John,” she manages to whisper as she melts against him. John brushes away the tears on her cheeks with his thumbs and laughs softly, “Does that mean you’re not disappointed and you like your surprise?” Marlena reaches up, buries her hands in his thick hair and pulls his head down and gives him a kiss that leaves no doubts in his mind on how she feels about him and his surprise for her. “Does that answer your question?” she finally asks.
John nods his head as his arms encircled her, one hand in the small of her back pulling her closer. His breath is warm and moist against her face and her heart races as he replies, “Umm, hmm and then some. So, Mrs. Black, would you like to christen our boat?” Marlena eyes all the activity going on and then looks up at John. “Right now? With all those people around?” John laughs. “Get your mind out of the bedroom, Doc. I was being literal. After all, this will be “Heart’s Desire’s” maiden voyage and we can’t let her leave the dock without a proper christening.” Marlena agrees, “No, I suppose we can’t let that happen.”
John’s gaze drops from her eyes to her shoulders to her breasts, swelling above the vee of her neckline where she is crushed against him. His voice is a little unsteady, “On second thought, maybe…” Marlena places her fingers under his chin and lifts his head so their gazes meet, a flash of humor crossing her face. “The yacht first, John.” John swallows hard and nods his head in agreement. He releases her and signals to someone standing on the stern deck of the yacht and then looks at Marlena, his eyes glowing, “This shouldn’t take too long and then we can pick up where we just left off.”
A smile curves Marlena’s lips but she doesn’t reply as John turns to the man approaching them carrying a bottle of champagne. John introduces him as the yacht’s captain. A few minutes later, “Heart’s Desire” is christened and John leads Marlena on board. When he starts to head inside the cabin area, Marlena stalls him, her eyes twinkling. “Would you mind if we stayed on deck until we’ve cleared the bay?” John does his best to hide his disappointment and nods his head. “Sure, Doc, if that’s what you really want to do.”
She winds her arms around his waist and molds herself to him. “John, we can’t spend all our time in our cabin and I would like to admire the view, at least until there isn’t anything left but water to see.” John gives a low groan and leans his forehead against hers, “Sweetheart, if you don’t want to be deprived of admiring the view you’re going to have to stop moving against me like that.” Marlena flashes a wicked smile as she steps away from him. She holds out her hand, he links his fingers through hers and they move to the bow of the yacht. They share a companionable silence as Heart’s Desire lifts anchor and heads out to sea, Marlena leaning back against John, his arms wrapped around her.
Marlena could sense John’s growing impatience to get her alone as Hawaii grew smaller on the horizon. There was a trace of laughter in her voice as she broke the silence, “I don’t suppose you’d like to give me a tour of the yacht now?” “A tour? Sure, and I know just where we’ll start,” John says as he spins her around and picks her up and tosses her over his shoulder.
“John! What are you doing?” “Giving you a tour,” he says as he heads toward the cabin area. “Look, there’s the deck. Over there is a port hole, and that’s a thingamajig…” Marlena slaps his back, “This isn’t what I meant.” Ignoring her, John continues, “…and this is the living room, and over there is the dining area…” He stops long enough to open a cabin door, “and this…is our cabin.” He carries her over and dumps her on the spacious bed, grinning down at her, “and this is our bed.” Marlena kept her features deceptively composed, “Are you through?” He nods. Marlena reaches up and grabs a handful of his shirt front and pulls him down on the bed, “Then make love to your wife.”
After a short catnap, John awoke to find Marlena still asleep. He quietly moves from the bed, dons his clothing and goes up on deck. The Captain greets him with bad news as he points to the sky ahead of them. “We’re heading into a storm. It’s bigger than forecasted and we won’t be able to go around it.”
A worried frown creases John’s brow as he gazes up at the black sky just ahead of them, “Is it going to be a problem?” The Captain shakes his head, “Not too much of one but you might want to warn Mrs. Black that things are going to get rough shortly. And you might want to place that ship to shore call you mentioned before we reach the storm. You won’t be able to get through again until its over.”
John nods and returns to the cabin to warn Marlena. She was still asleep and he didn’t have the heart to awaken her just yet. He decides to wait until he’s made his call, unaware of how quickly the storm would be upon them. He quietly closes the cabin door and heads for the communication room. A few moments later he is connected to Abe, “Hey partner, how are things back home?” “Quiet for the moment. Your brother, Hope and Bo are staying at the house with the kids and I’ve got a 24 hour guard posted on the grounds,” Abe informs him. “Which means Stefano is still on the loose.”
“I’m afraid so but he hasn’t been seen in Salem since he made his escape from the airport. It’s a good thing you covered your tracks or I’d suspect he was following you and Marlena.” John feels the yacht lurch slightly as he replies, “I made sure he couldn’t. Just don’t let your guard down at your end.” Abe pauses, then says reluctantly, “There is something else I should tell you. I was contacted by the ISA and they want to send a man in to help capture Stefano.”
John grabs onto a rail as the ship lurches even more sharply, then replies, “I hope you told them no, Abraham.” Static cuts in and out on Abe’s reply, “They didn’t…choice… arriving…” “What was that, Abe? We’re moving into a storm and there’s a lot of interference.” A searing flash of lightening, followed by a loud boom of thunder rocks the yacht. Most of Abe’s reply is overrun with static except the word “tomorrow.”
John looks down at the man working the communications console, “Is there any way you can get a better signal?” “I’ll try, Mr. Black.” Seconds later, Abe’s voice returns, “…you still there?” “Yea, I’m still here. Look, before I lose you again – who is the ISA sending?” Another flash of lightening nearly blinds John followed immediately by a tremendous sizzling boom of thunder. Sparks fly from the communications console and small trails of smoke rise from the equipment. John and the crew member both leap back. Concern for Marlena sends John running for their cabin as the yacht lurches sharply again.
John finds the cabin empty. He calls out for Marlena and searches for her – calmly at first. When he couldn’t find her any where below decks as the storm worsens, he becomes frantic. Surely she wouldn’t have gone up on deck in this weather? He runs up on deck into the driving rain and nearly knocks over one of the crew members. He shouts to be heard above the thunder, “Have you seen my wife?” The man shakes his head no and rushes off. John moves along the port side of the yacht, fighting the swirling wind and wild roll of the boat. “Marlena!” He sees no sign of her. “Damn it, Doc! Where are you?”
A glaring streak of lightening brightens the darkened sky momentarily followed immediately by a tremendous boom of thunder. He sees her, moving quickly in his direction. He reaches her in three strides and grabs for her as the yacht rolls again, nearly causing Marlena to lose her balance. John doesn’t say a word as he practically drags her back to the cabin areas. The moment they are out of the rain, he turns to her and his fears for her override his common sense as he lashes out angrily, “What in the hell were you doing up on deck in that?” He points outward. “Don’t you realize you could have been seriously hurt or worse, swept overboard? I’ve been searching all over for you.”
Marlena reaches up and brushes a wet strand of hair off her cheek. “And you found me, unharmed and believe it or not, not even one area of me is melted.” “This isn’t a joking matter, Doc.” “John, I’m fine.” John’s hand automatically reaches out to steady her as the yacht lurches, “If I hadn’t found you when I did…”
“What? I’d have been shark bait?” “Marlena…” “John, are you going to act like this every time I disappear from your sight?” “Are you saying I had no right to be half out of my mind with worry because *you* decided to take stroll on deck during a raging storm?” “No, I’m saying that you’re blowing this all out of proportion.” “Oh, I am, am I? And I suppose you saw all the crew members out taking a leisurely stroll too? Hell, I’ll bet the Captain was out there trying to get a tan while tossing in a line to catch the evening meal.”
Marlena turns and starts to walk away from him. “Where are you going, Doc? I’m not finished…” She glares back at him, “Yes, you are.” John stares after her departing form, torn between anger and admiration as he notices the way her wet clothing clings to her every curve. Five minutes later he was kicking himself for being such an ass.
Marlena, dressed in dry clothing, sits on the bed impatiently tapping her fingers on the coverlet waiting to see how long it would take John to come to his senses. The worst of the storm had passed by the time the cabin door opens slowly and a white flag waves back and forth, “Is it safe to come in?” “Who’s asking? Jekyl or Hyde?” John pokes his head in. “How about the man who loves you?” “Is he ready for a rational conversation?” “Uh huh.” “Then I suppose it’s safe for him to come in.”
John enters, closes the door behind him and leans against it saying in a rush, “Marlena, I’m sorry I acted like such a jackass.” She moves from the bed and walks up to him but doesn’t touch him, “Did it ever occur to you that I might have gone up on deck for a reason and that I was caught by surprise by the suddenness of the storm?” He shakes his head, remembering, too late, that she hadn’t had any warning, “I didn’t think…” “No, you didn’t.” “All right, I didn’t but I was worried about you. Why did you go up on deck?” Marlena moves away from him, more to hide her embarrassment, “I was seasick and needed some fresh air and I was looking for you. I found the Captain. He told me you were making a ship to shore call and warned me about the storm. I was working my way back when the storm hit. You found me shortly after that. End of story.”
John moves quietly and stands right behind her, “Are you all right? Are you still seasick?” His concern touches her, but she wasn’t ready to let him off the hook yet. She turns to him. “I’m fine now but that’s not what this is about. You do realize that you can’t go crazy every time a little crisis comes up, don’t you? I’m not that fragile.” “I know you aren’t, Doc and I really don’t know what came over me. Maybe it’s the thought that I’ve come so close to losing you too many times and when I couldn’t find you, I was half out of my mind with fear.” He reaches up and gently caresses her cheek with his fingertips, continuing, “I can’t promise not to do it again, sweetheart, but I do promise to try not to stick my foot in my mouth again.”
Marlena shakes her head and laughs gently before saying, “You won’t be able to keep that promise either. Maybe a little keel-hauling will be good reinforcement.” “Whew! For a moment there, I thought you were going to opt for the twenty lashes.” “Well, come to think of it, I kind of like the idea of seeing you strung up and shirtless.” He grins, “How about sprawled on the bed and shirtless?” He starts to reach for her but Marlena steps back. She wasn’t going to make it that easy for him, “Oh no you don’t, not until you’ve told me what Abe had to say.”
John sighs, “You don’t mind if I get out of these wet clothes while I tell you?” “That would be nice.” As he begins to peel off his shirt, “The children are fine. Kit, Bo and Hope are staying with them.” He hands the shirt to Marlena, and smiles to himself as her eyes unconsciously travel over his exposed flesh. He moves to the bed and sits down to remove his boots, “There hasn’t been any sign of Stefano in Salem and Abe figures we’ve covered our tracks well enough that he won’t find us.” He stands again and removes his jeans and boxers, “Unfortunately, the ISA has decided to send someone in to help find him.”
Marlena can’t tear her eyes away from him. “Who are they sending?” John tosses the remainder of his clothing onto the back of a chair, “We were cut off before Abe could tell me.” Marlena wasn’t really listening to his reply as she tosses his wet shirt over her shoulder and walks toward him. She places a hand on his chest and shoves him lightly, causing him to fall back on the bed. “I think this will do until I can get you strung up and shirtless.” She falls on top of him effectively ending their conversation.
***
Back in Salem, Abe has just finished filling Kit, Bo and Hope in on the latest developments but is interrupted by Bo before he can say who the ISA is sending. “Why in the hell is the ISA sending someone in? Don’t they think we’re capable of handling DiMera on our own?” Abe shakes his head, “Apparently not and this person does have a lot of experience where Stefano is concerned. Frankly, Bo, we can use all the help we can get if we’re going to capture him before John and Marlena return from their honeymoon.” Hope sits on the arm of the sofa next to Bo, “Abe’s right, Bo and really, what harm can it do?” “What harm can it do? Plenty! Every time the ISA has come to Salem, there’s been more trouble than we started out with. Abe, can’t you change their minds?” Abe glances uncertainly at Kit, then looks at Bo, “I tried.” “Try again.” Abe sighs, “Bo, when they told me who they were sending, I had to agree with them.”
Kit finally speaks up, “Judging by your expression, Abe, you’re torn over the arrival of their choice.” “I am.” “Who are they sending, Abe?” “They’re sending your brother, Bo.” Bo and Hope exchange surprised glances and ask in unison, “Roman agreed to come back to Salem?” Abe nods, “He’s arriving tomorrow.”
Having been filled in on the history of John, Marlena and Roman, Kit asks quietly, “Does he know about John and Marlena?” Abe shakes his head, “I don’t think so. From what Chief Tarrington said, Roman hasn’t been completely briefed on his assignment yet. They’re leaving that up to me.” Bo jumps to his feet, “Oh great, that means he’ll probably expect to find Marlena in Salem when he arrives. I’m sure he didn’t expect her to wait around for him but it’s still going to be a blow when he finds out she’s married to John now. I certainly don’t want to be the one to break the news to him.”
“You won’t have to, Bo. I’ve already talked to Shawn and Caroline. They’d rather tell him themselves. And I think you underestimate your brother, he wasn’t blind to how John and Marlena felt for each other.” “That’s true, Abe but I know how much he loved Marlena despite the divorce.” Hope can’t help but ask, “Were you able to warn John and Marlena?” Abe shakes his head, “They ran into a storm and we were cut off before I could tell John.”
Kit interrupts their discussion, “If you don’t mind an outsider’s opinion, I think you’re all worrying too much. They’re all adults and though things will be awkward, at first, they’ll be able to handle it.” Bo nods reluctantly, “I suppose you’re right but I can’t shake the feeling that Roman’s returning to Salem right now is a mistake.” Hope looks at Bo, “Bo, how can you say that? He’s your brother.” “You don’t have to remind me of that, Hope. I just think his return is going to cause trouble that none of us can predict.”
***
Somewhere outside of Salem, Stefano, seated behind an opulent desk, picks up the phone. “What news do you have for me?” “No news on John Black and his wife but I picked up another tidbit of information I thought you’d find interesting. Roman Brady is returning to Salem, on assignment for the ISA.” Stefano smiles, “So, my old nemesis is returning. He could prove quite useful in my plans. When is he due to arrive?” “Tomorrow.” “I want him followed.”
Stefano hangs up the phone and picks up a pawn from the chessboard off to his right, “How can I use you to drive a wedge between John and Marlena and bring John down, once and for all?”
The next morning, Marlena wakes up as John enters their cabin carrying a breakfast tray. “Good morning, Doc!” Marlena moans, rolls over and pulls the pillow over her head. John crosses the room and sets the tray on the night stand next to Marlena, then yanks the pillow away from her, “What kind of greeting was that?” “Go away.” “Wait a minute, I think I’m in the wrong room. Let me go out and try this again.”
John snatches up the tray and heads for the cabin door. Marlena leaps from the bed and makes a beeline for the bathroom, stopping John in his tracks, “Something I said? Didn’t say?” He sets the tray back down and goes over to the closed bathroom door, “You know, Doc, if you’re still punishing me for yesterday, I think I’d prefer keel-hauling.” He gets no response, then continues, “If you’re upset because I fell asleep after the third….”
The door snaps open. A pale and disheveled Marlena delivers a punch to John’s mid-section, then slams the door shut. John immediately doubles over and gasps, “What was that for?” When he catches his breath, he stands to one side of the door, “All right, John, what did you do this time?” He moves to the other side of the door, “Nothing.” Leaps back to the other side, “Nothing? Then why did she just hit you?” He steps back over to the other side, “Got me. Must’ve had a bad dream, woke up on the wrong side of the bed…or maybe she’s wishing she had strung me up.”
The door pops open again, catching John in mid stride switching to the other side. Marlena looks at him, “Are you enjoying yourself?” “One of us has to.” And before Marlena can close the door again, he grabs her and pulls her into his arms. “Tell me.” She leans her head against his chest, “Seasickness again.” John tilts her chin up, “Why didn’t you say so?” “Because you were being too damn cheerful.” “I’m not going to apologize for that but I can do something about your sea sickness.” He leads her over to the bed and sits her on it. “Wait right here.”
A few minutes later he returns with a bottle of motion sickness pills and a glass of water, “Your breakfast.” “Very funny.” She accepts a pill and the glass of water from him. “Want me to leave you alone until you’re feeling better?” Marlena shakes her head, “I’m sorry, I shouldn’t have hit you.” “True but you didn’t do any damage,” he touches his abdomen gingerly, “at least I don’t think you did. Maybe you should take a look.”
Marlena glares at him. “On second thought…” He pauses, then changes the subject, “you know, Doc, I’ve never known you to get seasick before.” “I’ve never been seasick before.” John is suddenly all concern and sits beside her, “Sweetheart, are you sure it isn’t something else? Do you have any other symptoms?” “You mean crankiness, nausea and vomiting aren’t enough?” “Marlena, I’m serious.” She relents, “Other than that and a little light headedness, no, I haven’t noticed any other symptoms.” “Maybe we should put a call in to Mike.”
Marlena looks at him, “Why?” “Because he’s a doctor and…” “And what?” John does some fast thinking, “Is this where you’re going to remind me that you’re a doctor and you’re quite capable of diagnosing yourself?” Marlena looks away to hide her sudden amusement, “Umm hmm.” “All right, Doctor Evans, how are you feeling now?” “Hungry.” John is dumbfounded, “Hungry?” “Famished.” She replies as she moves from the bed and inspects the breakfast tray. John shakes his head and mumbles to himself, “She forgot to mention mood swings.”
“What was that, John?” John moves over to her and slides his arms around her waist and plants a kiss on the back of her neck, “I love you.” Marlena glances up at him, laughter lurking in her eyes, “Even though I told you to go away?” “Even though.” Marlena turns in his arms and runs her hands slowly up his chest, “Even though I hit you?” “Yep.” Marlena curls her arms around his neck, “Even if I have another mood swing?” “So you did hear me.” ” ‘fraid so.”
John slides his hands down her back and pulls her closer, “Am I going to get any warning in the future?” ” ‘fraid not.” “Then I guess I don’t have any choice.” Marlena leans back and looks up at him, “What do you mean you don’t….” John crushes her to him and captures her mouth, effectively silencing her.
***
Abe is disappointed when he arrives at the hospital to visit Lexie, only to be told she is tied up making hospital rounds. As he turns to leave, Mike walks up to him. “Abe, I’ve been trying to reach you all morning.” “What’s up, Mike?” Mike looks around carefully and lowers his voice, “Have you heard from John and Marlena since they left?”Abe nods, “Yesterday. Why are you asking?” “Maybe we should go to the lounge, I’d rather not be overheard.”
Abe follows Mike to the lounge, then asks, “So what’s the big mystery, Mike?” “Did John say anything about Marlena’s health?” “No, should he have?” “Not necessarily. I just wondered if he did.” “Do you want to tell me why?” Mike frowns, “I can’t tell you anything specific, Abe but something showed up in Marlena’s pre-marital blood test and I won’t be able to confirm my suspicions until she has another test.”
Abe is suddenly concerned, “Is it serious?” “It could be. Is there any way I can talk to them before they return to Salem?” Abe shakes his head, “I’m afraid not, Mike. They ran into a storm yesterday and lost communications. I don’t even know where they’re headed to leave a message for them. John took every precaution to insure Stefano wouldn’t find them.” Mike runs his hand through his hair in frustration, “If you do hear from them, would you have them get in touch with me?” “Sure, Mike.” “Thanks, Abe,” Mike replies, then leaves before Abe can question him further.
***
Stefano paces his study impatiently. Roman Brady was due to arrive in Salem today and he hadn’t heard anything from his henchman. It had taken him all night to come up with the perfect plan to use Roman as his pawn in his plans for John and Marlena. He’d given the order to have Roman brought to him after he visited his parents and heard the news about his ex-wife. It was imperative that Roman didn’t have a chance to speak to anyone else before Stefano could institute his plan. The phone rings. Stefano moves behind his desk and sits before answering it. “You have news?”
“Roman Brady’s plane just landed. He’s on his way to the Brady Pub now.” “You know what you have to do?” “Yes, sir. My men are in place. I’ll contact you again when we’re enroute.” Stefano hangs up the phone and a satisfied smile crosses his face, “Soon, very soon, my old friend, we shall meet again.”
***
Kit is placing an order with Caroline, when she looks up and sees the pub door open to reveal Roman. With a cry of delight, she excuses herself from Kit and rushes over to greet her son, “Roman, welcome home! I wasn’t expecting you this early.” Roman hugs her and smiles, “I thought I’d surprise you.” He looks over his mother’s shoulder and sees Kit across the room. His smile fades. “John is a priest again? The last I heard he’d been released from his vows and was engaged to Kristen.”
Caroline steps back and shakes her head, “No, Roman. That isn’t John, it’s his brother Father Christopher Black.” Roman shakes his head in surprise, “Brother? I guess I’ve been out of touch too long. Maybe you should get me caught up on things around here before I run into the rest of the family.” Caroline takes his hand and leads him over to a booth, “Why don’t you have a seat and I’ll get you some lunch.” Roman takes a seat, shaking his head, “I’m not hungry, mom. Why don’t you join me so we can talk.” Caroline is hesitant, “Maybe I should let your father know you’re here first.”
And before Roman can say another word, Caroline goes to find Shawn. Kit’s order had been taken care of by one of the waitresses and he was preparing to leave when Roman stands up and stops him. “Father Black.” Kit turns to him, “Yes?” Roman holds out his hand to him, “I wanted to introduce myself, I’m Roman Brady. I know your brother, John.” Kit shifts the bags of food to his left hand and shakes hands with Roman. “It’s a pleasure to meet you. Your family talks about you frequently.” Roman says pointedly, “Yours never mentioned you.”
A slow grin spreads across Kit’s face, “That would have been rather difficult considering he didn’t know I existed until recently.” “I always thought twins had a special connection.” The grin drops away from Kit’s face and is replaced by a look of regret, “That might be true of most twins.” He catches a glimpse of Caroline and Shawn and was eager to escape before Roman Brady could question him further, “I see your mother has returned with your father. I’m sure you’d like to have some time alone with them.” With a nod of his head, Kit leaves. Roman watches him leave and then his attention is captured by his parents.
They settle into a booth. “Son, I can’t tell you how good it is to have you back home again. How long are you planning to stay in Salem?” Roman looks from his father to his mother, then shakes his head, “I’m not sure, Pop. I’d like to see the kids and visit with the family for awhile…” “Surely you’re home for good? Why did you come back to Salem if you weren’t planning on staying?”
“Shawn Brady!” Roman pats his mother’s hand, “It’s all right, mom. Pop has every right to expect me to stay.” He looks around, “And I guess that all depends on certain people that I left behind.” Caroline looks down, “There have been a lot of changes since you left Roman.” Roman immediately picks up on her hesitancy to say more, “What is it the two of you are afraid to tell me?”
Caroline and Shawn exchange glances, unsure of how Roman will take the news. “It’s about Marlena, isn’t it? You don’t have to be afraid to tell me about her. I could hardly expect her to wait around until I came to my senses.” Caroline nods, “Yes, it’s about Marlena.” Before she can say more, Shawn asks, “You’re still in love with her, aren’t you, son?”
Roman sits back and sighs, “I’ll always love her, Pop. A day hasn’t gone by when I haven’t thought about her. But I couldn’t get past the hurt she brought to me and our family. It took me a long time to realize that we really were all Stefano’s victims and, too, Marlena and John were never given the chance to resolve their feelings for each other, one way or the other. I guess that’s why I stayed away so long, to give them that chance. I didn’t get much news while I was under cover and I assumed that things didn’t work out between them when he left the priesthood and became engaged to Kristen.”
His concern only for his son, Shawn asks to Caroline’s horror, “Son, are you saying you’ve come back to Salem to try again with Marlena?”
“That’s enough, Shawn,” Caroline says with an edge of anger in her voice. She takes a calming breath and then looks at Roman, there wasn’t an easy way to tell him the news, “There isn’t any point in answering your father’s question, Roman. John and Kristen were engaged but that ended and John and Marlena finally did get a chance to resolve their feelings for one another. They were married several days ago and are currently on their honeymoon.” “I see,” Roman says quietly and an uneasy silence falls on the trio. He takes a deep breath and asks, “Is she happy?” Caroline reaches over and places her hand over Roman’s, “Yes, she is.” Roman nods, “Then I’m happy for her. So, why don’t you tell me what the rest of the family has been up to?” Caroline knew that Roman wasn’t as happy as he pretended but she followed his lead as she and Shawn filled him in on the rest of the family.
***
Eric descends the staircase at the Black house and stops short of entering the living room when he hears Kit mention his father’s name and tells Bo and Hope of their meeting at the Brady Pub. Eric swears under his breath and quietly returns up the stairs. He locks himself in his room and picks up the phone and dials a long distance number. “Liz Curtis, please.” He waits impatiently until Liz finally comes on the line and says before she can get a word in edge-wise, “What are you up to, Liz?” “Eric, it’s so nice to hear from you again. What’s the matter, didn’t I leave Salem fast enough for you?” “You should never have come here in the first place. Did you know my father was returning to Salem?” “Roman’s back? Well, that does pose a problem for you, doesn’t it? He’s going to want to know *everything* you’ve been up to since he’s seen you last, isn’t he?” Eric’s hand tightens around the phone, “He isn’t going to find out unless you tell him.” Liz laughs, “On the contrary, Eric, I don’t have to say a word.” Her voice turns sober, “Our so-called friends are who you should be worrying about. If I were you, I’d confess everything before they catch up with you and you’re fooling yourself if you think they won’t.” Eric is suddenly concerned, “You don’t think they’ve figured out all ready that I’ve come to Salem, do you?” “Relax, Eric, they don’t have a clue where you’re hiding out, not yet anyway.” “You’ve heard from them?” “They were waiting for me when I got back to LA. It was lucky for both of us that I covered my tracks on my trip back and forth to Salem. As far as they know, I was in New York.” Eric is only slightly relieved, “What am I going to do, Liz? You know I don’t want to get the family involved in this. I got myself into this mess and it’s up to me to get myself out of it.” “That’s an admirable goal, Eric but not a very realistic one. Not with the type of people we’re dealing with. Promise me you won’t do anything foolish?” “Can’t promise that, you know what a fool I’ve been already.” Liz sighs, “Don’t beat yourself up over it, you didn’t have any idea of what you were getting in to and I didn’t find you soon enough to warn you. If you won’t tell your father, will you at least consider telling John and your mother when they return?” “Yes, I’ll consider it but I’m not making any promises. They have enough to worry about with Stefano DiMera on the loose and now my father’s return.” “That’s true, but consider it anyway,” Liz urges before she hangs up the phone. Eric hangs up the phone and walks over to the window and looks out over the lake. He was going to have to figure out how to avoid his father and that wouldn’t be an easy task. As for John and his mother, he’d wait to see how things were when they returned before he’d consider telling them anything.
***
Little did Eric know that Stefano DiMera was going to provide him with the reprieve from having to face his father any time soon. The moment Roman stepped out of the Brady Pub, Stefano’s men caught him unawares and dragged him off before any one could witness the abduction.
***
Marlena, standing at the rail of the yacht watching their dolphin escort frolicking in the ocean, leans back against John as she feels his arms slide around her waist. He says, “They’re considered good luck.” “Does that mean the rest of our trip will be uneventful?” Marlena asks hopefully. John chuckles, “Suppose to and considering we’re only a few hours away from our destination, I can’t imagine anything happening between now and then.” Marlena looks up at him, “You still haven’t told me where we’re going.” “I haven’t?” “No, you haven’t.” “Well then, Mrs. Black, I guess it’s time I told you.” He points to an island barely visible in the distance, “See that island out there?” She looks out towards the horizon, “Um hmm.” “That’s where we’re going.” “That tells me a lot. What island is it?” “It’s a private island.” She looks up at him again, “You didn’t?” John grins, “No, I didn’t but I was tempted to when Victor offered to sell it to me. And who knows, we might fall in love with the place and decide to buy it any way.” “As a vacation get-away for the family?” “Doesn’t that idea appeal to you, Doc?” “John, don’t you think a new, very large house and a yacht is enough for now?” “No but I won’t debate the issue with you right now. In fact, right now, I’m content just holding you in my arms.” “And I’m content to be here but there is something I’m missing.” “The children?” He guesses correctly. Marlena nods, “I can’t help but wonder what new antics Belle is up to, whether Brady and TJ have driven Kit into hiding, how Eric is adjusting to being back and Salem, how Carrie and Sami are doing….” John turns her so that she is facing him, “Would you feel better if we gave them a call when we get to the island?” Marlena smiles and nods again. John threads his hands through her hair, “Then that’s exactly what we’ll do the moment we step foot on the island.” Marlena slides her arms up around his neck, “And after that?” A teasing light enters John’s eyes, “Well, we’ll probably want to get our land legs back, so I thought, maybe, a hike around the island. I understand it’s great exercise and has flowers and wildlife you won’t see anywhere else in it’s natural unspoiled…” Marlena interrupts him, “John.” “Yes, sweetheart?” Marlena’s voice lowers seductively, “Wouldn’t you rather get some exercise by stripping your wife naked and going for a leisurely swim?” “Doc, if I strip you naked, it won’t be a leisurely swim.” “Promise?” He brushes his lips against hers, “Promise!”
***
Abe stops in at the Brady Pub before heading back to the police station, “Caroline, have you heard from Roman yet?” Caroline is surprised by the question, “Yes, he was here several hours ago. He said he was leaving to go to see you at the police station.” Abe frowns, “I haven’t been there yet today. If he showed up there, someone would have called me.” “I think he was a little upset when he left here. He might have gone to see the children first.” “You told him about John and Marlena then?” Caroline nods, “He said he was happy for her but I got the feeling that it was only a pretense. The last thing he’d heard, John was engaged to marry Kristen. I’m afraid he might have come back to Salem with the hopes of getting back together with Marlena.” Abe couldn’t tell Caroline the real reason Roman had returned to Salem and he didn’t want to think about the possibility that Roman had returned for Marlena, “Caroline, I know Roman. If he said he was happy for Marlena, then he meant it and I’m sure, by the time John and Marlena return, he’ll have gotten used to the idea that they’re together and will wish them all the best.” “I hope you’re right, Abe.” Abe hears the continuing doubt in Caroline’s voice and is suddenly worried that she might be right. If that were the case, Roman’s feelings for Marlena could very well jeopardize his mission. Abe seeks to reassure himself as well as Caroline. He gives her a hug, “Trust me, Caroline. You’ll see. Roman only wants what’s best for Marlena.”
***
John walks out of the spacious island house onto the patio to find Marlena sound asleep in a lounge chair beside the pool. He leans over and cups his hands together and scoops water out of the pool and then walks over and separates his hands over her. A startled Marlena sits up abruptly as the water hits her, “John Black, I’m going to…” John pulls her up from the chair and tilts her chin up with his hand, “You’re going to what?” She answers him by shoving him backward into the pool. When John resurfaces, she is stretched out in the lounge chair again, an innocent look on her face. “John, you really shouldn’t swim in your clothes.” “You’re right, Doc, I’d be much more comfortable out of my clothes.” He takes off his shirt and tosses it at Marlena. She swats it away and watches with interest as he removes the rest of his clothes and tosses them up on the patio. Marlena tries to pretend the sight of him doesn’t affect her in the least, “John, I thought we were going to call the children.” John props his arms on the side of the pool, “We were, but a certain wife of mine decided she’d rather get me out of my clothes before I could tell her the bad news.” Marlena sits up, “Oh no, don’t tell me we can’t call them.” “I’m afraid we can’t, Doc. It seems that the same storm that knocked out the communication system on the yacht damaged the one here on the island. There aren’t any spare parts on the island to fix it, so I’ve sent the yacht back to Hawaii to get the parts we need.” “You mean we’re here…all alone?” John grins and then swims away from the edge of the pool. Marlena watches him appreciatively as he swims a lap across the pool. He calls out from the far side of the pool, “Hey, Doc, what are you waiting for? An engraved invitation?” She shakes her head, “Nope.” He swims back towards her, “Then what?” Marlena stands and gathers up his clothes, “Oh, I’m sure you’ll remember sooner or later.” John is out of the pool and reaches her before she enters the house. He scoops her up in his arms and heads back to the pool, his clothes falling to the ground forgotten. “John, don’t you dare!” Without a word, he walks down the pool steps. “John, no!” He continues to ignore her as they reach the water. He sets her on her feet in the shallow end and runs his hands slowly down the length of her until he reaches the hem of her dress. “Prepare to be stripped, wife.” “Oh boy!” Marlena’s clothes join John’s clothes on the patio and with a laugh, she swims away from him. John dives under the water and catches her around the waist and pulls her under. His hand brushes against her breasts as he turns her and pulls her toward him for a kiss. They resurface, still kissing. When their lips part, they both gasp for air. John smoothes the wet hair back from Marlena’s face. “You do realize, this isn’t exactly what I had in mind?” Marlena puts her hands on his shoulders and falls against him, “No? And what exactly *did* you have in mind, Mr. Black?” John staggers a little, his voice slightly unsteady, “A little ‘From Here to Eternity’ reenactment on the beach.” Marlena smiles, “There’s always next time.” She lowers her mouth to his and gives him a slow lingering kiss, savoring every moment. Their desire for one another takes over and their love flows as the water swirls around them. The tropical paradise surrounding them dissolves away as their passion spins out of control and takes them to new heights until there is nothing left but the rippling waves of the aftermath of their lovemaking. Marlena leans her head against John’s chest as the water cools their heated flesh, and says breathlessly, “That…was our…’From here to Eternity.” “No…it wasn’t.” Marlena lifts her head and looks up at him, “What do you mean, no?” John’s hands sweep downward along her back, “That…” He kisses her nose, “…was…” He kisses the corner of her mouth, “…hurricane…” His lips brush hers, “…Marlena.” “Are you complaining?” He grins, “Baby, you can make landfall like that any time you want to.” His lips capture hers and he pulls her under the water.
Darkness had fallen outside as Marlena adds the finishing touches to her makeup. John had said he had to take care of something and told her he’d meet her in the living room after she’d gotten dressed – in her best evening gown. She was still wondering what he was up to.
After their little swim in the pool, they’d donned dry clothes and taken a walk around one side of the island and then returned to the house for a shower and a nap. A reminiscent smile curves her lips as she turns from the mirror and heads for the living room. From where he was standing in the shadows, John sucked in his breath as Marlena entered the living room.
Candles were lit everywhere and they enhanced her beauty and glimmered along the light beading on her blue gown, revealing a tanned leg up to her thigh where the gown parted on the side as she stepped into the center of the room.
John reaches behind him and turns on the stereo, the opening strains of “Afterall” fill the room.
He steps out of the darkness and holds out his hand to her, “May I have this dance?”
Marlena slips her hand into his and melts into his arms.
John whispers in her ear, “Just when I think you can’t be any more beautiful, you manage to take my breath away and prove me wrong.”
Marlena runs her hand along the lapel of his jacket, “And you should wear a tuxedo more often. You’re gorgeous.”
John chuckles, “Well, now that we’ve gotten our mutual admiration out of the way…tell me, Mrs. Black, are you happy?”
“What do you think?”
“Yes?”
“Um hmm, deliriously happy and you know, I think you were right.”
“Right about what?”
“The chance that we might fall in love with this island.”
“Are you saying you want me to buy it afterall?”
Marlena shakes her head, “No, but I wouldn’t mind visiting here again some day.”
“I’m sure Victor will let us visit here as often as we like but, Doc, you make it sound like our visit here is almost over. We still have *days* of water sports left ahead of us.”
Marlena laughs and a companionable silence falls between them as they finish their dance. When the music ends, John leads her over to a glass enclosed alcove bathed in moonlight where a small table, lit by several candles, is set for dinner.
Marlena looks at the table in surprise, “Oh my, you have been busy.”
John pulls out a chair for her, “Why don’t you sit down and I’ll show you just how busy I’ve been.”
“Okay.” John leans over and kisses her after she sits down and then moves to a bottle of champagne chilling on a side table. Marlena watches him as he pops the cork and pours the champagne, “John, when did you have time to do all this? It didn’t take me that long to get dressed.”
He grins at her, handing her a glass of champagne, “It’s a trade secret.”
“And you’re not going to share it with me?” John sits across from her, “Nope.”
He holds out his glass, “I’d rather drink a toast to my very beautiful, very sexy and very loving wife.”
Marlena touches her glass to his, “And I’d like to drink one to my very handsome, very sexy and very loving husband.”
They each take a drink of the champagne, their eyes never leaving each other.
Marlena sets down her glass, “So what other surprises do you have in store for me?”
John leans toward the table and Marlena jumps as she feels the warmth of his hand traveling up her leg to her thigh and stopping there.
“Just dinner, sweetheart.”
“Just dinner?” She asks with a catch in her voice.
John slowly removes his hand and nods as he gets to his feet, “Don’t go away now, I’ll be right back.”
He returns a short time later carrying several covered dishes on a tray. Marlena reaches out and runs her hand along the curve of his firm behind as he leans over to set the dishes on the table.
“You make a very enticing waiter.”
John almost drops the tray, “Doc, behave yourself.”
She withdraws her hand and smiles sweetly, then takes a sip of her champagne.
John manages to put the dishes on the table and remove their covers without mishap. He retakes his seat, his hand reaching for his tie, “I think it’s getting a little warm in here.”
Marlena’s smile widens, “Really? I hadn’t noticed. Would you like me to help you with that?”
“Would you?” Marlena rises and moves in front of him. As her hands are busy untying and removing his tie, John reaches up and runs his index finger slowly along the exposed upper curve of her breasts revealed above the gown,
“You make a very enticing valet.” Marlena shivers and steps away from him, dropping the tie in his lap.
“Feeling any cooler?” John grins at her and shakes his head no. Their eyes meet and hold.
“John, you do realize if I remove any more of your clothes, all your hard work will go to waste and I am hungry.”
“Me too.”
“For food, John.”
“For that too.” He reaches over to one of the plates and picks up a lobster, “Would you care for a lobster, Doc?” Marlena laughs softly, then retakes her seat, “I’d love a lobster.”
***
Marlena sets her napkin aside and leans back in her chair, “You’ve been holding out on me, John.”
“I have? How so?”
“Either you’ve learned to cook when I wasn’t looking or you have a chef stashed away someplace on the island. Please tell me, it’s the former.”
John picks up his champagne glass and twirls it between his fingers as he admires the play of candlelight through the liquid remaining in the glass, a smile touches his lips, “Relax, Doc, there weren’t any witnesses to our little *swim* this afternoon.”
“Then you really did do all this yourself?”
“Um hmm.”
“I’m impressed.”
John looks up at her, “You haven’t see the dessert yet.”
“There’s dessert too?” John sets down his glass and rises to his feet and holds out his hand to her,
“Why don’t we move into the living room?”
Marlena slips her hand in his and follows him into the living room. He leads her to one of the sofas.
“Have a seat, Doc and I’ll be right back.”
Before she relinquishes his hand, Marlena pulls John closer and leans in and brushes his lips with hers, “Don’t be gone too long.”
John returns a short time later with a small silver tray lined with rows of strawberries, a mound of whipped cream in the centre. He sets it on the coffee table in front of Marlena.
“Strawberries and whipped cream,” she says softly.
He grins, “Yep.”
“We haven’t had those in a very long…”
He leans down and places a finger on her lips, “No looking back.” She nods.
“Now, Marlena Evans-Black, are you ready for dessert?”
A glow enters her eyes, “I’m ready.”
John pulls her to her feet, “There’s something we have to do first.”
“There is?” He nods his head and turns her around so her back is facing him. He says softly in her ear as he slides the zipper of her gown open, “We have to remove our clothes.”
“We do?” John slides her gown off her shoulders and kisses her neck.
“Umm hmm because this isn’t *just* any dish of strawberries and whipped cream, this one is special.”
Marlena leans back against him, her voice a breathy whisper, “Special?”
John’s hands travel down the length of her as he pushes her gown from her, past her waist and over her hips. It slides unheededly to the floor,
“This one includes two very special ingredients.” Marlena turns in his arms and presses herself to him, a seductive smile on her lips,
“You and me?”
“You and me.”
After his last conversation with Caroline, Abe began searching for Roman. His concern for his old friend continued to grow when he discovered no one had seen him after he left the pub. There was only one place left he could think of to search, Roman and Marlena’s old house.
Abe knocks on the door. When he doesn’t get a response, he knocks again and calls out Roman’s name. A few moments later, the door opens. Roman is standing there in a bathrobe, toweling his wet hair. Abe’s look of relief is evident.
“What’s up, Abe?”
“You tell me, Roman. I’ve been searching for you all day. You were suppose to come by the station after you left the pub.”
Roman steps back and waves Abe in, “I had to take care of a few things first and decided to unpack and shower before I stopped by the station.” Roman turns to close the door and misses the odd look Abe gives him,
“Roman, I talked to Caroline earlier. She’s worried about you.”
“Because of the news about Marlena?”
Roman questions, as he turns to Abe. Abe nods, “She said she got the feeling you came back to Salem in the hopes of reuniting with Marlena.”
“And if I did?”
“Then I think the ISA should assign someone else to the case.”
Roman’s face suffuses with anger, “I’m very capable of handling this case, Abe. Marlena or no Marlena.”
“Roman, we’re friends and I know what a blow it must have been hearing that Marlena and John were married when you’d been expecting to find her free. Can you honestly tell me you can put your feelings aside that easily and concentrate on finding Stefano?”
“Is that what our friendship has boiled down to, Abe? My finding Stefano? I never thought the job would come before the friendship.”
Abe is taken aback, “Is that what you think?”
Roman shrugs, “Maybe you’re just trying to protect John and Marlena.”
“Yes, I am, that is what this case is all about. Catching Stefano and protecting John and Marlena until we do. I’m worried that your feelings for Marlena, or animosity towards John, could cause you to become distracted…careless. We *are* dealing with Stefano here buddy and any slip-ups at all can compromise their safety … and your own.”
Roman laughs, “I’m a big boy, Abe. I can take care of myself. And if it will make you feel any better, I can assure you my feelings for Marlena won’t interfere with the case.”
Somehow, Abe isn’t reassured but keeps it to himself, “Are you still planning to come down to the station? I’ve had the files pulled for you to look over.”
“You don’t mind if I put that off until tomorrow morning, do you? I’d like to see my children first. Then the case will have my full attention.” “Tomorrow morning is fine. I’ll see you then,”
Abe heads for the door and turns back, “By the way, welcome home, Roman.” Abe leaves. Roman stares thoughtfully at the closed door, a slow smile curves his lips.
***
After sleeping in late the next morning,
John and Marlena spent the afternoon hiking up the mountain leading to the other side of the island. Marlena brushes the dampness from her forehead, “John, are you sure this camping idea is such a good one? Wouldn’t we have been more comfortable staying at the house?” John looks back at her and grins, “You should have thought of that before you agreed to it.”
“I was only humoring you.” His grin widens,
“I know.” He shifts the camping gear on his back and stops as the trail they’d been following opens onto a slight clearing. In the center is a crystal blue pool of water fed by a waterfall and surrounded by lush greenery and tropical flowers.
“Doc, I think I’ve found our camp site.” Marlena glances up at the sky, “And just in time, it’s almost dark.”
John drops the camping gear and turns to her. “That wasn’t sarcasm I just heard in your voice, was it?”
“Not at all,” Marlena replies lightly as she walks past him. John catches up to her at the edge of the pond, “All right, Doc, what is it?”
Marlena turns to him, “You drag me up the side of a mountain most of the day and you have to ask?” John tries to humor her,
“Would it help if I pointed out it’s all down hill on the return trip?” Marlena glares at him. John tries again,
“Okay, so I should have warned you what I meant by hiking to our camp site but you have to admit this is a lot better surroundings than our last camping trip.” Marlena looks around,
“You know, you’re right. No land minds, no KGB hideout, no one chasing us…it’s a little dull, don’t you think?”
A wary look enters John’s eyes, “Doc, is this another one of your mood swings?” Marlena shakes her head and manages a weak smile. “What’s wrong, sweetheart?” Marlena turns away from him, “Nothing’s wrong.” John puts his hands on her shoulders and turns her back towards him.
He notices how pale she’s become, “I’m not buying it, Marlena. You were too quiet on most of the hike up here, you’re obviously not happy about being here and you don’t look well. I want to know what’s going on.” “I’m just…a little…” Her body goes limp under his hands and she falls against him. Fear enters John’s eyes as he eases Marlena to the ground. He checks her pulse and finds it strong but erratic.
He tears off his shirt and dunks it into the water and runs it gently along Marlena’s forehead and cheeks, “Marlena, can you hear me?” She stirs slightly, then moans. “Come on, sweetheart, open your eyes.” Marlena’s eyes flutter open, “John?” He tosses his shirt aside and gathers her into his arms, “I’m right here, Doc.” “What happened?” John gently caresses her hair, “You fainted on me.” “I did?” He nods,
“And scared the hell out of me. Sweetheart, why didn’t you tell me you weren’t feeling well? I wouldn’t have brought you up here if I’d known.”
“Well, I was feeling fine when we left the house. It wasn’t until we were over half way here that I didn’t and I thought it would pass.” “And I suppose you wouldn’t have said a word if you hadn’t fainted?”
Marlena smiles ruefully, “You had your heart so set on this camping trip, I didn’t want to spoil it for you.” “Damn it, Marlena, you’re more important to me than any camping trip. If I’d have known you weren’t feeling well, I’d have carried you back down the mountain.” Marlena shakes her head and says teasingly, “John, I don’t think your back would have held up this time.” John frowns at her and then says abruptly, “As soon as the yacht returns, we’re going home.”
Marlena sits up, “What do you mean we’re going home?” John captures her chin in his hand, “Don’t bother trying to talk me out of it, Doc.” She pulls her chin from his grasp, “John, you’re blowing this all out of proportion.” “You’re not taking this seriously enough.” “I was seasick and fainted once.” “Oh, and I suppose now you’re going to tell me you’re feeling wonderful?” “I will be as soon as I’ve had something to eat and gotten a good night’s sleep.”
John rises and moves over to the camping gear, “Fine, I’ll feed you, then tuck you into the sleeping bag and tomorrow we’ll go back to the house and start packing.” Marlena picks up John’s discarded shirt and rises and moves up behind him, “John, we don’t have to cut our honeymoon short.” John sighs, “Doc, don’t argue with me on this, okay? I’m feeling bad enough for not realizing you weren’t up to this camping trip. I’m taking you back to Salem so you can see a doctor, end of discussion.”
Marlena slides her arms around him and lays her cheek against his back, “All right, I won’t argue with you any more tonight.” John turns in her arms and grins, “Thank you, sweetheart, for that small concession.” He kisses her lightly on the lips, “Now, why don’t you have a seat someplace while I get a fire started. In case you haven’t noticed, we only have about 10 minutes of daylight left.” “Which is why you’re going to let me help you gather the firewood.” “Doc…” Marlena places her hand over his mouth, “If I can’t argue, you can’t argue.” She releases him and with a soft laugh, moves out of his reach and begins collecting wood.
***
John adds more wood to the fire he’d built earlier, then joins Marlena in the sleeping bag. She snuggles back against him as his arm slides around her waist. “Doc, are you still awake?” “Um hmm.” She rolls over to face him and says sleepily, “Something on your mind?” John props his head on his right hand and reaches up and caresses her cheek with his left, “I’ve been doing some thinking.” She yawns, then says, “You’ve been doing a lot of that lately. It could be dangerous.”
John taps her nose lightly, “Now who’s the comedian?” Her smile revealed in the glow of the firelight warmed his heart. “Tell me,” she manages before another yawn takes her. “Maybe this should wait until you’re more awake.” “I’m awake enough,” she says convincingly. John is silent a moment, as if trying to pull his thoughts together, then says, “I’m seriously considering going back into police work.” “I know how much you’ve missed being a cop.” “It’s not exactly the Salem P.D. that I had in mind.” “No?” “No.” Marlena’s reply is another yawn as her eyes close. John smiles to himself. “Actually, I thought I’d join the foreign legion and drag you along as a camp follower.” He barely hears her, “Okay” as she relaxes completely against him, sound asleep.
***
John wakes up the next morning and finds himself alone. He sits up instantly and looks around, seeing no sign of Marlena. He tosses back the top of the sleeping bag and jumps to his feet. “She wouldn’t have been crazy enough to go back down the mountain by herself, would she?” And then he spots her blouse, lying in the dirt, three feet away. Another three feet beyond that, her jeans.
Curiosity, overcame the panic that had been setting in as he follows her trail of clothes to the edge of the pond. Her soft laughter floats across the water and wraps around him. He looks up in time to see her emerge from beneath the waterfall and dive into the pond. John couldn’t get his own clothes off fast enough and then he was in the pond with her.
Marlena was waiting for him when he surfaced. She slides her arms around his neck, “Good morning.” John’s arms close around her, “Is this your way of telling me that your prescription for a good night’s sleep was all you needed to feel better?” Marlena smiles, “Are you convinced?” John grins as his hands slide down her back, “You certainly *feel* pretty good to me.” His grin fades, “But I haven’t changed my mind about going home, sweetheart. I still want you to see a doctor.”
Marlena plays with the hair at the nape of his neck, “I’ve been thinking about that.” “And?” “I agree, it’s time we went home. I miss the children, but I’d like to make a stop on the way home.” “I’m listening.” “Would you mind if we made a stop in Colorado?” John chuckles, “It was all ready on the agenda, Doc. I knew you’d want to see your parents again and I had a feeling you wanted to talk to them about Eric after his unexpected performance at our wedding.” “So you were curious about that too, were you?”
John nods, “I think he’s hiding something and I think we should find out what it is.” “I do too, John, but he might not want us to interfere.” “He’ll never have to know and besides, he might be ready to talk by the time we get back to Salem.” John lifts her in his arms, “And now, Mrs. Black, I’d like to find out what it’s like to make love to my wife under a waterfall.” “Before you do, there is something I wanted to ask you.” John rolls his eyes, “If you insist.” Marlena bites the inside of her cheek to suppress her laughter. “Do you really want me to be your camp follower while you chase across deserts with the Foreign Legion?” John grins, “That sunk in, did it?”
Marlena nods and John continues, “You mean you can’t picture yourself on the back of a camel or mending my uniforms or slaving over a hot open camp fire to cook my meals?” Marlena manages to keep a straight face, “Can you picture yourself buried in sand to the neck while the ants surround you, drooling at the tastiest morsel they’ve ever seen?” ” “I see your point.” “I thought you would. Now, about making love to your wife under the waterfall….”
By late afternoon, Abe had given up on seeing Roman return to the office. He calls Lexie and arranges to spend a quiet evening alone with her, without interruptions. They both leave their pagers behind and head out of town to a quiet restaurant. John hangs up the ship-to-shore phone and looks over at a pale, anxious Marlena and shakes his head, “I can’t reach Abe and I don’t want to risk calling the house until I know what’s going on.” “I was hoping we’d be able to talk to the children.” John moves to her side and slides his arm around her waist, “I know you were, sweetheart. We’ll try to reach Abe again tomorrow and if he says everything is all right, we’ll call the kids then, okay?” Marlena nods but can’t hide her sudden worry, “You think something is wrong, don’t you?” John leads her out of the communication room, “Not exactly, but I do have this feeling that we should continue to take every precaution.”
Marlena sighs, “So do I.” John stops and turns her to face him, he tilts her chin up with his hand, “You look tired, Doc. Why don’t you go take a nap?” He adds with a grin, “I promise not to wake you this time.” Marlena smiles wanly, “You didn’t hear me complain, did you?” John’s grin widens, “Not unless you’ve taken to moaning your complaints.” Marlena looks around quickly, “John!” “Don’t worry, Doc, no one is within earshot.” He brushes her lips with his, “Go take a nap and I’ll see you at dinner.” He watches her leave, a worried frown creasing his brow. He wasn’t going to wait until they reached Salem to get Marlena to a doctor and with that in mind, he returns to the communication room and places a call to Colorado.
***
Sami opens the door when Eric’s knock announces his arrival at the Brady house. She beams at him, “Come on in, Dad’s in the kitchen.” Eric looks around the house, seeing it again for the first time since he’d gone to Colorado when he was younger, “The place hasn’t changed, has it?” Sami frowns at him, “Of course it has, mom and dad aren’t married any more.” “That’s not what I meant, Sami and you don’t need to get defensive.” “Defensive about what?” Roman asks as he emerges from the kitchen. “Nothing,” Eric replies as he camps out on the sofa. Sami moves to her father’s side and links her arm through his, “Eric was just commenting on how the house hasn’t changed. I haven’t told him yet that I’m moving back in.” Eric remains silent. “You should think about it too, Eric,” Sami adds. “Sami, why don’t you check on dinner while I talk to Eric.”
Sami glances at her brother then her father and finally nods and leaves the room. Roman moves to the sofa and sits next to Eric, “I’m glad you decided to come over tonight, Eric.” Eric shrugs, “You practically ordered me here, so I came.” Roman sighs, “I thought you might have come here because you wanted to.” “Sure, that too but not if you’re going to try to talk me into moving in.” Roman shakes his head, “No, I won’t try and I’ll keep Sami from pressuring you too. All I want is to enjoy and evening with you and your sister.” “I’d like that too, Dad.” Roman’s next question catches Eric off guard, although he should have expected it, “How is your mom?” “She’s uh…she’s fine.” “Son, you don’t have to be afraid to discuss her with me. I know she’s married to John now, but I still love her. I always will and I want her to be happy.” Eric is still wary, “She is happy, Dad.” “Do you know when they’re coming home? I want to be around to congratulate them.” Eric shakes his head, “No, no one knows.”
Sami emerges from the kitchen, “Dad, I think the food is done.” Roman rises to his feet, “How bout you and Eric set the table while I bring the food out?” The twins nod their agreement and Sami hisses at Eric the moment Roman disappears into the kitchen, “The least you could do is look happy to be here.” Eric glances at the closed kitchen door as he and Sami set the table, “Why pretend to be something I’m not?” “He’s your father, Eric.” “You don’t have to remind me of that, Sami but I don’t know him anymore.” “And you won’t if you don’t give him a chance.” “I’m here, aren’t I?” Their conversation ends as Roman returns from the kitchen carrying a tray laden with food, “I hope you two are hungry. I have enough food here to feed an army.” Sami glares at Eric then turns to her father, “I’m starved, Daddy.”
***
Marlena awakens from her nap to find evening had arrived and the room dimly lit with only the cabin’s recessed lighting. Her glance falls on John, seated in a chair next to the bed watching her. She smiles at him, “How long have you been there?” John turns on the beside light, then reaches over and smoothes the hair back from her cheek, noticing how pale and tired she still looked, and returns her smile, “Not long. How are you feeling?” “Hungry.” His smile widens to a grin, “I thought you might be.”
Marlena starts to get up. John pushes her back against the pillows, “You stay right there.” “Now what are you up to?” “Why do you always think I’m up to something?” John asks as he crosses the room. Marlena laughs softly, “Aren’t you always?” John doesn’t answer her as he opens the cabin door and signals to someone outside. He closes the door, walks back to the bedside and leans over and kisses her, “Not always but in this instance, yes, I am. I intend to serve you dinner in bed.” She starts to protest, “John, I’m quite capable….” He kisses her again to silence her, “Humor me.” “Okay.” A soft knock on the door interrupts them.
John calls out for the person to enter and one of the crew members arrives pushing a cart laden with food. John directs him over to the table, “You can leave it there.” The crew member nods and then silently withdraws. As John moves to the cart, Marlena sits up more comfortably in bed, “I think I might like this after all.” “Now how did I know you’d change your mind?” “Oh no! I’m not becoming too predictable, am I?” John returns to her side and sets a plate of food in her lap, amusement in his voice, “No, Doc, predictable is not a word I’d use to describe you these days.” He goes back to the cart to serve up his own plate.
Marlena takes a bite of food, then says, “And what is that suppose to mean?” “It means…you’re pretty unpredictable but I’m not complaining. I’m getting used to your little surprises. Looking forward to them, in fact.” “You mean my mood swings, don’t you?” John joins her on the bed and flashes her a grin, “Those too.” She leans over and kisses him, “You tell the sweetest lies.” “But you love me anyway, right?” “I don’t know, I’ll have to think about that one,” she says teasingly, then takes another bite of food. “Done thinking yet?” Marlena nods, “Yep, I love you anyway.”
John’s voice turns serious, “Good, then are you ready to hear a decision I’ve made?” “You’ve made another one without me?” “‘fraid so, sweetheart.” Marlena sighs, “Maybe you’d better tell me.” “I’ve made arrangements for you to see a doctor when we arrive in Colorado.” “It’s not going to do me any good to argue about this one, is it?” John shakes his head no. “Then I won’t because I know it’s the only way you’ll be convinced that nothing is wrong with me.” “That’s right. Now finish your dinner.” Marlena eyes the food left on her plate, then looks at John, “Do you want to wear what’s left of my dinner?” John grins, “Will you bathe me afterwards?”
Marlena shakes her head, “No, you’d enjoy that too much.” “And you wouldn’t?” “No, not at all,” she lies badly, then pops another bite of food into her mouth.
Abe is surprised, late the next morning, when he enters his office to find Roman seated behind his desk, feet propped up, going through Stefano’s file. Roman glances up briefly, “Good morning, Abe. You’re late.” Abe removes his overcoat and hangs it up,
“I had an appointment with the mayor and the commissioner. You seem to be in a better mood today.” Roman closes the file and sets it on the desk, then swings his feet down,
“I had dinner with Eric and Sami last night. I can’t say it went all that well, but it’s a start. I’ve been going through the file, it looks like Stefano’s been busy while I’ve been gone.” Abe nods, “And as elusive as ever. Come up with any ideas on where to look for him?” Roman shakes his head, “Not yet.
When are Marlena and John due back?” “I don’t know. John and I agreed it would be better if no one knew their plans. Less chance of Stefano finding out.” Roman frowns, “What if someone needed to get in touch with them?” “John has been keeping in touch. Although, I haven’t heard from them in a few days.” “And that doesn’t concern you?” Abe shakes his head, “No, their means of communication was knocked out by a storm. I’m sure I’ll hear from him again soon.” “I’d like you to pin him down on their return, Abe. I want to make sure full security is in force on the day of their arrival.” “I don’t think that’s a good idea, Roman. Security is all ready pretty tight and if we increase it, that’s going to alert Stefano.” “Maybe, but it’ll guarantee he can’t get to them.”
“I’ll run it by John and see what he says.”
Roman rises to his feet, “Until then, I’m going to check up on a few leads.” The moment Roman walks out the door, Abe’s phone rings. “Carver, here.” “Abe, its John.” “Hey partner, I was wondering when I was going to hear from you again. How’s Marlena?” “It’s funny you should ask that, Abe. She hasn’t been feeling well the past few days.” Abe remembers his conversation with Mike of a few days ago, “John, I ran into Mike Horton after you left and he said he needed to talk you and Marlena and it sounded pretty urgent.”
John is unable to hide the concern in his voice, “Did he say what it was about?” “He wouldn’t go into details but did say something showed up in Marlena’s pre-marital blood test.” Abe pauses then continues, “There is something else you should know.” John sighs, “If it’s more bad news, Abe, I’d rather it waited until we got back.” “I’m not sure this can wait, John. It’s about that agent the ISA was sending – it’s Roman and he’s back in Salem.” John is silent for a moment before he asks, “How did he handle the news?” “To tell you the truth, John, I’m not sure. I haven’t seen that much of him since he’s been here. Are you going to tell Marlena?” “Yes. A part of her still loves him and she’ll need time to prepare herself for seeing him again. I just hope Roman doesn’t make it difficult for her.” Abe can tell by John’s voice that Roman will be looking for trouble if he upsets Marlena in any way and John knew by Abe’s silence that he was afraid Roman might.
John breaks the silence, “You have anything else for me?” “One last thing. Roman wanted to know when you were returning so he could increase the security.” “Not a good idea, Abe. That will definitely alert Stefano.” “I did point that out to Roman but he thinks the extra security will insure yours and Marlena’s safety.” John’s voice is firm, “We stick to the plan, Abe. Roman may not like it but I’m not taking *any* chances where Marlena is concerned. He, of all people, should understand that.” “I agree and I’ll pass it on to him. Say hello to Marlena for me and tell her the children are fine. I’ll see the two of you when you get back.” “I will and thanks, Abe.” Abe hangs up the phone, a frown mars his brow. He had the feeling that Roman was not going to like John’s decision.
***
John joins Marlena at the rail as Hawaii comes in to view in the distance. His heart turns over as she smiles at him, despite her pallor, “As much as I love the yacht, I’ll be glad when we’re on solid ground again.” He slides and arm around her waist and returns her smile, “Me too.” “Did you reach, Abe?” John nods, “Um hmm.” “And?” “He said to say hello and the children are fine.” Marlena is relieved, “I’ve been worried about them.” John gives her a reassuring hug, “They’re in good hands, Doc.” “I know but I worry about them any way. Did he have any other news?”
John looks out over the water, “Yes, he had other news.” Marlena turns to face him, “From the tone of your voice, it’s not good news.” He looks at her, “That all depends on how you look at it, honey.” She rests her hands on his chest, “If you’re trying to find a way to break it to me gently, don’t. I can handle it.” His hands come up and cover hers, “Roman is back in Salem.
He’s the agent the ISA sent.” “Then he knows…” Her voice trails off. “That we’re married? Yes, he knows.” Marlena buries her face against his chest, trying to hide her hurt but unable to keep it from her voice, “Oh John, it must have been a blow for him to come home and find out like that, especially after I tried everything to convince him not to leave me. What if he believes that I didn’t…” She can’t finish. John caresses her hair, wishing he could take away some of the pain she was feeling at the moment, “If you’re thinking that Roman is going to believe that you never loved him, don’t. He knew, Marlena, but he’s a proud man and he needed to distance himself from everything to heal and to come to terms with the decision he’d made to live his life without you.”
Marlena takes a deep steadying breath, and looks up at John, “I didn’t want him to find out that way. I was hoping to be the one to break it to him, to let him know that a part of me still loves him and always will and that I finally admitted to myself what he’d been trying to tell me all along – that I did love you and wanted you in my life in a way that he couldn’t be any more.” “You’ll still be able to tell him that, Doc.” “Yes, I can. Did Abe say how he took the news? How the children handled his coming home? Anything?” John shakes his head, “He hasn’t seen much of Roman since he’s been in town but having been in Roman’s shoes before, I can pretty much guess how he took the news. It’s not going to be easy for him, at first, to see the two of us together.” Marlena slides her hands around him and hugs him to her, “You’re worried about his reaction, aren’t you?”
John holds her tightly, “Yes, I am but more for your sake. You’ve had to deal with so much these past few months and I wanted our return home to be a happy, peaceful one for you.” Marlena smiles up at him, “It will be and once we’re settled back in, I’ll talk to Roman. Once he sees how happy I am, we are…I’d like him to be a part of our lives for the children’s sake.” John nods, “I’d like that too.”
Marlena’s smile fades, “I hear a ‘but’ in there.” John sighs, “Baby, I just don’t want you to get your hopes up that things will happen over night. Roman might have given you up when he left Salem, but he knew you were still free – that there still might be hope for the two of you.” Marlena finishes for him, “And finding out that you and I are married ended any hopes he might have had.”
John nods. “I know and I know, too, that it will be more of an adjustment for you and Roman but the two of you were friends once. I think you can be again, eventually and I’m sure Roman isn’t going to want to do anything to jeopardize the case.” John nods, “Yes, we do have a common goal – protecting you and capturing Stefano and seeing that he is put away once and for all.” He reaches up and smothers a fake yawn, and changes the subject, “Now, what do you say to a little nap before we get ready to dock in Hawaii?” Marlena laughs softly, “We haven’t been out of bed more than an hour. Are you sure a ‘little nap’ is what you had in mind?” John grins, “Okay, so I had more than a ‘little nap’ in mind. After all, I was deprived of my exercise this morning.” “Is that what you’re calling it now?” John nods at a passing crew member then scoops her up in his arms and whispers in her ear, “Nothing gets my heart going and the blood pumping like making mad, passionate love to my wife does.”
***
Stefano, seated behind his desk picks up the phone the moment it rings, “What do you have for me?” He listens to the voice at the other end with growing anger, then says, “I do not want to hear that you have nothing! Useless information gets me no where. Do not call me again until you have something.” He slams the phone back into its cradle, “Damn you, John Black. You may think you have out smarted me this time but you are in for a few surprises when you return.” He laughs suddenly his anger evaporating, “Yes, you and the lovely Marlena will not even realize what is happening until it is too late.”
***
Later that evening, after an uneventful flight to Colorado, John takes Marlena directly to the hospital despite her protests that seeing the doctor could wait until morning.
They are in the examining room waiting for the doctor. “No, Marlena, it can’t wait.” “Do you want to tell me why it’s suddenly so urgent that I see the doctor tonight?” John takes her hand in his, “When I talked to Abe earlier, he had a message from Mike. Something showed up in your pre-marital blood test. I’ve tried to reach Mike all day but he can’t be located and hasn’t called me back” “Why didn’t you tell me earlier?” “I didn’t want to upset you.” “And you didn’t think rushing me to the doctor without any warning the moment the plane landed would upset me?” “I’m sorry, sweetheart, I guess I wasn’t thinking. I’ve been so worried about you, all I could think of was getting you to a doctor as soon as we arrived.” Marlena says lightly, “I’m sure it’s nothing more than the flu and you’re going to look pretty silly when the doctor confirms it.” “Don’t try to brush this off, Marlena. Mike wouldn’t have asked Abe to pass along that message if it was something as simple as the flu.”
The doctor arrives at that moment and the pair fall silent, as he says, “I’m Dr. Fields. The nurse gave me your message, Mr. Black and I did get in touch with Dr. Horton in Salem.” Marlena is unable to hide her fears any longer as her hand tightens on John’s, “What did he say?” “Before I say anything further, I’d like to run a blood test and examine you first, Mrs. Black. Mr. Black, if you’ll step outside until I’ve finished the examination…” John looks at Marlena and she tries to give him a reassuring smile and nods that it’s okay. He kisses her, and then says, “I’ll be right outside, Doc.”
John paces the hall for what seems like forever and casts worried glances at the closed door of the examining room. He watches as the lab technician comes and goes. He watches as a nurse enters the room and emerges a short time later and then returns to the room again five minutes after that, with what appears to be the lab results in her hand. By the time the nurse and doctor emerge, their faces unreadable, John is frantic. Before John can say anything, the doctor tells him that his wife had requested to be the one to tell him the results of the blood test and examination. John closes his eyes and says a short prayer, then takes a deep breath and enters the examining room to find Marlena in tears.
John rushes to Marlena’s side and cradles her in his arms. He feels her trembling and asks with quiet urgency, “What is it, Marlena? What did the doctor say?” Marlena pulls back a little and cradles his face in her hands. It dawns on John that Marlena is trembling with laughter and her tears are ones of relief. “You can relax, John, I’m not dying of some dread disease…I’m only pregnant.” Relief fills John’s face as he leans his forehead against hers, “Thank God, I was so afraid…” He jerks back, “What did you just say?” Marlena smiles and says calmly, “You’re going to be a daddy again.”
John is speechless. Marlena laughs happily, “Yea, that was my reaction too. Although, I should have known. It’s not like I haven’t been in this condition before. I don’t remember being so weak and tired during the first trimester of my other pregnancies. Dr. Fields said my iron was low, so that would explain…”
John suddenly pulls Marlena closer and shuts her up with a kiss that takes her breath away. When their lips part, he says, “Do you know how much I love you?” Marlena nods, “Yes, I do and I love you just as much. Does this mean you’re happy about the news?” John grins from ear to ear, “Doc, I’m thrilled about the news.” His grin fades as he takes her hands in his and raises one of them at a time and turns them over and plants a kiss in each palm, “I wasn’t there for you when you were pregnant with Belle.” He places a hand on her belly, a tear slides down his cheek, “I didn’t get to feel her growing inside you, her first kick…”
Marlena reaches up and brushes the tear from his cheek, “You were there to bring her into this world, John and you breathed life back into her when she couldn’t breathe on her own. And now, we have a new life to cherish and nurture together and I promise you, you won’t miss a single moment.” John nods, and Marlena continues, “And just think of how happy Belle will be when she gets her wish for a new baby!” John chuckles, “Yes, there is that. After all, she already has the nursery picked out. So have you figured out when it happened?” Marlena nods, “That first night at the cabin.” John’s grin returns, “Well, that *was* a very special night.”
Marlena’s face suddenly drains of color, “John, Belle came down with the measles at that time. That must be why Mike was so concerned.” John pales, but does his best to reassure her, “Marlena, don’t start thinking the worst. We’ll have whatever tests done that are necessary when we get back to Salem and I know in my heart that everything will be fine. You have to believe that too.” “I’ll try.” John holds her close, “Doc, you have to do more than try, because if you don’t you’re going to make yourself sick with worry.” Marlena nods, “I know.” A silence falls between them as they hold each other. Finally, Marlena breaks the silence, “John, I don’t want to tell anyone until after the tests are done.” “Not even your parents? They know we came straight to the hospital, we have to tell them something.” Marlena sighs, “You’re right, we’ll have to tell them.” John breathes a silent sigh of relief. He knows Marlena will need another woman’s strength and understanding and who better than her mother to give it to her. John doesn’t know, yet, that it won’t be enough to ease her fears.
***
The next morning, John awakens to find himself alone. Concerned, he hurriedly dresses and goes in search of her. His mother-in-law tells him that Marlena has gone for an early morning walk and hasn’t come back yet, “She needed some time to herself, John. She’ll come back when she’s ready.” John nods and goes out to the porch and sits on the porch swing to wait for her.
***
Marlena, seated beside a brook she and her twin, Samantha had spent so many hours picnicking by when they were children, dips her hand in the water and sighs.
“It’s strange, Sam, but I can still feel your presence here. We had so many wonderful times here together when we were children. So much in my life has changed since you’ve been gone. I’m happier now than I’ve ever been in my life. I know you thought that my future would always be with Roman, and at one time, I did too. But John came along and the love we share has transcended every thing and every one.” Marlena looks at the mountains in the distance, “
He fills my life with so much love, so much happiness, sometimes more than I thought I ever deserved. When I’m with him, I know anything is possible.” She brushes a tear from her cheek, “And now we’re going to have another child – a child I want more than I can tell you. Oh, Sam, I wish I could describe to you the joy on his face when I told him the news but then, maybe you did see it. And maybe…you know, too, that I’m facing the possibility of losing this child. Losing DJ was devastating but I survived it. I don’t know if I can survive this.”
Her glance falls back to the water rippling in the morning sun, “But most of all, I’m worried about how this loss would affect John. He’s lost so much in his life and he’s finally regained the people he once believed were lost to him forever but he’s never lost a child. Never felt the helplessness, the anger, the emptiness. His children mean so much to him. There isn’t anything he wouldn’t do to protect them and keep them safe. And in this case, he would be powerless because its out of our hands.”
She closes her eyes for a moment, then looks down at her wedding rings, “He has so much faith and he believes that the baby will be fine and I want to believe that too. I need to believe that but then I remember DJ and my faith slips.” She sighs again, “I don’t know why I’m burdening you with all of this. I guess…I guess I was just looking for some kind of reassurance that my fears are groundless and everything *will* be all right.” A warm, strong pair of arms encircle her and John whispers in her ear, “You said it yourself, Marlena – when we’re together any thing is possible. We’re going to make it through this and I *know* our baby is going to make it through this too.”
Marlena leans her head against his and reaches up and lays her hand on his cheek, “How did you know I needed you at this moment?” “Your mother told me you’d gone for a walk and I decided to wait on the porch swing for you, to give you the time you needed to be alone. Then I felt your pain and uncertainty and I knew you needed me.” He turns her in his arms and threads his hands through her hair, “Don’t you know by now that I’ll always know when you need me and I’ll always be here for you?” Marlena’s tears fall freely, “I do know that, I do.”
His thumbs brush at her tears, “Doc, you are the single, most important thing in my life and I would give my life if I could, to protect you from facing the possibility of losing another child, but I can’t. I can only believe in God and our love and with you by my side, that gives me the faith and courage to face anything, to believe any thing is possible.” Marlena can’t help but ask, “John, what if we lose this baby?”
John’s voice doesn’t waver, “We’ll still have each other and the family we’ve already created and we’ll mourn our loss together and we’ll become closer and stronger because of it. But I don’t believe we’ll have to face that.” He smiles tenderly, “I truly believe that this time next year, we’ll be holding our baby in our arms and explaining to Belle why the baby can’t carry on a meaningful conversation with her, play dolls with her or even join her in her latest escapades – while Brady and TJ fight over who is going to be their new sibling’s protector.” Marlena smiles at that, “Yes, I can see that happening too.” She wraps her arms around his neck, “Thank you.” “I didn’t do anything, Marlena. Just reminded you of what you already knew in here…”
He points to her head. “…and in here.” He points to her heart. “And you don’t think you deserve thanks for that?” “Well, if you want to thank me, I can think of other ways you could do it.” “John! My father is out here some place.” John shakes his head and laughs, “Why do you always assume I’m thinking about making love to you?” “Aren’t you?” “Um, yes, but not at this very second.” “Then what are you thinking about?” “Food! Your mother was whipping up one helluva breakfast when I left the house.” “Well, now that you mention it, I’m pretty hungry myself.” John grins and Marlena adds quickly, “For food.”
John rises to his feet and pulls her up beside him and leans over and gives her a gentle, stirring kiss, then says, “How bout a race?” Marlena laughs, “You’ll lose.” “You think so, do you?” “I know so.” Without another word, John races for the house. Marlena takes the shortcut.
Abe is sitting at his desk going through some paperwork when Roman arrives. He hadn’t seen or heard from Roman since their last meeting before John called the other day and that bothered him. He sets aside his paperwork and leans back in his chair, “I was wondering when I was going to see you again.”
Roman makes himself comfortable in a chair across from Abe’s desk, “I was out of town following up on a few leads.” “Did you come up with anything?” Roman shakes his head, “They were all dead ends. Where ever Stefano is hiding, he’s made sure no one will find him. Have you heard from John and Marlena?” “As a matter of fact, John called right after you left the other day.” Roman waits a moment to see if Abe is going to volunteer any more information, and frowns when he doesn’t, “And? Did you propose my idea to him?”
Abe nods, “He didn’t like it and I have to agree with him.” Abe doesn’t miss the momentary flare of anger that crosses Roman’s features before Roman says calmly enough, “Why? I thought the two of you would be more concerned than you seem to be in insuring that Marlena is fully protected.” “We are and that’s why there won’t be any increased security. We may not know where Stefano is but we do know that he is very much aware of everything that is happening here in Salem. One single change in the plan will alert him.” Roman’s voice raises a notch, “For God’s sake, Abe, this is Marlena we’re talking about. The least you can do is tell me what the plan is.” Abe gives him a strange look, “We’re also talking about John, Roman and as far as the plan goes, I don’t even know what it is other than my end of things here in Salem and you’ve already been briefed on those.”
Roman jumps to his feet and paces the room in frustration, “Then we aren’t going to know when they’ll arrive until they’re here, is that it?” “That about sums it up, and John did say something else I agreed with – he said he wouldn’t take any chances where Marlena was concerned and you of all people should understand why.” That brings Roman to a standstill and he gives himself a mental shake. His anger falls away and he turns to Abe, his voice calmer, “Yes, I do understand.” And without another word, he leaves the office. Abe stares at the closed door, a thoughtful expression on his face.
***
That evening, the Black house is in an uproar when Belle turns up missing. Hope is trying to calm a tearful Brady while Kit, Bo,
TJ and Eric search the house and grounds for her. The phone rings and before Hope can answer it, it stops ringing. Upstairs, seated in the middle of her parent’s bed, Belle cradles the phone against her ear, “Hi!.” Her face lights up like a Christmas tree when she hears her father’s voice, “Belle, is that you?” “Daddy!” John chuckles, “What are you doing answering the phone?”
Belle makes herself more comfortable on the bed, “Belle hiding you room. Miss mommy and daddy.” “We miss you too, sweetheart.” “Come home. You gone too long.” “We’ll be home real soon, I promise. Your mommy wants to talk to you.” Belle nods. “Belle?” Belle grins, “Hi Mommy.” “Are you being a good girl?” Belle shakes her head no and giggles, “Belle being bad.” “Are you hiding again?” Belle nods. “Belle, if you’re nodding your head yes, mommy can’t see you.” “Yes, Belle hiding. Hide ’til you ‘n Daddy come home.” At that moment Kit walks into the room. “Oh, oh! Belle found. Bye, bye!” She hangs up the phone. “Hi Uncoo Kit.” Kit reaches down, lifts her into his arms and carries her out of the room, “All right you little rascal, who were you talking to?” “Mommy and daddy.” The phone rings again, this time Hope answers it downstairs, “Black residence.” “Hope! Thank goodness. Belle just hung up on me.” “Marlena! I didn’t know she was on the phone. Everyone has been searching for her for the past 20 minutes.”
Brady jumps down from the sofa and moves to Hope’s side when he hears her call out his mother’s name and tugs on Hope’s shirt. Marlena laughs softly, then says, “Apparently she was hiding in our bedroom and someone found her – that’s when she hung up the phone.” Kit enters the room, a squirming Belle in his arms. “Kit found her, they just came in the room. Someone else wants to say hello to you…”
Bo, Eric and TJ enter the room. Hope laughs, then continues, “Maybe I’d better just let everyone say hello since they’re all here now.” After the rest of the younger children get a chance to say hello and receive assurances that they’ll be seeing their parents soon, Eric says a quick hello, hands the phone to Kit, then helps Hope take the youngsters upstairs. Bo motions that he’s going upstairs too and leaves Kit alone to talk to John and Marlena. “Now that it’s quiet in here, which one of you do I have on the phone?”
John replies, “That would be your brother. Sounds like they’ve been quite a handful.” “You don’t know the half of it but I’ll save the details until you get home and whatever you said to them seemed to settle them down for the moment.” “We let them know we’d be home soon and we expected them to be on their best behavior since it will happen when they least expect it.” “Then you are on your way home?” “Is that relief I hear in your voice, Kit?” Kit laughs, “Does a daily litany of ‘patience is a virtue’ answer your question?” John chuckles, “Yes, I guess it does and in answer to your question, we’ll be home sooner than we expected.” “I’ll make sure the children don’t get a chance to tell half of Salem in their excitement before you get here.” “I knew we could count on you, Kit. We’ll see you soon.”
***
John hangs up the phone and turns to Marlena, “Feel better?” Marlena nods, “I do. I just wish we could tell them we were coming home tomorrow.” John links his arm through hers as they walk through the house, “So do I, but just think of how happy they’ll be when they see us tomorrow.” “I am and that helps.” “You know, Doc, you still haven’t told me how you beat me back to the house this morning.” Marlena smiles, “I took the shortcut.” John smiles and shakes his head as they join Marlena’s parents on the porch to enjoy the afternoon breeze. Seeing the smiles passing between John and Marlena as they emerge from the house, the older couple exchange relieved glances confident that John would keep Marlena from dwelling on the dangers they faced with her pregnancy.
***
Later that afternoon, John enters the bedroom expecting to find Marlena sleeping only to find her struggling to lift a heavy suitcase onto the bed, “Doc, what do you think you’re doing?” Marlena drops the suitcase on the floor and spins around, “I’m certainly not trying to have a heart attack by being startled out of my wits.” John moves to her side, “I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to startle you. I was expecting you to be sleeping.”
She watches as John lifts the suitcase onto the bed, “I was going to look for that sweater I told mom she could have and then start packing the rest of our things.” “You should have called me.” Marlena opens up the suitcase, “I was doing fine until you came charging in here.” She begins searching through the clothing, “I thought I put that sweater in this suitcase.” John picks up one of her folded blouses from the suitcase and lifts it to his nose and inhales the scent of it, “If you’re talking about the blue one, it’s in the other suitcase.”
Marlena plucks the blouse from his hand and refolds it, “I don’t suppose you’d mind bringing that suitcase over here too?” John grins, “Are you sure you don’t want me to bring all of them over here?” She gives him an exasperated look, then turns her attention back to straightening up the clothes in the suitcase in front of her.
John sets the other suitcase on the bed, “Before I came in here to check up on you, I was having an interesting conversation with your father.” Marlena starts looking through the other suitcase, “Oh? What about?” “Since we didn’t get the chance to talk to your parents earlier about Eric, I decided to find out what he’s been up to.” “And did you find out what he’s been up to, besides college, that is?” “Apparently he’s been spending his weekends traveling and was in LA for several weeks before he stopped here on his way to Salem for our wedding.”
Marlena stops a moment and frowns, “That explains why Eric was avoiding us before we left Salem. He didn’t want us asking any questions. Did Dad say why Eric was in LA and has been traveling?” “Eric told him he was traveling with a band he and a few friends from college started.” Marlena pulls the blue sweater she’d been looking for out of the suitcase, “Didn’t Dad believe him?” John nods, takes the sweater from her and lays it across the back of a nearby chair, “In fact, he and your mother went to a local club to see the band perform… with Liz when she was in town.” “Well, that explains how he and Liz met up. I don’t understand why Eric didn’t tell us about this band before.” John offers, “Maybe he was afraid we’d think it was interfering with his studies.”
Marlena shakes her head, “No, I don’t think that’s it. There seemed to be some kind of tension between Eric and Liz.” “Are you sure you weren’t imagining it, Doc? Things were pretty hectic before and after the wedding.” Finished with the larger suitcase, Marlena closes it, “No, it wasn’t my imagination because now that I think about it, Eric didn’t seem happy at all that Liz was in Salem and, too, there’s his decision not to come back here and resume his studies. He never did say why he wanted to stay in Salem.”
John moves the closed suitcase off the bed, “So you think he’s hiding something?” Marlena looks up at him, “Don’t you?” “It’s beginning to sound that way.” John rescues a black teddy that had fallen from the suitcase onto the floor, then holds it up, “Hey, you haven’t worn this yet. I don’t suppose you’d mind modeling it for me?” She snatches it from his hands, “Later, we’re not finished discussing Eric.”
John sighs, then sits on the bed next to the suitcase, “Okay, what do you want to do about him?” “I don’t know. If we confront him, he’ll just go on the defensive.”
John rescues another item of clothing, this time a sexy lavender nightgown, “Are you sure you’re not in a modeling mood?” Marlena holds out her hand. John grins and places the nightgown in her hand, then says, “I suppose this means you won’t rest until you get to the bottom of whatever he’s up to.” “If he’s in some kind of trouble, we have to help him.” “I agree. In fact, that brings up another subject I wanted to discuss with you. One you interrupted the other day when you fell asleep.” A smile plays across her lips, “You mean the foreign legion discussion?”
His grin widens, “Yes, that one.” She closes the other suitcase, “As long as it doesn’t involve any camp following activities, I’ll stay awake this time.” John pushes the suitcase from the bed, then reaches up and pulls Marlena down onto his lap. “Actually, it involves starting a new business.”
She curls her arms around his neck, “What kind of business?” “A detective agency.” “So you were serious about not wanting to go back to the Salem P.D.?” John nods as his hands begin a caressing exploration of her curves, “I’d rather work independently.” “By yourself?”
John smiles, “No, I had a partner in mind.” Marlena’s breath catches in her throat and she finds it difficult to concentrate as John’s hand drops below her waist, “Who? I…I don’t think Bo…would want to leave the force but…Hope might be interested.” “Actually, Doc, I was thinking more in the lines of a very talented psychiatrist I know.” Marlena squirms and melts against him, “Why?”
His eyes dance, “Because I like the way she looks in a teddy.” Marlena tugs gently on the hair at the nape of his neck, regaining a little of her composure, “We’re suppose to be having a serious discussion.” John slides his hands up and threads them in her hair, “Because this particular psychiatrist and I have already proven that we make an unbeatable team.” He pulls her closer so that their lips are a mere inch apart, “So what do you say, Dr. Evans-Black, do you want to start a detective business with me?” Marlena shivers as his hand slides down her back again, “John, I…I think we need to…ah…discuss this…” “….later.” He finishes for her as he falls back onto the bed, pulling her on top of him and capturing her lips.
Outside the door of their house, John sweeps Marlena up into his arms. Marlena slides her arms around his neck, “John, what are you doing?” He grins, “Observing tradition.”
He reaches down and opens the door and carries her inside. He kicks the door shut then sets Marlena on her feet, encircling her with his arms. His lips brush against hers as he speaks, “Welcome home, Mrs. Black.” “Umm, welcome home to you too, Mr. Black.”
At that moment a disheveled and multi-colored Belle dashes into the foyer and comes to a screeching halt when she sees her parents, “Oh, oh!” She does an about face and races back the way she came from. John and Marlena exchange surprised glances. John speaks up first, “What was that all about?” Marlena shakes her head, “I don’t know but did you see all the paint and glitter covering her? And I’ve suddenly noticed how quiet it is around here.”
John takes Marlena’s hand, “I noticed that too and I think we’d better go investigate.” They follow little droplets of paint to the kitchen where pandemonium reigns. Kit is standing guard at the open kitchen door, his arms outstretched to prevent their passage.
Behind him, they see Hope and Carrie frantically trying to scrub a very noisy, squirming Belle and Brady. While TJ and Eric are hastily shoving paint, brushes, scissors, glue, glitter and paper covering the kitchen table into a large box. There are paint splatters every where and the floor is littered with scraps of paper and glitter. Kit swallows painfully, “John, Marlena, we weren’t expecting you.” John’s lips twitch in amusement, “Obviously.”
Marlena manages to keep a straight face, “How long are you going to barricade the door, Kit?” Kit slowly lowers his arms and says a bit sheepishly, “I guess it’s a little late for that, huh?”
John grins as he leads Marlena, past his brother, into the kitchen. Belle and Brady manage to escape the cleaning crew and rush into their parents arms, yelling simultaneously, “Mommy, Daddy, welcome home!” Unmindful of the paint and glitter still clinging to their youngest children’s clothing and hair,
John scoops up Brady as Marlena lifts Belle into her arms. The others take advantage of the pair’s distraction, as Belle and Brady chatter away, and quickly hide the rest of the evidence hoping to conceal what they’d been up to.
By silent consent, John and Marlena wait until the guilty parties are absorbed in their tasks before they say anything to them. John’s glance scans the room, “So, which one of you is going to tell us what you’ve been up to?” The foursome pauses in their task as Kit leans back against the door frame and folds his arms, amusement dancing in his eyes. Belle pipes in with a warning, “Better not! It’s a secret!” Brady nods his head in agreement.
TJ and Eric slide behind Carrie and Hope, the women send a beseeching glance towards Kit. John and Marlena both fight to keep from laughing out loud. At that moment,
Bo enters through the outside door and doesn’t see John and Marlena right away, “You haven’t finished the….” “Uncoo Bo!” Belle interrupts him. Bo’s head snaps around and his mouth falls open, “John, Marlena, you’re home.”
Marlena looks at John, “Do you get the feeling that we came home too soon?” John nods, “Maybe we should leave and come back again in a few days.” A chorus of “NO!” reverberates around the kitchen. Kit picks that moment to rescue the others. He pushes away from the door frame and relieves his brother and sister-in-law of their squirming burdens, “Why don’t the two of you go unpack while we finish cleaning up in here?”
Marlena can no longer hide the laughter in her voice, “Do you mean give all of you time to come up with some kind of explanation that we’ll buy?” TJ walks over, hugs his mother and grins up at her, “It’s only fair, mom.” John ruffles his son’s hair, “You’re absolutely right, TJ. Come on, Doc, let’s leave them to their scheming.” After John and Marlena leave the kitchen, their is an audible sigh of relief around the room.
Eric leans on the broom handle, “That was a close one.” Carrie takes Belle from Kit, “Do you think they’ve guessed what we’re up to?” Bo laughs, then says, “The evidence was pretty damning.” Belle frowns in disapproval, “Uncoo Bo!” Bo gives a gentle tug on a lock of Belle’s hair, “Sorry, Belle. I should have said – the evidence was everywhere.” Belle nods in approval. Kit sets Brady on his feet. The youngster turns around and looks up at him, apprehension fills his face, “The surprise isn’t spoiled, is it?”
Kit stoops down in front of Brady, “No, Brady, we’ll think of something to tell them.” Eric laughs, “I don’t know why you all think it’s so difficult. Just tell them we were keeping Belle and Brady entertained.” TJ shakes his head, “That won’t work, Eric, we were all acting too guilty.” Hope walks over to Brady and takes his hand, “I think Carrie and I will take Belle and Brady upstairs and get them cleaned up while you *men* brainstorm.” She smiles sweetly at them, then continues, “I’m sure you’ll come up with something.” Bo swats her on the behind as Hope passes him, “Coward.”
***
As they enter their bedroom, Marlena turns to John with a laugh, “You don’t think we ruined their surprise, do you?” John’s arms slide around her waist, “We won’t if we play dumb for the rest of the day but we’d deprive ourselves of hearing what they’ve come up with to explain what they were up to.”
Marlena sways closer to him, “We could always lock ourselves in here until they’ve finished planning whatever it is they’re planning.” John grins, “You think so, do you? And just how long do you think it would take before they started taking turns knocking on the door?” Marlena asks hopefully, “A do not disturb sign wouldn’t work, huh?” John chuckles and shakes his head no, “Belle and Brady can’t read and the rest of them would ignore it.” “Well, how are we going to stay out of their way until they’re finished?” John runs his index finger along her jaw line, “Maybe we should ask them for suggestions.” Marlena rolls her eyes, “Oh there’s a wonderful idea. I’d be afraid of what they’d come up with.” John laughs, “Come on, Doc, where’s your sense of adventure?”
Marlena’s eyes dance, “Back with the snakes, poisonous plants and mud slides.” “Not going to let me forget that, are you?” Before Marlena can answer, the first knock sounds on the door. John releases Marlena and they turn to face the door as Marlena calls out for whomever it is to enter. The door opens and a clean, redressed Belle is standing there, grinning from ear to ear, “I ‘pose to tell you to stay in you room.”
Marlena leans back against John as his arms slide around her waist. She keeps a straight face as she asks, “How long do we have to stay in here, Belle?” Belle holds up one, two and then three fingers, “Two hours.” John rests his chin on Marlena’s shoulder, “And what are we suppose to do with ourselves for two hours?” Belle grins again, “Take a nap!” And before they can say another word, she gives them both a quick hug around their legs and then is out the door pulling it closed behind her.
John turns Marlena back around to face him, “I like that idea!” Marlena nods, “And since we’ve been ordered to stay in here for the next two hours, that means we probably won’t be interrupted again.” Another knock sounds on the door. “You were saying, Doc?” John murmurs with a chuckle before he releases her and walks over to the door and opens it. This time it’s Brady standing there with his hand behind his back. “Hello, son, what can we do for you?” “I brought something to keep you busy,” he says as he moves his hand from behind his back to reveal a crossword puzzle book. John takes it from him and manages not to laugh, “Why thank you, Brady.” Brady flashes them both a grin and then turns and disappears down the hall. John closes the door and holds up the book as he turns to Marlena, “I think this is their way of making sure we don’t ask questions. So, Mrs. Black, will it be crossword puzzles or a nap?” Marlena saunters over to him, leans against him and plucks the book from his hand and tosses it over her shoulder, “Why don’t you lock the door and I’ll show you….”
***
Two hours later, John and Marlena are led into the living room by TJ. Their surprise is genuine when they see the room decorated with balloons, glitter covered streamers and a huge hand painted welcome home banner, a buffet laden table and family and friends shouting “Welcome Home.” Sometime later, Bo and Kit steal John away from Marlena, who is surrounded by Laura, Hope, Maggie and Carrie. Belle races into the middle of the group and looks up at her mother, “You ‘prised, mommy?” Marlena caresses her daughter’s head, “Yes, Belle, Mommy and Daddy were very surprised.” Belle races off to tell her brothers.
Marlena looks up at the others, “How in the world did you ever manage to get all this done in two hours?” Hope smiles, “It wasn’t easy. The children started making the decorations this morning – that’s what you walked in on. We thought we’d have another day or two for the rest.”
Carrie nods, “We were making some frantic phone calls after you showed up to get everyone over here.” Maggie chimes in, “They were lucky. Laura, Alice and I were just on our way out the door to do some shopping.” Laura adds, “And we volunteered to alert the others.” Marlena laughs, “Remind me, next time I want to throw a quick party to get the four of you involved.” She looks around, “Where is Alice?”
Hope takes a quick look around the room, “She must still be out in the garden with Caroline and Shawn. Those exotic orchids John ordered were delivered while the two of you were gone and Grams couldn’t wait to see them once she got here.”
Laura loops her arm through Hope’s arm, “Why don’t we go see if they’re still out there?” Hope nods and the pair move away. Carrie’s attention is caught by Mike and Lexie coming into the room and she quickly excuses herself, leaving Marlena and Maggie alone. Maggie lays a gentle hand on Marlena’s arm, “Why don’t you join me on the sofa, Marlena?” She lowers her voice, “I can tell you’re not feeling well. You’re starting to look a little pale.” Marlena flashes her a grateful smile and then says as they are seated, “I was hoping it wouldn’t be obvious.” Maggie is concerned, “Are you all right?”
Marlena nods, “I will be. I think it’s all the excitement of the trip home, seeing the children again and the party.” “Marlena, we’ve been friends for a long time, remember? I can tell when you’re putting up a good front.” Sudden tears spring to Marlena’s eyes as she nods her head, “I know, Maggie but I can’t talk about it right now.” Maggie leans over and hugs her, “We’ll talk about it later then.” Marlena returns her hug, “Thank you.”
***
From where he is standing in the foyer talking to Kit, Bo and Abe, John can see Marlena and Maggie. His brow furrows in concern, missing what Abe had just said. Bo snaps his fingers in front of John’s face, “Hello? John, are you still with us?” John drags his attention away from Marlena, “I’m sorry. What did you say?”
Abe sees that John still appears distracted, “Maybe we should finish this another time.” He grins and adds, “After all, this *is* suppose to be a party.” Kit puts a hand on John’s arm to prevent him from leaving and says to the others, “Why don’t the two of you join your wives? John and I will be in shortly.” When they are left alone, Kit leads John into an unoccupied room and asks, “What’s wrong with Marlena? And don’t tell me nothing, I’ve seen the way you’ve been watching her and the concern on your face. This isn’t about Roman Brady, is it?”
John shakes his head, “I am worried about how Roman will react when he sees her again, but that’s not my main concern.” “Then what is?” John sighs, “You’re not going to let this go, are you?” A smile tugs at Kit’s lips, “Would you?” John shakes his head. Kit urges, “Then tell me.” “Marlena is pregnant.” Kit is surprised by the mixture of joy and pain on his brother’s face, “Pregnant? I would think you’d be thrilled by that news.” “I am, we both are but there could be a complication,” John admits, adding, “She got pregnant at the same time that Belle came down with the measles.
Marlena is doing a good job of covering it right now, but she’s scared to death that she’s going to lose the baby.” He runs his hand through his hair in frustration, “That would devastate her. She lost a child during her first marriage and the possibility of losing this one….” His voice falls away. “Has she seen a doctor?” John nods, “In Colorado. She’d been ill during our honeymoon so I took her to see a doctor the moment we arrived there. That’s when we found out she was pregnant. He assured us that there wasn’t any danger in losing the baby right now but he recommended tests be done as soon as we returned home.”
Kit places a comforting hand on John’s shoulder, “We’re all here to support you both and to pray for the baby, you know that.” John nods again, “I do but Marlena and I agreed not to announce the pregnancy until after the tests and we were sure the baby was out of danger.” “I understand and I wish I’d known about this before, I wouldn’t have helped the children plan…” John interrupts him and manages a grateful smile, “I’m glad you did. It’s just what Doc needed to take her mind off the baby.” Kit gives John’s shoulder a squeeze, “Then why don’t we go join the others before she starts wondering where you disappeared to.”
***
Meanwhile, Marlena and Carrie are having an equally serious conversation. “Oh Carrie, why haven’t you gone to see him yet?” Carrie replies defensively, “Austin and I were out of town on a business trip and we just got back this morning. I didn’t even know he was back in Salem until I arrived here and Uncle Bo told me.”
“You should have gone to see him the moment you found out.”
Carrie shakes her head, “After what Eric told me about their meeting, I’m not anxious to see my dad again.” Marlena passes a quick glance of concern over Eric on the opposite side of the room, “It didn’t go well?” “Not their first meeting and the second was somewhat strained. Sami didn’t help the situation either. She’s living with dad now and I did try to talk her into coming here this afternoon but she refused, even though she said dad had gone out of town for a few days.”
Marlena sighs, “I had hoped Roman’s return wouldn’t alienate Sami and I again.” Carrie tries to reassure her, “I think she just needs some time to reconcile herself to the way things are now that he’s back. I’m sure she’ll come around soon.” John walks up behind Marlena and slides his arms around her waist and looks over her shoulder at Carrie, “Hey you two, this is a party. You’re suppose to be having fun.” Carrie smiles, “You’re right and I think I’ll go do that. We’ll talk some more later, Marlena.”
John turns Marlena to face him, his eyes searching her face not happy to see how pale she is and felt a pang of guilt over being one of the contributors to her exhaustion. He should have made her take a nap earlier instead of letting her have her way with him. “Honey, I think it’s time you took that nap.” Marlena protests, “John, we can’t leave the party now.” His voice firm, “Oh yes, we can Marlena and once I’ve gotten you tucked into bed, I’ll come back down and tell everyone your jet lag caught up with you.” John doesn’t allow her any further protests as he leads her out of the room. As they pass Mike, John indicates with a subtle nod of his head that he’d like him to follow them. Mike gives them a few minutes and then discreetly heads up to their room.
***
On the other side of Salem, Roman surprises Sami by coming home sooner than he’d planned on. Roman is in turn surprised to find Sami sitting on the sofa, mumbling to herself and punching a pillow in frustration. He walks over and sits next to her, “Hey, Sami, what has you so upset?”
Sami ignores his question and demands, “I thought you said you were going to be gone a few days?” Roman answers easily, “I changed my mind.” There is a sarcastic edge to Sami’s voice when she questions him, “Why? Because you found out Mom was home?” Roman says convincingly enough, “I didn’t know she was home, Sami. I came back because of how upset you were over my leaving for a few days.”
All sarcasm gone from her voice, “You really came back because of me, Daddy?” Roman takes her in his arms and hugs her, “Of course, I did.” He holds her at arms length, “So why aren’t you off welcoming your mother home?” Sami is obviously torn, “I want to….” “But?” “I didn’t want to upset you by going over there. They’re having a big welcome home party and everyone was invited, except…” “Me,” Roman supplies. Sami nods.
Roman takes her hand and pats it, “I’m not upset by that, Sami and you shouldn’t be either. A welcome home party isn’t the place for me to see your mom…and John again. So if you want to go over there, do.” Sami’s hand tightens on his, “I’d rather stay here and spend time with you, Daddy. I can see Mom tomorrow.” She moves into his arms for another hug and misses the smile of satisfaction on his face.
Mike finishes examining Marlena and tucks his stethoscope into his doctor’s bag that he’d grabbed from the foyer table on his way upstairs. John, seated beside Marlena on the bed, takes her hand in his and asks with a slight edge of impatience, “Well?”
Mike turns to them, “Other than a slightly elevated blood pressure and exhaustion, everything seems fine.” He adds, “I’m strongly recommending two days of bed rest.” Marlena protests, “Mike, I can’t stay in bed for two days.” Mike locks gazes with her, “It’s two days in bed here or at the hospital, Marlena.”
John leans over and whispers something in Marlena’s ear, she looks at him, nods and then looks at Mike, “All right, you win.” Picking up his bag, Mike looks at them both, “I think you should keep visitors to a minimum too. You won’t rest if you don’t.” “Don’t worry, Mike, I’ll see that she gets the rest she needs,”
John assures him, then looks down at Marlena. “I’ll go explain your absence to the others. You stay put.” He brushes his lips across hers and starts to rise from the bed, Marlena’s hand on his arm stops him, “John, please tell everyone to stay and enjoy themselves. There isn’t any reason for the party to break up on my account.”
John captures her hand in his and gives it a squeeze, “I will. You get some rest, okay?” Marlena nods as John tucks the blanket around her. He leans over and kisses her forehead and then follows Mike out. John stops Mike a short way down the hall. “There’s something else, isn’t there?” Mike glances back toward the closed bedroom door, “John, it’s obvious that Marlena is under a lot of emotional stress right now and that’s not good for her or the baby.”
John nods, “She’s afraid she’s going to lose the baby and, although, she hasn’t said so I know the thought of how Roman’s return is affecting the children is adding to her stress.” Mike frowns, “I thought that might be the case. I’ll make an appointment for Marlena to have the necessary tests done in three days, in the meantime I think it might help if she talks to my Aunt Maggie. I noticed the two of them talking earlier and their friendship goes back a long way.” “I noticed that too and I think she would have told Maggie everything if they’d been off by themselves.” Mike nods in agreement, then adds, “As for the matter of Roman, I think allowing the children to talk their feelings out with Marlena will help all of them.”
John nods, “I agree.” Mike can tell that John is still worried, “You’re also concerned about how meeting up with Roman again will affect her, aren’t you?” John sighs, “I’m worried about his reaction and how it will affect her, yes. If what I’m hearing is true, it’s going to be a very difficult meeting for her.” “Then maybe you should stall their meeting for as long as possible. At least until after the tests have been done and the two of you know that the baby is all right,” Mike suggests. “That’s easier said than done, Mike and not something I’d agree to until I discussed it with Marlena.”
***
Sami emerges from the kitchen carrying a large bowl of popcorn to see her father on the phone and announces, “Okay, I’m ready to watch the movie.”
Roman quickly ends his phone conversation and hangs up the phone, then walks over to her. “Sami, I’m sorry but something has come up and I have to leave.” Crestfallen, Sami starts to say, “But I thought…” He places his arm around her shoulders and gives her a quick hug, “I’ll make it up to you, I promise.” Before Sami can protest any further, Roman is out the door. She slams the bowl of popcorn down on the table sending kernels of popcorn flying, “It’s not fair, it’s just not fair!” She glances over at the mantelpiece, a picture of her mother with herself,
Eric and Carrie catches her eye, “He would have stayed, if you’d been here mom but that will never happen because now you’re married to John. And Carrie and Eric would have been here too, where they belong, instead of welcoming you and John home. It’s no wonder that daddy doesn’t like to be in this house anymore.”
She plops down on the sofa and snatches up a pillow and hugs it to her, a lone tear trickles down her cheek, “I was hoping that my being here would be enough to change that.” Sami swipes angrily at the tear, “Face it, Samantha, things will never be like they were and the sooner you accept that, the happier you’ll be.”
But a small voice inside her continues to protest and yearn for the family she once had, urging her to do something, anything that would make that happen. Sami places her hands over her ears, “I won’t listen, I won’t. Mom is happy with John.” She jumps to her feet, “And I should be over there welcoming them home. After all, daddy doesn’t care what I do, otherwise he would have stayed.” She grabs her purse and leaves without looking back. If she had, she would have seen her father and another man talking in the shadows at the side of the house.
***
TJ is passing through the foyer when he hears a knock at the front door. He opens it to find Sami standing there. Before she can say a word, he gives her a big hug and says, “Sami, you made it! I was hoping you would.” A warm feeling of being wanted washes over Sami. She smiles and hugs him in return, “I’m not too late?”
TJ tucks his arm through hers and leads her towards the living room, “No, the party is still going on but Mom wasn’t feeling well and went to bed. Belle and Brady will be happy to see you. They keep asking where you are.” Belle and Brady see Sami the moment TJ leads her through the doorway. With a squeal of delight, the duo races up to her and hugs her.
John, in conversation with Carrie, turns his head to see what the commotion is and smiles. Carrie says with a slight hint of sarcasm, “I see she decided to come after all.” John looks at her and says gently, “Carrie, I understand why she didn’t come sooner and so does Marlena. Don’t blame Sami for being torn over the situation. The important thing is, she’s here.” Carrie is contrite, “You’re right, John, I’m sorry. I guess it’s a tough situation for all of us.”
John gives her shoulder a gentle squeeze, “Things will work out for everyone, pumpkin. You just have to have faith.” A short time later, Sami manages to get John alone for a moment. After welcoming him home, she inquires with genuine concern, “TJ told me that mom wasn’t feeling well. What’s wrong with her? It doesn’t have to do anything with my dad, does it?” John shakes his head, “No, Sami, she’s just tired out from the trip and needed some rest.” “Can I go up and see her?” John puts his arm around her shoulder, “Why don’t we go up together and see if she’s still awake?” Sami stiffens a little and then relaxes, “I’d like that.”
***
John pokes his head around the door fully expecting to find Marlena sleeping. Instead he sees her sitting up, her glasses perched on her nose, reading a book. He motions for Sami to wait in the hall, and enters the room, “Doc, I thought you said you were going to get some rest?”
Startled, Marlena drops the book, “John, I wish you wouldn’t do that and I *am* resting.” John walks over and plucks the book from the bed and reads the title to himself, then sighs as he places the book under his pillow. He lowers his voice, “Marlena, I thought you weren’t going to dwell on the baby?” Marlena removes her glasses, “I couldn’t sleep and I wanted to read up on all the possible effects….”
John places his fingers on her lips, “Sami is outside, she wants to see you.” A smile lights Marlena’s face, “She is? Oh, do have her come in.” John fetches Sami and picks up on Marlena’s wordless request to leave the two of them alone. Sami moves to her mother’s side and hugs her before the door is closed, “Welcome home, Mom!”
Marlena’s caresses her daughter’s hair, “It’s good to be home, sweetheart and I’m glad you came after all.” Sami sits down next to her mother, “I’m sorry I didn’t come sooner.” Marlena shakes her head, “You don’t have to apologize, Sami. I know you want to spend time with your father.”
Sami looks away, “He…he had to go out, so I should have been here when Eric called and told me you and John were home.” Marlena captures Sami’s chin in her hand and gently turns her to face her, “Sami, is everything all right?” Sami pastes a smile on her face, “Sure, Mom, why wouldn’t it be? I don’t want to talk about me, I had to see for myself that you were okay when I heard you weren’t feeling well. Are you okay?”
Marlena nods, “Um hmm. I just need a few days rest, that’s all.” Sami looks down and idly plucks at the blanket, “I thought…well, I thought hearing that Dad was back had upset you.” “Not at all, . I’m glad he’s back in Salem. This is his home, he belongs with his family,” Marlena assures her. Sami looks up and meets her eyes, “But you’re not in a hurry to see him again, are you?” “I’m not in any hurry to force a meeting between us, but I do want to see him again. A part of me will always love him, Samantha and I want him to know that I’m glad he’s finally come home, especially for yours, Eric and Carrie’s sakes.”
Sami is silent a moment, then asks, “Do you think that things will work out for all of us? I mean, I don’t want to be torn between you and John and Dad but when I remember how happy we used to be with Daddy….” Marlena takes Sami’s hand in hers, “Oh Sami, I know how much you’ve been hurt and how unhappy you’ve been since your father and I divorced but that doesn’t mean we can’t be happy now. John and I, very much, want Roman to be a part of our lives and to find happiness of his own, but that isn’t going to happen over night. And the one thing I don’t want you to feel is guilt because you love your father and you love John.”
Sami admits unhappily, “It’s not easy, Mom. I feel disloyal to Dad when I’m with you and John and disloyal to the two of you when I’m with Dad. Especially when Carrie and Eric act like they’d rather be here instead of with him.” “Eric and Carrie are pretty confused themselves right now and like you, they have to work through their feelings. It will happen. Just don’t push them, okay?” “I’ll try not to but they don’t know how much they’re hurting him, Mom.”
Marlena reaches up and tucks a lock of hair behind Sami’s ear, “Sami, you can’t fix everything for your father and you have to trust in him enough to work things out for himself. And the best thing you can do for yourself, your father and everyone else is not to put your own life on hold but to move forward.” Sami asks defensively, “Are you saying it was wrong of me to move back to the house?” “No, I’m saying you shouldn’t spend all your time *in* the house. You’re a very pretty girl and you shouldn’t hide yourself away. You should be out continuing your education or working and even having some fun. And I’ll just bet your father would agree with me completely.” Sami nods, “Yes, he probably would.” She hugs her mother again, “Thanks, Mom. I’m glad I came over and we had a chance to talk.” “So am I, my sweet Sami.” Sami smiles and rises to her feet, “And now I’d better let you get some rest.” She leans over and kisses her mother’s cheek, “Bye, Mom. I’ll come back to see you again in a few days.”
John enters the room shortly after Sami leaves, “You, okay?” Marlena nods, “But that doesn’t mean you can’t come over here and hold me.” He joins her on the bed and takes her into his arms, “What will our guests think?” Marlena rests her head on his chest and laughs softly, “That you succumbed to exhaustion too?” John tilts her chin up, meets her gaze and flashes her a grin, “If it means you’ll get some sleep, then I’m totally exhausted.” He reaches up and turns off the bedside lamp.
John and Marlena are awakened very early the next morning by a loud knock on their bedroom door. Marlena moans and says sleepily, “Who did you forget to tell that I’m suppose to be resting for two days?” “Ah…that would be most of the household,” John admits ruefully, then adds with a half grin, “I was sooo exhausted last night, I didn’t get a chance to tell anyone after our guests left.” The knock becomes more insistent.
Marlena gives him an exasperated look, “Are you going to find out who it is?” “I was hoping they’d be convinced we were still sleeping and go away.” Brady’s raised voice can be heard through the closed door, “Maybe we should huff and puff an’ blow the door in.” Belle replies in an equally loud voice, “Mommy and Daddy not pigs.”
John and Marlena exchange amused glances and resist laughing out loud. The knocking starts again and Belle yells, “Mommy, Daddy, wake up!” Marlena sits up in the bed, “John, I don’t think they’re convinced.” John tosses back the covers and climbs out of the bed and says over his shoulder, “You stay put.” John snatches the door open as Brady starts to beat on the door again. He catches his son as he stumbles into the room.
Belle giggles, darts past John and climbs up onto the bed and into her mother’s arms. John starts to close the door and stops when he sees Eric and Kit standing there barely awake and yawning. He says irritably, “I suppose you want to come in too.”
Kit shakes his head no and beats a hasty treat. Eric flashes him a sleepy grin, “No, we’re going back to bed now that you’ve turned off the alarm clock.” He then looks down the hall, “You can all go back to bed now.” The sound of several doors closing elicits a laugh from Marlena. John pushes the door shut and shifts the squirming Brady under his arm and heads back to the bed, “Somehow I get the feeling they’ve all been through this before.”
Brady escapes John’s hold and snuggles into the middle of the bed next to Marlena. Belle settles in next to Brady and eyes both her parents, “You ‘pose to answer a knock.” John stretches out on his side of the bed, sitting back against his pillows and looks over their heads at Marlena, daring her to laugh again, “We were sleeping.” Brady looks at his father, “You went to bed before we did, Daddy.” Belle nods, “Means you get up first.” John gives Marlena a ‘you can jump in anytime’ look, then says, “And who made up that rule?” Brady grins, “Uncle Kit.” Belle adds proudly, “We fool him an’ wake all of them.”
Marlena manages to keep a straight face, “Every morning?” Belle and Brady nod in unison. John barely manages to keep the laughter out of his voice, “And whose idea was that?” Belle and Brady point to each other. Marlena laughs softly and reaches over and hugs them both, “Oh my, how we’ve missed the two of you.” Brady smiles happily, “We missed you, too.” Belle looks from her mother to her father, “You not go away again?”
John glances at Marlena, then meets his daughter’s eyes, “I don’t think your Uncle Kit will let us.” Seeing Belle’s frown, he adds quickly, “But we wouldn’t even if he did.” Belle climbs into her father’s lap and puts her little arms around his neck and lays her cheek against his, “Promise?” John enfolds her in his arms, “Promise.” Brady tugs on Marlena’s sleeve, a worried frown creasing his brow, “Mommy, are you still sick?”
Marlena caresses his head, “I’m not really sick, Brady. Just tired from all the traveling and Dr. Horton says I should stay in bed and rest for a couple of days.” Brady’s relief is evident, “I’m glad you’re not sick, mommy and we can help Daddy take care of you.” “That’s a good idea, Brady and that includes letting mommy get some sleep.”
Belle looks at her father, her disappointment clear on her face, “No more knocking?” John nods, “No more knocking in the morning or when mommy is sleeping.” Brady asks quietly, “Who will make breakfast, Daddy?” Belle’s eyes glow, “Belle will!” Brady shakes his head emphatically, “I don’t like play dough cereal with mustard!” Belle glares at him, “Belle don’t like black bread and cats up!” Brady fires back, “And I don’t like cold hot dogs in orange juice.” Marlena, looking a little green around the gills, shudders, “John, I think they’ve won.”
Belle and Brady look at each other and say in surprised unison, “Won what?” John sets Belle on the floor and then lifts Brady and sets him down beside his sister, then climbs out of bed, “I think your mommy is trying to say that daddy will be making your breakfast for the next few days.” Their little argument instantly forgotten, the duo cheers and races out of the room to head for the kitchen.
Marlena dashes for the bathroom. John pinches himself, “It was all real. I wasn’t dreaming.” He walks over and knocks gently on the bathroom door, “Doc?” “Go away!” John didn’t need to be told twice as he heads for the kitchen.
***
After their appetites are satisfied, Belle and Brady are sitting at the table coloring quietly while John makes a light breakfast for Marlena. Kit strolls into the kitchen, “Well, brother, I see you’ve survived the morning.”
John spares his brother a brief glance, “A little warning would have been nice and that knocking rule wasn’t one of your better ideas.” Kit chuckles as he moves next to John, “I’ll admit that it backfired, but you haven’t seen what happens when they don’t wake anyone up and make their own breakfast. It’s not a pretty sight.”
John nods, “So I’ve heard. I’m afraid their menu selections didn’t sit very well with Marlena.” Kit looks contrite, “I’d forgotten about that.” John turns to Kit, a grin on his face, “You can make up for it by calling the nanny.” “I thought she was still on vacation?”
John pulls a very visible note placed at eye level off the refrigerator and hands it to his brother, “Marlena left that on the refrigerator before we went on our honeymoon and she told Bo to remind you that it was there. The nanny is probably wondering why she hasn’t heard from anyone.” Kit shakes his head in disbelief, “I can’t believe I forgot, Bo didn’t remind me and none of us noticed this.”
John chuckles as he picks up the tray he’d prepared for Marlena, “Admit it, Kit, you wanted the time alone with the family before your sabbatical ended.” “Well, of course, I did but when I think of how much easier things *could* have been….” John grins and says in parting, “Look upon it as a further lesson in patience, Father Christopher. After all, you did say it was a virtue.”
***
Marlena awakens the instant John enters the room. He sets the tray on the bedside table and sits next to her, “Feeling better?” Marlena nods and smiles, “How are things in the kitchen?” “Quiet and Kit is calling the nanny even as we speak.” Marlena sits up, “I was wondering why he hadn’t called her after we left on our honeymoon.” John grins, “He’s a glutton for punishment.” “You mean he forgot her vacation ended the day after we left.” “That too. So, are you up to a little breakfast?”
Marlena eyes the covered tray warily, “As long as it isn’t play dough or hot dogs.” John lifts the cover on the tray, “How does toast, fruit and tea sound?” “Wonderful. Are you planning to join me?” John sets the tray on her lap, “I’ll stay and watch. I had pancakes with the kids.” Marlena takes a sip of tea, then asks, “What are your plans today?” “I thought I’d go down to city hall and turn in the necessary paperwork to open the detective agency.” “You’re not wasting any time on that, are you?”
John takes a grape off of the plate and pops it into Marlena’s mouth, “I want to have everything set up within the week. I can’t keep taking over Abe’s office.” “Then you’re going to stay involved in the investigation to find Stefano?” “I’m not going to rest until he’s put away once and for all, Doc.” Unable to hide the fear in her eyes, Marlena says, “I know, John but I thought now that the ISA was involved…”
John caresses her cheek gently, “You know how I feel about the ISA.” “And Roman?” “I’m sure he’ll appreciate whatever help he can get, even if he doesn’t say so at first. You know he isn’t going to be comfortable working with me.” She nods, “I do know that but it makes me feel better knowing that you’ll be working together to catch Stefano.” He smiles, “Me too. Now that we’ve discussed my plans, what are yours?”
Marlena takes another sip of tea before she answers, “I thought I’d catch up on my reading.” His smile fades, “Doc…” She sets the cup down and places her hand on his arm, “John, I need to know what we’re facing. Losing the baby isn’t the only risk we face. There are also congenital defects that can result from exposure to Rubella. I’m sure Mike will explain everything before the tests are done, but I don’t want any surprises.” John places his hand over hers and squeezes it gently, “And I don’t want you upsetting yourself.”
Marlena pulls her hand away and says angrily, “I’ve been upset ever since I realized I’d gotten pregnant at the same time Belle had the measles. Reading that book isn’t going to change things. Nothing will until I know the baby is all right.” John moves the tray aside and takes Marlena into his arms, “Honey, I’m sorry. I’m not trying to trivialize the way you feel. I just don’t want you giving up hope.”
Marlena’s anger melts away, “I know you’re not and I haven’t given up hope but I’m frightened.” He arms tighten around her and he admits, “I know you are, Doc, and I am too. I guess that’s why I was so against your reading that book. It was easier for me to keep my hopes up, not knowing. But you’re right, we should be prepared for every possibility. I just want you to promise me something.” “What?” “If I’m not here and you feel overwhelmed by your fears, you’ll call Maggie and talk to her.” “I can do that if you’ll promise to talk to Kit if I’m not there for you.”
John tilts her chin up, “You have a deal, Mrs. Black.” He kisses her with infinite tenderness, “I love you.” Marlena threads her hands through his hair, “I don’t suppose my bed rest includes showing you how much I love you?” John chuckles, “I’m almost positive that isn’t on Mike’s recommended agenda.” Marlena gives him a saucy smile, “Then I guess I’ll have to spend most of the day sleeping so I’ll be well rested tomorrow and what Mike doesn’t know won’t hurt him, will it?” John grins, “I’m certainly not going to tell him, but…” Exasperated, Marlena interrupts him. “You couldn’t resist tossing one of those in there, could you?” John shakes his head and continues, “…but, if I don’t think you’re well enough, we stick to Mike’s agenda. Okay?” Her answer is a kiss that leaves John wondering how he was going to be able to resist ravishing his wife.
After a late morning gallop, Eric and Father Christopher are in the stables brushing down the horses. TJ dashes in to tell Kit that he has a phone call. After Kit leaves, TJ pulls an envelope out of his pocket, “Eric, I found this outside the stables this morning. It has your name on it.” Eric silently takes the envelope and examines it. He doesn’t recognize the hand writing. There is no address, no postmark, just his name in bold script. They had found him. TJ leans against the stall door, a grin lifts his lips, “Think it’s from a secret admirer?” Eric manages to say lightly and pockets the envelope, “I don’t think so, little brother.”
TJ is disappointed, “Aren’t you even going to open it and find out?” Eric turns back to his task, “Later, right now I need to finish up with the horses.” “Will you tell me about it later, if it is?” TJ asks hopefully. Eric pauses in mid brush, “Yes, I’ll tell you if it is under one condition.” “What’s that?” “You don’t tell anyone else about it.”
Eric holds his free hand out to TJ and adds, “Deal?” TJ shakes his hand, “Deal!” Eric laughs, “Now get out of here so I can finish what I’m doing.” The moment TJ is out of the stables, Eric’s laughter fades. He sets aside the brush and slowly pulls the envelope from his pocket. He turns it over several times before opening it. Even though he had a good idea of what it would say, the color drains from his face anyway as he reads the brief message…
Vacation is over, Caruso. You will be contacted
tomorrow afternoon. Don’t even think of running
again, your family won’t like the consequences.
Eric crumbles the note in his hand and leans his head against a wood beam, “Oh God, how am I going to get myself out of this?”
***
Marlena looks up at the sound of a knock on the bedroom door and calls out “come in” as she closes her book and places it under the bedcovers. The door opens and Kit peeks his head in, “Are you up for a visitor?” Marlena smiles and sits up futher in the bed, “Yes, please!”
She noticed the moment he stepped in the room that he was wearing his frock and collar again. She hadn’t seen him in it since he performed the wedding ceremony. A sudden vision of John dressed as a priest holding her wet, naked body in his arms flashes across her mind. It rattles her. Kit notices her sudden palor as he takes the chair next to the bed and turns it around and stradles it, “How are you feeling?”
Marlena tries to regain her composure as she gives him a suspicious look, “Did John put you up to this?” Kit decides to wait until a better moment to question her on it. To lighten the mood, he grins and admits, “Okay, I confess, he did ask me to look in on you. Do you mind?”
Marlena shakes her head and smiles in relief when Kit doesn’t mention her upset, “No, not at all.” She waves a hand indicating his clothing, “I was a little surprised to see you back in the collar. Does this mean your vacation is over?” Kit nods, “I’m afraid so. The Bishop called this morning and wants to see me so I’m going over to Brookdale to talk to him as soon as John returns.” Marlena asks sadly, “How soon do you think you’ll have to return to Italy?” Kit smiles, “Just between you and me, I may not be returning to Italy. As soon as I learned that Father Kyle was moving to another parish, I put in a request to be transferred here.”
Marlena returns his smile, “Oh, that’s wonderful. I hope the Bishop has good news for you then. You haven’t told John yet, have you?” Kit shakes his head, “No, I wanted to wait until the transfer approval came through and surprise him. He knows my sabbatical is almost at an end but we haven’t really discussed the possibility of my leaving soon.”
“Kit, you’ve become such a big part of his life, all our lives, not having you here for him would be a possibility I don’t think he’s ready to face.”
“To tell you the truth, Marlena, I’m not ready to face that possibility either. When I think of all the years that I believed I’d never see my brother again…I just don’t want to give up this second chance we’ve been given.”
“I know John feels the same way and there is still so much of your past together that he doesn’t remember.”
“I’ve been filling him in on our childhood and adulthood together whenever I get the chance but he hasn’t remembered any of it. Do you think he ever will?” Marlena sighs, “I don’t know, Kit. Stefano did such a thorough job of removing his memories. Sometimes a memory will come back to him out of the blue or when something unexpected triggers it but he has also had false memories. Like his believing he was a priest.” Kit rests his arms on the chair, “There are two explanations for that.”
Marlena nods, “I know he must have remembered you and your vocation on some level but what is the other reason?” Kit smiles wryly, “I’ll have to take you back to the past somewhat.” Marlena smiles, “I’m not going anywhere.” Kit begins his narration, “It was always a tradition in our family for one of the males to join the priesthood. However, John and I were the last of the males in our family so our mother was torn between wanting to see the family name carried on and what she felt was our family duty to the church.”
“That must have put a lot of pressure on the two of you.”
Kit nods, “When we were younger, John was the quiet, studious one. He was more in touch with his spirituality than I was,” a brief grin touches his lips, “I was your basic hell raiser.” He continues in a serious tone, “Our mother thought John would be perfect for the church and pushed him in that direction despite her conflicts about the future of the family line. The summer we turned twelve, we were suppose to go to camp.
John came down with one of those childhood diseases and stayed behind while I went to camp. To this day, I don’t know what happened but there was a fire at the house while I was gone. John was the only survivor.” Marlena gasps, “Oh no, how terrible! Don’t tell me, he blamed himself?” Kit nods, “Yes, because he couldn’t save our parents. He became very withdrawn after that and turned more to the church.
We went to live with our mother’s sister and her husband. They encouraged him and several years later, he finally entered the seminary.” Marlena is surprised, “Are you saying that he *was* a priest?” Kit shakes his head, “No, he never took the final vows. I guess when it came right down to it, he realized that becoming a priest wasn’t the way he wanted to make a difference in his life. He used his portion of our inheritance and joined a partnership in a detective agency. His first case involved a child kidnapping ring and went on from there. He became so successful, he finally bought out his partner and opened up an office in Europe and ended up spending most of his time there. From the first day he became a detective, he investigated our parents death during all his free time.” “That would explain his interest in opening a detective agency now. Did he ever find out what caused the fire that killed your parents?”
Kit shakes his head again, “No. The arson investigator’s file and the police records of the incident had vanished. Years later, just before he disappeared, John told me he’d finally gotten a lead.” “And now that’s lost somewhere in his memory,” Marlena says sadly. She looks at Kit curiously, “None of that explains why you decided to become a priest instead.” A half grin touches Kit’s lips, “Osmosis.” He explains further, “I spent so much time with John during his seminary days, my hell raising days virtually disappeared without my realizing it and I knew that I wanted to be the one to take those vows. It’s strange how life turns out sometimes but it took turns I never expected it to after that.”
Marlena supplies, “Like John disappearing out of your life?” Kit nods, “The last day I saw him, he’d just arrived from Europe and said he was on his way to someplace in the south, he wouldn’t be specific on the location. Just said he was working on a new case and wanted me to lend him a couple of frocks and collars. I knew then, whatever he was involved in meant he would be masquerading as a priest.”
Marlena shakes her head in amazement, “Knowing about that part of John’s life explains so many things…” Kit leans over and covers her hand with his, “Including how he was able to save you when you were possessed. It wasn’t just his love for you, it was the faith that had always been a part of him and to some degree the training he’d had.”
As Marlena looks down at her hands to avoid meeting Kit’s gaze, he asks gently, “What is it about that time that upsets you, Marlena?” Her head snaps up, she meets his gaze and manages a convincing smile, “Oh no you don’t. We were discussing John not me.” “Give you two an opportunity to be alone and what do you do? Talk about me behind my back.” John comments from the doorway. Marlena’s head swings around and her gaze locks with her husband’s, “How long have you been standing there?”
John moves to the bed and sits beside her, “Long enough to hear you avoid answering Kit’s question.” He leans over and kisses her lightly, then whispers in her ear, “I know, I know, you don’t want to discuss it. But *we* will, later…” Marlena nods and whispers in return, “…*much* later.” She looks at Kit and smiles, “Kit and I have been discussing your childhood and early adult years.”
John slides and arm around his wife’s shoulders, “So I was right, you were talking about me behind my back.” Kit grins, “Don’t worry, I didn’t say anything she can hold against you.” John chuckles, “That’s a relief.” Marlena looks between the two of them, “But what he did tell me brings up a lot of unanswered questions.” John captures her chin in his hand, “A mystery, my darling wife, that you’re not up to getting to the bottom of right now.” Marlena protests, “John, I’m feeling perfectly fine and your past is important.” “I won’t argue with you on that point, Doc, but those unanswered questions have kept this long, they can keep for awhile longer.
As for how you’re feeling, we’ll let Mike be the judge of that. He’s coming back over later this afternoon to check up on you.” Kit laughs and rises to his feet, “I think this would be a good time for me to make my exit.” He heads for the door and looks back at the two of them, “I’m only sorry I don’t have time to stick around to see which one of you is really the more stubborn.” The door closes softly behind him.
John and Marlena are left speechless for a moment, the say in unison, “I’m not stubborn.” Marlena gives John an incredulous look, “Oh? And what do you call insisting that I stay in bed and rest and dragging Mike in here unnecessarily to check up on me when I tell you I feel fine?” John shifts on the bed so that he is facing her fully, “And what do *you* call insisting on overdoing making it necessary for me to call Mike in here to prove that you aren’t feeling as fine as you say you are?” Marlena decides to try and side track him. She runs her index finger idily along his arm and asks, “John, there is something I’ve been meaning to ask you and Kit telling me about your past brought it back to mind.”
John captures her fingers and laces his fingers through hers, “Ask me later, right now we’re discussing your health and Mike’s impending visit.” Marlena shakes her head, “No, you were discussing my health.” She tries another tack, “So…did you finish up with the necessary paperwork to open our detective agency?” John resists the urge to grin, “As a matter of fact, yes I did. Now, wife of mine, do you have any other distractions to toss my way before we get back to discussing you?”
Marlena frees her hand from his then melts against him, wraps her arms around his neck and says seductively, “As a matter of fact, I do. Right now, I’d like to strip your clothes off one by one…” John places his fingers over her lips before she can go any further, his voice deepens, “You don’t play fair, Doc but I did ask for that.” He removes his fingers from her mouth and brushes her lips teasingly with his and then glides his tongue tantalizingly along her lower lip before pulling back, “But that’s *all* you’re going to get and I’m not going to let you distract…”
Marlena’s warm hand glides up his thigh. John grabs it quickly and traps it with his hand before it reaches its destination, “Marlena! Do you want me to move off this bed?” Marlena’s eyes glow warmly as she shakes her head slowly back and forth. John continues, “Are you going to behave yourself now?” Marlena sighs, “If you insist.” John’s voice is serious now, “I insist. Now, are you going to accept Mike’s visit gracefully and do exactly what he tells you to do?”
Marlena asks playfully, “Are you going to tie me to the bed if I don’t?” John is distracted by a sudden very provocative mental image and says thoughtfully, “Now there’s something I hadn’t thought of….” He shakes himself, “Doc, I’m trying to be serious here.” Marlena laughs softly, a mischievious light twinkles in her eyes as she slides her hand inside his shirt, “And you’re doing a very good job of it too.” John leans his head back and closes his eyes, “Marlena.” “Yes, John?” She asks innocently. He swallows painfully as her hand continues to glide over his chest,“I’m not made of stone.” Marlena’s hand slides down to his warm firmly muscled belly, keeping her voice light, “I can certainly attest to that.”
John lets out a loud audible breath, then opens his eyes and pulls her up against him, trapping her hand, “When we discussed this, this morning I thought we had agreed to wait until tomorrow when you were well rested?” Marlena is satisfied with the little beads of perspiration dotting John’s brow and smothers a fake yawn then replies, “I’m a little tired anyway.” John threads his hands in her hair and leans closer and whispers, his breath hot against her ear, “Then I suggest you take a nap.”
Burying her face in his neck, Marlena breaths a kiss there and says softly, “I’m not sure I can…sleep.” John’s voice deepens as his hands explore the hollows of her back, “I know something that will make you sleepy.” His touch upset her balance and she asks in a shaky voice, “You do?” “Um hmm.” “What?” John slowly moves her back over to her side of the bed and releases her, a grin curving his lips, “A bedtime story.” Marlena makes a grab for him but he is too quick for her as he rolls off his side of the bed. She bites her lip in frustration, “And you say that I don’t play fair!”
John stands at the side of the bed and looks down at her, his voice firm, “Mike said you were to get some rest and that’s exactly what you’re going to do until he says differently.”
Marlena doesn’t take her eyes off him and says nonchalantly, “I don’t know how you expect me to rest when all I can think about is tearing your clothes off of you and touching and kissing every part of your body, especially in those little places you like so well. But if you think I should rest, then okay, I’ll try to get some rest.” “Nice try, Doc but it isn’t going to work. I feel guilty enough about causing you to have a relapse yesterday. I’m not going to do anything that will have Mike threatening you again with the hospital. So you’ll have to settle for dreaming about tearing my clothes off and if Mike says it’s okay and you can prove to me tomorrow that the exertion won’t make you ill again, I’ll let you do whatever you want with me.” Marlena’s eyes glow, “Promise?”
He leans over and his lips brush against hers as he replies, “Promise.” He backs away, his grin returns, “Now, I think I’ll have TJ come in and read you a nice sedate, boring bedtime story while I see what the other children are up to.” Marlena throws a pillow after him as he leaves the room.
Eric, sitting behind the desk writing a letter, gives a guilty start when the library door opens. John and TJ enter as TJ asks while eyeing his father suspiciously, “Are you sure mom wants me to read her a book, Dad?”
Before John can answer, Eric hastily slips the letter into his pocket as he jumps to his feet drawing John’s attention, “Eric, I didn’t know you were in here. We didn’t mean to interrupt you.” “That’s okay. I was just writing a letter to my…uh…grandparents. I wanted to…um…ask them to send a few things to me here,” Eric replies as he moves out from behind the desk, then adds, “I’m finished now.”
TJ looks at Eric, a mischievous twinkle in his eye, “Maybe you’d like to read Mom a bedtime story.” Eric shakes his head, “Can’t TJ, I promised Grandpa Shawn I’d help him with a few things at the pub.” He glances at his watch, “And I’m already late.” John watches Eric leave the room, wondering what he was really up to. Eric had been acting too nervous and even a little guilty about that letter he’d been writing and John wasn’t buying the grandparent explanation. TJ’s voice breaks in on his thoughts, “Earth to Dad!”
John looks down at his son, “I’m sorry, TJ, did you say something?” “I asked you what kind of book.” John resists the urge to grin, “Better make it something you like so you’ll enjoy reading it.” TJ laughs, “Oh, I get it and then Mom will be so bored with it, she’ll fall asleep just to get me to stop. I have a couple of those up in my bedroom.” And before John can tell him to resist the urge to pick a gory book,
TJ is out of the room like a shot. John starts to chase after him and comes to a halt in the foyer as Hope is greeting Maggie at the front door. John crosses to Maggie’s side in two strides and takes her arm and pulls her along behind him, “Quick Maggie, you have to rescue Marlena before TJ gets to her.” Maggie sends Hope a ‘has he lost his mind?’ look and then finds herself being led up the stairs. When they reach the top of the stairs, John points down the hall, “She’s in the last room on the right. I’ll go head TJ off at the pass.” When she hears the knock on the bedroom door, Marlena resists the urge to pretend she’s sleeping and says, “You can come in, TJ.” Maggie opens the door, saying, “It’s not TJ. I hope you don’t mind.” There is so much relief in Marlena’s “Maggie!”, Maggie can’t help but wonder if the whole Black household hadn’t gone crazy overnight.
Maggie closes the door and approaches the bedside, “Marlena, what’s going on around here? No sooner did I step foot in the front door, John is dragging me up the stairs telling me I have to rescue you from TJ.” Marlena laughs, “I think he finally figured out what TJ’s idea of a bedtime story is.” Maggie sits down in the chair next to the bed, “Bedtime story?” Marlena nods, “John was going to have TJ come in and read me a bedtime story to help me fall asleep. He keeps insisting I need to rest more. When Mike gets here, and that isn’t going to be soon enough, I’m going to tell him to quit putting those ideas into John’s head. He’s spoiling all my fun.” “Marlena, if Mike thinks you need to rest…”
Marlena’s voice holds a hint of exasperation, “I’m pregnant, Maggie not an invalid. I just over did a little on our honeymoon and haven’t been feeling too well. But I really am fine now but I can’t convince John of that.” It is Maggie’s turn to sound relieved, “You’re pregnant? Oh, thank goodness. The way John and Mike were acting last night I thought there was something seriously wrong with you.” Marlena’s eyes well up but she fights the tears, “It’s not me, Maggie. It’s the baby. I conceived at the same time Belle came down with the measles. Which is why we haven’t told anyone yet about the pregnancy.”
Maggie reaches over and covers Marlena’s hand with hers, “Oh, Marlena. I’m sorry. Have you had the tests run yet to find out if the baby is all right?” Marlena shakes her head, “Not yet. Mike wanted me to rest for a few days first. In the meantime, I’ve been reading up on the possible effects the measles can have on a fetus. My biggest fear is that I might lose the baby. Losing DJ all those years ago was hard enough.” Maggie nods, “I remember and you know my prayers will be with you, John and the baby. And if there is anything you need…”
Marlena gives her a grateful smile, “Thank you, Maggie and just being able to talk to you like this is all I need.” In an attempt to change the subject and add a little lightheartedness back into their conversation, Marlena continues with a soft laugh, “My, we do go back a long way don’t we?” Maggie follows her lead, “Yes, we do and I hope no one realizes just how far back. Otherwise, we won’t be able to lie on our next birthdays.” Marlena’s eyes twinkle, “That’s why I don’t have birthdays.” Maggie laughs, “You know, I never thought of that.”
Marlena admits, “It’s a little something I picked up from Alice. By the way, did she manage to talk John out of some of those exotic orchids he had brought in?” Maggie nods, “Yes she did. She’s so good, she even had him and Father Christopher promising to bring them over and plant them for her. I think she followed that up with something about being the envy of all her friends for having the best looking matched set of gardeners in town.” Marlena laughs, “That’s our Alice.”
A soft knock interrupts them, followed by John poking his head around the door, “I hate to interrupt the two of you but Mike just arrived, Doc and I don’t expect an argument from you this time about seeing him.” Marlena says sweetly, “Why would I argue with you, dear? I’ve been sitting here counting the minutes until Mike’s arrival. Don’t keep him waiting, send him in.” Maggie smothers a laugh as John’s mouth falls open in surprise. She rises to her feet and gives Marlena a hug, saying in a low voice, “Give me a call when Mike gives you the okay and John releases you from prison. I think you need a day out with the girls.” Marlena returns her hug, “I’d like that and thanks again, Maggie.”
John holds the door open for Maggie, who exchanges greetings with Mike as he passes her to enter the room. Marlena greets Mike as Maggie smiles up at John and says in parting, “Good luck.” John is puzzled by that remark and enters the bedroom and closes the door, “All right, Doc, what’s going on?” Marlena holds out her arm to Mike so that he can take her blood pressure and asks innocently, “Going on?” John moves to the edge of the bed and folds his arms across his chest,
“Don’t try playing the innocent with me, Doc. You have that look in your eye.”
“What look might that be, John?”
Mike chuckles, “John, I think you’d better quit while you’re ahead. I think I know what’s coming.” “Want to clue me in before she gets started?” John asks hopefully. Mike shakes his head and says before listening to Marlena’s heart, “Sorry, John, you’re on your own. Once I answer the question I know she’s dying to ask me, I’m out of here.” Marlena waits until Mike is finished checking her heart before she says, “And she’d better get the answer she wants.” The light bulb goes off over John’s head, “Doc, if that question has anything to do with what we were discussing earlier…”
Marlena’s appreciative gaze slowly sweeps him from head to foot and back up again. John’s breath catches in his throat. A smile of satisfaction curves Marlena’s lips, then she turns her gaze to Mike as he puts away his medical equipment, “Well?” Mike snaps his medical bag closed, “You have amazing recuperative powers, Marlena.”
Marlena flashes her husband a dazzling smile, then asks Mike, “And?” Mike looks from one to the other, “Will you keep in mind that there is a law against killing your doctor for a diagnosis or recommendation you don’t agree with?” John gives Marlena a triumphant grin, “He’s going to agree with me.” Marlena shakes her head and laughs, “Not if he wants me to remember what he just said he won’t.”
Mike eases himself toward the door, “I’ll tell you what, how about if I leave and phone the results of my exam in after I get a safe distance away.” John and Marlena both look at him and say in unison, “Coward.” Mike places his hand on the door, “Oh? And which one of the two of you would *you* want to face after hearing something you didn’t want to hear?” John and Marlena look at each other and laugh. Marlena says, “He has a point.” John nods in agreement. Mike shakes his head in exasperation, “If the two of you are finished amusing yourselves, I’ll say what I have to say.”
John sits on the bed next to Marlena and once again their voices are in unison, “We’re ready.” Mike bites back the urge to laugh, “First, all your vital signs are back to normal, Marlena.” Marlena gives John an “I told you so” smile. Mike continues, “Second, I recommend you continue to rest for the remainder of the evening, just to be on the safe side.” John gives Marlena an “I told you so” smile. Mike wasn’t finished, “However, there isn’t any reason why you can’t resume normal activities, Marlena – within reason, of course. If you overdo again, I can’t guarantee that you won’t encounter a longer recuperation period next time.” Mike reaches for the doorknob and says in parting, “If Belle and Brady turn out anything like their parents, I’m going to have the last laugh.” He slips out of the room and closes the door quietly behind him. John looks at Marlena, “Now what do you suppose he meant by that?” Marlena is barely able to keep the laughter from her voice, “If I didn’t know any better, I’d think he just said we were a handful.”
John’s gaze drops to her breasts, “Well, one of us is.” Before Marlena can reply, the phone rings. She starts to reach across John to pick it up and finds herself rolled onto her back, her hands pinned above her head with one of his hands. “Forget the phone, Doc.” “Okay. Does this mean you’re going to make love to me now?” John runs his index finger slowly along her cheek, “No, it means we’re going to discuss it – without interruptions.” “Discuss it? But Mike just said…” His finger slides along her jaw, “You could have a longer recuperation period next time you overdo.” “John, we’re talking normal activity…”
John grins as his finger trails across her lips , “Doc, there isn’t anything normal about our…activity.” Now Marlena is exasperated, “Oh all right, you have me there but I couldn’t be any more rested if I tried.” John taps her chin lightly, “Yes you could and you will for a few more hours.” He releases her and rolls off the bed, “In the meantime, I have a meeting with Abe.” Marlena sits up and folds her arms beneath her breasts causing them to swell over the neckline of her nightgown, “I thought you were suppose to meet with him this morning?” She watches with smug delight as John eyes drop to that swell and he swallows painfully, “He…ah…got tied up and I agreed to meet with him this afternoon.” A smile plays about Marlena’s lips as she unfolds her arms and slowly draws the blankets up to her chin, “Well, then, I suppose you’d better go meet with him.” John is on the bed and dragging her and the blankets up into his arms, his mouth swooping down to capture hers. Her mouth parts under his and he explores the recesses of her mouth. She kisses him back with equal intensity, savoring every moment. John slowly drags his lips from hers, his voice unsteady as he says, “You’re shameless, Mrs. Black.” Marlena laughs softly and pulls away from him and settles herself back on the bed, “And don’t you forget it, Mr. Black. Now go meet with Abe so I can get some rest.”
***
After several minutes of filling John in on the latest on their investigation of Stefano, Abe realizes that he isn’t even paying attention and says, “A recent source told us that Stefano was last seen on Mars.” John’s mind is replaying those last few moments he’d spent with his very tempting wife. He replies absently, “That’s nice, Abe.”
Abe laughs, “John.”
John looks at him, “Hmm?”
“Something tells me your mind is elsewhere this afternoon. Maybe we should postpone this meeting to another time.”
John gives himself a mental shake, “No, we’ve already postponed it once.” He grins and adds, “I’ll try to pay attention this time, partner. Now what was that about Mars?” Abe smiles and waves his hand, “Nothing.” He hands John a very slim folder, “Rather than repeat everything I just said, why don’t you look through this.” John looks at the folder in surprise, “This is all you’ve gotten since I’ve been gone?” Abe looks unhappy, “I’m afraid so.” John opens the folder and flips through the few pages it contains, “This doesn’t tell us any more than we knew before and there isn’t anything in here about Roman’s part of the investigation.” He looks up at Abe, “I’m assuming he hasn’t had time to turn anything in to you yet.” Abe shrugs, a frown on his face, “I don’t know if he is going to turn in anything, John. He said all his leads have been dead ends.” A frown settles on John’s brow too, “What leads has he been following?” Abe’s office door opens at that moment and Abe says, “Maybe you’d better ask him that, yourself.” John turns around. Roman is standing in the open doorway.
Roman closes the door and says with a hint of anger in his voice, “Abe, I thought you were going to keep me informed on any meetings held in the department concerning Stefano.”
He shoots a hostile look at John and adds, “And that includes the ones with the civilian factor.”
John sets the file aside and folds his arms across his chest and says calmly, “It’s nice to see you again too, Roman. Now suppose you tell us how you knew there was a meeting going on.” Roman’s eyes harden, “Let’s get something straight, right up front, Black. The only reason the ISA is even tolerating your presence in this investigation is because Stefano has targeted your wife. If it was up to me, you wouldn’t even be a part of it, any more than you would be a part of my childrens’ lives.”
Abe steps in to defuse the situation before it gets out of control, “Roman, we’re here to discuss Stefano, period. Not your feelings nor the ISA’s.” John speaks up, “That’s all right, Abe. Let him get it out of his system because until he does, this investigation isn’t going anywhere.” Abe nods, “Then I think I’d better leave the two of you alone.” John voices his gratitude, “Thanks, partner.” Roman doesn’t say a word as Abe walks out of the office. The moment the door closes, he glares at John, his voice full of antagonism, “As far as I’m concerned, we have nothing to discuss. You may be married to my ex-wife…”
John interrupts him, his voice civil, “My marriage to Marlena has nothing to do with this investigation. However, it does have everything to do with our working relationship and for Marlena’s sake and the childrens’ sake, we do need to discuss your feelings on the matter.” Roman doesn’t bother to hide his hatred, “My feelings? You know damn well what they are, what they’ve always been. From the way I look at things, ever since you first stepped foot in Salem – your goal has been to take away everything that belonged to me. It doesn’t look like that has changed any.”
John says calmly, “We both know what brought me to Salem and the only thing I was ever guilty of was having an affair with Marlena while she was married to you. I think Marlena and I, both, have more than atoned for that.” Roman replies sarcastically, “Oh yes, I’ve seen how everyone has forgiven the two of you. At least you had the decency to wait a few years before you jumped back into bed together.” John’s hands curl into fists at his side. He takes a deep breath and relaxes, uncurling his fists. Hitting Roman wasn’t going to help matters. “You’re an even bigger fool than I thought you were, Brady and if you think I’m going to tolerate your bad mouthing Marlena, you’re mistaken. And if you want to discuss this situation from points of view, why don’t we take a look at it from my perspective?”
Roman folds his arms across his chest and leans back against the file cabinet, a sneer on his face, “Why not?” John continues, “I know how much Marlena loved you and everything she went through to try to get you to take her back. I know how devastated your children were when you decided to leave Salem. I know what Marlena and the children have gone through these past few years without you. I was here and you weren’t – you chose to end the marriage, you chose to leave your children and you’re angry because they didn’t sit around and wait for you, yet again. The biggest mistake you ever made was in assuming that I wanted to take your place. The truth is, I wanted my *own* place in their lives and now I’ve got that. For your sake and everyone else’s, you need to come to terms with it and accept it.” “Are you through?” A silken thread of warning enters John’s voice, “Just one more thing. If your actions endanger Marlena or my family, in any way, you’ll have me to answer to.”
Roman pushes himself away from the file cabinet, “Is that a threat?” John lifts an eyebrow and asks simply, “How would the old Roman Brady have answered that question?” That brought Roman up short. Something flitters across his face, an emotion that John couldn’t quite define, not then. The silence that falls between them is broken by the sound of Roman’s cell phone ringing. He answers it with a curt “hello” and after listening to a very brief message, he hangs up.
Without looking at John, Roman tucks his cell phone away and says abruptly, “Our little meeting is over.” He walks out. Moments later, John is so deep in his thoughts, he doesn’t hear Abe enter and doesn’t realize he’s there until his friend’s hand settles on his shoulder, “John?”
John pulls himself back to his surroundings, “Abe. Have you been back long?” Abe shakes his head, “No, I just came back in.” He looks around, “What happened to Roman?” John says under his breath, “That’s what I’d like to know.” Abe looks at him, “What was that, John?” “Sorry, Abe, just talking to myself. Roman received a phone call and left.” Abe moves behind his desk and sits down, “No explanations?” J
ohn shakes his head no as he moves from where he’d been sitting on the desktop and turns and faces Abe. Abe frowns then asks, “I take it nothing was resolved between the two of you?” “Now that’s a question I can’t answer, Abe.” “Something’s bothering you about your meeting with Roman, isn’t it?” John admits that much, “Yes, but I can’t quite put my finger on it.” “Want to discuss it?” John shakes his head again, “Not yet. I need some time to sort through everything.” He turns and his gaze sweeps the office, “Speaking of discussing things, Roman never did answer my question about how he knew we were having a meeting.”
Abe follows John’s gaze, “Are you thinking what I’m thinking?” John looks back at his friend and nods, “We both know what tactics the ISA resorts to during their investigations.” By mutual consent the two of them do a slow, methodical search of Abe’s office. After ten minutes, John stops and holds up an electronic bug to show Abe, then drops it to the floor and smashes it. Abe looks down at it, “Do you think that will make the ISA any more cooperative?” The lack of surprise in John’s voice escapes Abe, “It wasn’t ISA issue, Abe.” Abe, on the other hand, is surprised, “Stefano?” John nods. A sudden thought strikes Abe, he looks at John sharply, “John, you’re not thinking that Roman…” John laughs and clasps Abe’s shoulder, “Don’t be ridiculous, Abe. Roman probably found out from one of the men. After all, he worked with most of them.” He looks down at the smashed device, “Let’s just hope none of them are on Stefano’s payroll.”
***
The moment his listening device goes dead, Stefano curses loudly and slams the lid of the electronics case shut. A harsh laugh floats over from the far side of the room. Stefano looks over at the darkened corner and says coldly, “Try to contain your amusement. John Black may have a few suspicions but he isn’t going to find out the truth until it is too late.” Roman Brady steps out of the shadows, “You’ve under-estimated him before, Stefano.” A smile of amusement settles on Stefano’s features, “Yes, but this time he has much more too lose and he will get careless. You will see to that.” Roman’s smile contains no amusement and Stefano is satisfied at the look of pure cold, hatred that twists the man’s features.
***
John decides to stop by the Brady Pub on his way home. The moment Caroline sees him, she comes out from behind the bar, “John, how is Marlena?” John gives her a hug, “Mike says she’s back to normal and she should be up and around tomorrow.” Caroline smiles in relief, “Oh, I’m so glad. You’ll have to give her my love and tell her to stop by when she gets the chance.” “I will, Caroline.” As they walk the short distance to the bar, Caroline asks curiously, “So what brings you here?” “I had a meeting with Abe and thought I’d stop by on my way home and see if Eric was still here.” A puzzled frown gathers on Caroline’s brow, “Eric?” John nods, “He said he was coming over here to help Shawn with something.” Caroline shakes her head, “He hasn’t been here, John. Even if he had, he wouldn’t have been able to help Shawn with anything. Shawn has been in Chicago all day.” Caroline’s attention is caught by a customer. John uses her distraction to wave a quick goodbye. By the time John steps out of the pub, nightfall is quickly approaching. He walks to where his vehicle is parked, and is suddenly struck by the strange sensation that someone is following him. He wheels around and a shadowy figure takes off running in the opposite direction. John gives chase.
***
Eric descends the last step onto the pier when he hears a muffled groan and then a thud. He looks over in time to see someone fall and another figure backing away. He calls out, “Stop!” For a brief instant, the figure looks over at him and the dim light falls across the exposed face, Eric gasps aloud as he recognizes the attacker. The figure turns and runs. Eric rushes over to the fallen figure and gently turns him over. He receives his second shock – it is John.
Marlena wakes up out of a sound sleep, sits bolt upright in bed and cries out, “John!” She is startled to find it dark beyond the spill of light cast from the bedside lamp. John should have been home hours ago. Something was wrong, she could feel it. She tosses the bedclothes aside and wastes no time getting dressed. By the time she reaches the living room, Kit is hanging up the phone. He turns to say something to Hope and sees Marlena standing in the doorway. He isn’t surprised to see her there. Marlena rushes to his side, “It’s John, isn’t it?” Kit takes her hands in his, “Yes. That was Abe on the phone. He said John is on the way to the hospital.” Marlena pales but her voice is strong as she demands, “What happened?” “According to Abe, it looks like John might have been mugged. He was found unconscious on the pier.” “I want to go to the hospital.” Kit nods and looks over at Hope, “Go ahead, Kit. I’ll stay here with the children.” She walks over to the pair and lays a comforting hand on Marlena’s arm, “I’m sure he’ll be all right, Marlena.” Marlena nods and allows Kit to escort her out of the room.
***
Eric peeks through the staff lounge window and sees his mother arrive, escorted by Father Christopher. He watches as Abe and then his uncle Bo greets her with a hug. After they exchange a few words, his mother disappears into the examining room. He sees his grandmother arrive and quickly slips out of the staff lounge. Bo finishes filling his mother in, ending with, “And that’s all we know right now.” Caroline frowns, “I don’t understand it. John had just left the pub about 20 minutes before the attack. I assumed he was going home. What was he doing down on the pier?” Abe shakes his head, “We don’t know, Caroline. All we know is that Eric found him there.”
He sees Eric approaching and wrongly assumes he just arrived, “Eric, you’re finally here. Is there anything you can add to what you already told me on the phone?” Kit watches Eric with interest. He’d seen him peeking out the staff room window and the way he’d slipped from the room unseen by the others. He notices the wary look that enters the younger man’s eyes at Abe’s question before Eric replies, “I’m sorry, Abe. It’s like I said on the phone. I arrived on the pier and saw someone lying there unconscious. I can’t tell you what a shock it was to find out that it was John.” Kit asks the question Eric had been dreading to hear from Abe, “And you didn’t see anyone else around?” Eric shakes his head again, his eyes never meeting Kit’s, “No, no one.” Bo turns to Abe, “I think I’ll go down there and see how the investigation is coming along. Call me when there is news on John.” Abe nods and watches Bo leave. Eric starts to make his retreat, but finds himself trapped when Kit follows him and reaches out and takes his arm, “We need to talk.”
***
Inside the examining room, Marlena is standing next to her unconscious husband, his hand held tightly in hers as she anxiously watches Mike finish his examination. When he finishes, he looks up at her and answers her unspoken question. “He’s suffered a blow to the head. A pretty severe blow from the looks of it. Couple that with the fact that he’s still unconscious, he may have a skull fracture. I want to send him down for a cat scan. In the meantime, try talking to him. He might respond to your voice.” Marlena nods, then turns her attention to John. She reaches up with a trembling hand and gently smoothes a lock of hair back from his forehead, “John, it’s me, Marlena.” She leans closer and brushes her lips across his, “I’m here, honey. Please open your eyes. I need to know that you’re going to be all right. I need you back here with me.”
She examines his face closely for some kind of response, but there is none. “I checked on Belle and Brady before I came. They were sleeping like two little angels. And TJ was absorbed in one of those books that you were going to have him read to me as a bedtime story. He had all the lights on in his room and his hair was practically standing on end, so I know I wouldn’t have liked what he was reading but I still love you for insisting I rest and trying to find ways to make sure I did. Well, I’m rested now, John and if you open your eyes, you can see that for yourself.” Her voice falls to a whisper, “Please open your eyes.” Mike lays a gentle hand on Marlena’s arm, “They’re here to take him down for the cat scan, Marlena.” Marlena nods again, leans over and kisses John and then steps back as they transfer him to a gurney and wheel him out of the examining room. Mike motions for Caroline to join Marlena and then leaves the two women alone. The moment Marlena feels the older woman’s arms slide around her, she allows the tears she’d been holding in check to fall.
***
Eric is rescued by the timely entrance of John’s gurney being wheeled past them and then Mike’s emergence from the examing room. Kit turns to Mike, “How is he?” “He’s received a severe blow to the head and hasn’t regained consciousness. I’m sending him down for a cat scan to rule out a skull fracture.” Abe glances toward the closed examining room door, “How is Marlena holding up?” Mike sighs, “As well as can be expected. I’m just afraid of what kind of set back she’ll suffer if John doesn’t regain consciousness soon.” Kit nods, “She won’t leave his side until he does.”
Eric steps in with a suggestion, “Why don’t you set up an extra bed in his hospital room for her?” Mike flashes Eric a grateful smile, “Thanks, Eric, that’s an excellent idea and I don’t know why I didn’t think of it. I’ll go make the arrangements now.” Abe adds, “And I think I’ll go arrange for a police guard for their room. Until we find out who the attacker was and why, I’m not taking any chances.” Eric suddenly finds himself alone with Kit and mentally kicks himself for opening his big mouth. Kit smiles, not unkindly, “Reprieve is over, Eric. Now suppose you tell me what really happened out on that pier.” Eric becomes defensive, “You all ready heard what happened.” Kit nods, “Yes, but it wasn’t the truth.” Eric turns away, afraid Kit will see the guilt in his eyes, “I have nothing else to add.”
Kit clamps a firm hand on Eric’s shoulder, “Eric, if you know something that could explain why John was attacked and who his attacker was, you have to tell the truth. Especially if this wasn’t a simple mugging because it could happen again. Maybe not to John. Next time, it could be your mother.” Eric closes his eyes. He can’t tell Kit or anyone else the truth because telling the truth would mean revealing who the attacker was and Eric knew that would create even more problems, for everyone. He shrugs Kit’s hand off, “I need to go tell Carrie and Sami about John. They’d want to be here for mom.” This time, Kit doesn’t stop Eric from leaving.
***
Marlena is sitting in the waiting room surrounded by family and friends by the time Mike comes back with the cat scan results. She rises to her feet and moves the few steps to meet him, “What did the test results show?” Mike gives her a reassuring smile, “Good news. He doesn’t have a skull fracture, just a minor concussion.” Relief lights her eyes as she asks her next question, “Has he regained consciousness?” “Not yet but he was starting to come around after the cat scan. He’s been transferred to a private room and I’ll take you to him now.” Carrie jumps to her feet, “Can the rest of us see him?” Mike shakes his head, “I’m afraid not, Carrie. Maybe tomorrow.” He turns to Marlena, “Ready?” Marlena nods and follows Mike while the others express their relief over the good news. Eric slips away before Kit gets a chance to corner him again.
***
Marlena sits on the bed beside John, takes his hand in hers and raises it to her cheek. Mike motions for the nurse to follow him out. Before the door is closed behind them, Marlena says to John with a hint of humor in her voice, “You’ve picked a fine way to avoid making love to me tonight, John Black. If I’d have known you were going to end up flat on your back, unconscious in a hospital room I wouldn’t have let you leave the house today. So the least you could do is wake up and apologize.” John’s barely whispered “sorry, Doc” brings tears of relief to Marlena’s eyes. His eyes slowly flutter open and his hand tightens on hers as he continues, his voice a little stronger, “You should have…locked me in.” Marlena nods, then asks, “How do you feel?”
John grimaces, “Like a whole building has fallen on my head. What happened?” “You were attacked on the pier and hit on the head. Mike says you have a slight concussion.” John frowns, “Attacked on the pier?” Marlena caresses his cheek with loving fingers, “Don’t you remember?” John starts to shake his head and thinks better of it when the slight movement causes an explosion of pain. He closes his eyes and takes a deep breath, then says with a shaky laugh, “Better not try that again.” Marlena starts to pull away from him, “I should get Mike.” John’s eyes fly open and he refuses to release her hand, “No, stay. Use the call button.” Marlena nods, reaches over John with her free hand and pushes the button. John’s arm slides around her and pulls her closer, “I don’t suppose you want to kiss me before he arrives?”
A teasing light enters Marlena’s eyes, “I think we’d better wait on that until Mike says it’s okay.” “Marlena…” She shuts him up with a very gentle kiss, then draws back slightly and tells him firmly, “It’s my turn to play tyrant and you will follow doctor’s orders.” The door opens and Mike enters saying, “Well, that didn’t take long. I wasn’t expecting you to regain full consciousness for awhile yet, John.” John smiles up at Marlena, “I didn’t want my beautiful wife to think I was deliberately ignoring her.” Marlena’s eyes glow, “He’s just trying to be nice. I threatened him.” Mike rolls his eyes, “The two of you don’t quit, even when one of you is laid up in a hospital bed.” He checks John’s vitals, then asks, “Other than a headache, how are you feeling?” John admits, “I’m not anxious to get up and dance around the room.” Mike replies deadpan, “It’s a good thing, you probably wouldn’t be able to keep up with it.”
Marlena, resists the urge to laugh and shoots John a “it’s time to be serious” look and informs Mike, “He’s having short term memory loss right now. He doesn’t remember the attack.” Mike nods, “That’s to be expected. What is the last thing you do remember, John?” John frowns, “I’m not sure. Wait, yes I do. I went to the pub after I left Abe’s office.” “And after that?” John is silent a moment, the effort of trying to think causing his head to ache unbearably. Finally he says, “I don’t know. It’s all a blank.” Marlena gives his hand a reassuring squeeze, “Don’t think about it right now, honey. It will come back to you eventually.”
Mike nods, “Probably once the slight swelling in the brain tissues goes down. You took quite a blow, so you’ll experience some pain for awhile too. I’ve ordered something for the pain but I want to wait a few hours before the nurse gives it to you.” He looks at Marlena and adds, “I’m assuming you plan to stay here with him tonight, so I’ve had the other bed set up for you. Now, if you don’t have any further questions, I’ll come back in the morning and check up on both of you.” They thank him and he leaves. John reaches up, threads his hands through Marlena’s hair and pulls her closer, “He didn’t say a thing about not kissing my wife.” Marlena laughs softly, her warm breath fanning his face and neck. “No, he didn’t,” then adds warningly, “but, it could prove to be very painful.” John murmurs before capturing her lips, “Baby, you’re well worth every moment of pain.
Eric decides to take a walk in the park near the hospital before heading home. It is nearly deserted and he manages to avoid the few people strolling there. As his steps take him to the playground area, he is suddenly confronted by two men. He recognizes them immediately and stands his ground, “What do you want?” “The boss has a little job for you.” Eric looks from one to the other, “Is that why my step-father was attacked tonight? To make sure I’d co-operate?” The shorter man reaches out and grabs Eric’s shirt front, “We know you saw the attacker and kept your mouth shut about what you saw, but you’re going to provide evidence for the police to find.”
Eric jerks free, ripping his shirt in the process, “You can go back and tell your boss I meant what I said in LA, I’m out of it.” The two men look at each other and trade grins that are clearly visible in the moonlight. The larger of the two men speaks up, “What a shame it would be if someone else in your family should have an *accident.* Maybe we’d get your attention again if we chose your pregnant mother.” Eric eyes the two of them as if they were crazy, “If you want me to believe your threats, you’ll have to do better than that. My mother isn’t pregnant and I’d certainly know if she was.”
The larger man informs him, “Not if she had a reason to keep her pregnancy a secret until she had certain tests performed to verify that the baby wasn’t affected by your youngest sister’s bout with the measles. And that information can be verified. She’s scheduled to have the tests done at University Hospital the day after tomorrow at 10 a.m.” Eric pales, that was too much information for them to be bluffing. He knew they had him right where they wanted him and he lashes out in anger and makes a charge at the man, receiving a blow to the stomach that drops him to the ground. As he is bent over gasping for breath, a small dark object and a pair of gloves lands in the dirt in front of him. “You’re to plant this on the pier before your Uncle the cop gets there. We’ve managed to side track him, but you don’t have much time. Don’t disappoint the boss, Eric and wear the gloves so you don’t leave any fingerprints.” The two men disappear into the shadows. Eric reaches out and picks up one of the gloves and uses it to nudge open the small object. It flips open to reveal an ISA badge and identification card – both belonging to his father.
***
Hope descends the stairs as Bo enters the front door of the Black house. She reaches the foyer, “Did you find anything?” Bo shakes his head, “Nothing.” “Bo, something or someone set off that alarm.” Christopher enters the house, “We agree.” Abe follows Christopher into the house, as Hope asks, “Do you two know something we don’t?” Abe points out, “It’s a little too coincidental after John’s attack tonight.” Hope looks at the three men in concern, “You think John’s attack was deliberate?” Bo slides a comforting arm around her waist, “We still think it might have been a random mugging but we haven’t finished investigating yet. In fact, I was on my way down to the pier when you called me about the alarm.”
Kit voices his concern, “Abe and I were discussing it on the way over and we think John’s being out of commission and our being away from the house tonight provided Stefano DiMera with the perfect opportunity to put the security system to the test.” Bo nods, “You could be right. Maybe we should contact Roman about this.” Abe says reluctantly, “I don’t think that’s such a good idea, Bo.” Bo is surprised, “Why not? He *is* investigating Stefano, isn’t he?” Abe exchanges a quick look with Kit, then looks at Bo, “I’d rather not pull Roman into this until I’ve had a chance to discuss it with John.” Bo frowns, “John is hardly in any condition to discuss it, Abe and I’m sure Roman would want to know about this right away.” Abe confesses, “I’m not so sure of that, Bo.” Bo is immediately on the defensive, “What are you trying to say, Abe?” Abe asks pointedly, “You’ve seen the latest file on Stefano, have you noticed any new leads or information?”
Bo shakes his head no. Abe continues, “Then ask yourself this, if Roman is heading up an ISA investigation that has kept him busy following leads, why don’t we have any new information and why are we exactly where we started before he came to Salem?” Bo says angrily, “I don’t like what you’re implying, Abe.” Abe admits, “I don’t like it either, Bo and I’ve been trying to rationalize this ever since Roman came back to Salem. Something isn’t right and I don’t know if it has something to do with the ISA’s agenda or Roman’s animosity for John but whatever it is, I intend to get to the bottom of it.” Hope lays a calming hand on Bo’s chest and asks, “We all know that their first meeting wasn’t going to be easy but are you sure you aren’t exaggerating Roman’s animosity, Abe?” Abe sighs, “If you would have asked me that question yesterday, I would have said it’s possible, Hope but not after what I saw in my office today.
Roman showed up while John was there. Roman was deliberately trying to provoke John. I was more surprised by it than John was but he wasn’t willing to talk about it. He didn’t have to, half the precinct heard part of what Roman said to him. He wasn’t exactly trying to keep his feelings a secret with the way he was shouting.” Bo asks, obviously puzzled by what he was hearing, “Did you question Roman’s actions?” Abe shakes his head, “I didn’t get a chance to, Bo. He left before I could talk to him. Now do you see why I don’t want to bring him into this until I’ve spoken to John?” Bo nods, “But I don’t have to like it.” Kit interrupts in a calm voice, “I think we should concentrate on discovering who attacked John and tightening up security around here.” Bo nods again, “I agree and I’m also going to have a talk with my brother.” Before anyone can stop him, Bo leaves. Hope suggests, “Maybe I should go after him. In the frame of mind he’s in, he might go after Roman first. At this point, he’ll probably do more harm than good if he talks to Roman.” Abe shakes his head, “I’ll go after him, Hope. In the meantime, I’ll put in a call to have a few more men assigned to patrol the grounds.”
***
Contrary to what Hope believed, Bo headed directly for the pier. He knew he needed time to calm down and think things through before he confronted his brother. He is surprised to find Eric on the pier talking to the investigating officers. “Eric, what are you doing here?” Eric says easily, “I wanted to help out since I’m the one who found John. I thought coming back down here might help me to remember a few details I’d forgotten.” Bo isn’t the least suspicious, “And did it?” Eric shakes his head, “I’m afraid not.” Bo turns to the two investigating officers, “Have you found anything?” “Not yet, sir. We’re still searching the pier. It hasn’t been easy since the fog moved in,” one of them replies. Eric holds out a flashlight to Bo, “I stopped by the pub and picked up a couple of extra flashlights.”
Bo takes it, “Thanks, Eric. Maybe between the four of us we’ll find something. You two men start your search at that end of the pier and we’ll start from over here.” He looks at Eric, “Show me where you found him.” Eric pulls the jacket together that he’d pilfered from the pub to conceal the tear in his shirt and leads Bo over to an area near several large pilings, “It was right about here.” Bo begins searching the area around the pilings. Eric pretends to search while keeping an eye on Bo. His heart sinks when Bo stoops down and picks up Roman’s ID and badge half hidden under a piece of trash. He starts to walk towards Bo to stop him from calling out, but he is too late. “I’ve found something.” Abe arrives in time to hear him, “What did you find, Bo?” “I don’t know yet, Abe. It looks like some kind of wallet.” Bo holds the wallet by the corner and pulls out a hankerchief and uses it to open the wallet, “Eric, would you shine your flashlight this way?” Eric reluctantly does so as Abe and the the two officers join them. Eric’s soft groan of despair is smothered by the reaction of surprise from the others.
***
Mike takes a peek in John’s hospital room, smiles, shakes his head and quietly closes the door. He should have known the extra bed wouldn’t be needed. He nods to the armed police guard then turns to go back to the nurse’s station to find Abe waiting for him. Mike’s smile fades at the look on his face, “What’s going on, Abe?” “I need to talk to John.” Mike shakes his head no, “I’m sorry, Abe. John has had a rough night so far and he and Marlena are both sleeping. Whatever you need to talk to him about will have to wait until after I’ve examined him in the morning.” Abe frowns, “This can’t wait, Mike.”
Mike stands firm, “It’s going to have to, Abe. John took a very severe blow to the head and the best thing for him right now is to rest. Not to mention the stress this is putting on Marlena. If you go in there now and upset them, you’re not going to help the situation.” Abe finally relents, “All right, you win but I will be back here first thing in the morning.” “That’s fine, Abe as long as you understand that unless I’m satisfied that John’s made a marked improvement, you won’t get to see him even then.” Mike leaves to finish up his rounds. A brief smile touches Abe’s lips, “I should have hired you to guard their door, Mike.” His smile fades as he walks over to the police guard and gives him further instructions.
***
John stirs restlessly in his sleep, murmuring that he needs to protect Marlena. She awakens instantly and softly calls his name. “John?” He doesn’t awaken but murmurs something else she doesn’t catch. She reaches up and soothes his brow with gentle fingers and whispers to him. “I’m here, John. I’m okay and I’m safe.” He unconsciously reaches for her, pulling her closer and with a sigh of satisfaction settles back into a quiet sleep. Marlena falls back asleep moments later.
Eric stops his pacing, parts the drapes and looks out his bedroom window, groaning as he sees the first rays of light on the eastern horizon. Letting the drape fall, he walks over to the bedside table and turns on the lamp. His hand trembles as he slowly opens the drawer and pulls out a sealed envelope with John’s name written across the front of it. He takes it in his hands as if he plans to rip it in two, then changes his mind and slips it back in the drawer. Sinking onto the bed, he clasps his hands between his knees and hangs his head. Things were suddenly so much worse and now that his mother’s life and his unborn brother or sister’s life was being threatened. He should never have come back to Salem. He doesn’t hear his bedroom door open, nor the soft footsteps that cross his room. A light hand reaches out and touches his arm.
Eric is off the bed like a shot, earning a shriek from the room’s other occupant. Eric’s fright adds a harshness to his voice he didn’t normally use, “Belle! What are you doing here?” Belle’s eyes instantly fill with tears and her lower lip quivers as she stands there bravely before her older brother. A lone tear rolls down her cheek and Eric is instantly contrite. He scoops her up in his arms and hugs her close, “I’m sorry, Squirt. I didn’t mean to yell at you.” He kisses her cheek and caresses her soft hair, “You scared me, that’s all. Do you forgive me?” Belle wraps her arms around his neck, leans her wet cheek against his and nods her head, “Belle sorry too.” Eric sits on the bed and settles Belle down beside him, saying gently, “Now do you want to tell me why you are here?” Belle frowns, then looks up at him, “Belle had bad dream. Mommy and Daddy not here but you awake.” She stands up on the bed beside him and touches his cheek, “Why Eric sad?” Eric manages a smile, “I’m not sad, Belle. Just tired.” Belle tilts her head and looks at him, “You have bad dream too?” Eric nods his head, “Yes, Belle, I’ve been having a bad dream too.” Before she can ask any more questions, he rises to his feet, “What do you say to a piggy back ride back to your room? It’s not time for you to be up yet and you’ll feel better if you get a little more sleep. Okay?” Belle makes a face, “Belle have to?” Eric nods and presents his back to Belle. With a soft giggle she climbs up on his back and wraps her arms around his neck, whispering in his ear, “I wuv you, Eric.” Eric gives her arms a gentle squeeze, “I love you too, Squirt.”
***
Marlena sighs in relief as she realizes that John is still sleeping peacefully and then glances at her watch. She moans softly as she sees how early it is and then stifles a yawn. She is tempted to go back to sleep but the door creaks slightly and she turns her head to see the nurse peeking her head in. Marlena raises her finger to her lips and indicates that she’ll join the nurse out in the hall momentarily.
The nurse nods and retreats. Marlena’s gaze scans John’s features, then she leans closer to him and places a gentle kiss on his brow. Satisfied that he won’t awaken any time soon, she gently eases from his arms and the bed. She goes into the bathroom to freshen up, then slips out of the room to find Mike waiting for her at the nurse’s station but not before she notices the guard outside the hospital room door. “Mike, why is there a guard outside John’s room?” “Abe ordered one.” A flicker of fear touches her eyes, “Does Abe think the attack was deliberate and the attacker will try again?”
Mike places a comforting hand on hers, “I think he did it as a precaution, Marlena.” He didn’t want to tell her about Abe’s late night visit just yet and didn’t want her to continue to dwell on her fears for John. To distract her, he asks, “How is John this morning?” The distraction works. Marlena smiles in relief, “His vital signs are good but he was restless part of the night. He finally fell into an untroubled sleep a few hours ago.” Mike nods, then eyes her in some concern, “What about you? You don’t look like you’ve gotten much sleep. Maybe you should go home and get some rest now.” Marlena shakes her head, “I’m not leaving until John is ready to go home. I’ll rest then.” She flashes him a grin, “And if I get really tired, I can always make use of that other bed you provided.” Mike keeps his voice sober, “Does John intend to play musical beds?” Marlena supresses the laughter in her voice but the twinkle in her eyes gives her away as she says in parting before returning to John’s room, “Only if you think it will help him recover, Doctor.” Mike calls after her as she disappears into the room, “Fair warning, I’ll be in, in a little while to check up on him myself.”
***
Marlena isn’t surprised to find John awake. She smiles and moves to his bedside, “You’re suppose to be sleeping.” John pulls her down on the bed beside him and grins, “I missed your warm, sexy body curled up next to me.” She laughs softly, “There’s no doubt about it, you’re almost back to normal. How’s your head this morning?” John reaches up and touches it randomly, “Still there.” She swats at him playfully, “Do try to be serious.” He runs his hand up her arm, “Serious, hmm?” He threads his hand in her hair and gently tugs her head down until their mouths are mere inches apart, “How’s this for serious?” He closes the gap and captures her mouth with his. When their lips part, Marlena makes herself more comfortable on the bed.
John isn’t satisfied just having her next to him, he pulls her on top of him. Marlena smiles, “I like the way you do serious but you’re avoiding my question, you know.” John nods and grins, “If this wasn’t a hospital bed, I’d prove to you exactly how my head is…ah…feeling.” Marlena laughs as she moves teasingly against him, “We weren’t discussing that part of your anatomy and a hospital bed never stopped you before.” John groans softly, “True but I didn’t bring a ‘do not disturb’ sign, did you?” Marlena shakes her head, “Nope, I forgot it too but then I didn’t think you’d make such a quick recovery.”
John’s grin widens, “I didn’t want to disappoint my wife again. She’s been hot for my body, don’t you know? And if she doesn’t stop moving against me like she is, I’m liable to forget where we are.” Marlena’s laughter is smothered as he kisses her again. It takes a few moments for them to realize there is a knock at the door. They both sigh in frustration. Marlena gives him a quick kiss and says before moving off the bed, “Don’t you move now.” Her eyes wander down the length of him, “On second thought, you might want to turn onto your side.” She turns and opens the door, “Yes?” Mike is standing there with a “Do Not Disturb” sign. “I thought the two of you might have forgotten this.” Marlena laughs and takes it from him, “Well, now that you *have* disturbed us, you might as well come in and see how he is for yourself.” They turn to John who is sitting up in bed, a pillow resting on his lap. Marlena laughs softly as Mike advances to the bed, shaking his head. “I’m constantly amazed at the recuperation powers the two of you possess.”
John grins, his eyes never leaving Marlena, “Love is a powerful medicine.” Marlena moves to the far side of the bed, “A very powerful medicine.” She slips her hand into John’s as Mike examines him. When Mike is finished, John asks, “Well, do I pass inspection?” Mike shakes his head again, “The swelling is down completely, your headache appears to be gone and everything else seems to be normal – yes, I’d say you pass inspection.” “Does that mean I can take him home now?” Marlena asks hopefully. “Not yet, Marlena. I need to ask him a few questions first.” John nods, “Fire away.” “Do you remember what happened to you last night?”
John frowns, “Was I on the pier? I seem to remember following someone down there and then the lights went out.” Mike nods, “Eric found you there unconscious.” Marlena asks a question of her own, “John, why were you following someone down to the pier?” He looks up at her, “Someone was following me when I came out of the pub. So I decided to turn the tables.” Mike frowns, “Then it wasn’t a simple mugging afterall.” John looks at Mike, “Is that what Abe thinks?” Mike nods, “Yes, everyone assumed you’d been mugged. Speaking of Abe, he came by here late last night and said he needed to talk to you but I wouldn’t let him wake the two of you up. He promised to return this morning.” Marlena’s hand tightens on John’s, “He must have found out who attacked you.” John raises her hand to his lips, kisses it and gives her a reassuring smile then turns back to Mike, “If he doesn’t arrive before we leave, tell him I’ll give him a call after I get home.” “I will and now, I’ll go fill out your release papers. I know how anxious the two of you are to get out of here.”
The moment the door closes behind Mike, John pushes the pillow aside and pulls Marlena onto the bed, “Now where were we?” Marlena resists, shaking her head, “Oh no you don’t, you can wait until we get home. Besides, don’t you think we should discuss what happened to you last night?” John sighs, “No, I don’t. You know as much as I do right now.” “Then maybe we should wait for Abe and find out what he has to say?” “Doc, do you agree that what Abe has to tell us is probably bad news?” She nods. “And do you also agree that his news will probably spoil the mood?” She nods again and starts to say, “but…” John puts his fingers over her mouth, “No, Marlena, no buts. We’ve had a rough couple of days and I made a promise to you that I intend to keep, Abe or no Abe.”
Marlena can’t help but laugh as she pulls his hand away, “You mean the one about my having my way with you?” John nods enthusiastically as his hands travel down her back, cupping her buttocks and pulling her closer. Just before their lips meet, another knock sounds on the door. John releases her immediately, “Okay, I give up. We wait until we get home.” Marlena doesn’t even bother rolling off of John, she just yells “come in.” A nurse opens the door, gives a startled “oh!” then hastily departs. John and Marlena look at each other and laugh. Marlena finally says, “I think I’d better let you get out of this bed so you can get dressed.” John can’t resist pulling her close for that kiss they were just denied and murmurs optimistically before devouring her mouth, “And when we get home, I’ll undress so you can get me in to bed.”
***
John’s optimism is dashed down when Mike returns with the release papers. “There’s something I need to remind the two of you about before you leave.” A stricken look enters Marlena eyes, “You’re going to remind us about those tests, aren’t you?” John slides his arm around Marlena’s waist and pulls her close to him. Mike nods, “I’ve scheduled them for tomorrow morning but if you’d rather get them out of the way today before you leave the hospital, they have an opening in an hour. I know that’s not much time to prepare yourselves but I thought I’d mention it anyway.” He hands the release papers to John, “I’ll give you some time to discuss it.”
John and Marlena exchange glances, then Marlena says quietly before Mike leaves, “We don’t need time to discuss it, Mike. We’ll have them done this morning.” “I’ll go make the arrangements then and meet you down at Dr. Franklin’s office.”
John enfolds Marlena in his arms as the door closes behind Mike, “Are you sure, Marlena?”
She doesn’t look at him as replies, “I’m sure. The sooner we have them done, the sooner we’ll get the results back.” John tilts her chin up and sees the fear in her eyes she was trying to hide from him, “Just remember how much I love you and that we’re together in this, every step of the way and we have to keep believing that our baby is going to be fine.” “That isn’t the only thing I’m afraid of, John. I know you didn’t want to discuss this before but what if that attack on you last night *was* deliberate? And what if…” He stops her with a kiss and then cradles her face gently in his hands, “Baby, if we deal in ‘what ifs’ we’re going to drive ourselves crazy. We need to concentrate on the right here and right now.” He lowers his hands to her belly, “So what do you say we go talk to Dr. Franklin, have those tests done; and while we’re at it, check out our little guy or gal’s heartbeat?” Marlena places her hands over his and smiles up at him, “I’d like that, a lot.” John raises her hands to his lips and plants a warm kiss on each one, then slides an arm around her waist and leads her out of the room.
John gives Marlena’s hand a reassuring squeeze when the technician begins the ultrasound. Their eyes turn to the ultrasound monitor as Dr. Franklin explains, “This will tell us if there are any abnormalities and if the baby is growing properly. And I should be able to give you a due date based on the baby’s size.” The pair exchange glances as Marlena says, “We figured mid-February.” Dr. Franklin nods, “So far that looks about right.” She points to the image appearing on the monitor, “There’s your…”
She falls silent and looks closer at the monitor, then instructs the technician to move the ultrasound paddle a little to the right. Marlena grabs John’s arm in a panic.
John asks calmly, “Dr. Franklin? Is something wrong?” Dr. Franklin shakes her head, looks up from the monitor and flashes a smile at them, “No, nothing is wrong. In fact, I had to take a closer look to verify what I was seeing.” She points to the monitor again, tracing her finger around the outline of the baby, “As I was saying, here is your baby…” Her finger moves slightly to the right and she traces another outline, “…and here is your other baby.” John and Marlena are stunned. They look at each other and then at Dr. Franklin, saying in unison, “Twins?” Dr. Franklin nods as she takes measurements, “Fraternal and both appear to be at the right physical development and size. I don’t see any abnormalities consistent with rubella exposure.” The expectant parents hug each other in happy relief. Marlena asks, “How soon will we get the blood results back?” “The rubella titer should be back before you leave, the rest will be in tomorrow.” She smiles and hands them several Polaroid’s, “Your first pictures.”
John is staring at the pictures and says in awe, “Two babies, Marlena!” Marlena laughs softly as she caresses John’s cheek with her hand, “It’s only one more than we expected.” John looks over at her and grins, “Wait until Belle finds out she’s going to have two to pamper instead of the one she was hoping for.” The technician hands Dr. Franklin a slip of paper. She looks it over then announces, “Well, I have some more good news for you. Your titer came back non-immune which means your exposure to rubella didn’t affect you or the babies.” John slides his arm around Marlena and holds her close. His lips brush across her temple. Tears of relief fill Marlena’s eyes, “Thank you.”
Dr. Franklin smiles, “You don’t have to thank me, Marlena but I am glad to be the bearer of good news. Now, would the two of you like to hear your babies heartbeats?” John says enthusiastically, “Would we!” The technician moves aside for Dr. Franklin who locates one of the heartbeats instantly. John grins from ear to ear, “Now that’s music to my ears.” Marlena’s face glows with joy as she nods her head in agreement. Dr. Franklin locates the other heartbeat, this one a little fainter. Seeing the concern cross John’s face, Dr. Franklin explains, “This one is trying to hide behind the other one, so the heartbeat isn’t as loud but it’s just as strong.”
She sets aside her equipment and pats Marlena’s arm gently, “Why don’t you get dressed now and I’ll have my secretary set up an appointment for a regular visit. If there is a time that isn’t good for you, just let her know. I’ll call you tomorrow when the other results come in.” They thank her again and the moment the door closes behind Dr. Franklin, John scoops Marlena up into his arms and plants a big kiss on her lips, “Well, Mrs. Black, I’d say we’ve out done ourselves, wouldn’t you?” Marlena links her hands behind his neck, laughs and shakes her head, “I still can’t believe we’re having twins.” John sets her on her feet and cups her face in his hands, “And they’re healthy, strong and growing just like they should be. Our prayers were answered, Marlena.”
Marlena nods as tears gather in her eyes and roll down her cheeks. John brushes her tears away with his thumbs, “So what do you say to a little celebration, off by ourselves, before we go home?” Marlena leans closer and kisses his chin before saying, “I say yes. After all, you do have a promise to keep.” She dances out of his arms and scoops up her clothes, “And before you get any ideas that might embarrass anyone on the staff, you can wait outside while I get dressed.” John swats her on the rear as he passes by her, “Spoil sport.”
***
Mike finishes up the last of his paperwork and is preparing to leave for the day when Abe shows up. Mike knew that John and Marlena had already left the hospital and that Abe wouldn’t be happy to hear he’d missed them. He isn’t. “Damn it, Mike didn’t you tell them how important it was?” “I did, Abe and John said he’d call you after they got home. They had a pretty upsetting morning and needed some time alone.” Abe is suddenly concerned, “John is okay, isn’t he?” Mike reassures him but doesn’t explain further, “Yes, he’s fine. You’d never know he’d suffered that blow to the head last night.” Abe sighs, “Did he remember anything else about what happened last night?” Mike nods, “He said someone was following him when he left the pub, so he decided to go after whoever it was and when he got down to the pier, that’s when he was attacked. Have you learned something new?” Abe silently debates on how much he should tell Mike, then says, “I did but I’d rather not say anything until after I’ve talked to John. Did they say whether or not they were going right home?” Mike shakes his head, “No, they didn’t say but I’m assuming that’s where they were headed.” “Thanks, I’ll try to call them before I head over there then.”
***
Eric slips out of the house before encountering anyone else. When he reaches his car, he isn’t surprised to find an envelope sitting on the front passenger seat. Sliding in behind the wheel, he grabs the envelope and rips it open. He is to meet up with “the boss” at eleven o’clock at the Salem Inn, otherwise his mother would meet with an accident at 11:05. Glancing at his watch, Eric sees that it is a few minutes to ten. He leans his head back against the head rest and closes his eyes, his hands curl around the steering wheel. His eyes pop open as he is struck with the unshakable urge to go see his mother at the hospital and make sure she was all right before he went to the Salem Inn. He starts the car and heads down the driveway. Kit turns away from the window as Eric’s car disappears from view.
Bo and Hope enter the room arguing. “There has to be some logical explanation for this, Hope. No matter what Roman thinks of John, he wouldn’t hurt him.” “I agree, Bo, the old Roman wouldn’t have but he’s changed. You’ve even said so yourself and you’re not the only one who thinks so and you’re not the only one who is bothered by it. Look at how upset Eric and Sami have been ever since Roman came back.” “Of course they’re upset, he walked out on them and just suddenly reappeared in their lives. Now they’re torn between their father and John and Marlena. That doesn’t mean Roman is out to get John because of it.”
Hope suddenly realizes that Kit is in the room and alerts Bo to it by saying, “Kit, we didn’t know you were in here. I’m sorry, we shouldn’t have been discussing…” Kit interrupts her, “Don’t apologize, I’ve been tossing this issue around in my own mind most of the night and morning. I’m at a distinct disadvantage though, I don’t know Roman that well. I can only go by what I’ve observed.” Bo plops down into a chair, “Maybe you have more of an advantage than you think, Kit and I’d be interested in hearing what you’ve come up with.” He casts a quick glance at Hope as she takes a seat on the sofa, “*We* aren’t getting any where.” The phone rings.
Hope, remembering Belle’s penchant for picking up the phone when her parents weren’t in the house, makes a grab for it. “Black residence. Hope Brady here.” “Hope, it’s Abe. Have John and Marlena returned home yet?” “No, Abe, they haven’t. We didn’t even know John had been released from the hospital. I thought you were going to talk to them earlier this morning?” “I got tied up looking for Roman and by the time I got to the hospital, John had already been released and they’d left.” “Then John and Marlena don’t know that…” “No, Hope, they don’t. I was going to head over there but I have to meet with the Commissioner and won’t arrive before they do.” “Do you want us to break the news to them?” Abe sighs, “Looks like you’re going to have to. Oh and tell Bo that we still haven’t found Roman and let him know too, that he’s still under orders to stay out of the search. That goes for you too, Hope. You’re both too personally involved in this.” Hope glances from Bo to Kit, “I agree, Abe and I’ll pass along your messages.” “Thanks, Hope and I’ll try to get over there as soon as I can.” Hope hangs up the phone and fills Bo and Kit in on what Abe had to say and finishes with, “I think we should concentrate on how we’re going to break the news to John and Marlena.
This is going to be quite a shock to them.” Bo slams his fist on the chair, “Stop it, Hope. You act like Roman is guilty and I’ve told you, there has to be a logical explanation for why his badge and ID were on the pier. Despite what Abe said last night, you’ll never convince me that Roman was John’s attacker.” Hope shakes her head, “No, Bo, I’m just concerned about John and Marlena. Whether or not Roman was down on that pier last night doesn’t matter. The *possibility* is enough to upset them and they deserve to know what’s going on.” Bo concedes, “I’m sorry, Fancy Face. You’re right.” Kit asks quietly, “Did Abe say when we should expect them?”
Hope glances at her watch, “Not really but based on what Abe said, they should be arriving shortly.” Kit’s glance encompasses them both and says calmly, “Then why don’t we go see how the nanny is faring with the children while we’re waiting? Maybe the two of you will have calmed down enough to face them by the time they get here.” He doesn’t wait for them to follow him. Bo looks at Hope and says when Kit is out of ear shot, “Ouch! He makes me feel worse than the nuns did when I was a kid.” Hope grins, “Does that mean we can call a truce now, Brady?” Bo grins back at her, “I don’t think Father Christopher is giving us much choice.”
***
Unaware that their decision to take a detour on the way home is going have everyone frantically searching for them, John and Marlena arrive at the loft. John kisses a sensitive spot on Marlena’s neck hampering her efforts to unlock the loft door.
She stops what she is doing and turns around to face him. “John!” “Yes, dear?” “Do you or don’t you want to make it inside the loft?” “Doc, I wanted to make it in the back seat of…” Marlena slaps her hand over his mouth, “Yes, you did until you realized how much of an effort it would be to remove Belle and Brady’s car seats. And then you thought the elevator would be a challenge until you decided there weren’t enough floors…” John nips at her hand playfully, interrupting her, “You know, Doc, if I didn’t know any better I’d think you were complaining because I’m making you wait.” She grabs his hand and drops the keys into it, “Your turn.” John looks down at the keys and then up at Marlena, “My turn?”
Marlena points at the loft door, “Unlock the door, John.” A wary look enters John’s eyes, “You’re not going to try something funny are you?” A slow smile lifts Marlena’s lips, “No, I’m not going to try something *funny*. Although, I do think I deserve something for all my patience.” John’s eyes glow and he starts to reach for her, “Now you’re talking.” Marlena places her hand on his chest and holds him at bay. She shakes her head, “That’s not what I had in mind.” She bites back her laugh at his crestfallen look, then continues, “I want your shirt.” “My shirt?” Marlena nods. “Are you sure you wouldn’t rather have a kiss?” Marlena nods again. With a shrug, John removes his shirt and holds it out to her. Marlena plucks it from his fingers and tosses it over her shoulder. “Hey, I thought you said you weren’t going to…”
Marlena interrupts him, “Now I think I’d like the pants.” “Doc, are you sure you don’t want me to unlock the door first?” Marlena’s eyes dance as she shakes her head, “I want your pants.” The keys fall out of John’s hand to the floor, he starts to retrieve them but Marlena stops him, “Leave them.” John straightens and grins, “You’re the boss.” He pauses, then says, “I’ll have to take off my boots first.” “I’ll consider them a bonus.” John kicks off his boots and then, his hands fall to his waist band and he slowly releases the snap and pulls down the zipper. He watches as Marlena unconsciously wets her lower lip with her tongue. He controls his urge to laugh and then removes his jeans and hands them to her. They join the shirt. Marlena slowly eyes him from head to foot. She fights the urge to reach out and run her hands over his firmly muscled chest and arms. If she gave in to her impulses now, they’d never make it through the door. “Umm, John…maybe you should unlock the door now.”
Before he retrieves the keys, John stretches out his hand and very slowly runs his thumb along her lower lip. Marlena shivers in response and takes a step backward. John opens the door, then turns and sweeps her, weightless, up into his arms and carries her into the loft and doesn’t stop until they reach the master bedroom.
John gently places Marlena in the center of the bed and starts to lean over to kiss her. Marlena laughs softly as she snatches up a pillow and places it between them, “John! I thought you were going to let *me* have *my* way with *you*?” John grins backing away only slightly as his hand inches toward the pillow, “I thought you were.” Marlena rolls off the bed as John snatches the pillow away, her laughter floating in her wake. John tosses the pillow aside and says to distract her, “Doc, I thought you couldn’t *wait* to get me into bed?” He dives across the bed and makes a grab for her but only comes up with air as Marlena sidesteps his outstretched hand. Marlena tilts her head and looks at him, “Then I have you right where I want you, don’t I?”
John grins and pats the bed, “Yes, I guess you do. Does that mean you’re ready to join me?” Marlena is distracted by a sudden vision of herself in a white nightgown and John dressed in priest garb, minus the collar, entwined together in that same bed. John takes advantage of her brief distraction and is off the bed in a heartbeat. Marlena isn’t sorry when she feels John’s arms slide around her waist and pull her up against him asking, “What is it?” Marlena shakes her head and smiles up at him, “Nothing.” And to keep him from questioning her further, she threads her hands through his hair and draws his head down and kisses him very thoroughly, her exploring tongue adding fuel to his already raging desire. John groans and whispers as their mouths part, “Doc, don’t you think it’s time we got you out of *your* clothes?” His fingers brush along her collar bone like the wings of a butterfly. Shivers of delight follows his touch as his fingers drop to the top bottom of her dress. Marlena looks down and then back up at John nodding her head. A slow smile curves his lips as he takes his time undoing the row of buttons, his touch light and painfully teasing.
Not to be out done, Marlena rakes her nails gently across his shoulders and down his chest, hampering his efforts and fostering the urge to rip the dress off of her. They sway towards each other and then pull back, both now anxious to remove the material that separates them. Marlena impatiently brushes John’s hands aside, murmuring “let me” as she unfastens the last few remaining buttons and eases out of her dress. John’s eyes immediately drop to the swell of her breasts and her rounded abdomen and breathes, “You’re beautiful.” He drops to his knees and spreads his hands across her belly, still in awe of the fact that two babies are cradled safely inside her womb. He plants a gentle kiss there and is startled by a sudden movement. Marlena laughs softly at the look on his face, “I think your children are trying to say hello.” She takes his hand and slides it to where she can still feel movement. Tears gather in John’s eyes as he feels the fluttering against his palm. Marlena lovingly carresses his head as they share the enchanting moment.
***
Eric’s arrival at the hospital is made in record time, but like Abe before him, he is disappointed to learn that his mother and John had already left the hospital. He is relieved to hear John is fine and they were on their way home, but his heart is heavy knowing he doesn’t have much time before the *meeting.*
Reluctantly, he leaves the hospital and heads for the Salem Inn. The hotel room door is snatched open before Eric gets a chance to knock. The *boss* looks down at her watch, “Not a second to spare, Eric, I’m proud of you.” She turns and walks back into the room, “Do come in and close the door behind you.” Eric does as he’s told, then turns to the woman, “What do you want?” Her laughter is full of amusement as she pours herself a glass of wine, “Eric, Eric, Eric. Why do you always ask me that question?” Eric can’t hide the sarcasm from his voice, “Maybe because you still haven’t answered it.” The woman grins, “I like you, Eric, I really do and maybe I will answer your question this time. Afterall, you deserve to know why you were specifically chosen for those little jobs you do for me.” Her grin fades and her voice becomes threatening, “And will continue to do.” Eric remains silent as the woman takes a sip of wine.
The fact that his hands were formed into fists at his side doesn’t escape her notice. “You need to learn how to relax, Eric.” She holds up the wine decanter, “Some wine?” Eric shakes his head and continues to stare silently at her. She nods, “Alright, we’ll get down to business then.” She takes a seat in a nearby chair and looks up at him thoughtfully. Her next words are aimed at dragging an answer from him, “You really don’t have a clue why I chose you, do you?” “No. Why should I?” The woman takes another sip of wine before replying, “No, I don’t suppose you *do* know. Well, let me fill you in on a few things. You were chosen for two reasons – John Black and your mother.” “What did they ever do to you?” Eric asks angrily. “Hmm, what did they do to me? That’s very simple. John Black was masquerading around Salem as Captain Roman Brady at the time I was arrested. He wasn’t interested in hearing my explanations and made sure I went to jail. I didn’t enjoy jail, Eric. It’s a vile, nasty little place and it stifled my talents.” “And my mother?” The woman laughs, “That one is even simplier, I owe her one. So to get even with both of them, I’m using you.” “And if I refuse to work for you any longer?” Her laughter gone, she rises from the chair and walks up to him and taps him on the chest with her index finger, “Have you forgotten your mother’s condition? Or the fact that we can get to her any time we want?”
Eric replies sullenly, “I haven’t forgotten.” The woman pats his cheek, “Then there isn’t any question of your refusing to work for me, now is there?” She doesn’t wait for Eric to reply, but turns from him and walks over to the bed. Opening the briefcase laying there, she takes out a packet and tosses it to him. Eric catches it deftly and looks at it as if it were something deadly as the woman continues, “We’ve booked you and your little group for a gig in Chicago tomorrow night. They’ve already received your message and will meet you there. You’ll be contacted in the usual way to pass on the merchandise.” She walks over to the door, opens it and says in dismissal, “Don’t disappoint me, Eric.” Eric turns to leave, stopping to face her, “Some day, Savannah, I’m going to see you brought down.” He leaves with her laughter echoing in his ears.
***
At the loft, the desire that had momentarily cooled during the emotional bonding over their children’s movements is flickering to life again. This time, neither of them feels the need for urgency. Marlena holds out her hand to John, his fingers entwine with hers as she leads him over to the bed.
***
As Hope glances at the kitchen clock for the fifth time in the last ten minutes then exchanges glances with Bo, Kit knew he wasn’t going to be able to hold them back much longer. Hope’s voice is filled with worry and frustration as she finally says, “Shouldn’t they be here by now?” Bo nods, then looks at Kit, “If you’re thinking of giving us another reassuring speech, Father, save it. They *should* have been here by now and I’m not waiting around any longer.” He looks at Hope, “You with me?” Hope nods and with an apologetic shrug to Kit, she follows Bo out of the kitchen. A brief smile creases Kit’s lips. Atleast they weren’t arguing anymore. His smile fades as he wonders what had delayed his brother and Marlena and fought the urge to leave the children with the nanny and help in the search. His confidence in Bo and Hope would just have to satisfy him. The children needed him here. Kit wouldn’t have felt so confident if he’d overheard Bo and Hope’s conversation on their drive back to Salem.
Bo glances at Hope, “I hope you’re not thinking that Roman is behind this.” Hope sighs, “Bo, stop trying to second guess my thoughts. I’m just as worried about Roman as you are but until he’s found and can explain things, he’s going to be suspect whether you like it or not. And right now, we need to concentrate on finding John and Marlena, *not* arguing about your brother.” “I think we should look for Roman,” Bo tells her bluntly. Hope stares at him and says accusingly, “You’re using this search for John and Marlena as an excuse, aren’t you? You couldn’t wait for a reason to get out of that house to go look for Roman without Abe finding out.” Bo’s silence speaks volumes. Hope shakes her head in exasperation, “I can’t believe you. Abe ordered us not to join in the search…damn it, Brady, have you stopped to consider if Roman is innocent, whoever did attack John is still out there and John and Marlena could be in very real danger?” Bo glares at her, “Roman *is* innocent and the sooner we find him, the sooner we’ll learn the truth. And just maybe, we’ll also learned who really attacked John.” “And in the meantime, the attacker catches up to John and Marlena.” Bo shakes his head, “That’s not going to happen, Hope.” “You’re right, Bo, it isn’t because I intend to find them and make sure it doesn’t, with or without your help. So why don’t you just drop me off at Gran’s and I’ll take my car to go search for them.” Bo sets his jaw stubbornly, “Fine. You do it your way, I’ll do it mine.”
***
John and Marlena turn to each other as John raises his hand and caresses her cheek with trembling fingers, then slides them toward the back of her head. He buries his hands in her hair and pulls her closer as his mouth slowly descends to meet hers. Marlena quivers at the sweet tenderness of his kiss. Without breaking the kiss, John cradles Marlena in his arms and cushions her as they fall back upon the bed. Their lips part and their eyes meet as they whisper in unison, “I love you.” Marlena felt a burning desire, an aching need for another one of his soul drugging kisses. John didn’t make her wait as his lips met hers once again.
***
Eric arrives back at the house just as an officer Kit was talking to gets back into his police cruiser and leaves. Eric rolls down his window and calls out to Kit, “My mother and John aren’t back yet, are they?” Kit shakes his head no. Eric doesn’t wait for an explanation. He backs out of the driveway and heads back to town.
***
John and Marlena’s kisses further fanned the flames of their desire. John’s hands lightly trace a path over her skin, seeking and finding her pleasure points, reveling in her soft moans. As his gentle hands continue their exploration, Marlena is overwhelmed with the need to touch him in return. She trails tickling fingers up and down his spine as her lips leave a warm moist trail across his chest. Instinctively, she arches toward him bringing their bodies even closer together. The contact sends a flood of molten lava racing along the path where skin touched skin. Their lips met again in a lingering kiss filled with passion and tenderness. They abandoned themselves to the whirl of sensation as Marlena welcomes him into her body. Her gasp of sweet agony mingles with his moan of pure pleasure as they lose themselves in the web of love and desire they’d woven so skillfully around each other. Time had stopped, nothing else in the world existed or mattered at that moment.
***
Downstairs, buried under the heap of John’s clothes is the soft trill of his cell phone. At the same moment, the elevator doors slide open and a figure steps out.
The figure stepping off the elevator looks around listening carefully, then looks down at the piles of clothes. A grimy hand reaches down and picks up the clothes, gathering them under a torn and ragged jacket and then picks up the cell phone, pocketing it. Just as quietly as the figure had arrived, it disappears into the elevator.
***
John looks down at Marlena, sleeping peacefully in the circle of his arms. Her belly is pressed against his hip and he smiles as he feels the slight fluttering there. He lightly brushes a stray strand of hair from her cheek and his finger gently follows it’s soft curve. Her eyes flutter open and she smiles, “I fell asleep, didn’t I?” He nods and returns her smile, “You’ve had a busy morning.” Marlena snuggles closer to him, “And what did you have in mind for the rest of the afternoon?”
John grins. Marlena laughs softly, “John, as much as I would love that, I’m sure everyone is wondering where we are by now.” John lowers his hand and brushes it along her breasts. His grin widens as Marlena sucks in her breath. “You were saying, Doc?” She nips playfully at his chest and says breathlessly, “You don’t play fair.” John’s hand glides lower still causing Marlena to shiver in response as he whispers in her ear, “Baby, I intend to make you forget all over again that the world even exists.” With a sigh of pleasure, the rest of the world already forgetton, Marlena offers her mouth to him.
***
Hope arrives at the police station as Abe emerges from his meeting. He is surprised to find her waiting in his office, “Hope, what are you doing here?” “John and Marlena still haven’t shown up at home and I came into town to help you look for them.” Abe frowns, “They haven’t been in touch with anyone?” Hope shakes her head. Sensing there is something she isn’t telling him, he asks, “Where’s Bo?” Hope looks down at her hands and lies, “He’s out looking for John and Marlena.”
Abe isn’t sure he believes her and before he can question her further, Eric arrives prompting Abe to remark, “Let me guess, you’re here to help search for your mother and John too.” Eric exchanges glances with Hope and nods, “I came to town as soon as I found out they were missing.” Abe looks at the pair of them, “Has anyone tried reaching them on John’s cell phone?” Hope nods, “I tried to call while I was waiting for your meeting to end. There was no answer.” Eric asks, “Abe, you don’t think John’s attacker caught up to them, do you?” Abe looks at Eric curiously, “You don’t believe it was your father who attacked John, do you?” Eric fidgets nervously, “I don’t know what to think, Abe. Right now, I’m just worried about mom and John. Can we go look for them now, please?” Hope says gently hoping to steer his thoughts away from the worst case scenarios, “Eric, I know you’re worried about them too but we have to come up with some kind of plan. It’s possible they just wanted some time alone.”
Abe nods, “That’s what Mike said, which means we have to figure out where they might have gone.” Hope suggests, “What about the Penthouse? Marlena said the lease doesn’t run out for a few months yet and she and John didn’t want to sublet it in the meantime.” Abe shakes his head, “I’ve already sent a man over there, the place is deserted.” Eric chimes in, “John still owns the building the loft is in, maybe they went there.” Abe shakes his head again, “As far as I know, they’ve pretty much moved everything out of the loft and the patrolman who checked there earlier said there was no answer when he knocked.” Hope sighs in frustration, “Maybe they went there after the patrolman stopped by, Abe.” “It’s possible, Hope. It’s also possible they’re sitting in some quiet restaurant someplace, taking a walk in the park or driving around the countryside.” Eric can’t help but add, “Or lying hurt someplace. So how much longer are we going to stand around here and discuss where they might be?” Abe’s desk phone rings. He answers it and the conversation is brief. He hangs up the phone with a frown and then looks from Hope to Eric, “That was one of the patrolman. They just found John’s clothes and cell phone in an alley on the other side of Salem.” Hope sucks in her breath and Eric starts for the door.
Abe stops him with a hand on his shoulder, “It’s not going to do you any good to go rushing over there, Eric. There is a piece of good news, the clothes were in good condition, though a bit wrinkled, with no blood on them.” Eric rounds on Abe and asks angrily, “Then where are John and my mother?” He shakes off Abe’s hand, “I’m tired of talking and I intend to find them.” He stalks out. Abe looks at Hope, “There is something more going on with that young man than just his mother and John being missing.” Hope nods, “I agree and I’m afraid it’s the same thing that’s going on with Bo – Roman’s involvement in all of this.”
***
Bo slams his fist on the piling. “Damn it, Roman, where are you? If you didn’t attack John, why are you hiding?” He turns in frustration to find Sami standing there, a look of horror on her face. “Sami, I didn’t….” Sami says in a small voice, “You think he did it, don’t you? You think my dad attacked John.” “No, Sami, I don’t.” He starts to reach for her to comfort her, but she pulls away. “Why not? You know as much as I do how much he hates John and wanted to be with my mother again. And I know how strangely he’s been acting since he’s been back in Salem.”
Bo looks at her questioningly, “Strangely, how?” Sami is unable to hide the hurt in her voice, “He’s been lying to me. One minute he says he wants to spend time with me and the next moment he’s gone, without explanation, always after some mysterious phone call. It’s like he wishes I wasn’t in the house because I’m in the way.” A tear trickles down her cheek, “Well he doesn’t have to worry about that any longer because Austin is back with Will and I’m not subjecting my son to that. I’ve already moved out.” Bo sighs, “Sami, do you think your father attacked John?” Sami turns away from him and stares out over the river. “Sami?” Sami’s shoulders slump in defeat as she whispers, “Yes.” Without looking at him, she quietly walks away.
***
Belle and Brady peek around the living room door to watch their Uncle Kit pacing across the carpet. TJ sneaks up behind them and places a hand on each of their shoulders and asks quietly, “What are you two doing?” Startled, Belle turns and glares at him then raises her finger to her lips, “Shhh. Uncoo Kit is ‘stirbed.” “Disturbed by what?” Brady glances up at his brother, “Momma and Daddy being missing and he’s been doing that for a long, long time.” Belle nods, “We watching to see the hole in the carpet.” TJ bites back the urge to laugh and glances at his uncle. It was apparent that his uncle was very worried. He looks down at his younger siblings, “Maybe we’d better go back upstairs before he sees us.”
Brady shakes his head and says firmly, “No.” Belle tucks her arm in Brady’s, “Me either.” Kit calls out from the living room, “Then maybe the three of you will join me in here instead of whispering at the door.” With a guilty start, the trio faces him and then enters the room. Kit points to the sofa and the children scramble to take a seat on it. Kit sits in a chair across from them, “Now, do you want to tell me what’s going on?” Brady doesn’t hesitate, “Why were you pacing, Uncle Kit? And where’s momma and daddy?” Belle climbs down from the sofa and goes to stand in front of her uncle, “Daddy still hurt?” Kit lifts Belle up and sets her on his knee then looks at the boys, “How did you know your daddy had been hurt?” TJ admits reluctantly, “We heard you talking to Uncle Bo and Aunt Hope earlier.” Kit asks sternly, “So you were eavesdropping?” Belle shakes her head, “We not dropping, we listening.” Kit sighs and ruffles Belle’s curls. His tone softens, “Yes, your daddy was hurt but he’s okay now.”
Brady moves to Kit’s side, “Then where is he? Is he with momma?” TJ doesn’t add to the questions, but Kit sees the need for reassurance in the boy’s eyes. Kit does his best to reassure the three of them, “Your father was released from the hospital this morning. I’m sure he and your mother had a few things to take care of before they came home and should be home soon.” Brady frowns, “Then why were you putting a hole in the carpet, Uncle Kit?” “Putting a hole….oh, you mean pacing.”
Belle nods enthusiastically, looking over at the carpet a disappointed look crosses her face, “No hole.” Kit chuckles softly and slips his free arm around Brady and hugs him and Belle, “That’s just a saying, people don’t really put holes in carpets when they pace.” His voice turns serious, “And I was just pacing because I was wondering where your parents were but not because I’m worried about them.” TJ asks quietly, “You’re worried about the person who hurt my dad, aren’t you?” Kit eyes meet TJ’s and he nods, then looks down at Belle and Brady, “I know how we can all think about something else while we’re waiting for your mommy and daddy to come home.” Belle claps her hands together and shouts, “A story! Cinderlella.” Brady grimaces and shakes his head, “Not *that* story again. I want Dr. Seuss.” Belle makes a face and rolls her eyes, “There no prince in those stories, Brady. Just yucky eggs and…” TJ walks over and places a hand on Brady’s arm, “Come on, Brady, I’ll read Green Eggs to you and Uncle Kit can read Cinderella to Belle.”
The younger children satisfied with TJ’s suggestion, their concern about their parents momentarily alleviated, race out of the room hand in hand. Kit puts his arm around TJ’s shoulders, “We’ll talk later, okay?” TJ nods and then asks, “You don’t think anything happened to them do you?” Kit shakes his head, “We would have heard something by now if it had. Now, we’d better get upstairs before Belle and Brady come back down here.”
***
“I don’t believe it!” Marlena, buttons the last button on her dress and turns as John enters the bedroom, “Don’t believe what?” “My clothes are gone.” Marlena bites her lip to keep from laughing, “No.” John is far from amused, “Yes.” Marlena tries her best to stay serious, “Who do you think took them?” John shakes his head, “I don’t know but I intend to find out. Just as soon as I get some clothes, that is.” He looks at her daring her to laugh, “You do realize that I moved all of my clothes to the house, which means…”
Feeling a smile fighting it’s way to break free, Marlena turns from him, “…you can’t leave the loft.” The humor of the situation gets the best of her and a peal of laughter escapes her lips. She turns back to face her husband and says between laughs, “I’m sorry, John…it’s just…who knew?” Her eyes rake him from head to foot as a thoughtful look crosses her face, “Of course, there *is* a plus side to this situation.” “Oh really?” Marlena nods, “To have such a handsome, sexy hunk as my prisoner…I can’t even begin to tell you what kind of images that conjures up…” “Doc…” She walks up to him and places her hands on his bare chest and says seductively, “A prisoner who would be at my complete mercy.” Her hands slide down his chest. John captures them in his as they reach the waist band of his boxers, a reluctant grin touches his lips, “Doc, I’m *always* at your complete mercy.”
He brushes his lips across hers, “Now what are we going to do about my dilemma?” “Call for help?” “Whoever took my clothes, took my cell phone too.” Marlena moves away from him and retrieves her purse from the dresser. She opens it and pulls out her cell phone and waves it back and forth, “Will mine do?” “Smart ass.” Marlena smiles and holds it out to him, “I’m not the one who left my clothes and cell phone in the lobby.” Ignoring that comment, John takes the phone from her. Marlena adds, “Better make the first call count, you won’t get another one.” “Doc, aren’t you carrying this prisoner thing a little far?”
Marlena shakes her head and stifles another laugh as she points to the battery indicator, “The battery is low.” John shakes his head as he dials home, “Just my luck it’ll cut out in mid-request and I don’t know how I’m going to explain this one.” Marlena slips her arms around his waist, her eyes dancing, “Do you really think they’ll ask if you don’t tell them?” John flashes her a look of exasperation and then his attention is diverted by the voice on the other end of the line. “Belle?…Yes, Belle, it’s daddy…Yes, mommy is with me. Belle…Belle, put Uncle Kit on the phone…yes, we’ll be home soon…Yes, I know you like Cinderella…and Brady likes Dr. Suess….Belle, go get Uncle Kit…”
He pulls the phone away from his ear as Belle drops the phone at the other end. Marlena laughs, “Atleast she didn’t hang up on you.” John looks at the phone and sighs, “She might as well have, it’s dead.” He folds the phone shut, tosses it on the bed and puts his arms around her shoulders. “Now what, Mrs. Black?” “Well, Mr. Hunk, the way I see it, you have three choices.” John lifts his eyebrow, “Three?” She nods her head, “Um hmm.” “Let me guess, one of them involves my remaining as your prisoner?” Marlena smiles, “Surely you didn’t think I’d give up so easily on that one? It’s all your fault, you know.” “Mine?”
Marlena nods, “I just keep picturing you tied to the bed with silk scarves while I…” John interrupts her, resisting the urge to let her play out her fantasy, “Doc, I thought you were going to give me options to get out of here?” “You’d be rescued eventually.” “As appealing as that is, I’d rather not be interrupted by half of Salem barging through the door. What’s my second choice?” “You could wear a blanket home and I’d sneak you in the back door.” “And have to explain things to the children because they’ll be watching every entrance for our arrival? I think I like the first choice better.” “I thought you might.” “What’s my third choice?” “I could go home and bring some clothes back for you.” John shakes his head, his voice emphatic, “No way, Doc. I’m not letting you go off by yourself alone.” “I guess that brings us back to the silk scarves, doesn’t it?” John laughs, “Sorry to disappoint you, Mrs. Insatiable but I have another solution.” A hopeful note in her voice, “I’ll be your prisoner?” John shakes his head, “You go down to the super’s office and use his phone to call home.” “Wait a minute, that means *I’d* have to explain….” John can’t resist tossing her earlier words back at her, “Do you really think they’ll ask if you don’t tell them?” “Cute, very cute.” She slips from his arms and heads for the door, murmuring, “Like they won’t guess…” “Marlena.” She stops and looks back at him. His tender gaze warms her as he says huskily, “I love you.” She smiles, “I know.”
***
Marlena makes it as far as the bottom of the stairs when a knock sounds on the loft door…
A small crowd is gathered in the lobby outside the loft door as the superintendent joins them. He looks rather sheepish, “I didn’t mean to cause a ruckus when I couldn’t get ahold of Mr. or Mrs. Black.” Abe steps up, “We’re glad you called.” The super nods his head in relief, “I thought something was mighty strange when I found the loft door open. I didn’t go in though, just did a listen and when I didn’t hear anything, I closed and locked the door back up and called the precinct straight away.” Hope glances around the lobby, “You didn’t see anyone suspicious?”
The man shakes his head no. Sami taps her foot impatiently, “I think this is all a wild goose chase. Didn’t you say you sent a patrolman over here earlier, Abe?” Abe nods, “That was hours ago, Sami.” Sami doesn’t let up, “And he didn’t find anything. So what makes all of you think Mom and John are here now?” Eric glances at his sister, “They aren’t any where else, Sami and if they aren’t here, then I don’t want to think of what might have happened…” Sami doesn’t let him complete that thought as she moves toward the door, “Fine, then maybe we should knock and see if they’re here.”
She raises her hand and knocks. A moment later, a very surprised Marlena slides open the door. “Oh my!” Before anyone else can react, a voice from inside calls out, “Doc, are you still here?” Seconds later, John moves into view. The reaction from the crowd in the lobby is a mixture of comic surprise and relief. Marlena looks from the gaping mouths back to her husband wrapped in the sheet, toga style, and says between tremors of laughter, “John…we have…company.” The superintendent makes a fast exit as the others file into the loft, all talking at the same time. “We’ve been so worried…” “….clothes found in an alley…” “…looking all over Salem…” Sami cuts right to the chase as she glances from her mother to John, “The two of you could have saved everyone from searching for you and worrying about you, if you’d let someone know where you were going to be.”
Hoping to avoid explanations, John slips an arm around Marlena’s waist, “You’re right, Sami and it’s my fault we didn’t. I’m afraid I was anxious to get your mother alone so we could celebrate.” Four pairs of eyes focus on John and Marlena as Eric asks, “Celebrate?” An ear to ear grin splits John’s face, “We’re pregnant.” Dead silence follows his announcement as the news sinks in. “Pregnant?” Sami and Eric gasp in unison. Marlena nods, moving closer to John, not sure how to take her children’s reaction, “We didn’t want to announce it sooner until we knew whether or not my exposure to Belle’s rubella affected my pregnancy. We just received the results this morning.” Sami is all concern as she takes a step towards her mother and John, “The baby is all right?”
Marlena glances up at John and then smiles at her daughter, “Yes, they both are.” Eric chokes. Hope shakes her head and laughs with delight, “Twins! Congratulations!” Abe chuckles and holds out a congratulatory hand to John, while Marlena moves to hug Sami. Marlena whispers against Sami’s ear, “You’re not upset are you?” Sami gives her mother an extra hug, “Upset? Mom, I couldn’t be happier for you and John. After what I…put you and John through…with Belle…” Marlena gently caresses her daughter’s hair, “That’s all in the past, sweetheart. I don’t blame you and neither does John. We never have and it’s time you put it behind you, too.” Sami nods, “I’ll try and thanks, Mom.” She releases her mother as Eric steps up. He places his hands on his mother’s shoulders and looks at her intently, “I wasn’t around for Belle’s birth but I promise, I’ll be around for this one and I hope you won’t be upset if I tend to get overprotective.” “Not you too, Eric!” Eric smiles and nods his head, “Someone has to keep an eye on you during those moments that Dad can’t be there.”
John places a hand on Eric’s shoulder and grins at Marlena, “And I can’t think of anyone I’d rather have doing so, Eric.” Marlena eyes the pair of them with a glint in her eye, “If the two of you think you’re going to smother me…” John’s grin widens, “I’m sure you’ll find ways to thwart us, Doc.” Hope eyes John up and down, “In your case, it looks like she’s already found a way to do that. So tell us, John, how *did* your clothes end up in an alley on the other side of Salem?”
Marlena chokes back a laugh as John blushes. She lets him squirm for a moment and then comes to his rescue, “It’s a long story and I’m afraid it’s going to have to wait. Right now, we need to get home before the younger children drag Kit out of the house to look for us.” Her laughter trembles on her lips, “I…ah…don’t suppose you know where we could get some clothes for John?” Much to John’s relief, Eric offers, “I just happen to have a pair of sweats in my car. I was planning to go to the gym later today to work out.” Sami joins Eric whispering to him as they go out the door. Hope follows behind saying, “Now that the crisis is over, I think I’ll go find Bo. I’ll see you later and congratulations again. Oh, and I’ll be expecting a full explanation next time I see the two of you. I wouldn’t miss that one for the world!” After the other three depart, John glances at Marlena, “Doc, would you give Abe and I a moment alone before Eric and Sami return?” She looks from one to the other, John’s face is filled with concern, Abe’s is stamped with wariness. “John, if you’re planning to discuss who might have attacked you, I’m not leaving.”
John slips his arm around her waist, “I had a feeling you’d say that but I’d feel a whole lot better if you weren’t upset by anything else right now.” She pulls slightly away from him, “I’m all ready upset by the fact that someone *attacked* you. Keeping me in the dark isn’t going to change that.” She looks at Abe and asks point blank, “Do you know who attacked him?” Abe sighs, he knew from long experience that once Marlena made up her mind there was no talking her out of it. He looks at John, who nods slightly, takes a deep breath and then says, “We have a lead.”
Marlena melts into the warm circle of John’s arm around her shoulder. It’s the only concession to her fears that she allows herself. She asks with a hint of impatience in her voice, “And?” “Marlena, before I go any further. Let me say this much…I don’t have any suspects right now. At least none that I’d be willing to arrest. We found something on the pier where John was found and it’s not conclusive evidence. I’m not even sure it *is* evidence.” John feels Marlena stiffen and says quietly, “Better stop stalling, Abe.” Abe nods. “We found Roman’s ISA badge and ID.” Marlena gasps, “No!” “I’m sorry. I didn’t want to break it to the two of you this way. But, it’s like I said, it’s not conclusive proof.” John withholds comment as Marlena takes a deep breath and asks, “What does Roman have to say to all this?” Abe glances down and replies quietly, “We haven’t been able to find him.”
Marlena looks at Abe and then up at her husband, “The two of you suspect him, don’t you?” Before they can answer, Sami and Eric return. Futher conversation is suspended for the moment when John goes upstairs to dress. Sensing Abe had broken the news to their mother, Sami and Eric decide to leave and meet up with them at the house.
Abe turns to Marlena, “Marlena, you know I don’t want to believe that Roman could be involved?” She moves over to the table and picks up a small framed picture of John and Belle taken shortly after Belle’s birth that had been left behind. She sighs sadly, “I knew things would be a bit difficult at first when Roman came back but I…” She sets the picture down and turns to Abe, “I’m not sure I can believe that Roman is so bitter and angry that he’d attack John.” Abe starts to reach out a comforting hand to her but lets it drop to his side, “I’ve been trying to give him the benefit of doubt, but after everything that’s been happening lately…I’m not sure I can. He’s changed, Marlena and I didn’t realize how much until he’d confronted John at the station yesterday, hours before the attack.”
Marlena pales, “I didn’t know they’d met up.” John says from the top of the stairs, “I didn’t get the chance to tell you.” He descends the stairs and moves to Marlena placing his hands on her shoulders, “Honey, I know it looks bad and I’m not entirely convinced Roman attacked me.” Her eyes anxiously search his face, “There is a but coming, isn’t there?” He nods reluctantly, “I’m afraid so.” She melts into his arms and lays her head on his chest, “Tell me.” John caresses her hair, “Abe was right when he said Roman had changed. Ever since he’s been in Salem, he’s gone out of his way to stall our investigation on Stefano. You know as well as we do, Roman would never do that. There have been other, little things that don’t seem to jell…at least not with the Roman I know…bitter or not. The one thing I do know is, Roman wouldn’t do anything to jeopardize *your* happiness and his deliberately trying to provoke me into hitting him yesterday would have accomplished the opposite. As would his attacking me.”
Marlena looks up at him, her voice hopeful, “Then you don’t think he did it.” His gaze meets hers and he tells her honestly, “Not yet.” Marlena nods then asks quietly, “Can we go home now?” John nods and brushes his lips lightly across hers, “I think you left your purse upstairs.” She manages a small smile, “Found a way to get me out of the room after all, didn’t you?” “Do you mind?” She shakes her head, gives Abe a brief smile then heads upstairs.
John waits until he’s sure she’s out of ear shot before saying, “I don’t like what this is doing to Marlena. We need to find Roman, fast.” “I know, John and I have every available man looking for him. Unfortunately, he seems to have vanished.” John frowns, “That’s not like Roman either. Do you think it’s possible that something has happened to him?” Abe nods, “That might explain how his badge and ID ended up on the pier.” “Then maybe you’d better consider foul play involved and search for him from that angle.” “I’ll get right on it. Apologize again to Marlena for me, will you? I hated spoiling your happy news.” “I will and I’m sure she understands, Abe. We couldn’t keep it from her forever.” With a final nod, Abe leaves. Marlena joins John moments later. He holds out his hand to her, she slips her hand into his and they leave the loft.
***
Eric glances over at Sami sitting quietly in the passenger seat, “You’re awfully quiet, sis. I thought you’d be happy about picking Will up.” “I am. I’m just worried about Mom and John. Especially now with the news about the babies. And I’m afraid of what Dad will do next.” Eric’s hands tighten on the steering wheel, “You mean when he finds out Mom is pregnant?”
Sami nods, “That’s kind of final, isn’t it? I mean, if Dad had any hope before of getting back together with Mom, it’s gone now. With the way he’s been acting…I don’t know what he’ll do.” Eric reaches over and places a comforting hand on Sami’s arm, “There isn’t anything *we* can do, Sami. We have to trust Mom and John to work things out with Dad.” Sami glances at him, “I know you’re right but still…” Eric’s voice becomes firm, “I mean it, Sami. If you try to get involved any further, you’ll only make matters worse. If you still *insist* on helping somehow, then do it by being there for Mom. Support her, no matter what happens.” Sami eyes him suspiciously, “Why do I get the feeling that you aren’t going to be around? You aren’t thinking of leaving Salem again, are you? Not after telling Mom you’ll be there for the babies’ births.” Eric sighs, “I meant what I told Mom but I do have to leave town, for a few days. My band has been hired to do a gig in Chicago starting tomorrow night.” “Can’t you call and cancel?”
Eric shakes his head, “I can’t, we have a contract that can’t be broken and the rest of the band is already on their way there.” “When were you planning to tell Mom and John?” “Later,” Eric replies briefly, letting his sister know he didn’t wish to discuss it any further. Sami turns her head and stares out the window, wondering where her father was at that moment.
***
Roman moves away from the seedy hotel room window and walks over to the night stand next to the bed. He slowly pulls open the drawer to reveal a 45 caliber pistol. He picks up the pair of gloves laying on the bed and dons them, then picks up the pistol. He turns to face the far wall and raises the pistol, aiming its sites on the fading newspaper picture tacked up on the wall. It was a picture of John and Marlena taken several years ago. He pulls the trigger and the only sound in the room is the click of the hammer striking the empty chamber.
The next morning, Marlena awakens to find herself alone in bed. She glances at the clock and is surprised to see that it is nearly noon. Then again, maybe she shouldn’t have been so surprised, she didn’t sleep well the night before because of the nightmares she’d been having. Nightmares of Roman attacking John. She closes her eyes. No! She couldn’t, wouldn’t believe that Roman would ever hurt John – not intentionally.
The ringing of the phone startles her. Her eyes fly open and she reaches over and picks it up and says sleepily, “Hello?” “Doc!” Marlena pales and sits up instantly at the sound of the frantic, breathless voice on the other end of the line, “Roman?”
“Yes, Doc, it’s me. Listen, I don’t have much time. I don’t know what’s going on there but don’t believe any of it. Did you hear me, Doc? Don’t believe any…” Marlena grabs the phone with both hands, “Roman? Roman?” The reply is the buzz of the dial tone. She lowers the phone and stares at it blindly. John enters the room a few moments later and finds her that way.
Marlena looks up as she feels John’s weight settle on the bed next to her and his hand brushes hers as he takes the phone from her and hangs it up, asking quietly, “Who was on the phone, Doc and what did they say to upset you so much?” “Would you hold me?” John takes her in his arms, “Tell me everything. Including what you were dreaming about last night.”
She looks up at him in surprise, “You knew?” He smiles tenderly, “You were pretty restless last night.” He brushes her chin with his knuckles, “You were dreaming about Roman, weren’t you?” She nods. John hugs her close and sighs, “If I’d known it was going to upset you this much…”
Marlena puts her fingers against his lips to stop him, “I don’t know if I could have forgiven you if you hadn’t told me.” She lowers her hand and says with a hint of frustration in her voice, “It’s all so confusing right now. The Roman I know, that we *both* know, isn’t capable of hurting anyone. Yet, when I piece together everything I’ve seen and heard since he’s returned, I don’t know what to think. That’s probably why I had those dreams last night about Roman attacking you. Because some part of me believes he *is* capable if he really has changed that much and is acting so differently but then he calls…” Feeling John’s start of surprise, she nods, “Yes, that was Roman just now, he told me he didn’t know what was going on here but not to believe it. He sounded rushed, like he didn’t have a lot of time and then he was cut off.”
“He didn’t give you a clue to where he was?” Marlena shakes her head, “No, and I didn’t hear anything in the background either. One minute he was talking to me and the next, he wasn’t. John, you don’t think…you don’t think something has happened to him, do you?” “It’s beginning to sound like it. I had suspected as much yesterday and asked Abe to carry on his search from that angle. I talked to him awhile ago and, obviously, they still haven’t located Roman.”
“John, do you think Stefano is behind all of this?” “I’m sure of it, Doc.” “Are you planning to help search for Roman?” “Yes, but not until I’m sure you and the children are fully protected. Which means, you don’t go *anywhere* alone, Marlena. Not to the hospital, the pub, shopping…” Marlena glares at him, “I know what *anywhere* implies.”
A smile plays about John’s lips, “I know you know but you also have a stubborn streak a mile long and if you make up your mind to go somewhere and you don’t have an escort…well, I don’t want to have to take you to the loft, strip your clothes from you and toss them out a window to keep you from going off alone.” Marlena’s eyes glow, “Would *saying* I’d like to go somewhere without an escort earn the same treatment?”
John pulls her closer, a tender warning in his voice, “I’m serious, Marlena.” “So am I. So I’ll promise never to go anywhere alone and you can start stripping your wife, right here, right now. Deal?” John shakes his head and laughs, “What am I going to do with you?” “Shake on it?”
He brushes his thumb along her lower lip, “Sorry, honey, you’re going to have to take a rain check. The kids will be up any moment with your breakfast.” Her momentary disappointment is gone in a flash at the mention of breakfast, “Food!” John laughs then moves down to talk to the *babies*. “I think your mommy is trying to tell me that you’re hungry again.” He glides his hand over Marlena’s rounded tummy, continuing, “It’s going to get very noisy here in a moment. Your big brothers and sister know all about you and they’re very anxious to say hello.”
Marlena threads her fingers in his hair and gives a gentle tug, “Hey you. Does this mean everyone is going to start talking to my belly instead of me?” John moves back up beside her and grins, “Feeling neglected all of a sudden?” He leans closer and runs the tip of his tongue along the outer edge of her ear and whispers, “I’ll take care of that later.” Marlena lands a gentle blow in his solar plexus, “Then don’t start something you can’t finish now.”
The door bursts open. A giggling Brady and Belle escort TJ, carrying a tray heaped full of food, into the room. Marlena eyes all the food in dismay and whispers to John, “They don’t expect me to eat *all* of that, do they?” John flashes her a brief grin then reaches out to take the tray from TJ. Belle climbs up on the bottom of the bed and looks at her father suspiciously, “Daddy, you said Mommy had two babies in her belly. There’s no babies there.”
Brady cocks his head and looks at his mother trying to see something different, “Mommy looks a little fatter, Belle.” Marlena chokes and John bursts out laughing. TJ eyes his younger siblings and shakes his head. Marlena slides her hand under John’s arm and pinches him. He does his best to control his laughter as she explains to Belle and Brady, “I’m afraid Mommy is going to look *much*…” She pauses a moment, looks to the ceiling then back down at the children, “…fatter…as the babies get bigger. They are both very small right now.”
Belle and Brady quietly contemplate that as TJ circles the bed and hugs is mother. “Congratulations, Mom. I still can’t believe I went from having no brothers and sisters to having a houseful!” A momentary feeling of hatred overcomes Marlena as she remembers all that Stefano had deprived her son of, but she lets it go as his slender arms hug her again and he plants a kiss on her cheek. She reaches up and brushes a dark lock of hair from his brow, “I’ll be counting on you to help keep them all in line, you know?” TJ rolls his eyes and grins.
“So, are we going to help Mommy eat her breakfast?” Belle and Brady look at John in horror. Belle shakes a finger at her father, “That food is for Mommy and the babies, Daddy!” John gives Marlena an ‘I tried’ look as she smothers a laugh, then says to the children, “Okay, okay, we won’t help Mommy eat. How about the three of you cleaning up the playroom like you promised to do earlier while Mommy and the babies eat their breakfast?”
Brady’s lower lip droops, “Do we have to?” John nods, “A promise is a promise.” Brady sighs and is the first one out the door, mumbling under his breath about not making promises ever again. Belle giggles, blows her parents each a kiss and chases after Brady. TJ looks at his parents and says in parting, “You know, if the twins turn out like Belle and Brady, we’re in trouble.”
***
TJ puts the last of the toys away on an upper shelf while Belle and Brady lie sprawled on the floor coloring. Belle leans over and looks at Brady’s picture, “What’s that?” Brady adds another touch of color before replying, “The Black family.” He points to each character, “There’s Mommy and Daddy Black, TJ Black, Brady Black, Belle Brady and…” Brady doesn’t get any further as TJ gasps and Belle protests loudly, “Belle not a Brady! Sami, Eric and Carrie are.” “Are too! I heard Sami say so.” Belle scrambles to her feet, her eyes welling with tears, “No! Belle a Black!” She runs from the room and stumbles headlong into her horrified parents.
Marlena scoops Belle up into her arms. Belle buries her face in her mother’s shoulder and cries brokenly, “Tell Brady I’m a Black too.” Marlena runs a soothing hand along Belle’s back and exchanges a painful glance with her husband, “Of course you are, sweetheart, but your daddy and I weren’t married when you were born so your last name is different.”
Belle hiccups on a sob, “I wanna be a Black, Mommy.” John reaches over and captures one of his daughter’s tears on his finger, “And so you will, little one. Mommy and Daddy will take care of it today.” She looks from one parent to the other, “Promise?” Both her parents nod enthusiastically and say in unison, “Promise!”
Brady, afraid to meet his parents gaze, is led up to them by TJ. TJ gently prods Brady in the back. He finally looks up, “I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to hurt Belle.” John stoops down in front of his son, “We know you didn’t, Brady.” He ruffles the boy’s hair, “Now why don’t you take your sister back into the playroom and the two of you work on the Black family portrait together? Okay?”
Brady nods as Belle squirms out of her mother’s arms. Brady waits until Belle joins him, then hugs her. Belle gives him a sunny smile and they race back into the playroom. TJ stands there motionless. Marlena senses his unspoken question. She places a hand on his shoulder, “You don’t have to ask, TJ. Your last name *is* Black. I knew your father wasn’t Roman Brady when you were born so I made sure his name was on your birth certificate. We had intended to have Belle’s name changed but so much has happened, it slipped our minds.”
Relieved, TJ hugs them both and then rejoins Belle and Brady. John slips his arms around Marlena, “Doc, you realize that we’re going to have to get Roman’s permission to legally change Belle’s name, don’t you?” Marlena nods and says reluctantly, “And under the circumstances, we can’t be sure he’ll willingly agree.”
“Right but I’ll give Mickey a call and have him get the paperwork started anyway and while I’m at it, I’ll see if he has the papers ready for me to sign on the building I’m buying for the detective agency.” Marlena looks at him in surprise, “You bought a building and didn’t tell me?” A rueful smile crosses his lips, “I was going to surprise you with it once the purchase was complete and the remodeling was done. And while we’re speaking of surprises, did Eric tell you he was going out of town last night?”
She shakes her head, “No, did he tell you?” John frowns, “No, Sami told me this morning when I asked where he was. She said he and his band were performing in Chicago tonight.” “Wasn’t that kind of sudden? He never mentioned doing any more performances before. In fact, he hasn’t spoken much about that part of his life at all. He usually manages to change the subject whenever it comes up.”
“I’ve noticed that too. Maybe we should look into this band thing. If it was on the up and up, he wouldn’t be so secretive about it.” Marlena shakes her head, “No, not yet. If Eric finds out we’ve been spying on him, he might not understand. Let’s give him a little more time and maybe he’ll come to us about it.” “All right, Doc, we’ll do it your way, for now. Let’s go make that phone call to Mickey.”
***
Sensing John and Marlena’s urgency to get the matter of Belle’s adoption taken care of quickly, Mickey files the paperwork that afternoon. His secretary, not knowing that Roman is missing, messengers the paperwork over to the Brady house. Roman, having slipped back into the house unseen from the back, is surprised when there is a knock on the door.
He looks out the side window and sees the messenger standing there. After a quick glance around, he feels confident that there are no patrol cars in sight and cautiously opens the door. “Can I help you?” “I have a letter for Roman Brady.” “I’m Brady.” The messenger holds out his clip board, “Could you sign here, please?”
Roman does and gives him a tip. The messenger hands him the envelope. Thanking him, Roman closes the door and rips open the envelope. His body goes rigid as he scans the contents of the legal document. “Damn them! They’re taking everything away! Everything!” He balls up the papers, tosses them on the floor and vents his rage on the living room. Finally, he pulls out his gun satisfying himself that it’s loaded and slips out of the house the way he’d arrived.
Kit helps Marlena get the children ready to go the pub for dinner to celebrate John’s recovery with the Bradys while John is on the phone with Abe getting the latest update on the search for Roman. Kit looks over Brady’s head at Marlena, “You haven’t told the Brady’s your news yet, have you?”
Marlena shakes her head as brushes Belle’s hair, “Not yet, we’re planning to tell them tonight.” She looks Belle over, “Belle, I think you’re all ready now and you look very pretty in your new dress.” Belle’s smile lights up her face, “You look pretty too, Mommy.” “Thank you, sweetie.” Marlena turns her glance to Brady who is squirming under Kit’s hands as he helps the boy into his jacket. “And you, Brady, look very handsome”
Brady pulls at his shirt collar, “Feel silly dressing up to go to Grandpa and Grandma’s.” Kit taps Brady on the nose, “Now how do you think your Grandparents would feel if you showed up in your dirty old clothes while everyone else was dressed nice?” Brady shrugs, “I don’t know but *I’d* feel more comptrib…comfor…better.” Kit laughs and winks at Brady, “Me too.”
Marlena laughs, “Don’t encourage him, Kit!” Sami, carrying Will with TJ trailing behind enters the room as John hangs up the phone. He looks at Marlena and answers her questioning gaze with a negative shake of his head, then says to everyone, “Are we all ready to go?” He receives a round of nods before the younger children make a mad dash for the front door. “Well, I guess that answers my question.”
Kit escorts Sami and Will out the door, leaving John a moment alone with his wife. He takes advantage of the moment and pulls her into his arms and brushes her lips with his, “Have I told you lately how beautiful you are and how very much I love you?” Her eyes dance. “Are you telling me that because I’m wearing maternity clothes now and you think I’m getting fat too?”
John shakes his head and grins as he slides his hand down to her belly, “You look very becoming in *baby* fat and I’m looking forward to watching you blossom.” Marlena bites her lip to keep from laughing, then says, “Maybe we’d better join the others before you dig yourself any deeper.” She pulls him close, “But before we do, tell me again how much you love me.”
His eyes devour her and then he lowers his mouth to hers, whispering against her soft lips, “I love you Dr. Marlena Evans-Black, with everything that I am, everything that I have and everything that I will be. Today, tomorrow and always.” His last words are smothered on her lips as he claims her mouth with his.
***
The sounds of joy and revelry escape the confines of the pub and permeate the surrounding area. The lone figure standing in the shadows of a nearby building, clenches and unclenches his fists. He’d watched his family and friends arrive, followed by the Black family with his daughter and grandson in tow. They were having a family celebration, one that didn’t include him.
*He* was the outsider now. All because John and Marlena had married and taken over the family that was his. Roman raises his hand and rubs his head, trying to quell the headache that throbbed there. He wasn’t suppose to be feeling this way. He was suppose to be happy for Marlena…but he wasn’t, instead he was consumed with bitterness and rage and the need for revenge. Revenge on John and Marlena and he intended to get it tonight. He slips his hand inside his jacket and is reassured by the feel of the hard metal sitting snugly inside its leather holster. Yes, tonight he would finally have his revenge.
***
Marlena’s gaze sweeps the room and she sighs in contentment. She hadn’t seen the Bradys this happy and relaxed in a long time. Even the mystery of Roman disappearance hadn’t put a damper on the evening’s celebration and the news of her pregnancy was met with joy and excitement. She feels John’s warm, strong arms circle her from behind, his hands settling on her belly. “Happy, Mrs. Black?”
She leans back against him and nods her head, “Very. I was just thinking how happy and relaxed everyone seems. We really have managed to heal the wounds and put the past behind us.” She sighs sadly, “With the exception of Roman and I’m hoping things will work out with him too.” She glances up at him, “Still no news?” John shakes his head, “Abe got a call from the station a few minutes ago but the lead turned out to be another dead end.” He reaches for her hand and raises it to his lips, “Don’t worry, Doc, we’ll find him and then we’ll straighten this whole thing out.”
He places his hand back on her belly and feels the babies move, his face breaking into a delighted grin, “I think the babies are enjoying the party too.” “Oh, I think they just enjoy having their daddy so close by.” John is pleased. “You think so?”
Marlena nods, “Um hmm. They’re always more active when you’re around.” John buries his face in her hair and whispers, “So is their mother.” “John!” He turns her in his arms and kisses her.
***
Across the room, Caroline and Shawn exchange pleased glances as they watch John and Marlena. Sami joins them at the bar and follows their gaze, she sighs in contentment, “They really are happy together, aren’t they?” Caroline hugs her granddaughter, “Yes, they are and you seem pretty happy about that.”
Sami nods, “I am.” She looks at her grandmother, “I know I fought their being together for a long time but they’ve both made me realize that they really do belong together. You can’t help but be happy when you see them together.” Carrie joins them at that moment, “I agree and the love they have for each other encompasses everyone they’re around.” The sisters exchange glances and smile.
Shawn slaps his hands down on the bar, “I think this would be a good time to propose a toast.” Carrie laughs, “A toast to what, Grandpa?” “Why love, of course, darlin’!” Caroline shakes her head in amusement and helps Shawn pass around glasses of sparkling cider. Carrie pulls her sister aside, “What’s this I heard about John and a toga…”
***
Roman moves a little closer to get a better view of what’s happening inside the pub. A fresh wave of fury rolls through him as he watches his father lift a glass and propose a toast to John and Marlena. Their is a ripple of laughter and then the others lift their glasses and drink. He leans back against the building and closes his eyes. The sound of footsteps off to his right instantly sends him back to the shadow of the building.
Bo and Hope round the corner, their apparent argument coming to an abrupt end as they reach the pub door and enter. He waits a few moments and then moves closer again to watch and wait.
***
Bo hugs Marlena and then shakes John’s hand, “Hope told me the good news, congratulations.” He shakes his head and laughs, “Sure didn’t waste any time, did you?” John’s arms enfold Marlena again, he chuckles, “Nope.” Marlena glances across the room at Hope and then looks back at Bo, “So when are you and Hope going to stop arguing long enough to get married again?”
“Oh no you don’t, Marlena. We weren’t talking about Hope and me.” Marlena smiles, “Maybe you should be. John and I don’t have a problem.” Bo rolls his eyes and asks John, “Does she ever stop playing shrink?” John gently pats Marlena’s belly and grins, “Sometimes.” Marlena elbows John in the stomach as Bo passes a quick glance toward Hope and says, “You know, you just might be on to something there, John.” Feeling John’s tremble of laughter, Marlena quickly turns in his arms and grabs his face with her hands and kisses him to stop him from saying anything else.
Bo makes a hasty departure and joins Hope and nieces at the bar. He can tell instantly that they’re up to something, “All right, what’s going on?” Hope exchanges glances with Carrie and Sami and tries to keep a straight face as she turns to Bo, “What makes you think something is going on?” “The three of you have that look on your faces that says you’re planning something.” Sami laughs, “Well, if you must know, Uncle Bo, we were just going to remind John of a funny incident that happened yesterday.”
Having been filled in by Hope on the previous days events, Bo catches on immediately, “Toga?” The three women nod and are no longer able to contain their laughter. Carrie manages to say, “If only we had some sheets.” “So who’s going to start the chant?” Kit and Mike join them. Kit says, “You wouldn’t!” at the same time Mike asks, “What chant?”
***
Abe and Lexie join John and Marlena and just as Abe was about to speak, the words, “To…ga! To…ga!” floated across the room, getting louder as they were repeated. John turns a lovely shade of red as Marlena sinks into a chair, her laughter getting the best of her. Abe tries at first to control his laughter, but he doesn’t succeed. A puzzled Lexie looks around the room, wondering if everyone had lost their mind. John finally steps into the center of the room and takes a bow. The chant turns to applause and more laughter.
***
Roman’s hand tightens around his gun. Surely the party would be ending soon and then he could finish what he’d came here to do? His patience is finally rewarded as he sees John help Marlena on with her coat. In that split second, he felt as if he been struck a mortal blow to the stomach. Marlena is pregnant! His knees weaken and he grabs on to the wall for support. Could he go through with his plans knowing that?
***
Moments later, the pub door opens and John and Marlena are the first ones to emerge, followed by Bo and Hope. Before anyone else passes through the door, Roman steps out of the shadows and pulls the trigger.
Marlena brushes the tears from her cheeks as she turns from the window to face John lying silent, still and helpless on the hospital bed. The quiet beep and hum of the machines that were helping to keep him alive were the only noise in the room. Her hand falls to her belly as the twins take turns kicking her. A gentle smile lifts her lips. “If your daddy were awake, he’d be amazed at how big you’ve gotten.” Soft laughter escapes, “How big *I’ve* gotten.”
The smile and laughter fade as she approaches the bed and leans over to kiss John’s smooth brow. “I have to go soon, John. Mike says it’s not good for me and the babies to keep spending so much time here. But I…” She moves to the chair and settles into it before taking his hand in hers and raising it to her cheek, “But I don’t like going home anymore. The house is so quiet. The children whisper all the time now and walk around like little ghosts. And Kit, well, he’s lost a little more weight. I hired a cook to try to tempt him but he doesn’t have much of an appetite these days. He’s been putting in long hours at the church.”
She sighs and mentally tries to perk herself up a little. “There is some good news. Eric has been doing well in his classes. I’m so glad he decided to finish his education at Salem University and I think he has Sami convinced to start attending classes there too. He’s still making those mysterious trips of his to play around the country on the weekends. I’m not any closer to finding out more about them though and he still isn’t volunteering any information. I don’t suppose you know where I can find a good private detective?”
She pauses, not because she was expecting an answer, although she remained hopeful her words were reaching him, but to search her memory for more news to tell him. “I think I told you before that Sami and Austin have been dating for awhile now. Carrie has finally made peace with the decision she and Austin reached and started dating again herself. She went out with Mike last night.” A small smile of remembrance curves her lips, “She looked so beautiful and they looked just adorable together. Of course, you probably would have teased her something terrible but she’d have secretly enjoyed it.”
Fighting her tears, she falls silent again at his continued lack of response. Were her words reaching him? Was he trying to fight his way back to her? She lowers his hand to the bed side and leans closer, her voice drops to a hoarse whisper, “Do you know how much I miss you? Miss your laughter, your teasing, your arms holding me at night? How much I miss sitting down with you in the mornings to plan our day and in the evenings to discuss everything that’s happened with our children and the rest of the family?” Her hands curl into fists as an unconscious edge of anger tinges her voice, “It’s been two months, John. Two very *long* months. What is it going to take to get you to come back to me? The doctors have done all they could and keep telling me it’s all up to you now. So why haven’t you given me some kind of sign that you hear me? Feel my presence?”
She hits the side of the bed with a fisted hand as her tears fall freely now, “And I’m not the only one who needs you. The children need you and the family needs you. They still haven’t recovered from the shock of Roman shooting you and it hasn’t helped that he’s still missing. They’ve tried to go on with their lives, but a part of them is still in limbo. They need a sign. *I* need a sign. Something…anything, to give us hope.”
She leans back in the chair and closes her eyes, “And what about the babies, John? They’re due in another two months and you’re missing so much.” She takes a calming breath, opens her eyes and leans forward again. “Do you know that Maggie has been doing *your* job? She’s been going to Lamaze classes with me. Oh, she’s been wonderful and supportive but she’s not *you.*” Reaching for his hand again, she says firmly, “You will wake up, John. You will be by my side when our twins our born. Do you hear me? I won’t let you get out of it.” Her voice drops to a whisper as she lays her head on his hand, “Please come back to me.”
The door opens silently and Maggie pokes her head into the room. She hated to interrupt but Mike had given her strict orders not to let Marlena stay too long. “Marlena.” It takes a moment for Maggie’s voice to penetrate Marlena’s fierce concentration in willing John to wake up from his coma. When she finally looks up, Maggie’s heart goes out to her. Marlena silently rises to her feet and presses a trembling kiss on John’s lips. She starts to say something else, changes her mind and joins Maggie out in the hallway.
Maggie takes her hands in hers, “Are you okay?” Marlena offers her friend a brief smile, “I will be.” Maggie nods, then says, “Mike wants to check your blood pressure before you leave. I should warn you…he said if it was still up, he was going to place you on bed rest for a few days.” Marlena starts to protest, then glances back at John’s room, “Then we’ll have to hope it’s down, won’t we? I won’t do John any good if I’m stuck in bed.” Maggie gives her hands a final squeeze before they head for Mike’s office.
***
Maggie takes a detour on the way back to the Black house. Marlena looks up at the building in front of them, then looks at Maggie. “Isn’t this the building John purchased for the detective agency?” Maggie nods, “Mickey has a surprise for you.” She opens her car door, “It’s a good thing Mike said your blood pressure was down some because Mickey would have been disappointed if I didn’t bring you by today. He thought you could use something to cheer you up. I did too.” Marlena gives Maggie a grateful smile, “We’d better not keep him waiting any longer then.”
After Mickey takes the two women on a tour of the newly remodeled building, he looks at Marlena, “What do you think?” Tears gather in Marlena’s eyes, “I thought everything had been put on hold when…” She shakes off the tears, then continues, “John will be so pleased when he sees it.” She hugs Mickey, “Thank you.” Mickey gives her a reassuring hug in return, “He’ll be here hard at work before you know it.” “I hope so, Mickey.”
Mickey holds her at arms length, “You’re not giving up hope, are you?” Marlena shakes her head and says fiercely, “No, I’ll never give up hope. John will come out of his coma and we’ll be together again.” She looks from Mickey to Maggie, “I can’t tell you what your friendship has meant to me all these years, but most especially these past few months. I really don’t…I don’t know how I would have gotten through them.” Mickey gives a gentle squeeze to her arms before releasing her, “You would have, Marlena, for John and for your children. You’ve always been a survivor. But I’m glad we were able to be here for you.”
Maggie adds teasingly, “And where else would we be? Now, I’d better get you home, Marlena, before Mike calls to check up on you. I told him about our little detour and he was afraid it would tire you out.” Marlena laughs softly, slipping her arm through Maggie’s, “Dodging Mike tires me out but don’t tell him I said that.” She looks at Mickey, “Thanks again, for everything.” Mickey nods and watches the women leave.
He isn’t the only one watching. Stefano steps out of his place of concealment across the street as Maggie’s car and the unmarked police car tailing them turns the corner. He turns to his henchman, “It is time we put our next plan into action.” “I thought you’d changed your mind about that since John Black is still alive?” A slow smile spreads across Stefano’s face, “You should know by now that I always have a backup plan.” His glance sweeps over the building Marlena and Maggie had just vacated, “If all goes well, John Black will never see the inside of that building and Marlena will find her hopes for a happy future with him being destroyed, one by one.”
***
The sound of the children’s laughter drifting downstairs greets them when Marlena and Maggie step through the front door. A smile of relief crosses Marlena’s lips, it sounded wonderful and she’d missed it every bit as much as she missed John. Maggie smiles too, “I wonder who brought about that miracle?” Marlena shakes her head, “I don’t know but I’d like to find out.” She leads the way as they go upstairs to the playroom.
They find Sami sitting on the floor in front of Will, Belle, Brady and TJ, a book open in her lap. The children’s faces are glowing with laughter as Sami reads another line from a book, sounding very much like Grover while tossing her hands up in the air and waving them around in mock panic, “Do *not* turn the page!” The children yell back, “Turn the page! Turn the page!”
One by one the children realize that they aren’t alone and the smiles and laughter drops from their faces. Sami looks over her shoulder and says quietly, “Hi, Mom. Hi, Maggie.” She starts to close the book as Marlena steps into the room, “Sami, please don’t stop. The children seem to be enjoying it so much.” Belle scrambles to her feet and moves to her mother’s side, her little face serious, “Can’t have fun now, momma. You home and you sad.” Brady, still seated beside TJ, looks equally serious as he nods his head in agreement with his sister. TJ slides his arm around Brady. Will climbs into his mother’s lap.
Marlena is taken aback, “Why would you say that, Belle? I want you to enjoy yourselves.” Her glance encompasses all of them, “Is that why you’ve all been so quiet lately, because you think I didn’t want you to enjoy yourselves while your daddy is in the hospital?” She sees from their faces that it is and takes Belle’s hand and moves closer to the other children. “I’m sad because I miss your daddy so much and I know you do too, but that doesn’t mean you can’t laugh and have fun. Do you know how unhappy your daddy would be if he knew you were sad all the time?”
TJ looks at his mother and asks pointedly, “What about you, mom? He wouldn’t be happy knowing you’re sad all the time either.” “You’re right, TJ, he wouldn’t be and until just now, I didn’t realize I had been or that I’d been responsible for all of you acting so differently. So I think we should make a promise to each other right here – we’ll all do our best to enjoy ourselves and not be afraid to laugh. Is it a deal?”
TJ smiles, “It’s a deal!” The younger children nod their heads enthusiastically. Sami holds up her hand to her mother and smiles. Marlena takes Sami’s hand in hers and gives it a gentle squeeze, mouthing the words “Thank you.” Sami squeezes back, releases her mother’s hand and picks up the book, “Who wants to find out if there really is a monster at the end of the book?” A chorus of “Me, me!” fills the playroom.
With a last glance at the children, Marlena joins Maggie out in the hall. Maggie smiles, “Those are some very smart children in there.” Marlena nods, “Yes, they are and I should have realized how my feelings and behavior had been affecting them.” “Don’t be too hard on yourself, Marlena. You’ve had a lot to deal with and you’ve held up better than I would have under the same circumstances.” “I can’t forgive myself that easily, Maggie. I *should* have put the children’s feelings and needs first. I’ve been so selfish…”
Maggie says sternly, “Let it go, Marlena. You and the children have confronted the problem and agreed upon a solution. Tearing yourself up over what’s in the past won’t do them or you any good. Besides, you also have the children you’re carrying to consider. Upsetting yourself and getting your blood pressure up again isn’t good for them. And if that doesn’t convince you, then think of how John would react if he saw you like this.” That brings a smile to Marlena’s face, “He’d take me in his arms and say just about the same things you just said but in his own way. Then he’d do something crazy to make me laugh or provoke me so I’d get mad at him and forget what I was upset about. He’d wait until later, when I was calmed down, to discuss whatever it was that had been upsetting me.”
“You know what I think you need?” Surprised at Maggie’s sudden turn in conversation, she blurts out, “What?” Maggie slips an arm around Marlena’s shoulders, “Something to occupy your thoughts and since you still haven’t reached any decisions about the nursery, don’t you think it’s time we took a look at it so you can start making plans to redecorate? I’m sure you’d like to have it ready when the twins are born.” Marlena shakes her head and laughs, “You’re determined not to let me wallow in self pity, aren’t you?” Maggie grins and leads Marlena to the nursery.
***
Kit arrives home that evening and almost turns around and walks out, thinking he’d entered the wrong house. The house sounded alive in a way it hadn’t since John had been shot. It warmed him and lifted his spirits, yet it left him wondering what had brought about the change. He knew it wasn’t John’s recovery. Not only had he just been to visit his brother but some inner connection told him that John was still deep in his coma.
He looks up as Marlena is making her way down the staircase. He immediately moves over to offer her a helping hand. She takes it with a smile, “You’re home early. I hope that means you plan to join us for dinner tonight.” Kit waits until she reaches the bottom step before replying, “No, actually, I just stopped in to pick up a couple of books before going back to the church.” Marlena places a hand on his arm, “Please, join us. It would mean a lot to the children…and to me. We need some normalcy around here and I think you could use it too.”
Kit can’t argue with her on that point. He’d virtually cut himself off from the family after John had been shot, trying to find his own way to deal with the possibility of losing his brother. Submersing himself in his work at the church, though fulfilling spiritually, was not the answer. He should have been here comforting and supporting Marlena and the children. It wasn’t too late to start doing that. He smiles at Marlena, “All right, I’ll stay for dinner.”
Marlena flashes him a warm smile in return, “Good. I had cook prepare some of your favorite dishes just in case.” Kit eyes her suspiciously, “You weren’t going to take no for an answer again, were you?” Marlena shakes her head no. Kit laughs and escorts her into the dining room to join the rest of the family.
***
Marlena turns away from her contemplation of the moon shining on the frozen, snow covered lake through her bedroom window and looks at the big empty bed across the room. These were the moments she missed him the most – when they were alone in their room together after all the children were tucked into bed. They’d talk for hours – sharing laughter, dreams and plans for the future and then they’d make love. Sometimes, they’d just hold each other and fall asleep secure in each others arms.
She turns back to the window, shivers and pulls her robe closer around her, aching for the feel of John’s arms around her instead. She wasn’t going to give in to self pity but she wanted and needed him so much. She leaned her head against the window sill and looked up at the night sky, “Please, God, bring him back to me soon. I’ll try to stay strong in the meantime but it’s so hard to do without him. It took us so many years to be together again and I can’t believe that our happiness isn’t meant to last. You couldn’t be that cruel…life couldn’t be that cruel.”
Her hand drops to her belly and gently caresses it to soothe the restless twins. “Maybe I’m asking for too much because you’ve already granted us so much. It’s almost like my parting words to John in the letter I wrote him before the plane crash are coming back to haunt me.” Her voice catches, “But I don’t want to base our lives together on just the quality of what we’ve already had. I want to spend the *rest* of my life with him. I want to grow old with him, watch our children grow and watch our grand children grow. I want to laugh with him, cry with him…” She brushes away the tears, she hadn’t known were falling, with the back of her hand. “Is that *really* so much to ask?”
She falls silent, continuing to stare out the window and then she is hit with the sudden urge to go to John. Something was happening, she could feel it. A chill worked it’s way through her and by the time she’d changed her clothes, a cold fist of fear had clutched at her heart. Whatever was happening…no, she wouldn’t…couldn’t think of the worst. She grabbed her coat and headed downstairs.
She is met there by Kit. He doesn’t need to ask, he can tell by the faint traces of tears on her cheeks and the look of determination on her features that she is going to the hospital. He is equally determined not to let her go alone, “You wait right here while I get my coat and car keys.” Marlena nods, adding, “I’ve already left a note for Maggie.” He returns two minutes later. Marlena asks, “You felt it too, didn’t you?” Kit replies with a nod and escorts her out to his car.
***
It takes all of Kit’s strength to hold Marlena back when they arrive at the hospital and find pandemonium around John’s room. He is afraid she’ll get hurt by one of the hospital workers as they rush blindly to and fro. Marlena looks up at him with pleading eyes, “Please…I have to go to him.”
Kit nods and protectively guides her into the room. Mike sees them immediately, a look of relief on his face. “Marlena, they just told me you were on your way here.” “What is it, Mike? What’s happening?” She asks as she reaches John’s beside to find his eyes open. She doesn’t hear Mike’s reply as she leans closer to the face of the man she loves more than life itself, “John!”
His eyes immediately move to her face. He tries to lift his hand to her but it falls back upon the bed. She takes his hand and raises it to her tear streaked cheek, “Oh John. You’re awake.” He tries to talk to her but no words come out and before Marlena can say anything else, the heart monitor warning sounds. Mike signals to Kit to move Marlena away from the bedside. She clings to John, refusing to move when Kit tries to pull her away. John finally manages to whisper, “I love you, Marlena” before his eyes close and he goes limp.
Mike’s voice finally reaches her, “He’s dying, Marlena.” Kit catches Marlena as her knees give way and a heart rending sob escapes her, her head shaking back and forth in disbelief. He couldn’t be leaving her, not now. There must be some kind of mistake. John wouldn’t give up like this.
She continues to cling to his hand trying to will him some of her own life force, ignoring the staff moving in to work on her husband. Her world becomes hazy and the only thing that exists are her and John and then his hand slowly slips away from hers and her world goes black.
***
Kit scoops Marlena up into his arms as Mike signals a nurse to go with him. Kit’s last sight of his brother is one of doctors and nurses frantically trying to revive him as the steady hum of the flatline on the heart monitor persistently invades the room.
Mike checks Marlena’s pulse as he asks Kit, “How are we going to tell her?” Kit moves away from the window and joins Mike at Marlena’s bedside. He shakes his head, “I don’t know, if she…”
Marlena opens her eyes, “John?” Kit takes her free hand, “No, Marlena, it’s Christopher.” She closes her eyes and sighs in disappointment, “Oh!” Mike and Kit exchange glances, that wasn’t the reaction they’d been expecting from her. Actually, they weren’t sure what to expect but certainly not that. She’d been in the hospital for three days and this was the first time she’d regained consciousness. There had been no physical explanation for her condition and Laura could only offer the explanation that Marlena had appeared to have physically and emotionally withdrawn the moment she felt John slipping away from her. She could not tell them what kind of emotional state Marlena would be in when she did wake up and that simply uttered “oh” didn’t tell them either.
Mike decides on a tentative approach, “Marlena.” Her eyes flutter open, she turns to look at Mike and smiles, “I was just dreaming about John and he was telling me that everything was okay and he’d be coming back to me soon.” Her gaze moves to Kit, “It seemed so real, and then I heard your voice, Kit…I’m afraid I was a little disappointed to find he wasn’t here with me after all.” Mike draws her attention back to him, “Marlena, do you know where you are?”
She slowly glances around the room and then at the two concerned faces looking down at her, “Of course, I’m in the hospital.” “Do you know *why* you’re in the hospital?” Marlena glances down and glides her hand over the blanket covering her rounded belly, “Well, it’s certainly not because of these two, they’re as active as ever.” She looks back up at Mike, “Don’t tell me…my blood pressure, right?” Mike shakes his head no and then lets out a deep breath, “Marlena, what do you remember about your last visit with John?”
“Well, for one, it was far too short. You really shouldn’t worry so much about me, Mike, I’m not that fragile. Maggie wasn’t very happy about taking me home so soon after I’d arrived.” Mike throws Kit a helpless look. Kit sits on Marlena’s bedside and takes her hand, “Marlena, I want you to listen to me very carefully.” She turns her attention to him and nods, “Okay.”
“You came back to the hospital with me that night.” Marlena frowns, “I don’t remember that. Why would we come back to the hospital?” “Because we both knew there had been a change in John’s condition.” Marlena’s frown melts away, “Then he’s awake now? Why didn’t you tell me?” She struggles to sit up, “I want to see him.” Kit helps her to sit up, then sighs heavily. “Marlena, John was in cardiac arrest when we arrived.”
Her reaction is immediate, “No! No, it’s not true. I would have remembered that.” Kit says quietly, “I have no reason to lie to you, Marlena.” Marlena looks to Mike for confirmation, he nods and adds, “That was three days ago.” Marlena sinks back against the pillows and says in a hallow voice, “Three days!” Then her voice drops to a whisper, “He’s not dead. I’d feel it.” She looks back up at Kit, “Tell me you’re not saying he’s dead.”
Kit is unable to meet her eyes, his voice regretful, “I’m sorry, Marlena.” Marlena snatches her hand away, her disbelief written on her face. “No, it can’t be true.” Mike informs her quietly, trying to get her to accept the truth, “His memorial service and funeral are this afternoon.” A lone tear slides down Marlena’s cheek, her voice a heartbroken whisper, “Please…tell me this is a horrible dream and I’ll be waking up soon.” Mike’s hand drops to her shoulder, “I wish I *could* tell you that, Marlena.”
The memory of that night comes rushing back to Marlena and the pain is more than she can bear. She says in the same heartbroken whisper, “I need to be alone.” Kit starts to reach out to her, but pulls his hand back as Marlena’s looks at him, her glance telling him that if he so much as touched her or said another word to her, she’d break down. He knew her well enough to know that she was trying to avoid that at all costs. He nods his understanding and rises to his feet. With a last worried glance at her, the two men leave the room.
The moment the door closes behind them, Marlena bites her hand to quell the keening wail she feels rising up inside her. She can’t break down. Not now. She has to stay strong for the children. She has to stay strong to face the afternoon ahead of her. Feeling a little more in control, she takes a deep breath then releases it. It almost works, until she holds up her left hand and touches her wedding rings with her index finger. Hot tears chase each other down her cheeks as she whispers brokenly, “It wasn’t suppose to end this way.”
***
Marlena tucked the children into bed and wandered down to the kitchen to clean up. She was grateful to have the time alone but tried to stop the flood of memories from this afternoon. She didn’t remember much of the memorial service or the funeral. The moment she had arrived home from the hospital, she’d shut down her own feelings and concentrated on comforting the children. She was determined to stay strong for them and she stayed that way through most of the service and the burial. Her one moment of weakness had come when she’d first entered the church and approached the coffin and finally faced the truth – John was gone from her life, forever. Her legs felt like they were going to give out and she wasn’t going to make it. It was the one time she accepted someone’s help, as Kit and Eric each lent her an arm to help her those last few steps.
And then she was standing before the open coffin. She didn’t want to accept the truth – that the man lying in the coffin was the same man who held her in his warm, loving arms and swore they’d be together forever. It wasn’t John. It couldn’t be. But it was. She had reached out with a shaking hand to smooth the lock of hair on his forehead, just as if he’d been sleeping, but the moment her fingers came into contact with his chilled skin she’d withdrawn them as if she’d been burnt. She hadn’t wanted to remember him that way and then her mind had filled with a flood of memories of all their times together, happy and sad. It had been small comfort at that moment, but it was all she had.
She vaguely remembered all the wonderful things said about John, the words of comfort, the hugs and the tears and when the funeral was over, she gathered her children to her and took them home. The one thing that she did remember and would never forget, was her inability to say goodbye to him. Good-byes to each other were something neither one of them had *ever* been able to handle. Marlena shrugs off even that memory for the moment and turns her attention back to picking up the children’s snack dishes off the kitchen table.
She is startled by Sami’s voice, “Mom? Are you all right?” Marlena doesn’t meet her gaze as she places the dishes in the sink, “Sure, sweetheart. Are the children sleeping yet?” Sami moves to her mother’s side and places a hand over hers to stop her from washing the dishes, “Mom, you don’t have to pretend with me any more. I’ve been watching you ever since the memorial service and you’ve been a rock for the children and the family but inside, you’re falling apart.” Marlena snatches her hand away and says shortly, “Don’t tell me how I’m feeling, Sami.”
Seeing Sami’s hurt look, Marlena is suddenly contrite and takes her daughter in her arms, “I’m sorry, Samantha, I didn’t mean to snap at you like that. It’s just…it’s just that…I need to stay strong. I won’t survive this if I don’t.” “I wish he were still here, Mom. I wish he’d walk through that door right now and take away all your pain. And then tell one of his corny jokes and make us all laugh because it was so corny.” “Oh Sami!”
Sami gives her mom a final hug, then releases her. Respecting the fact that her mother wasn’t ready to give in to her grief, she quickly changed the subject. “How about I help you with the dishes?” Marlena nods, “I’d like that.” They wash and dry the dishes in companionable silence, Sami sensing her mother’s need for quiet as they did the menial task. As Sami puts the last dish away, Marlena thanks her daughter and goes upstairs to check on the younger children.
She finds Belle curled up in a little ball, dreaming her little girl dreams. She was too young to understand what had happened and her heart ached for the little girl who would barely remember her father. After tucking Belle in and planting a kiss on her cheek, Marlena heads for Brady’s room.
She knew right away that Brady had cried himself to sleep. Traces of tears still clung to his soft cheeks and he whimpered softly between breaths. Brady understood what death meant, even at his young age. He knew that his real mama was in heaven and that meant he would never see her again in this lifetime. And now his daddy was there too. She gently wiped away Brady’s tears and leaned down and kissed his cheek, whispering, “You’re the son of my heart, Brady Black and I’ll be here to love you, protect you and guide you, just like your daddy always trusted me to do.”
With a heavy heart, she goes to TJ’s room. He isn’t sleeping. He is sitting in the middle of his bed, motionless and dry eyed. Marlena sits down next to him and he immediately moves into her arms, “I want him back, mom. I want my daddy back.” Marlena closes her eyes and replies gently, “I know you do, sweetheart. I do too.” She rocks her son gently in her arms as the tears he’d refused to shed all day finally fall. She murmurs words of comfort and continues to rock him until his crying stops and he relaxes, sound asleep, in her arms. She eases him down upon the bed, pulls up the quilt from the bottom and covers him with it. She leans over and kisses his forehead and whispers, “I love you, baby.”
And then she finds herself in the hallway having to face going to her bedroom, the one she’d shared, in her mind, much too briefly with John and can’t bring herself to go there. She heads down to the living room instead and curls up in a chair in front of the fireplace.
Kit finds her there a short time later. He quietly approaches the chair and stands next to it. “Marlena.” She doesn’t respond. “Marlena, we need to talk.” She finally looks up at him, “What is there to talk about, Kit? Everything that needed to be said was said this afternoon.”
Kit is struck by the emptiness of her voice and he isn’t sure if that’s going to make what he has to tell her any easier. “No, Marlena, I’m afraid there is more that has to be said. Something I couldn’t tell you before.” Marlena moves from the chair to stand in front of the fireplace, “I’m not sure I want to hear whatever it is you have to say. I’m not sure I could handle it right now.” Kit moves to stand beside her, “And I’m not sure I can handle telling you but I have to anyway. Call it a confession, if you will but I won’t be able to sleep with this on my conscience.”
Marlena looks at him sharply, “Why do I get the feeling I’m not going to like this?” Kit tugs nervously at his collar and admits regretfully, “Because I lied to you.” She looks at him in confusion, “Lied to me? About what?” “About John.” Marlena’s brows draw together in a frown, trying to remember what Kit might have said to her that was a lie. She couldn’t think of anything and looks at him questioningly. He says quietly, “Maybe we should sit down.”
Marlena shakes her head, rubbing the slight ache in the small of her back. “I need to stand.” Kit nods and then clears his throat, “There is no easy way to tell you this and I hope you’ll understand our reasons once you hear the whole story.” He stops, hoping Marlena would say something to make this easier for him. She doesn’t, so he continues getting right to the point. “John is alive.”
Marlena grasps the fireplace mantle, her eyes darken in pain and her voice hardens, “If this is some kind of sick joke…” Kit shakes his head, “I know what we told you and what you saw this afternoon, Marlena, but it was all for show. To convince everyone that John was dead, when in fact – he’s very much alive.” Marlena starts to sway but when Kit reaches out to steady her, she throws up a hand to hold him off, her voice low and angry, “Are you telling me that you and Mike took it upon yourselves to put my children and family through hell these last three days?”
Kit tries to explain, “We didn’t do it intentionally, we did it to…” “I don’t give a damn why you did it. How could you do that to the children? You’ve seen how devastated they are…my God, Kit, you’re a *priest!* You’re *not* suppose to lie and deceive. You’re *not* suppose to hurt the people you love that way. You’re *not* suppose to play God. And how will you be able to live with yourself knowing that *our* children, mine and John’s, may never recover from this? Do you think this little confession will absolve you and things will be all right again?”
Kit sighs and only says in his defense, “He’s my brother and I’m still a man.” A bitter laugh escapes Marlena, “And that makes it excusable? Do you think *he’s* going to *thank* you for what you’ve done?” Kit replies evenly, “No, but at least he’ll be *alive* to punch me out if that’s what he wants to do. If we hadn’t played out our little charade, he might not have been. I can understand your anger, but if I had to do it all over again – I would.”
“No, Kit, I don’t think you *do* understand my anger. You *shouldn’t* have lied to me. You should have told me this morning that John was alive.” “I wanted to, Marlena.” “Then why didn’t you?” “Mike and I weren’t sure you’d be able to pull off a convincing act in front of Stefano’s men.” Her reaction isn’t what he was expecting as she reaches up and slaps him, shocking them both. Marlena steps back and turns from him, “I want to see my husband.”
“You can’t.” Marlena rounds on him, “Don’t tell me I *can’t*, I want you to take me to him right now.” Kit sighs, “He’s not in Salem. We had him moved to a secure place where he could recover. Someone tried to kill him, Marlena. They injected a drug into his IV to cause his cardiac arrest. That *someone* is still out there. Stefano is *still* out there. If I take you to John now, we can’t guarantee his safety.”
A myriad of emotions plays across Marlena’s face. Her fear for John was foremost but she couldn’t get past her anger at what Kit and Mike had done nor was she willing to accept that she couldn’t see John. She needed to see him, to touch him. She had to know that this wasn’t just another lie. Finally, she said with a determination in her voice that John would have recognized, “You *will* find a way for me to see him and you’ll find it tonight.”
***
Mike arrives two hours later, a heavy set woman with graying hair, dressed in a nurse’s uniform and dark coat, in tow. Marlena eyes the woman darkly. “Bringing in the heavy artillery to keep me at home, Mike?”
Mike thought he’d been ready to face Marlena’s wrath, but the cold bitterness in her voice told him otherwise. He cleared his throat. “She’s your way out, Marlena.” “Really? Are you planning to hide me under her coat and sneak me out the back door?”
The woman steps forward and lays a hand on Marlena’s arm. “Marlena, it’s me, Maggie.” Marlena stares at her in shock. Maggie drags the wig off her head and turns to Mike and a silent Kit, standing in the background. “Maybe you’d better let me explain things to her. So far, the two of you have only managed to make a mess of things.” Visibly relieved, the two men high tail it out of the living room.
Maggie tosses the wig onto the sofa, the heavy coat joining it. She turns to Marlena, “Now, are you recovered?” Marlena nods. “Good. I know you’re ready to do bodily harm to Mike and Kit and I’m not saying I agree with what they’ve done, but John is alive and he’s safe and that’s what is important. Mike came to me to help find a way to sneak you out of the house.” She sits on the edge of a chair, kicks off her shoes and removes the padded stockings from her legs. “So I’m going to take off this disguise and you’re going to put it on.” She stands up and begins to unbutton the bulky nurse’s dress, “After supposedly examining you and discovering you need a full time private duty nurse because you collapsed after the funeral, Mike is going to take Nurse Dunnaway, presumably to her home, to collect her things to bring back here.” She shrugs out of the dress, revealing the padding over her clothes underneath. “Which means, you get me as a full time house guest until the charade is no longer necessary.” She unfastens the body padding and tosses it on the sofa. “So, does that meet with your approval?”
A brief smile crosses Marlena’s lips as she nods. “You sound like a general giving orders.” Maggie smiles in return, “That’s me, General Horton and I’m not finished either.” She gathers up the disguise, minus the body padding and holds it out to Marlena, “Put these on before the men come back.” Marlena hugs her friend, bundle of disguise and all. “Thank you.” Maggie places the clothing in her arms and winks, “You can thank me by giving that handsome husband of yours a kiss for me.”
***
Mike had warned Marlena on the way there that John was still in a coma but she notices immediately that his color seemed better than the last time she’d seen him. She tears off the wig and rushes to his bedside, reaching out and touching his face with gentle fingers. Soaking in the warm feel of him, assuring herself that he really was here. She leans over and brushes his lips lightly with hers, breathing his name over and over as tears of joy trickle down her cheeks.
Mike quietly closes the door, leaving them alone.
Page 2 of 12Marlena eyes the disguise, laid out on the bed, in distaste as she rubs at the persistent ache in her lower back. It had been a month and a half since that day she’d faced hell and heaven in the space of twenty-four hours. She’d managed to slip away in her disguise to be with John exactly fifteen times since then. Maggie, Mike and Kit wouldn’t let her risk it any more often than that. She hadn’t told them that she was tired of the disguise, the charade and all the sneaking around. She had come to hate what that disguise represented. She wanted her life back – her nice, safe normal life with John by her side. She wanted to be able to tell her children that their daddy was alive, deal with the confusion and trauma it would cause and move on. But most of all, she wanted to stop having those moments of weakness when she railed at John for doing this to them.
Her thoughts are interrupted as she feels an uncomfortable pull in her abdomen and lowers her hand to its roundness. “Not now, little ones, oh please, not now.” She couldn’t go into labor yet, John was still in a coma. It had been a week since she’d seen him last and tonight would probably be the last night until after the twins were born. She’d prayed every day that John would wake up, to be with her and watch their children come into the world. But it looked like God was only going to grant her one miracle – John’s life.
A soft knock on the door interrupts her reverie. “Just a moment.” She scoops up the disguise and quickly shoves it into one of John’s dresser drawers, then walks over to the door an opens it. She is surprised to see Abe standing there, a grim expression on his face. “Abe?” She questions quietly.
“I’m sorry to disturb you, Marlena. Maggie told me you were resting but my news couldn’t wait.” Marlena invites him in. “From the look on your face, it isn’t good news.” He shakes his head no. Marlena patiently waits for him to continue.
“It’s about Roman.” Marlena’s breath catches in her throat, “What about him?” “He was captured an hour ago and arrested for John’s murder.” “No!” Marlena gasps, as she staggers slightly, then sinks down upon the bed.
“Marlena, you know the evidence we have against him. His fingerprints were on the gun, several witnesses saw him shoot John – including you, and Roman had motive – he made it perfectly clear how much he hated John.” “But John…” she stops herself just in time. She couldn’t’ tell Abe that John was alive, not yet. No matter how angry she’d been with Kit and Mike in the beginning, John’s safety was all that mattered. Abe would probably never forgive her for not trusting him in this but it was too late to change things now.
Mistaking what she had been about to say, Abe’s eyes fill with understanding, “If you’re going to say John wouldn’t want to see this happen, I agree with you. But I have to abide by the law. You know that as well as I do.” A sharp pain sears across Marlena’s abdomen. She gasps in pained surprise. Suddenly concerned, Abe rushes to her side, “What is it, Marlena?” “I think…I think I’m in labor.” “Stay right there. I’ll go get Maggie.” After giving her shoulder a gentle squeeze, he dashes out of the room.
Moments later, Maggie arrives to find Marlena breathing through a contraction. She sits on the bed next to her. “Is that your first one?” Marlena nods. Maggie glances at her watch, “Abe is calling Mike.” Marlena clutches Maggie’s arm and whispers raggedly, “I don’t want to do this without John.” “Oh honey, I know you don’t but it doesn’t look like it can be helped.”
Marlena takes a deep cleansing breath and lets it out as the contraction passes. “Maggie, they’ve arrested Roman for John’s murder.” Maggie nods, “Abe told me but you can’t worry about that right now. You have to concentrate on the birth of your twins.” Marlena wasn’t ready to let it go, “You have to talk to Mike and Kit. They have to do something. Roman can’t be tried for John’s murder!”
Abe return halts any further conversation on the subject. “Mike said we should bring her into the hospital.” Maggie rises to her feet, “Would you let Kit and the children know while I help Marlena get ready?” “I’ve already told them. Kit is going to inform the rest of the family, then pack up the children and meet us at the hospital. I’ll wait for you downstairs.”
***
Mike emerges from the labor room to face a sea of anxious faces. Sami pushes her way forward, “How is my mother?” “She’s doing fine, for the moment. Her labor isn’t progressing as easily as we’d like it to. I’m afraid she’s fighting it.” Carrie slips her arm around Sami’s waist, “Is there anything we can do?” Mike shakes his head, “Other than being here for her, no.”
Caroline pulls Mike aside, “Mike, why is Marlena fighting her labor?” Mike sighs, “She keeps saying she can’t do it without, John. Maggie is doing her best to support her, but…” His voice trails off. Caroline shakes her head sadly, “I was afraid this would happen. She’s refused to grieve all these months and now when she needs her strength, it’s not there.” Mike pats Caroline’s arm soothingly, “I’m sure she’ll find it when the time comes. I need to go back in there. I’ll have a nurse keep you posted on Marlena’s progress.”
Sami and Carrie move into the circle of their grandmother’s arms as Mike returns to the labor room. Shawn moves up behind them, “First Roman and now this.” He shakes his head, “It hasn’t been a very good day.” Sami shoots her grandfather an angry glance, “Mom’s going to come through this just fine and so are the twins.” Shawn lays a comforting hand on her shoulder, “I know, Samantha darlin. I was just wishin’ I could be sayin’ the same thing about your father.”
His attempt at comforting Sami backfires as she pulls away from him, “It’s *his* fault that mom is in there without John. I hope he rots in jail.” And before anyone can stop her, she disappears. Carrie slips from her Grandmother’s embrace, “She didn’t mean that, she’s just really worried about Marlena. They’ve gotten very close since John’s death and I think she’s afraid something is going to happen to her mother too. I’ll go try to talk to her.” Caroline puts a staying hand on Carrie’s arm, “No, Carrie, let her be. She won’t thank you for forcing her into talking when she doesn’t want to. Give her time, she’ll be back.”
***
Marlena closes her eyes and lets out a deep breath as another contraction passes. She knew she wasn’t giving her full effort to her labor but she couldn’t stop thinking about John. He had wanted to be there for the entire pregnancy and take an active part in the birth. A bullet had deprived him of one and looked like it would deprive him of the other. She appreciated Maggie’s efforts to keep her spirits up with tales of how happy John would be when he woke up and took his children into his arms for the first time, but it wasn’t enough.
“Marlena.” Maggie’s voice finally penetrates her thoughts. She opens her eyes and looks up at the other woman. “I’m sorry, Maggie.” Maggie decides to take a different tack with her, “Marlena, how do you think John would feel if he saw you right now?” Marlena manages a weak smile, “I’m afraid he wouldn’t be very happy with me.” Maggie continues, “No, he wouldn’t and he wouldn’t like your jeopardizing yourself and the twins the way you are either. I know how much you miss him and wish he could be here, but he isn’t and you’re going to have to face that and get on with the birthing of your children.”
Marlena is prevented from replying as another contraction takes hold of her. Mike joins Maggie at the bedside and watches the fetal monitor carefully through the contraction. As the contraction passes, Mike checks Marlena’s pulse, then says to her, “Marlena, you need to listen to Maggie. You’re not dilating properly, you need to start concentrating. And if that isn’t enough to convince you, then maybe hearing that the twins are starting to exhibit distress will. If you keep going the way you are, we may have to perform a cesarean.”
Marlena’s face pales and her hand tightens on Maggie’s, she nods in understanding. Another contraction takes hold of her and she misses the gasps of surprise around her. She panics momentarily when she feels Maggie’s hand slip from hers, until she feels a larger, stronger hand close around her fingers. The contraction is over before she turns her head to see who was attached to the hand that held hers. Her eyes widen in surprise as she takes in the sight of the gray haired elderly looking man, with a mustache and large dark rimmed glasses, staring at her with all the love in the world in his eyes. “John!”
He grins, “Didn’t think I’d miss this moment, did you?” She reaches up and rips his mustache off. “Ow!” He rubs at his painful upper lip. “What was that for?” “I just wanted you to experience a little of what you missed.” And then she pulls him to her and kisses him as his arms enfold her. Maggie dabs at her tears with a tissue and shoots a questioning look at Mike. He shakes his head and shrugs. He couldn’t explain how John had gotten here any more than she could.
John looks intently at Marlena, “Now, what’s this I hear about your not behaving yourself and taking your time bringing our children into the world?” She clutches at the lapels of the faded tweed jacket he wore, her gaze devouring him, “Just how long have you been here?” “Long enough to hear what Mike just told you.” “But when did you…how did you….”
John reaches up and releases her grip from his lapels and raises her hands one at a time to his lips, “I’m sorry I checked out on you like that, honey but I’m here now and I can’t tell you how much I’m looking forward to holding those babies in my arms. So what do you say we save all your questions for later and concentrate on the twins?” Marlena nods and then tenses as she feels another contraction coming on. John squeezes her hands gently, “Look at me, Marlena. Concentrate on me and we’ll do this together.”
***
Maggie and Mike stand arm in arm, beaming, as they watch John and Marlena marvel over the small bundles each held in their arms. “He has your nose.” “She has your smile.” “Aren’t they just beautiful?” “As beautiful as their mother is.” John leans over and kisses Marlena, “We did it, Doc.” Marlena laughs softly, “Yes, we certainly did.”
John pulls the blanket aside covering his son’s tiny body. “John, what are you doing?” John looks up and grins sheepishly, “Counting his fingers and toes.” Marlena laughs again and shakes her head. She looks across the room at Maggie and Mike, “Thank you.”
The pair move closer to the bed as Mike says, “You don’t need to thank us, Marlena. The two of you did all the work.” Marlena slips her hand in to Maggie’s and gives it a grateful squeeze. “Yes, I do. You were both here for us.” Maggie squeezes her hand in return, “I wouldn’t have wanted to be any where else. So, what are you going to name them?”
John and Marlena exchange nonplussed glances. Marlena returns her gaze to Maggie, “We haven’t had a chance to decide.” Mike smiles, “Well, I’d say you have all the time in the world now. By the way, there is a waiting room full of anxious people watching this room like hawks. I’d better go out there and put their minds at ease and give them the good news.”
A little of Marlena’s joy slips as she remembers Roman. “Mike, would you have Kit and Abe come in here?” Mike lifts and enquiring brow. Marlena continues, a warning note in her voice, “Abe needs to know that John is alive before the rest of the family finds out and I’m going to leave most of the *explaining* to you and Kit.” Her voice softens, “Would you give us a few minutes first?” Mike nods, knowing they couldn’t avoid explanations forever especially in light of Roman’s recent arrest. Maggie gives Marlena’s arm a gentle pat, “I’ll join Mike and leave the two of you alone.” Marlena flashes her a grateful smile.
The moment they are alone, Marlena’s gaze roams John’s features as his own gaze moves from his son to his daughter in awe. She whispers softly, “I love you.” His reaction is immediate as his gaze meets hers and his face lights up with his love for her. “I love you.” He leans over and presses an infinitely tender kiss on her lips. Marlena’s hand reaches up and cups his face, “I’ve missed you so much. Don’t ever leave me again.” John’s hand moves up to cover hers, “You can count on it, Doc. You’re stuck with me forever.” Her eyes twinkle as she says in a voice of mock dismay, “Forever?”
He grins, “Got a problem with that, lady?” Marlena flashes him a seductive smile and says softly, “I’ll show you what kind of problem I have with it just as soon as I’ve recovered from the twins birth.” “Promise, Mrs. Black?” “You can count on it, Mr. Black.” John’s fingers entwine with hers and their gazes return to admiring their children.
Page 3 of 12After listening to Kit and Mike’s explanation, Abe rakes them over the coals for keeping the police department out of it. Kit and Mike are relieved when John steps into the room and Abe turns his attention to welcoming him back to the living and congratulating John and Marlena on the birth of their twins. Finally, he says to Marlena, “Marlena, I understand why you wouldn’t take me into your confidence but I wish you would have trusted me.”
“I’m sorry, Abe. I wanted to tell you.” Her hand tightens on John’s, “but in the end I agreed with Kit and Mike, the fewer the people who knew the better. What’s going to happen to Roman now?” Abe sighs regretfully, “The charges will be changed to *attempted* murder.”
“I’m curious, Abe. Has Roman said anything at all?” Abe replies in answer to John’s question, “As a matter-of-fact, he’s denied everything. He said Stefano had been holding him captive but that doesn’t explain how his fingerprints showed up on the gun.” John and Marlena exchange glances of silent communion, then John says, “I believe him and there are many ways Stefano could have put his fingerprints on that gun.” “We have no proof, John.”
“Then I’ll find it.” Abe shakes his head, “I don’t think that’s a good idea. Stefano has been one step ahead of us the whole time and it was only your *death* that had him fooled. And the more I think about it, the more I think it might not be a bad idea for you to continue to play dead if we’re going to beat him at his own game.” John and Marlena both say in unison, “No!” John continues, “No way, Abraham. Marlena and I have been apart too long as it is and it’s time the children know I’m alive.” Marlena nods, “You know I agree with him, Abe.”
Kit steps forward. Hearing that John and Marlena both believed in Roman’s innocence was enough for him. “Maybe you should talk to Roman and come up with a solution with him. After all, it is his freedom and his life on the line.” “I think my brother is right. Whatever we decide, Roman should be a part of it. If you’ll let him know what’s been going on, Abe, I’ll stop by to see him as soon as I’ve taken Marlena and the twins home and talked to the family.”
Marlena tugs on John’s hand. “Oh no you don’t, John. I’m going with you. Roman needs to know that we both believe in him.” John’s gaze locks with hers, “Then we’ll go together as soon as I’m sure you’re fully rested. Fair enough?” She smiles at him and nods.
Mike finally steps forward, “I hate to break this up but Marlena should get some rest now and the nurse will be bringing the twins back in soon.” Then adds, “If there is anything I can do to help Roman out, just let me know.” John nods, “We will, Mike and thanks again for everything.” Mike grins, “It was my pleasure, despite Marlena and Abe’s initial reactions.”
Mike escorts Abe to the door as Kit turns to his brother and sister-in-law, “Do you want me to break the news to the family? It’s the least I can do for putting us all in this situation.” Marlena bites back her smile, “Yes, it is and I think we’ll take you up on your offer but we’d like to tell the children ourselves. I think they’ll handle it better coming from us.” Kit nods. “Just let me know when you’re ready to see them.” “Give us an hour or two so Marlena can get some rest.” Kit nods again and after congratulating them again, follow Abe and Mike out the door.
The moment the door closes John moves up on the bed, stretches out next to Marlena and gathers her into his arms, “Alone at last!” She snuggles closer to him, “Yes and now you can do some explaining of your own.” “You’re suppose to be getting some rest.” “I *am* resting, now start talking. You can start with when you woke up from your coma.”
John knew better than to try to sway her away from anything. “All right, you win. According to Mike, I started coming out of it about a week ago. It was about the time a…ah…fat…gray haired nurse dressed in a God-awful tent of a dress was leaving my room.” “John, that was *me*!” His eyes glow, “I know. You…ah… had blossomed quite nicely.” “Oh you…”
John silences her with a kiss, then grins, “If you keep interrupting me, we’ll never get through my explanation.” Marlena’s eyes dance, “If you’re going to kiss me every time I interrupt you, I may not be able to help myself.” John laughs, “Maybe I should explain from the *other* side of the room.” Marlena’s arms tighten around him, “Don’t you dare. Now continue.” Then a sudden thought strikes her, “Wait a minute. Are you saying that you came out of your coma a *week* ago and no one bothered to tell me? Who do I blame for that one?”
“I’m afraid that would be Mike. He was concerned because you were so close to your due date and he wasn’t sure I’d be strong enough to be with you. And, too, there was still the matter of Stefano.” “That isn’t going to save him from receiving a piece of my mind.” John chuckles, “Doc, you’re going to have him dreading coming around you in the future.” “Then he shouldn’t keep taking these decisions upon himself.”
He tries to humor her, “Hey, I’m here, aren’t I?” It doesn’t work. “That doesn’t make it right, John. I went through hell when I thought I’d lost you, only to have them spring the news on me *after* your funeral that you were still alive. I know I finally agreed with their reasons, but I wasn’t happy about them.” John’s fingers lightly caress her cheek, “I know, Doc, Kit told me about that and everything else. I wasn’t very happy with their methods either. Especially when I knew what it had done to you and the children. If I could have prevented that, I would have.”
“I know you would have and I know, too, that having you back in my arms again makes it all worthwhile and I’ve forgiven them, for the most part.” She pauses, frowning. “There is something I’ve been wanting to know.” “What’s that?” “*Who* was in the coffin? I was completely fooled.” John shakes his head, “I have no idea. Kit avoided explaining that part. I’m assuming they did *some* disguise job if you were convinced it was me. So, Dr. Evans, do you have any more questions?”
“Just one. How did you get here?” “Kit came to get me the moment he was able to get free, otherwise I would have been here sooner.” He plucks at his jacket, “My brother is just full of surprises. He had my disguise picked out in advance.” He cradles her face in his hands, “Now, I think I owe you a few kisses for all those interruptions.”
Marlena laughs softly. “I was wondering when you were going to get around to those.” “Doc.” “Yes, John?” “You talk too much.” He prevents her from replying by devouring her lips with his.
***
Marlena faces her children alone while John waits in another room with the twins. They had decided it would be better if she explained things before the children saw him. “There’s something that I have to tell you all and I know it will be hard for you to understand.”
Sami clutches Will closer to her, “There isn’t something wrong with the twins is there?” Marlena shakes her head, a reassuring smile on her lips. “No, the twins are fine and you’ll get to see them very soon. This has to do with John.” Her glance sweeps Brady, Belle and TJ sitting at the foot of her bed, “Your Daddy.” Belle tilts her head sideways, “Daddy coming back from heaven?” Brady shoots his sister a disgusted look, “Daddy can’t come back from heaven.”
TJ remains silent and stares down at his hands. Carrie, Sami and Eric exchange confused glances. Marlena sighs softly, this was going to be more difficult than she thought it was, so she decided on the direct approach. “No, your Daddy isn’t coming back from heaven. You see…your Daddy didn’t die, we only thought he did. He was very, very sick and your Uncle Kit and Dr. Mike wanted to protect him so they hid him away and only let us think your Daddy had died until he could get better.”
The children all respond at once. Carrie gasps in shock, “Marlena, how could they do something so cruel?” TJ looks up, his face animated for the first time in months, “He’s alive? Really alive?” Eric shakes his head, “I can’t believe they did that.” Sami’s face lights up, “Oh, mom, I’m so happy to hear he’s alive.” Belle and Brady stare at their mother in confusion. Marlena motions the two younger children into the circle of her arms. Once they are settled there, Brady looks up at Marlena. “Momma, what does that mean?” Belle adds a question of her own, “Daddy not an angel?” She hugs them to her, “It means that your Daddy is alive and is waiting to see you, Brady and no, Belle, he isn’t an angel.”
TJ jumps off the bed and asks impatiently, “Where is he, mom?” Marlena smiles, “Well, I think if you open the door he might be there with the twins.” TJ races to the door and flings it open. John sans his disguise is, indeed, standing there with a twin in each arm. TJ resists the urge to hug his father while his arms are full. “Welcome back, Dad!”
John grins, “It’s great to be back, son.” He moves into the room and is immediately attacked by Belle and Brady as they scramble off the bed and each hug one of his legs yelling choruses of “Daddy! Daddy!” Carrie holds out her arms, “Maybe we’d better take the twins from you.” Carrie cradles one in her arms and Eric takes the other. Afraid he’ll drop his tiny sibling, Eric immediately takes it to his mother. John scoops Belle and Brady up into his arms and they take turns planting kisses on his cheek and putting a strangle hold hug around his neck.
Belle looks solemnly at her father, “You not go away again, Daddy?” “No, sweetheart, Daddy won’t go away again.” Brady’s brow draws into an angry frown, “Uncle Kit and Dr. Mike are bad men.” John shakes his head, “No, Brady, they were only doing what they thought was best. They wanted to protect me from the real bad man.”
Carrie and Sami exchange pain-filled glances and whisper in unison, “Stefano.” TJ’s face turns red with anger and his hands form fists at his side, “I wish Stefano were dead.” Marlena rebukes him softly, “TJ, you shouldn’t say things like that. I know Stefano has hurt all of us and he will pay for what he’s done and then he’ll never hurt any of us again.”
John’s eyes meet Marlena’s, they knew that they still had a long way to go to repair the damage that was done but they had made a beginning. John sets Belle and Brady on their feet and takes each of their hands in his, “What do you say we go say hello to your new brother and sister?” Brady looks up at his father, “What are their names, Daddy?” “I’m afraid we haven’t given them a name yet.” Belle frowns, “How we say hello with no name?” Marlena laughs, “Belle has a point, John. Maybe we’d better decide on names soon.”
John sets Belle and Brady up on the side of the bed. Belle leans over and touches one of the twins with her index finger, “How bout Muffin?” John and Marlena look at each other in horror. “Muffin?” Belle nods, “Like that name.” Sami laughs, “And what are you going to call the other one, Belle?”
Belle looks at the other twin, a thoughtful expression on her brow, “Let Brady name that one.” Brady scrambles up to his knees so he can get a better look at the other twin. He nods to himself, then looks at his parents and announces his choice, “Kermit.” Eric laughs at that one and explains, “He’s hooked on Sesame Street now.” Carrie grins, “Good thing he’s not hooked on Barney.”
Marlena says in mock dismay, “Muffin for a boy and Kermit for a girl?” Belle and Brady nod in unison, quite pleased with their choices. John laughs. “How about you use those as nicknames and Mommy and I pick out their real names?” Belle and Brady look at each other, thinking it over and then say together, “Okay.”
John leans over and whispers in Marlena’s ear, “Hopefully, they’ll outgrow it soon.” Marlena whispers back, “You’d better hope so!”
Page 4 of 12After Mike arrives and clears everyone out so that Marlena and the twins can rest, he insists that John come with him for an exam. “After all, you just came out of your coma a week ago and haven’t gotten all your strength back. I need to make sure there aren’t going to be any lingering problems.” John looks up from contemplating the tiny daughter he holds in his arms. “And you’re not going to let it wait until tomorrow, are you?” Mike shakes his head no.
Marlena places a hand on John’s arm, “I don’t want it to wait either. I want to make sure that nothing is going to keep you away from me again.” She smiles, “The twins and I will be right here, when you’re finished.” John lifts her hand to her lips and plants a warm kiss in her palm, “For you, I will.” He rises to his feet, kiss his daughter’s downy head then places her in her hospital bassinet near Marlena’s bedside. He turns to Marlena, leans over and captures her mouth in a lingering kiss. “Try to get some rest while I’m gone.” She nods as he plants a kiss on his son’s head cradled in Marlena’s arm. Husband and wife exchange tender smiles and then John follows Mike out the door.
Moments later, the door opens a fraction and Maggie peeks her head inside, “Do you mind if I come in?” Marlena smiles, “Please do! The quiet was deafening after all the earlier excitement.” Maggie steps into the room, closing the door behind her. “I won’t stay long because you really should try to get some sleep while you can.” Marlena looks down at her sleeping son, “Don’t I know it, but I couldn’t sleep now if I tried.”
Maggie holds out her hands, “Why don’t you let me put him in his bassinet for you?” After kissing his tiny cheek, Marlena hands her son to her friend, as Maggie asks, “So have you come up with names for them yet?” Marlena laughs softly, “No, but Belle and Brady have.” Maggie laughs as she places the baby in his bassinet, “I’m afraid to ask.” Marlena points to the bed cradling her son, “Meet Muffin and that over there is Kermit.”
Maggie shakes her head, her eyes alight with amusement as she settles into the chair next to Marlena’s bed, “Muffin and Kermit? I hope you talked them out of those?” “Not exactly. They’ve agreed to use them as nicknames.” She turns to her side, “Now, why don’t you tell me why you came back in here to see me?”
The amusement leaves Maggie’s features, “I wanted to let you know that Roman contacted Mickey. He’s asked him to represent him and Mickey agreed.” “I’m not surprised, Mickey has been his lawyer for a good many years now. What upsets me is that he *has* to hire an attorney to represent him.” She pounds her fist on the bed, “He shouldn’t be going through this and if it weren’t for Stefano…”
Maggie places a calming hand on Marlena’s arm, “Marlena, I didn’t tell you that to upset you.” Marlena’s voice fills with frustration, “I know you didn’t, Maggie. I just can’t help thinking about the continuing impact *that* man has had on our lives. It’s a wonder any of us have gotten on with our lives with Stefano still running lose out there.” “Do you really think Roman and John will be able to work together to bring him down once and for all?”
“Truthfully? I don’t know. I’m hoping that we can put all the bad feelings of the past behind us and they *will* be able to work together. But we really won’t know for sure until after we’ve talked to Roman.” Maggie shakes her head in disbelief, “I still think it’s incredible that the Roman who has been running around in Salem was an impostor. But then, I remember it’s Stefano we’re talking about…” Her voices dies away. “Yes, it is and considering that *his* Roman and I never encountered each other explains a lot. Stefano didn’t trust his impostor enough to pass my inspection.”
“I see two babies sound asleep but the one person who *should* be, isn’t.” Both women look up, guilt written on their faces, to see John standing in the doorway. He continues, “Why is that?” Marlena manages a small smile, “Couldn’t sleep?” He advances into the room, “Given your topic of discussion, I’m not surprised.” He reaches the beside and sits next to Marlena, as Maggie rises to her feet, “I’m sorry, John, it’s my fault she isn’t sleeping.” She eases toward the door, “Maybe I should leave the two of you alone now.”
Marlena bites her inner cheek to keep from laughing as Maggie makes a hasty exit. John turns to her with a stern look but before he can say anything, Marlena quickly asks, “How did your exam go?” John taps her chin, “My exam went just fine. Mike says I’ll be back to my normal self in another week. So tell me, Mrs. Black, how did the two of you get on *that* particular discussion?”
“Maggie wanted to let me know that Roman hired Mickey as his attorney,” she smiles teasingly, “and I’m glad you’re going to be back to normal in another week. Although I’m still not sure what your *normal* is.” John shakes his head in exasperation, “It’s not going to work, Marlena.” Marlena assumes an innocent pose, “What isn’t going to work?”
His answer is forestalled by a soft wail from one of the bassinets. By the time John reaches his crying son, his daughter has joined in duet. A nurse arrives with two bottles, “Sounds like I came to the rescue just in time.” Marlena thanks her as John places their son in her arms. He picks up his daughter and settles into the chair Maggie had vacated a few moments before. The nurse hands each of them a bottle and then leaves them alone with their children. The cries end the moment the twins receive their bottles. Marlena takes advantage of the quiet and briefly fills John in on what he’d missed the past few months to avoid getting back to their previous discussion. A comfortable peaceful quiet falls between them.
Marlena breaks it first. “John.” “Hmm?” “What do you think of naming our daughter after Maggie and Alice?” He looks up at her and smiles, “I was thinking the same thing but wouldn’t it get confusing having another Maggie or Alice around?” “Well, we could name her Maggie Alycia and call her Aly.” John tests the name out, “Maggie Alycia Black. Aly.” He nods, “I like them.” “Then Maggie Alycia it is. Now we need a name for our son. Have you considered any names?”
John glances over at his son and nods, “I’d like to name him after my father and Kit, if that’s all right with you.” “I think it’s a wonderful idea.” She removes the bottle from her son’s mouth, who gives a whimper of protest before she gently places him on her shoulder and pats lightly on his back. “I don’t remember you or Kit ever mentioning your father’s name though.” John says quietly as he follows Marlena’s actions with his daughter, “It was Connor.” “Connor Christopher Black. That has a nice ring to it too but I have a feeling he’s going to end up being called CC.”
Connor Christopher Black burps softly. Followed by a slightly louder burp by his sister. Their parents exchange amused glances as John says, “All ready she’s trying to outdo her brother.” He settles baby Aly back into the cradle of his arm and returns the bottle to her seeking mouth. “You won’t mind his being called CC, will you?” Marlena gives a final soft pat to Connor’s back and settles him back into her arms, “No, not at all but you do realize that Belle will turn it into CC Muffin, don’t you?”
John glances over at his son sucking greedily at his bottle and then grins at Marlena, “If Belle could see him right now, she’d call him Greedy Muffin.” Marlena laughs, “When you put it like that, CC Muffin doesn’t sound so bad.” She glances over at her daughter, “And then we have Aly…Kermit.” “I have an answer for that one too.” “I thought you might. I’m ready.”
“We should count ourselves fortunate that Sesame Street is more important to Brady right now than Dr. Seuss. Otherwise, she’d be called Aly Cat, or maybe Aly Sam I Am or even Aly One Fish Two Fish…” Marlena holds up a hand, “Okay, okay, I get your point.” She then stifles a yawn.
Seeing his daughter had fallen back to sleep, John carefully puts her back in her bassinet. Connor isn’t as cooperative and insists on finishing his bottle before finally falling asleep. John returns him to his bed and then turns to his wife, “Now it’s your turn to get some sleep.” Marlena gives him a weary smile, “Now, I think I’m ready.” John settles back into the chair, taking her hand in his. “And I intend to stand guard.” He kisses her hand, “Close your eyes, Doc and go to sleep.” She nods as her eyes flutter closed. She is asleep a moment later.
***
Roman stands up as Mickey enters the small conference room Abe allowed them to use. He holds out his hand to Mickey, “Thanks for coming so soon, Mickey.” Mickey shakes his hand, then sets his briefcase on the conference table, “I would have been here sooner but I was at the hospital.” Roman nods, settling back in his chair, “Abe told me about Marlena and John and the birth of their children. Is everything okay?”
Mickey hears the genuine concern in Roman’s voice and nods, “Marlena and the twins are just fine.” “What about John? Abe told me that his brother and Mike Horton are responsible for making everyone believe he was dead while he was still in a coma.” “Mike examined him shortly before I left the hospital and gave him a clean bill of health.” He takes a seat across from Roman, “But we’re not here to talk about them. I need to hear from you, what happened to you.”
Roman folds his hands together on the table top, “I’m not really sure about that, Mickey. I remember coming back to Salem and visiting with the folks that first day, and then everything is pretty much a blank after that. With the exception of remembering seeing Stefano several times after that and making my escape from where he was holding me prisoner.” “Do you remember where that was?”
Roman shakes his head, “He’d been drugging me and I was still pretty disoriented when I left. Bo and Hope found me wandering around in a field and by then, I was a few miles away from where Stefano had been holding me.” Mickey frowns, “You do realize that we’re going to need the location in order to help verify your story and clear you?” Roman nods, “I do and that’s why Bo and Hope are trying to retrace my steps. Abe said they weren’t having much luck.”
Mickey jots down a few notes on a notepad, “What about the impostor? Is anyone out looking for him?” Roman sighs, “There’s an APB out on him but the chances of finding him are like finding a needle in a haystack. When DiMera wants someone to disappear, he does a pretty thorough job.” Mickey nods his head in agreement, “True, but he’s been known to make mistakes. The fact that you’re here and John’s alive is proof of that. Did Abe tell you that John and Marlena believe you’re innocent and are going to do everything they can to help?” “He told me,” Roman replies, his voice unreadable.
Mickey looks at him sharply, “Do you have a problem with the two of them helping you?” Roman sighs, rises to his feet and moves over to the room’s single window, staring out at the snow covered parking lot. “You want the truth? I honestly don’t know how I feel, Mickey.” Mickey warns, “You might want to examine your feelings before they get any more involved in the investigation. If there is any strain at all between the three of you, it could very well hamper the investigation.”
Roman looks at him, “I’m well aware of that. I’m also aware that it would be to my benefit to have the man I’m accused of attempting to murder, on my side.” Mickey nods, then says, “There’s something else you should know. I couldn’t convince the judge to grant bail.” Roman returns to his perusal of the parking lot, not really seeing it. “I didn’t think he would considering whoever did shoot John left the scene of the crime months ago. That makes that person a flight risk.”
Mickey puts his notepad way and closes his briefcase, and asks gently, “Is there anything you need? Anything I can get you?” Roman shakes his head, “No, there isn’t anything I need right now.” “If you change your mind, have Abe contact me. I’ll see that you get it. In the meantime, I’ll start putting your case together for the preliminary hearing and will stop by again in the next day or two.” Without turning around, Roman murmurs, “Thanks, Mickey.” With a sigh, Mickey picks up his briefcase and leaves.
***
Stefano hangs up the phone and picks up the Salem newspaper. A grin spreads across his face as glances over it at his henchman, “Now I have them right where I want them.”
Page 5 of 12The twins nestled snugly in their arms, Marlena proceeds John through the front door of their home. Marlena notices immediately how quiet it is. “Oh, listen to that.” John moves to her side, “I don’t hear anything.” Marlena smiles up at him, “That’s what I mean. No hospital pages, no code blues, no ringing telephones, no nurse to wake me up just when I’ve fallen asleep to take my vitals… It’s always amazed me how they think new mothers could rest in a hospital.” She looks around and then frowns, “But I think it’s too quiet here. Where is everyone?”
John leads the way as they head up to the nursery, “Shawn and Caroline wanted to spend a few days with their grandchildren and Sami decided to join them to help out. Eric is off on one of his mysterious trips, Kit is at the church and Bo and Hope are on police business. Did I forget anyone?” Marlena laughs as John steps aside and allows her to enter the nursery first, “No, I don’t think so.” Her voice fades as she notices something new in the nursery – two hand carved oak rocking chairs, one with a pink bow, the other with a blue. “Oh, John, they’re beautiful!”
She moves closer and sees that they’re both engraved. She laughs again as she sits in one of the rockers, “His and hers?” John’s voice is teasing as he takes a seat in the other rocker, “That’s to avoid confusion in our old age when we move them out to the front porch to enjoy those warm sunny afternoons as we watch our grandchildren play or those romantic starlit evenings when we’re alone.”
Marlena sees her son’s eyes drifting close as the rocking motion lulls him to sleep, then smiles up at John, “What a wonderful idea but I’m not so sure I like the inference that we might be senile in our old age.” John reaches over and caresses her cheek with his finger tips and grins, “That was a joke, Doc. Instead of being like most people with “his” and “hers” towels, we have rocking chairs. Much more practical, don’t you think?”
“Oh yes, much.” She holds out her hand to him and he laces his fingers into hers as she adds, “Thank you, I love them already.” “Good because I have a few more surprises in store for you.” “You do?” John looks down at his sleeping daughter, a grin lifts his lips. “Um…hmm.” “And you aren’t going to give me any hints are you?”
John lifts his gaze to her, his eyes dancing. “Nope.” Satisfied that his daughter is going to sleep for awhile, he tucks her securely into her cradle then moves back over to Marlena’s side and holds out his hands for his son. “Why don’t you let me put him to bed too and then you go get some rest while they’re sleeping?” She hands Connor over to him. “I’m fine, John and if Mike Horton put you up to hounding me about getting some rest…”
John doesn’t admit to a thing as he interrupts her, his voice nonchalant as he tucks his son into his cradle, “I guess I’ll just have to rest by myself then.” John turns on the nursery monitor, picks up the portable and places it in Marlena’s hand. He leans over and brushes a kiss across her lips and then heads for the door, “See ya later, Doc.” Marlena looks down at the portable monitor in her hand and doesn’t know whether to throw it after him or laugh. Instead, she murmurs to herself about getting even with Mike Horton next time she sees him as quickly follows John to the master bedroom to find him already stretched out on the bed.
He doesn’t say a word, just grins and pats the bed beside him. “Oh, all right!” She concedes ungraciously as she sets the monitor on her night stand and then joins him in the bed. John turns on his side to face her and props his head up on his hand. “Now, aren’t you glad I convinced you to rest?” “You didn’t convince me of anything. I just didn’t want you to feel lonely in this big bed all by yourself,” Marlena says lightly, not looking at him.
John’s lips twitch, “That was considerate of you.” Marlena rolls onto her side and glares at him daring him to laugh. “John, do you realize that the twins have spent most of their time sleeping and I have been doing nothing but resting for the last two days? I was hoping we’d be able to spend some time together…” She stops, realizing that’s exactly what they were doing and finishes sheepishly, “Well, out of bed, at least.” He pulls her into his arms, “And we will, just as soon as we’ve both rested.”
Marlena sighs in exasperation, “You’re not listening…” John shuts her up with a kiss that leaves her gasping for breath and then says before she can catch her breath, “Marlena, why don’t you admit why you’re really afraid to fall asleep in this bed?” “I’m not…” She doesn’t finish the sentence, but her face expresses what she can’t bring herself to admit.
He cups her face in his hand, his voice is full of tenderness, “I’m not going anywhere, honey. When you open your eyes, I’ll still be here holding you in my arms just like I am now.” His thumb caresses her cheek lightly, “I know coming to bed alone night after night was one of the hardest things you had to do while I was gone, it would have been for me too. I’m not sure I could have slept in here without you. But we’re both home now, safe and sound and I intend to be here every single night holding you and loving you.” A grin touches his lips, “And as many times as I can get you alone during the day too.”
Marlena laughs softly. “It’s very scary how you do that, you know.” “What? Read your mind?” Marlena nods. John taps her nose, “There’s no trick to it. All I have to do is remember what it was like those six weeks you were in a coma and all the times we’ve been separated but we aren’t going to dwell on all the times we’ve been apart. We’re together again, we brought home two healthy, beautiful twins, we have three other adorable children to be proud of and a house of joy and laughter that’s always filled with family and friends. That’s what we’re going to concentrate on and everything else will eventually fall into place.”
Marlena knew he was talking about Roman but she wasn’t even going to let thoughts of him spoil this moment. She captures his hand in hers and plants a warm kiss on it, “Thank you.” “No, Doc, I should be the one thanking you…for loving me. That makes me the luckiest man on the face of the earth.” She smiles, “Then that must make me the luckiest woman because you love me just as much and you always know what to say to melt all my fears away.”
John brushes his thumb across her lower lip and says just before capturing her mouth in an infinitely tender kiss, “I love you more than life itself, Marlena Evans Black.” Their mouths part on a contented sigh. Marlena settles more comfortably in John’s arms and lays her head on his chest and says plaintively, “Six weeks is a very long way away.” John’s chest rumbles with light laughter as his hand gently glides up and down her arm, “I promise to make it worth the wait on one condition.”
Marlena lifts her head and looks at him, “What’s that?” “You model that nurse’s uniform for me in another six weeks or so. She was a real turn-on!” “You think so, do you?” John nods his head. A wicked grin touches Marlena lips but she doesn’t say a word as she rests her head on his chest again giving John second thoughts about his request.
***
Carrie bumps into Sami with the box she is carrying as they sneak through the back door of the Black kitchen. Sami nearly drops the bags of groceries in her arms and hisses, “Watch where you’re going?” “It was an accident.” TJ turns on both of them and raises his finger to his lips and growls in a low voice, “Shhh! Do you want them to hear us?”
Sami sets the bags on the counter and replies, keeping her voice low too, “It won’t matter if John decides to come down here and surprise Mom with lunch or something.” Carrie sets the box on the table, whispering loudly, “Well, let’s hope he doesn’t. I’m sure they’ll both appreciate a meal neither one of them cooked.” Sami giggles, and whispers back, “Ain’t that the truth.”
TJ moves to the box Carrie had set on the table and starts pulling table linens out of it, “I’ll go get the small dining room all set up while the two of you start cooking.” Carrie grins as TJ leaves the kitchen, “Bossy little thing, isn’t he?” Sami laughs as she begins emptying the grocery bags, “He gets that from Belle.”
Carrie joins Sami in emptying the bags, “How much time do we have before Maggie gets here to watch the twins?” Sami glances at the clock, “An hour.” Carrie frowns, “Maybe we’d better have TJ play look out after he’s finished decorating.” Sami nods, “Good idea.”
TJ breezes back in to get more items out of the box and glares at both of them, “Stop wasting time. You’re suppose to be cooking, remember?” Sami sticks out her tongue at TJ’s retreating back. Carrie laughs and the sisters turn back to their chore of preparing dinner.
***
John’s eyes snap open at the sound of an unexpected noise. He listens carefully, realizing it hadn’t come from the nursery monitor and then notices the light is off on the monitor. Marlena is sound asleep and he didn’t have the heart to wake her just yet. He gently eases his arms from around her. She stirs slightly. “John?” He kisses her forehead and says quietly, “Go back to sleep. I’m just going to check on the twins.” Marlena nods and rolls over and falls back to sleep.
John moves from the bed and goes directly to the nursery. He is surprised to find Maggie sitting in one of the rockers feeding a bottle to one of the twins. Maggie smiles up at him, “Surprise?” John shakes his head, “Something tells me this is part of a bigger plan.” “Well, yes, it is but I’ve been sworn to secrecy. The only thing I can tell you is not to worry about the twins for the evening and you and Marlena are to be downstairs in half an hour.”
“What…or should I say, who is waiting for us downstairs?” “John!” John laughs, “Oh, right, you can’t tell me that.” Maggie laughs too, “And I thought Marlena was the only one who didn’t like surprises.” John slaps himself in the head, “Surprises! I almost forgot.” And before Maggie can ask him what he meant, John practically runs from the room.
John returns to the bedroom and is relieved to see that Marlena is still asleep. He walks into their walk-in closet and starts searching for a particular box. He finally spots it tucked into a corner on the top shelf and pulls it down, along with several other boxes that bounce off his head and hit the floor with a dull thud.
Marlena called out from the bedroom, “John, what are you doing?” John quickly retrieves what he’d been searching for as he calls back, “Nothing.” He pockets the item and hides the box behind another one just in time. Marlena is standing in the doorway looking at the articles on the floor of the closet, “You call that nothing?”
He uprights the two boxes on the floor and scoops up the items scattered around them, “I was ah…trying to organize the closet?” “Looks like you’re trying to *dis*-organize it to me. I thought you were going to check on the twins?” “I did and they’re…maybe you should go see for yourself.” He said quickly, hoping she’d do just that.
Marlena leans up against the door frame and folds her arms across her chest, “Are you trying to get rid of me?” “Me?” Marlena looks around, “Gee, I don’t see anyone else around.” John knew she wasn’t going to leave until he told her what he was up to, and he wasn’t about to do that, “Actually, Doc, there is…not in here, in the nursery.” “You mean like the twins?”
John rolls his eyes in exasperation, so much for surprising her with Maggie’s presence. “Maggie is with them.” Marlena straightens in surprise, “Maggie?” John breaths a sigh of relief as Marlena disappears from view. She calls back, “I heard that.” John chuckles and then peeks out of the closet. Marlena had gone to the nursery.
He steps into the bedroom and pulls the object he’d been looking for out of his pocket and holds it up to the light. The gleaming gold chain with it’s assortment of charms swayed to and fro. John tapped it with his finger and grinned, “Now to make a few additions.”
Page 6 of 12“Maggie, what are you doing here?” Startled, Maggie turns away from the cradles to face Marlena, “Oh Marlena. I wasn’t expecting you.” Marlena laughs, “Well, I do live here.” Maggie laughs too, “That didn’t come out like I meant it to. I thought you were sleeping and wouldn’t see you while I was here. How are you feeling?”
Marlena moves beside her and they turn to look at the sleeping twins. “Rested for the first time in days.” “I stopped by the hospital to visit and Mike told me John had already brought you and the twins home. I actually stopped by to see if you needed any help but Kit told me you and John were both sleeping before he left again.” Marlena glances at her, a twinkle in her eyes, “So you thought you’d come up and take a peek?”
Maggie nods, pulling the light blanket up over Aly, “You don’t mind, do you?” Marlena caresses her son’s head, “Not at all.” “Marlena, I’d like to tell you again how much it means to me that you named your daughter after me. Alice was thrilled too and plans to tell you herself just as soon as she has a moment to visit.” Marlena hugs Maggie, “After everything you’ve done for me all the years we’ve known each other, especially these past few months, I wanted to do something special for you but that isn’t all, I’d also like you to be the twins’ godmother.” Maggie smiles and hugs her friend in return, “Oh, I would love too, Marlena.”
***
At the same time Marlena is talking to Maggie, John decides to go downstairs and see exactly what’s going on. TJ hears footsteps and slams the dining room doors closed without warning to his sisters and stands in front of the doors trying to look nonchalant. The moment John comes in to view, TJ says in a raised voice, “Ah, hi ya, Dad.”
John looks at his son, glances around and then back to his son again, “TJ, why are you shouting and what are you doing here? I thought you were at your grandparents.” “I…ah…I came home to get something I forgot.” “Did you?” TJ nods enthusiastically, “Yea, it was something I really, really needed.”
Seeing his son’s empty hands, John offers, “Maybe I can help you find it.” TJ says quickly, “No!” Then amends it with, “I mean, I already have help.” There is a loud thud from behind the closed doors. John points to the doors, “In there?” TJ nods again and when his father makes a move for the doors, he throws himself against them with his arms outstretched, “You can’t go in there!”
John stops in his tracks, “Why not?” “Well, because it’s…umm….” The door flies open to reveal Sami with Carrie standing behind her. TJ falls on his rear glaring up at his sisters, who look at him in mild disgust. Sami shakes her head, “Some lookout you are.” “It wasn’t *my* fault. You didn’t tell me what to say if mom or dad came down here.”
John helps his son to his feet, “I don’t suppose one of you would mind telling me what’s going on?” Sami sighs, “Since TJ all but spoiled the surprise anyway, you might as well come and see what we’ve been up to.” TJ protests, “*I’m* not the one who opened the doors!” Carrie laughs, “He has a point, Sami.”
John follows the arguing trio into the dining room. He looks over the romantically set table for two, and the “welcome home” and “congratulations” banners gracing two of the walls. He grins from ear to ear, “This is *perfect*!” TJ asks anxiously, “Does that mean you like it, Dad?” Sami nudges him and whispers in an undervoice, “Of course it does.” John tousles his son’s hair, “Yes, it does, son and Sami, don’t be too hard on him. There isn’t anything he could have said that would have kept me out of this room after I heard one of you drop something.”
Carrie starts laughing and TJ smiles in satisfaction. Sami gives them both a “I’ll get you back later” look and then smiles sweetly up at John, “I’m glad you like our surprise but don’t you think you should go get ready and make sure Mom is ready too? Dinner will be on the table in ten minutes.” “Maybe you’d better hold it for a few more minutes. It might take me awhile to pry your mom away from Maggie and the twins.” TJ groans, “She knows Aunt Maggie is here too?”
John laughs, “’fraid so but I promise not to spoil this surprise.” Carrie says as she steers her younger siblings toward the kitchen, “We’ll hold it for another 20 minutes, but any longer than that and it’ll be overcooked.” Sami says over her shoulder, “And we won’t be here when you come back down.” TJ adds, “Bye, Dad. Say hi to Mom for us.” John shakes his head and leaves the dining room, closing the doors behind him.
***
Marlena returns to the bedroom only moments after John but doesn’t seem him. However, there are noises coming from inside the closet. “John, are you in the closet *again*? What are you doing this time?” John pokes his head out, “I’ll be out in just a minute and no peeking.” She shakes her head in exasperation, a note of amusement in her voice, “I’m almost afraid of what I’ll see. You know, this closet thing is becoming a very strange habit of yours.”
John’s head reappears, “No cracks about coming out of a closet either, Doc.” Marlena sighs dramatically, “Take away *all* my fun. So how much longer are you going to be?” The closet door widens and John steps out dressed in a tux. Marlena stares at him and asks blankly, “A tux?”
John turns in a circle before her and then stops and holds out his arms, “So? What do you think?” She looks at him thoughtfully, deciding to play along for the moment, “I think you need to work on your turns but all in all, I’ll give it a six.” John moves in front of the mirror and straightens his tie, “I love a woman with a sense of humor.”
Marlena crosses her arms and taps her foot on the carpet, “John, *why* are you wearing a tux?” He turns to her, “Doc, you’re not dressed!” Marlena glances around the room, “All right, where is it?” “Where is what?” “The video camera.” John frowns, “Video camera?”
“You’re trying for America’s Funniest Home Videos, right? Maybe I’m still in bed dreaming or maybe I’ve stepped into the Twilight Zone.” John walks over, places his hands one her shoulders and grins, “None of the above.” She glares up at him, “Then are you going to tell me why you’re in a tux and why I need to get dressed?”
He shakes his head, “Nope. So, now are you going to get changed or not?” “If you’ll remember, I just gave birth to twins and am not able to get into any of my evening wear. So, Mr. Not-so-Funny Guy, I have nothing to wear.” He releases her and heads for the closet again, “Oh yes you do.”
Marlena is ready to throw something at him and calls out, “Do you know that you’re driving me crazy? She hears John’s laughter and promptly walks over, closes the closet door and turns the lock on it. A few seconds later John knocks on the door and calls out, “Doc!” She leans back against the door and calls back, “Yes, John?”
“You want to unlock the door?” “What door?” “The one you happen to be leaning against.” “Oh, *this* door.” “Not funny, Marlena.” He pauses a moment waiting for a reply. When she doesn’t make one, he pleads, “Come on, Doc. Open the door. It’s getting a little warm in here.” “Must be that *tux* you’re wearing.”
“Okay, you win! Open the door and I’ll tell you everything.” Marlena unlocks the door and pulls it open to find John standing there holding up a lilac colored silk and lace nightgown with a matching robe. He says, “That is, I’ll tell you everything just as soon as you’ve put this on.” Seeing the exasperated look back on her face, he quickly steps into the bedroom before she can slam the closet door closed again. She snatches the gown and robe from him and marches into the bathroom.
Not sure what she will do next, John sits down on the end of the bed and waits for her. She emerges from the bathroom ten minutes later in her changed attire. She stands before him, looking radiant, with her hands on her hips, “Start talking.”
Damn, but she was a difficult woman to try to surprise. Deciding she wasn’t going to be happy with the suggestion that they go downstairs to talk, John sweeps her up into his arms and ignores her protests as he carries her downstairs. He kicks open the dining room doors, carries her inside and sets her on her feet before the candlelit table saying, “Now do you understand why I’m wearing a tux? Why I insisted you change? And why I wouldn’t answer your questions?”
Marlena asks with a hint of laughter in her voice, “Does this mean I have to apologize for locking you in the closet?” He grins, “No, I did deserve it to some degree.” Marlena nods and then sees the banners hanging on the walls. “The children did this?”
John folds his arms around her, “Yes, they wanted to surprise us. Unfortunately, I spoiled it when I came downstairs while you were with Maggie so I had to promise to keep it a secret from you.” He brushes his lips across hers, “Promising not to step outside the house ever again probably would have been an easier one to keep.” “I’m not *that* difficult to surprise.”
He says with a hint of laughter in his voice, “Doc, maybe we’d better just sit down and enjoy what the kids have cooked up.” “John, I’m *not* that difficult to surprise,” Marlena repeats as she moves to the table. John pulls a chair out for her, “Are you trying to convince me or yourself of that?” Marlena settles into it, “You’re right, maybe we’d better just enjoy what the kids have cooked up.” John grins, then leans over and kisses her before moving to the other side of the small, cozy table.
Marlena looks at the food spread out on the table, “Oh, it all looks and smells delicious.” “Yes, it does but you can’t eat yet.” She stares at him, “What do you mean I can’t eat yet? I thought we just agreed…” “Forget that, I have something for you first.”
She asks with exaggeration, “A *surprise*, John? For me? Don’t tell me, you’re going to tell me I have Maggie upstairs to watch the twins while we enjoy this *surprise* dinner.” “You’re not going to get over this any time soon, are you, Doc?” She smiles sweetly and folds her hands on the table, an expectant look on her face. “Okay, big fella, hit me with your best shot.”
John bites his lip to quell his laughter and reaches in his pocket, pulling out a long slender package. He holds it out to her. Marlena’s eyes widen in surprise and she takes it from him. He says tenderly, “Open it, Marlena.” She unwraps the package. It’s a jewelers’ box. Inside is the charm bracelet John had given her several years ago for Christmas. She gasps softly and takes it out of the box, “Oh, John! Where did you find it? I thought I’d lost it in the move.” “I came across it shortly after we found out you were carrying twins. I was going to have a few more charms added to it for the rest of the children but it’s a little crowded already.” He reaches into his pocket and pulls out another package, this one smaller and obviously a ring box, “So I thought I’d get you something else to go with it. You have to close your eyes and hold out your right hand for this one.” Marlena does exactly as he asks. John takes the ring out of the box, takes her hand in his and slides the ring on her finger. “You can open your eyes now, Marlena.” She does and can’t take her eyes off the ring. Three rings, each a gold band set with three stones with a diagonal band of gold holding the three rings together. John explains as he points to the three jeweled bands, “Each band represents the children’s birthdays. Let’s see, one opal in each band is for Eric, Sami and Belle. The sapphire for TJ, emerald for Brady, aquamarine for Carrie, and the amethysts for Aly and Connor. Oh, and because we couldn’t leave Will out, there’s a topaz for him. The gold band that joins them all together is for us and our love that binds *all* of us together.”
Marlena brushes at the tears on her cheeks with her free hand, “It’s beautiful and wonderful and so…perfect and I love you for finding a way to surprise me after all. Now I feel terrible about locking you in the closet.” John raises her hand to his lips and plants a warm kiss there, “Doc, you can lock me in the closet any time as long as you look at me like that for the rest of our lives.”
Page 7 of 12Roman paces his jail cell like a caged tiger. Abe had told him that John and Marlena would be visiting later in the morning. At first he’d felt relief but as the morning wore on and he’d had time to dwell on it, a headache started to form in his temples. It grew worse and thoughts of their pending arrival made him feel edgy and restless.
Hearing footsteps approaching his jail cell, Roman stops his pacing and takes several deep breaths to calm himself. In his first brief glimpse of the tall dark haired guard, his mind is filled with a picture of John Black. The guard arrives in front of the cell door and unlocks it, then motions for the prisoner to step out of his cell. Roman takes a few more deep breaths and clenches and unclenches his fists, then steps out of the cell. Before the guard knows what’s happening, Roman attacks him and grabs his gun. The guard manages to get one shout for help out before he is knocked unconscious with the butt of the gun. Roman doesn’t have time to do anything else as Abe and several uniformed officers, guns drawn, confront him. Abe says calmly, “Roman, why don’t you give me the gun now before someone gets hurt.”
Roman looks down at the gun and then up at Abe and the other officers, a puzzled expression on his face, “This isn’t my gun, Abe.” Abe takes a tentative step forward and holds out his hand, “I know it isn’t, Roman. Why don’t you let me return it to its rightful owner?”
Roman places the gun in Abe’s hand, “Tell him to take better care of his weapon. Otherwise he could earn a suspension.” Abe waves the other officers back and eyes his old friend in concern, “Roman, do you know why we’re here?” Roman lifts his fingers to his temples and rubs at them, “I’m not sure. Was I coming down here to question someone? No…I was…” He lowers his hands and looks at the cell, “That’s right, I’ve been arrested for attempted murder and the guard arrived to…” Roman looks down to see the fallen guard slowly sit up, then looks back over at Abe, “What’s going on here, Abe?” Abe hands the weapon over to another officer and takes Roman’s arm and directs him back into his cell, “Let’s talk in here while they help him to the infirmary.” The cell door closes behind them and one uniformed officer stands guard within plain sight. Roman sinks down onto the edge of the bunk while
Abe watches him carefully, asking “Roman, are you all right?” Roman nods, wincing slightly, “Other than a headache, yea, I’m fine, Abe. Are John and Marlena here yet?” Abe nodded, “Yes, but I’m not so sure you’re up to seeing them right now.” Roman frowns, “Is there some reason you’re putting this off, Abe? I need to see Marlena.” “What about John?” Abe asks deliberately. Roman’s voice hardens slightly, “Yea, him too.” Abe tries to add a lightness to his tone, “I’ll tell you what, Roman. Let me go up and talk to them first and then I’ll have them bring you up.” Roman nods, “Sure, Abe.”
***
Marlena and John exchange frowning glances as Abe finishes filling them in on Roman’s strange behavior. Abe finishes with, “What do you think is wrong with him, Marlena?” “I’m not sure, Abe. It’s possible he could still be affected by whatever drugs Stefano used on him. Has he had a complete physical examination yet?” Abe nods, “Yesterday and the doctor was ready to give him a clean bill of health pending the test results. As far as I know, they haven’t come back in yet.” “Abraham, do you have any idea what might have set him off?”
Abe shakes his head, “None. He seemed very relieved earlier this morning when I told him the two of you were coming to visit and he was fine until the guard went down to get him.”
John takes Marlena’s hand in his, “Doc, maybe we should hold off seeing him until the test results come in. If he’s still being affected by the drugs, his behavior may remain erratic until they wear off or they can give him something to counter act them. I’m not going to risk your getting hurt by his actions.” “I agree with, John, Marlena. I’ve never seen Roman like this before and he’s completely unpredictable and disoriented.” Marlena looks from one to the other of them, “Have the two of you forgotten that I’m the one person who knows Roman better than anyone else *and* I’m a psychiatrist and that makes me the most qualified to judge whether or not he’s a danger to me or anyone else, for that matter?”
John is about to argue with her, “Marlena, he knocked a guard unconscious. You don’t know…” “No, John, you’re not going to talk me out of it.” Her glance turns to Abe, “I’ll see him on the other side of a jail cell if I have to, but I want to see him – alone.” Abe and John both protest quite vocally but Marlena doesn’t change her mind. In the end, they agree to let her see Roman through the jail cell while the two of them remain close by.
***
Roman looks up at the sound of light footsteps. He *knew* those footsteps. He leaps to his feet and rushes over to the bars just as Marlena comes into view. “Doc” he breathes. “Hello, Roman.” Roman holds out his hand through the bars to her and without hesitation, ignoring the warning noises around the corner, she slips her hand into his, “You look beautiful, content and happy, Marlena. Just the way I always wanted you to look.”
Marlena smiles even as a tear trickles down her cheek, “I am, Roman. I wish…” He interrupts her, “You don’t have to say it, I know what you wish for me, Doc. The main reason I came back to Salem was to tell you that I’d put the past behind me, that I wanted us to be friends again and that I was finally moving on with my life.” Seeing the hopeful look in her eyes, “No, I haven’t found anyone else yet. I don’t know if I ever will, you’re going to be a pretty tough act to follow, but that doesn’t mean I can’t be happy.” “I do want that for you, Roman, more than anything.”
He reaches up and tenderly brushes the tear from her cheek, “Hey, no tears, okay?” Marlena nods. Roman sighs, “Doc, I didn’t shoot John. I wouldn’t do anything to hurt you. You believe that, don’t you?” “I believe you and John and I will do everything we can to help clear you.” Roman glances quickly to the right, “Didn’t he come here with you? I wanted to talk to him too.” “Yes, he’s here. I just wanted to see you alone, first.” Roman withdraws from her, pulling his hands back inside the cell and grasping the bars. “Maybe that wasn’t such a good idea, Marlena.”
Marlena asks calmly, “Because of what happened earlier?” Roman leans his head against the bars and rubs it back and forth. His grip tightens on the bars and he breaks out in a cold sweat. Marlena watches him in concern and starts to say, “Roman, I…” John and Abe step into view at that momen and John immediately begins to pull Marlena back. The moment Roman sees him, he goes crazy. He tries to reach through the bars and snarls, “I might not have succeeded before but next time I’m going to kill you, you bastard.” Seeing the stunned looks on all three faces, Roman laughs harshly, “Yes, I *was* the one standing outside the pub that night. I’m the one who pulled the trigger. I’m just sorry I didn’t end your miserable life, John Black. You took *everything*…everything that ever mattered to me…and you’re going to pay….”
Marlena sank back into John’s arms and he quietly led her away with Roman’s vicious shouts echoing in their ears. He takes her to Abe’s office and makes her sit down while he pours her a glass of water. She takes the glass in trembling hands and sips lightly at it. Abe joins them a moment later. John glances quickly at him, Abe shakes his head. Before any of them gets a chance to speak, a uniformed officer enters with an envelope, “Roman Brady’s test results, sir.”
Abe thanks him and waits until he leaves, closing the door behind him, before he opens the envelope and silently looks over its contents. Marlena hands the glass back to John and asks quietly, “What do they say, Abe?” Abe hands them over to her. Marlena reads through them, flipping back and forth between pages, then shakes her head, “This is impossible.” John places a comforting hand on her shoulder, “What is it, Marlena?” She looks up at him, “According to these, there is absolutely no trace of any kind of drug having been in his system. The doctor states that he’s completely normal and has given him a clean bill of health.” She hands the results to John, “Roman may be healthy but his actions are not…normal.”
John hands the file back to Abe after glancing through it, “Maybe we should have the tests run again.” Abe frowns and taps the file, “You saw for yourself that we used the best labs available here and at the ISA and they both confirm each others findings.” John concedes, “You’re right, of course. I guess I was just grasping at straws. You do realize that the ISA is going to come here after him. He’s a loose canon they can’t afford to let out of their sight.” Marlena looks at both of them a little frantically, “We can’t let them take him.” John gives her shoulder a reassuring squeeze, “We won’t let them take him, sweetheart. I don’t think it will be in Roman’s best interest and we won’t learn the truth if they do take him.” Abe nods, then asks, “Marlena, what else could be causing Roman’s bizarre behavior if it isn’t drugs?” She says bitterly, “Stefano has been known to employ other methods besides drugs. It’s quite possible Roman’s behavior could be psychological.”
John suggests, “What if we move him to a facility where he can be evaluated?” Abe shakes his head, “I’m not sure that’s such a good idea considering he’s still under arrest. A judge would want him moved to a prison sanitarium. That would defeat our purposes.” John meets Marlena’s glance, “Doc, what if we talked to the judge? Do you think we could convince him to have Roman placed in a private institution where he could be evaluated and treated?” Marlena sighs sadly, “We could try, John but I’m not sure, at this point, if a judge will even listen to us. If Roman hadn’t gotten violent we might have had a chance.” He caresses her cheek with his fingers, “We’ll try anyway.”
Marlena manages a small smile and nods. John sees the sudden weariness mingled with her sadness, “I think it’s time we got you home to rest, honey.” “Before we go, there’s something I need to do.” She pulls a prescription pad out of her purse and writes out a prescription for Roman and hands it to Abe, explaining, “I noticed that his violent episode seemed to be preceded by a headache. This will help with his headaches and should, hopefully, keep him calm.”
John assists Marlena to rise as he says, “In the meantime, we’ll contact Mickey and see what can be done to convince the judge.” Abe nods, “And I think it’s best if the two of you don’t try to visit Roman again for awhile. I’ll keep you both posted on how he’s doing.”
***
Mickey, sitting across the living room from John and Marlena, looks at the pair and says gravely, “Unless we can get Roman evaluated before I present this to the judge, we don’t stand a chance.” Marlena leans forward, “I could evaluate him, Mickey.” Mickey shakes his head, “Marlena, given what happened this morning it would be too risky for you.” John gives Marlena’s hand a squeeze, “He’s right, Doc. But not in just the risk to you, you also risk not being able to help Roman. You know how his actions affected you today.”
Marlena protests, “He took me by surprise and I’m still not fully recovered from the twins birth, that’s all.” Mickey speaks up again, “There’s another reason why you can’t do the evaluation, Marlena and you know it. The judge is going to want a psychiatrist outside the situation to do the evaluation and carry on whatever treatment is deemed necessary. I’d like to recommend Laura.” “What do you say, Doc?”
Marlena replies with a hint of frustration in her voice, “It doesn’t look like I have much choice and if it has to be someone besides myself, I’d like it to be Laura.” Mickey rises to his feet, “I’ll go over and talk to her now then. The sooner we get moving on this, the sooner we can convince the judge to have Roman moved to a private institution.” They thank Mickey and John escorts him to the front door. Marlena moves to the French doors and looks out at the moonlit gardens. She feels John’s presence just before his arms circle her shoulders, his hands crossing in front of her. She leans her head back against him, and they lose themselves in the quiet moment together.
Page 8 of 12Marlena stands before a mirror putting on her earrings. A smile lifts her lips as she sees John’s reflection in the mirror approaching her from behind. He wraps his arms around her waist and plants a kiss on the curve of her neck, “Good morning, beautiful.” Marlena turns in his arms, “Good morning, yourself, handsome. Have you been in the nursery keeping the twins awake?” John feigns innocence, “Me?” “Yes, *you*!” John grins and rubs his hands lightly along the material covering her back, “Actually, I was in the nursery watching Belle and Brady keeping the twins awake. Brady and Belle were loudly arguing over which lullaby to sing them to sleep. I don’t think they twins were impressed by the lung capacity of their elder siblings because they let off a wail to raise the roof. Belle and Brady ran from the room mumbling something about noisy babies not being much fun.”
Marlena starts to pull away from him, “Maybe I should go check…” John pulls her back into his arms, “They’re sound asleep and the nanny is keeping Belle, Brady and Will occupied. TJ is with Kit studying now that my brother is tutoring him again, Sami went to the University to pick up her new class schedule, Bo and Hope left for the cop shop and *you* Mrs. Black, have a date with your husband to interview secretaries for the detective agency. Not to mention all that paperwork we have to sort through that’s been piling up the past few weeks.” Marlena laughs, “I told you not to open the detective agency before we hired a permanent secretary.” John taps her nose lightly with his finger, “How was I to know that our first secretary wouldn’t last a week? She reminds him as she straightens his tie that really didn’t need straightening, “You can’t blame her, John. She didn’t know her husband would be transferred out of state and she *did* set up that…filing system.”
John snorts, “That filing system from hell, you mean. Whoever heard of setting up income and expense files as ‘here today’ and ‘gone tomorrow?’ And it took me a week to find the agency license. She’d put it under ‘Risk and Rescue Permit.” Marlena laughs lightly, “Okay, okay, so she had a *unique* filing system…but it all made sense in an odd sort of way.” John glances at the clock and threatens playfully, “If we don’t get there soon, Doc, *you’re* going to be the one sorting through that *unique* filing system. We’re running late and our prospects may leave before we get there.” With that threat hanging over her head, Marlena slips from his arms and leads the way out of their bedroom.
***
Eric watches his mother and John’s car pull out of the driveway. Once they are safely around the curve and out of sight, he pulls in behind Christopher’s car and sneaks into the house unseen. He goes directly up to his bedroom and slowly sits down on the bed in his wrinkled, torn clothes. He gingerly touches his fingers to his bruised, swollen cheek and cut lip. With a moan of pain, he holds his ribs with one arm as he reaches over and pulls out the drawer in his nightstand.
He takes out the letter he’d written to John months ago. He grabs a pen and writes out the detective agency address on the envelope. He fishes a stamp out of the nightstand drawer and affixes it on the corner. Then he rises from the bed and starts tossing clothes into a suitcase. He had to get away before Savannah found out he’d snuck back into Salem. Maybe if he went into hiding, she wouldn’t try to hurt his family and that would give John time to find his letter. He hated leaving like this but he didn’t know what else to do. He couldn’t face his mother, not after what he’d been up to and he couldn’t stay because he refused to do any more of his Savannah’s bidding. Pocketing the letter and picking up his suitcase.
Eric moves quietly to the door. He opens it and peers out carefully to make sure no one was in sight. Seeing the coast is clear, he slips out and makes it downstairs before a voice stops him, “Eric, where are you going?” Eric stops in his tracks and sighs. He turns around to face his younger brother. TJ gasps when he sees Eric’s bruised and swollen face. Eric sets down his suitcase, wincing, and walks over placing his hands on TJ’s shoulders, “TJ, you have to forget that you saw me here today. You can’t tell a soul.” “But I did see you, Eric and you look awful. What happened?” “I don’t have time to explain. Just promise me you won’t tell anyone I was here.” TJ shakes his head, “Not unless you tell me. I want to help.”
Eric tousles TJ’s dark curls and a brief smile touches his lips, “You have the courage of a lion, TJ but you can’t help me in this and it’s better that you don’t know anything.” “Are you in trouble?” “Something like that and I have to go away for awhile. So promise me.” TJ reluctantly agrees, “I promise but you will come back, won’t you?” Eric nods, “That’s my promise.” Eric turns away, picks up his suitcase and moves across the foyer and out the door. TJ follows and when he sees Eric move to open the trunk of his car, slips into the backseat unseen. Kit steps out of the library a short time later, wondering what had been keeping TJ so long. The boy had gone up to his room to get a book and hadn’t returned. He goes in search of his nephew.
***
Before they can start interviewing, the office phone rings. Marlena answers it. “B & E Detective Agency” “Marlena, it’s Laura. I missed catching you at home and wanted to give you an update on Roman before I left the hospital to spend the day with Jennifer and Abby.” “Sure, Laura, hold on a moment.” Marlena puts her hand over the receiver and looks at John, “I’m afraid you’ll have to start the interviews without me.”
John nods in understanding, then glances toward the reception room and then back at her, giving her a look of mock fright. Marlena shakes her head with a laugh as John moves toward the reception room like a man going to the gallows. Marlena removes her hand from the receiver, “Sorry for keeping you waiting. How is he?”
Laura’s voice is reassuring, “He’s doing much better. Fortunately, he hasn’t had any more violent episodes since he was first brought here three weeks ago. The judge sent someone from the court over this morning to check on his progress. I guess he wanted to make sure he didn’t have any reason to regret his decision to place Roman in a private institution. He called me afterwards and assured me that he didn’t.” “That’s a relief. Are you still medicating him?” “Yes, but I have decreased the dosage and he’s handling it well. He asked about you and the children and even managed to talk about John without getting upset.” “Laura, has he given you any clue as to what happened to him?” “I’m afraid not. He still doesn’t remember much. He is worried about what Stefano might do though. I tried to tell him that Stefano seems to have vanished for the time being, but that didn’t reassure him.” “It hasn’t reassured any of us, Laura. Stefano is usually at his most dangerous when he’s quiet. John thinks he’s preparing another plan of attack. I just hope Roman doesn’t try to do anything foolish, like try to escape and go after Stefano. He needs to stay put and heal.” “I don’t think he’ll be going anywhere, Marlena. The judge isn’t ready to release Roman’s guards yet, even though the DA agreed to drop the charges.” “When do you think I’ll be able to see Roman again?” Laura is silent a moment, then replies, “I don’t recommend it for awhile yet. Since today was the first day he didn’t react adversely to any mention of John, I don’t think we should push our luck by putting any reminders in his way.” “Of course, you’re right. I guess I was just hoping that he’d made enough of an improvement for me to visit. You will tell him I said hello and that I’m thinking about him, won’t you?” “I will and in the meantime, don’t worry. Roman trusts me and we’re getting along very well.” “Thanks, Laura.”
Laura says lightly, “You don’t need to thank me, Marlena. I’m just returning a favor you did for me a long time ago when you helped Mickey. None of us would have gotten through that if it wasn’t for you. I just hope I can do the same for Roman.” “But I do need to thank you, Laura. It means a lot to all of us that you’re helping Roman and I know you’ll be able to get him past this so he can return to his family and a normal life. And if there is anything I can do, let me know.” “I will and I’ll call you again in a few days.” Marlena hangs up the phone and watches as John ushers the second prospect out of his office. He looks over at her and rolls his eyes. She joins him and together, they interview the rest of the waiting women.
***
John sits on the edge of the desk, “Sorry, Doc, I thought for sure we’d find a secretary in that bunch.” Marlena looks up from the desk stacked with untidy piles of mail and folders, “I’m afraid my mind was on other things anyway.” “Laura’s phone call?” Marlena nods. “Is Roman okay?” “Yes, he’s doing much better but Laura said he’s still not ready for visitors. The judge sent over someone from the court this morning to check on Roman’s progress. He’s satisfied that he’s made the right decision to place Roman there but he isn’t ready to call off the guards.”
John takes her hand in his, “Honey, you know the guards are there for his protection as much as anyone else’s. The judge understood our fears for Roman when it comes to Stefano.” “I know but I hate having the specter of Stefano still looming over all of us. I just want him caught and put away forever.” He gives her hand a reassuring squeeze, “He will be, Doc and then we’ll all be free of him and we won’t have to worry about Roman, the children or any of the family being in danger again.” She smiles up at him, “You mean we can lead *normal* lives?”
John laughs, “Well, if you consider *normal* keeping up with eight children and one grandchild, making love every day for the rest of your life, running a detective agency, making love every day for the rest of your life, keeping up with your patients at the hospital, making love…” Marlena shakes her head, amusement in her voice, “Funny, that sounds incredibly like what we already have with the exception of one or two things.” He grins, “You mean the every other sentence part?” She nods and reminds him, “*That* won’t return to normal for another three weeks.” “Don’t I know it but that doesn’t mean I can’t *think* about making love to you every day for the rest of our lives, or dream about it, or fantasize…”
Marlena reaches for his tie and starts to pull him toward her, their lips mere inches apart when the phone rings. John’s grin widens as he reaches for the phone, “Hold that thought, Doc.” He picks up the phone, “B & E Detective Agency.” “John, it’s Kit. I think TJ is missing.” John’s grin fades instantly, “Missing? What do you mean he’s missing?” Marlena’s face drains of color as she places a hand on John’s knee and leans forward in concern. Kit explains, “He left the library to go up to his room to get a book and when he’d been gone longer than I expected, I went looking for him. I’ve searched the entire house and am having the grounds searched now. John, you know I wouldn’t have called you if I didn’t have a bad feeling about this.” “We’ll be right there.” He hangs up the phone. “What is it, John? Who’s missing?” John takes both her hands in his, “That was Kit, he thinks TJ is missing.”
Marlena’s voice drops to a horrified whisper, “No!” John pulls her to her feet and picks up her purse, placing it in her hands, “Don’t jump to conclusions, honey. I’m sure TJ is just playing another game of hide and seek with Belle and Brady and we’ll find him safe and sound when we get home.” As John guides her toward the door, she asks with an edge of panic in her voice, “What if he isn’t, John? What if Stefano has finally made his move?” John’s voice is as cold as winter, “Then he’s a dead man.”
***
By the time they arrive home, the news isn’t good. TJ is no where to be found and after questioning the nanny, they know that TJ isn’t playing a game with his siblings. John is trying to calm and comfort Marlena, when Abe arrives with more bad news. Roman had escaped from the institution after Laura saw him earlier this morning.
Marlena looks from Abe to John, “But I just talked to Laura this morning and she said Roman was doing well.” Abe sighs, “I’m sure he’s convinced her of that, Marlena. He waited until after she left for the hospital before he made his escape.” Marlena pales, her voice appalled, “You think he came here, don’t you? You think he’s responsible for TJ’s disappearance.” Abe doesn’t get a chance to answer as one of the guards interrupts them. He produces a scrap of material found down by the lake and Abe recognized it immediately. Abe holds up the scrap, safely ensconced in an evidence bag, answering Marlena’s question, “I didn’t want to believe it but according to the description I was given, Roman was wearing a shirt made out of this material just before he escaped.” Marlena’s grip tightens on John’s arm, “He didn’t do it, John. He wouldn’t take TJ to get back at you.”
John’s gives her a reassuring hug, “I don’t think he did either, Doc. Roman wouldn’t hurt any of the children.” He points to the scrap of material, “That’s circumstantial, Abe, and you know it.” Abe tucks the evidence bag in his pocket, “Too circumstantial for me, John. I’m sorry, Marlena but until further evidence says otherwise, Roman is my number one suspect.” He looks at both of them and says in parting, “Maybe the two of you should stop thinking of him as the Roman he was and start remembering that he nearly killed you, John and has threatened on numerous occasions to do so again. In his present state of mind, Roman is capable of anything and we’d better not underestimate him.”
After Abe leaves, Marlena turns in John’s arms and looks up at him, “I want to look for TJ.” He reaches up and caresses her cheek, “I know you do, honey but we can’t just head out of here without an idea of where to look. Why don’t you call Laura and see if she can shed any light on where Roman might have gone and I’ll make a few phone calls of my own. Okay?” She nods, slips from his arms and starts to leave the room to call Laura. John’s voice stops her at the doorway, “We’re going to find him, Marlena.” She nods again without looking back and disappears through the doorway. John turns to Kit, “Tell me everything again.”
Page 9 of 12Eric reaches the outskirts of Salem and sees a figure ahead standing on the side of the road hitchhiking. There is something very familiar about that figure and as he draws closer, he knows why – it’s his father. He slows the car down.
Crouched down on the floor of the backseat, TJ holds his breath. He didn’t know why his brother was slowing down but he was afraid he’d guessed he had a stowaway and they’d returned home. He didn’t dare raise his head and peek out a window. When the car pulled to a stop and he heard Eric say “Dad!” in shocked tones and then an unfamiliar voice reply, TJ knew immediately who that voice belonged to – Roman Brady, the man who tried to murder his father. His worry about being taken home is now overshadowed by the fear of the man who was getting into the car. What would *he* do if he found John Black’s son in the car?
Eric pulls the car back onto the road and shoots a glance at his father, “I thought you were suppose to be in the sanitarium?” Roman’s gaze takes in his son’s face, “At this moment, I think discussing what happened to you is more important than discussing where I should be.”
A closed expression settles on Eric’s face and his hands tighten on the steering wheel, “I don’t want to discuss it.” Roman sighs. “With me or in general?” Eric doesn’t take his eyes off the road, “In general.” “Okay, then will you at least tell me where you’re headed?”
Eric ignores the question and asks one of his own, “Did you break out of the sanitarium to go after John again?” Roman isn’t surprised by the question, not after everything that had happened but it hurt him all the same to know Eric believed that and covered by saying lightly, “I think I’m headed in the wrong direction for that, Eric.” Eric shoots a suspicious glance at his father, “And if I hadn’t been the first one to come along?” “I’d still be headed out of Salem,” Roman replies, his tone finally convincing his son.
Eric relaxes visibly and then says apologetically, “I’m sorry, Dad, it’s just that…” “You don’t have to explain, son. I’m sure that’s what everyone thinks right now and I can’t blame them. I did try to kill John and now I’m on the loose.” A sudden thought strikes Eric and he looks at his father in horror, “You broke out to go after Stefano, didn’t you?”
Roman dons the same closed expression his son had been wearing earlier and doesn’t reply. Eric continues, “I can tell by your expression and the fact that you won’t answer me that’s exactly why you broke out. You can’t go after him by yourself, Dad. It’s too dangerous.” Roman indicates his son’s face, “Something tells me you’ve been running with a dangerous crowd yourself.” Eric clamps his jaw shut and refuses to reply.
It looks like they were both going to stick to their Brady stubbornness and dance around each other’s questions. Father and son fell into an uneasy silence and are startled by the unexpected sound of a sneeze coming from the back seat. Having seen TJ slip into Eric’s car, Roman had been waiting for the stowaway to give himself away. He turns slightly and reaches into the back seat, his hand closing around an arm as Eric pulls the car off the road. A struggling TJ tries to pull away from Roman’s firm grip without success as Roman pulls him up level with the back of the seat.
“TJ, what in the hell are you doing in my car?” Eric yells without thinking. TJ, his eyes round with fear looks from his angry brother to the man holding him in his grasp. “I…I…” He swallows painfully and then falls silent. Roman loosens his grip on TJ and tries to reassure him with a smile, “No one here is going to hurt you, son.” “That’s what you think. I’m going to…” Eric starts to say but is silenced by a glance from his father.
Roman turns his attention back to TJ, “Do your mother and father know where you are?” TJ shakes his head no, trying to convey his apologies to his older brother with his eyes but Eric won’t look at him. TJ didn’t know Eric was feeling very guilty at that moment. He should have known his brother would pull something like this and now his life was in danger. Roman glances between the two boys. He could see the bond between them and knew that John’s son would stick by his older brother no matter what and despite Eric’s anger, he could see he was very protective of the boy. It was also his guess that Eric was in trouble and a misguided TJ was along to help but the boy’s presence had somehow made things worse. He sighs, “Eric, he has to be returned to your mother and John.”
Both boys cried out “No!” in unison. Roman’s voice hardens, “I don’t think the two of you understood me, that wasn’t a question that required an answer. It was an order.” TJ finally finds the courage to speak up, “I’m not leaving Eric, he needs me.” Eric admits reluctantly, “I can’t go back.”
Roman reaches over, pulls the keys from the ignition then sits back and folds his arms across his chest. “Then it looks like the three of us will sit here until I get an explanation.” Eric and TJ’s eyes lock and the same thought runs through their heads, “How are we going to get out of this one?”
***
“Sir, they’ve pulled off the road.” The limo driver informs his boss.
“What are they doing?”
“They appear to be doing nothing, just sitting there.”
“Call the men and tell them to make their move now.”
***
John watches as Marlena moves to the windows and looks out for the fourth time in the last five minutes as the officers Abe had sent over, quietly finish setting up the equipment to monitor phone calls. They still didn’t have a clue where TJ disappeared to and Laura hadn’t been able to shed any light on the matter nor had Abe gotten any further in his investigation. As the hours had dragged out, Marlena had grown more afraid, more restless and nothing her husband had said had reassured her. She knew it was useless to keep watching the front drive for any sign of her son but she had to do something – anything to try to keep her fears at bay. She reaches up and impatiently wipes away the single tear sliding down her cheek as anger begins to blossom within her.
John knew the moment her fears turned to anger, her spine stiffened and her hands molded themselves into tight fists. He moves to her side, places his hands on her shoulders and turns her to face him, “They’re going to find him.” Marlena shakes her head, “No, *we’re* going to find him.” “Marlena, you know we have to stay here in case…” Marlena pulls away from him, her voice dripping with sarcasm as she cuts him off, “In case Stefano calls to taunt us? I don’t *think* so. I’m not willing to give that bastard the satisfaction.”
“Doc, if Stefano is behind this…” “*If*? Does that mean you starting to believe Abe’s theory?” John tries to reach for her again but Marlena sidesteps him, “No, John, I’m not going to let you placate me this time. I want to know what you’re really thinking. Do you believe Roman kidnapped our son?”
John didn’t want to believe it. Despite what had happened between Roman and himself, he couldn’t believe the man was capable of harming one of the children but they didn’t have any proof that Stefano was involved. They did have a small shred of proof that Roman might be but he still wanted to believe it was circumstantial. The two officers, having completed their work, look at each other in dismay at the signs of an argument brewing and quietly slip from the room.
He shakes his head but it’s too late, his pause had spoke volumes and Marlena read the flicker of doubt in his eyes. She turns from him. John starts to reach out to her but his hand falls by his side, fearing her rejection again. Instead, he says quietly, “Marlena, I’m just as worried and as upset as you are and I’m trying not to think the worst and thinking that Stefano has TJ again *is* the worst.” Marlena rounds on him, “So it’s easier to blame Roman, is that it?” John starts to protest but the words never reach his lips as he realizes Marlena is right. Once again, his silence condemns him.
Marlena’s voice is even with determination, “If you’re not going to go look for our son than I will.” She starts to walk past him. John grabs her arm, “Don’t be a fool, Marlena. If Stefano is behind this, you’ll be doing exactly what he’s expecting us to do – walk into another one of his traps.” Marlena’s expression is wintry as she glances down at his hand on her arm, “Let go of me, John.” Rather than releasing her, John captures her other arm. “You’re not going off on your own to look for TJ and *we’re* not going anywhere until we clear the air about Roman.”
Marlena pulls away from him, “Oh, I think you’ve made *yourself* quite clear, now it’s my turn. *Roman* would not kidnap my son, he wouldn’t put me through that. You of all people should know that Roman is not capable of what you’re suggesting.”
“That’s right, Doc, I should know that, just like I should have known *Roman* would never hurt you by trying to kill me. But he did, didn’t he? Not once, but twice. Or have you conveniently forgotten that?”
“You mean like you murdered Tony? When all the evidence pointed against you and everyone else believe you were guilty, I knew you were innocent because I know *you*. Just like I *know* Roman.”
“No, you *knew* Roman. He’s not the same man that left here three years ago. If he was, I wouldn’t have any reason to suspect him nor would he have ended up in a sanitarium under Laura’s treatment.”
“I don’t believe this! You seem to have forgotten just what Stefano is capable of doing to a person, how he can manipulate them or circumstances. Should we just skip over the fact that he brainwashed you into thinking you were my husband and stole your life from you? Should I have believed that brainwashing turned you into the hired assassin the ISA claimed you were? If I had, *we* wouldn’t even be having this conversation.”
John’s jaw clenched in anger, “I haven’t forgotten a damn thing Stefano has done. Not to you, not to Roman, not to me. But there is something *you* are forgetting. Not once have I ever tried to hurt you by attempting to kill or harm someone you love no matter what Stefano did to me. You can’t deny that Roman shot me any more than I can deny it’s *possible* he had something to do with our son’s disappearance.”
“Funny, I seem to recall standing in a Mexican hut when you had a gun trained on us. I also…”
John cuts her off, “And *I* seem to recall that we believed *I* was Roman Brady at the time and I was defending the woman I loved and believed was my *wife*.”
“By holding a gun on me? I guess you can’t judge by appearances alone.”
John’s fists clench in frustration, “You were standing next to the man I thought was an imposter!”
Marlena places her hands on her hips. “And *who* was I standing next to when we walked out of the pub?” She sighs. “The point being, John, *anything* is possible but is it likely and do I believe it? No! And *nothing* you say will convince me otherwise.”
“Let me get this straight. Are you saying you don’t believe Roman intended to kill me when he pulled that trigger? That you didn’t believe I was dead when Mike and Kit told you I was? That you didn’t mourn for me?”
“Oh, I believe it all right. Just like I believed Roman had been killed by Stefano before. Just as you mourned me when you believed I was dead. All of that was manufactured by *Stefano* and I believe he’s behind all of this now.” She pauses to take a breath, then continues, “As far as I’m concerned, this discussion is over. The *only* thing that matters right now is finding TJ. Are you going to help me or do I have to do it alone?”
“Finally, something we agree on – finding our son, but this discussion isn’t over, Doc. Far from it, because I don’t want this hanging between us for the rest our lives. And if you think I’m going to let you go out there on your own, you’re mistaken and we’re, also, not going to go out there without some kind of plan. The last thing I’m going to do is give Stefano the upper hand.”
“Well, I’m glad you finally see things my way,” she smiles sweetly. “And I don’t want to give *Stefano* the upper hand either. Let’s get to work on that plan.”
Page 10 of 12Roman doesn’t have time to react when the car doors are unexpectedly snatched open and he and the boys are pulled from the car. He recognizes the men instantly and starts to protest when the boys are immediately led towards a waiting sedan but the words “the boss is waiting for you” silences him. All he can do is watch helplessly as the boys are bundled into the car and driven away. A muscle in Roman’s cheek twitches as he heads for the black limo parked 300 yards behind Eric’s car.
***
Marlena looks up from the map she and John had been studying for the past ten minutes and frowns, “John, this isn’t getting us any where.”
John circles an area on the map and then taps it with the pen, “You’re wrong, Doc. Judging by what we know, I’ve been able to narrow down the search area.”
“And just *what* is it we’re suppose to know?”
John ticks off each point on his fingers, “One, we know the general area where Roman was found wandering which means if we are dealing with Stefano, it’s safe to assume he’s in that general area; Two, we can pretty much guess which path Roman took from the sanitarium to get here and I think it’s also safe to assume he wouldn’t go back to either place because it would be the first place we’d look; Three….”
Marlena holds up her hand, “Wait a minute.” She points at the circled area on the map, “Correct me if I’m mistaken but isn’t the area you have circled, the area you believe Roman is headed for?”
“Yes, it is.”
“What about Stefano?”
“Doc…”
She taps on the map with her finger an edge of sarcasm back in her voice, “Maybe you’d better widen your area of search, John. We wouldn’t want Roman to pull a fast one and go where you don’t think he’ll go.”
“All right, all right, you have a point but there is something else you haven’t considered.”
“What’s that?”
“Stefano could already be on Roman’s trail.”
Marlena glares at him, “I don’t need to consider it because if I did, then I’d buy into your theory that Roman has TJ.”
John tosses his pen down on the table, “Look, Marlena, if we’re going to find TJ, we have to consider *every* possibility based on the information we have and we, also, have to put our *feelings* aside….”
“You can’t expect me to put my *feelings* aside. We’re talking about *our* son here and we’re also talking about a man we both know, even if you won’t admit it, who wouldn’t hurt my son, let alone an 8 year old child. We’re also talking about another man we know to be a monster and one who would do *anything* to cause us more heartache and grief. Not to mention that he kept TJ from us all those years. Now given *that* information, I’d think even you would be convinced that Stefano is the person we should be concentrating on.”
“Alright, you win.”
Marlena looks at him in surprise, “I do?”
A brief grin touches John’s lips, “You always do.”
“Does that mean I’ve convinced you?”
John nods, “You’ve convinced me to look for Stefano but I’m still not convinced that Roman isn’t involved in this somehow.”
Marlena sighs in exasperation, “Fine. Maybe we should just discuss how we intend to find him without giving ourselves away and leave Roman out of the discussion.”
***
The limo window slides down as Roman reaches the car, revealing Chief Tarrington of the ISA. Roman is tempted to reach through the window and strangle the man but fights the urge. “Why did you take the boys away, Tarrington?” “You have a cover to maintain and the boys were a liability.”
“*One* of those boys is *my* son!” “A regrettable circumstance but you can trust us to protect them.” Roman snorts, “I’m well experienced with the ISA’s methods of protection, Tarrington, it doesn’t relieve my mind any. I want them returned to their mother.”
Tarrington shakes his head, “Sorry, Roman. Until this case is wrapped up, they’ll remain in our custody.” Roman starts to reach through the window but is pulled back by one of the ISA goons.
Roman snarls and shakes off the man’s hold, “And what am I suppose to tell their mother?” “Nothing,” Tarrington replies bluntly. “In case you’ve forgotten, Roman, *you* convinced the ISA to take on this mission and we intend to make sure you see it through – to the end. How soon it ends and how long your ex-wife suffers depends on you.”
“You bastard. This wasn’t part of the deal. Just like my nearly killing John wasn’t part of the deal. *Your* men fell down on the job when they neglected to fill the gun with blanks…” Roman stops and looks at the silent ISA Chief in dawning horror, “Neglect had nothing to do with it. You wanted him shot.”
Tarrington replies smoothly, “You must admit it was most effective in convincing Stefano he’d succeeded in brainwashing you. And before you consider quitting this case, remember that it is more than just those two boys lives at stake here. I don’t think I have to remind you of what will happen if Stefano gets his hands on your ex-wife again.”
Roman plants his hands on the car door and leans in closer, “I don’t intend to quit, Tarrington, but there’s something I’m going to make very clear to you. If *anything* happens to those two boys, I’ll make sure you don’t just have me to answer to – you’ll have John to contend with too. And from this moment on, we do things *my* way. I’m not willing to risk anyone else getting hurt because of our *mission.* You and your men better not get in my way.”
Tarrington’s voice held a warning note, “Fair enough, I’ll give you 72 hours to bring DiMera in. If you fail, the matter will be out of your hands.” Before Roman can reply, the window slides back up and the limo pulls away. As if on cue, Roman is hit from behind and falls to the ground in an unconscious heap.
***
Eric slides his arm around his brother’s shoulders once their blindfolds are removed. They hadn’t been able to get any answers out of the men who were holding them prisoner and now they were left alone in plain, windowless room that contained two cots, a small wooden table and two chairs and a separate door leading to a bathroom. “Welcome to Hotel California, little brother.”
TJ glares up at Eric and pulls away from him. “That’s not very funny, Eric.” “I wasn’t trying to be.” Eric replies as he moves over to the door and tests it. “We won’t be knocking this down.” TJ plops down on one of the cots and gives his brother a disgusted look, doing his best to cover his fear. “You can’t knock down a door that slides from inside one frame to the other.”
Eric turns and looks at the younger boy, “Would you be happier if I sat and did nothing?” “It’s not any worse than watching you do stupid things.” “Look, TJ, I know you’re afraid…” TJ jumps to his feet, “I’m not afraid! I’m *not*!”
Eric continues as if TJ hadn’t spoken, “…but we *are* going to get out of this.” “You don’t know that. You don’t even know who has us.” Eric says under his breath, “I know who doesn’t have us…” TJ had caught that remark, “Who doesn’t? Those people who are after you?” Eric says calmly, “I didn’t say anyone was after me.” “I’m not stupid, Eric. You didn’t beat yourself up and you told me you were in trouble.”
Eric sighs, “You shouldn’t have gotten into my car, TJ.” “You shouldn’t have ran away. Mom and Dad would have helped you.” Eric moves over to his brother and places his hands on the boy’s shoulders, “I’m sorry, TJ, I guess there were things we both shouldn’t have done and now we’re in even worse trouble.”
TJ isn’t able to hide the fear from his voice, “Do you think they’re going to kill us?” Eric shakes his head, his voice firm, “No, because if they were, they’d have done it already.” “But what if they’re waiting…” Eric gives his brother a gentle shake, “You have to stop thinking like that. My Dad knows we’ve been taken and I’m sure he’ll tell Mom and John. We’ll be rescued in no time.” TJ just looks at his brother in silence, unconvinced.
Eric wouldn’t have been so optimistic if he knew what was happening on the other side of the locked door.
Page 11 of 12Dusk is approaching as Roman regains consciousness and finds himself lying face down on the hard ground. Pain lances through his head as he slowly drags himself to his feet. He looks around carefully as he brushes dirt clumps and leaves from his clothes, a frown creasing his brow. What had happened and how did he end up in a ditch?
He reaches up and probes the back of his head with tentative fingers, wincing as he finds a sizable lump. Someone had hit him from behind and then, he remembered. Ignoring the pain in his head, he scrambled out of the ditch and up to the side of the road . Eric’s car was gone.
Why would Tarrington agree to give him 72 hours to find Stefano and then knock him out and take away his only means of transportation? Something was wrong with this picture. It added to his growing list of suspicions about the ISA and he didn’t like the conclusions he was coming to because it meant either the ISA or Tarrington were not to be trusted. Ironically, his thoughts flash back to a time when John had been vehement about not trusting the ISA because they played by their own rules and *always* had a hidden agenda. And then there was Marlena, she had learned it first hand and he’d been a fool not to remember it before he talked Tarrington into this mission; but it was because of Marlena that he’d been so determined to bring Stefano down this time.
Now everything was a mess and even worse, Eric and young TJ were involved. How was he going to explain it all to John and Marlena? As much as he was hoping to avoid it, he knew he didn’t have any choice now, he was going to have to tell them everything.
Roman sighs and glances up and down the road hoping to see an approaching vehicle, there isn’t one in sight. His mind dwells on how he is going to break the news to John and Marlena as he makes the long trek back to Salem on foot.
***
Tarrington receives a call informing him that the boys were gone and the two agents left to watch over them were dead. “Should we search for them, sir?” “No, they aren’t important at the moment. Brady is the one you’re to concentrate on. The moment he returns to Salem, he’ll try to contact the Blacks. I want you to delay him by whatever means are necessary. However, I don’t want him dead or incapacitated. We still need him. Is that understood?” “Yes, sir.” “One other thing. Brady is not to be informed that we no longer have custody of the boys.”
***
Marlena descends the stairs, after checking on the children, to find Abe and John in conversation in the foyer. They fall silent and look up at the sound of her approach. She doesn’t like the looks on their faces and glances from one to the other, demanding, “What is it?”
Abe excuses himself to go talk to his men monitoring the phones as John turns to Marlena. He reaches out to steady her as he tells her quietly, “I’m afraid we have more bad news.” “Is TJ….” she whispers and then falls silent. “No, no, it’s nothing like that.” He is quick to reassure her, then continues, “But we now believe that something has happened to Eric, also.”
“Eric? I don’t understand. I thought he was still in New York.” “Apparently he had come back to Salem. His car was found abandoned in the woods on the other side of the lake. There wasn’t any sign of a struggle and Eric is no where to be found.” “You don’t…you don’t think Stefano has him too?”
John sighs, “I don’t know what to think, Doc. I asked Abe to have the lab boys go over the car with a fine tooth comb. Maybe they’ll come up with some clues that will help us out. In the meantime, I don’t think we should speculate…” Marlena glares up at him, “John, if you’re thinking…”
John captures her face in his hands, “*No*, I’m *not* thinking of Roman and the last thing I want to do is argue with you any more.” His voice softens as his thumbs brush her cheeks, “Baby, we can’t let this situation tear us apart. We have to stay strong for the other children and for each other.”
Marlena nods and says in frustration, “I know but this waiting around is driving me crazy. Do you know how hard it was to face Belle and Brady? They kept demanding to know where I was hiding TJ and telling me playing hide-n-seek wasn’t fun anymore. They *know* something is wrong and they’ve already been through so much these past few months. And now you tell me Eric might be missing too. I just don’t know how much more of this I can take.”
His hands fall to her shoulders, “Doc, do you trust me?” “You know I do.” “And do you believe in me?” “With all my heart. You don’t doubt that do you?” John shakes his head as a gentle smile lifts his lips, “Not for a moment. I just wanted to remind you that our faith and trust in each other has gotten us through everything life has thrown at us and it *will* get us through this…as long as we work together and continue to believe that we *will* find the boys, safe and unharmed.” His smile widens, “So what do you say to handing this case over to the B&E Detective Agency?”
Marlena steps back and her eyes widen as she points from him to herself, “You and me? Working in the field together? No more sitting around the house waiting?” John’s eyes glow, “Is that a yes or no, Dr. E?” She holds out her hand to him, “Where do we start, Mr. B?”
Taking her hand in his, John leads her towards the front door, “From square one. Maybe we’ll pick up on something the police have missed.” “But it’s dark out there…” John chuckles, then reaches for the door handle, “It doesn’t have to be daylight to *talk* to people, Doc.” “John, we can’t just…leave.”
John pulls the door open and grins back at her, “Yes, we can. I’ve already filled Kit in on our plans.” “But we didn’t even know what our plans….wait a minute. You were awfully sure of yourself, weren’t you?” John pulls her through the door and closes it behind them and then turns to her and taps her chin with his finger, “No, I was *sure* of *us.*”
***
Roman, keeping to the shadow of the trees, reaches Salem’s city limits. His caution is justified when he sees the same sedan, used to take Eric and TJ away, parked on the shoulder of the road. He moves further into the trees and mentally reroutes his trip. It would take him longer this way and but he couldn’t let the ISA stop him from getting to John and Marlena.
***
A local housekeeping company receives a call to do a rush job on a house whose owners would be returning from overseas the following morning. A very large amount of money is offered for the job with no questions asked. Since the housekeeping company had been struggling lately, they snatched up the offer and sent people right over. They almost have second thoughts when they find blood stains and apparent signs of a fight, but money is money and they needed it.
One of the cleaning women finds an envelope peeking out from under one of the cots in an upstairs bedroom. She turns it over and sees that it is addressed to the B&E Detective Agency. Anxious to finish her work and get out of a house that had very bad vibes, she pockets the envelope and continues with her cleaning.
***
John glances back at the sanitarium as he and Marlena cross the parking lot. “So what did you think?” Marlena frowns not liking the conclusions she’d come to after talking with several of the orderlies and nurses because it supported John’s theory about Roman but honesty made her admit, “I think Roman has been putting on a show all this time. He’s had us all fooled. What I don’t understand is, why and why didn’t the police or Laura find out about this?”
John places a hand on her arm and turns her to face him, “Have you considered that Roman might have an agenda we aren’t aware of and someone took great care to make sure it was kept under wraps? Not to mention, the police have been spread pretty thin lately and Laura has other patients. It would be easy enough to distract either one of them.”
Marlena nods, “But it doesn’t make sense. Roman’s actions have hurt the people he loves and that’s not something Roman would or could do if he was in his right mind and Laura isn’t easily fooled, distraction or no distraction.” “But she *can* be manipulated. Face it, Doc, we all can and *have* been – by Roman and by Stefano. And I don’t think we’re going to find any answers or the boys until we find Roman.”
Marlena sighs in frustration as they resume walking toward the car, “As much as I hate to admit it, I think you’re right, Roman *is* involved but you’ll still never be able to convince me that he’s responsible.” He slides his arm around her waist and gives her a reassuring hug, “And I’m not going to try because I’m convinced someone else is behind all this and I’m beginning to think Stefano is only a part of it.”
Marlena looks up at him in surprise, “What makes you think that?” “Nothing tangible at the moment, just a gut instinct.” Marlena smiles at that, “If I remember correctly, I always told you to follow your instincts.”
They reach the car. “Yes, you did and right now, my instincts are telling me it’s time to get you home. You haven’t rested at all since we first heard about TJ and you’re still recovering from the twins’ birth. If we’re going to continue our investigation in the morning, you need a good night’s sleep. No arguments, okay?”
“Okay, no arguments but I’d like to make a stop on the way home.” “St. Luke’s?” She nods, warmed by how easily he could still read her mind. John leans forward and brushes his lips against hers, “I love you.” Marlena raises her hand to his cheek, “And I love you, even when you’re being stubborn, exasperating…” John starts to interrupt her but she slides her hand over his mouth and continues, “…but most especially at moments like this.”
Page 12 of 12Roman was forced to go into hiding for the night and by the time he reached the grounds of the Black estate the next morning, John and Marlena were pulling out of the driveway. He didn’t dare reveal his presence until they returned. He made it to the stables unseen and hid out in the loft to await their return.
***
TJ shakes Eric, whispering, “Eric, will you *wake up!*” Eric moans, rolls over and opens one eye to peer up at his brother, “What?” TJ shakes him again, hissing, “Wake up!” Eric opens both eyes and looks around to see what had his brother so frantic. Full awareness hits him – they were still being held prisoner. He waves Eric back, “I’m awake.” TJ points to the door, “Someone’s coming.”
Eric sits up as the door swings open to reveal Savannah. Eric groans, “I should have known.” Savannah ignores Eric and looks at TJ, “Who do we have here?” A mulish expression crosses TJ’s face and he stares back at her, saying nothing. Savannah laughs, “God help me, I *know* that look. You’re John Black’s son, aren’t you?”
Eric gets to his feet, “Leave him alone, Savannah. Your business is with *me*.” Savannah turns to Eric, “True but now I have a little insurance. I warned you not to try to run.” Eric folds his arms across his chest, “You should have let me out like I asked instead of sending your goons to teach me a *lesson*.”
Savannah reaches out suddenly and grabs TJ’s arm and pulls the struggling boy towards her, “Maybe we should teach you another lesson, only this time we’ll use him.” Two men show up behind Savannah and she pushes TJ towards them, “Take him to another room.” TJ’s eyes widen in fear as he sends a pleading glance to his older brother. Eric doesn’t relax his stance as he says casually, “I wouldn’t do that if I were you.”
Savannah laughs again, “And who is going to stop me, little man? You?” Eric glares at her in extreme dislike, “Do you think I was stupid enough to take off and not leave some kind of insurance behind?” Savannah raises her hand to the men to stop them from leaving, then eyes Eric suspiciously, “You’re bluffing.” A slow smile spreads across Eric’s face, “Are you willing to take that chance?” “I should have had my men kill you,” Savannah spits out. She shoves TJ back into the room and walks out, slamming the door behind her. They hear the lock click into place.
Eric sinks to the bed and buries his face in his hands. TJ quietly asks from the other side of the room, “Were you bluffing, Eric?” Eric shakes his head no. His hands fall and he looks at his younger brother, “But that doesn’t mean I’ve stopped her. She’s just regrouping. She’ll be back and when she…well, we need to find a way out of here before that happens.” TJ’s glance skims the windowless room, “We didn’t find one before.” Eric manages a lop-sided smile, “All we need is a little ingenuity and I know you’re up to it. After all, you helped rescue mom from that lunatic, Kristen Dimera.”
TJ doesn’t buy into his brother’s cajoling as he moves to his side, “What did you do for her and why won’t she let you quit?” Eric runs his hand through his blonde hair, “She was using the band as a cover to smuggle diamonds across the country.” TJ’s eyes widen in surprise, “Why did she pick you?” “She wanted to get back at mom and dad.”
TJ frowns at his brother, “You should have told them. They would have stopped her.” Eric sighs, “You don’t understand, TJ. It wasn’t that simple and it’s not important any more. Getting out of here is.” “What about your insurance?” Eric admits ruefully, “I’m afraid I dropped it under the bed where we were being held before.” TJ says accusingly, “Then you lied.” He turns away from Eric and says petulantly, “I wish I’d never gotten in your car.” “That makes two of us,” Eric retorted grimly.
***
A smile of satisfaction curves Savannah’s lips as she turns off the intercom. So Eric Brady had been telling the truth, after all, and now she knew where to find the insurance and how to keep young Mr. Brady in line. She decides to let the boys stew for awhile as she heads out to retrieve the envelope herself.
***
Marlena looks over John’s shoulder as he reads the police lab report done on Eric’s car, “What does it say?” John shakes his head and lowers the paper, “Nothing. His car was wiped clean.” A puzzled frown knits Marlena’s brow, “Wiped clean?”
John nods, “Someone went to a lot of trouble to wipe away finger prints, remove clothing fibers, hair, dirt, everything.” “Then we’re right back to where we started from.” John sets the paper on Abe’s desk and turns to her, “No, we’re a step closer. Ask yourself this, why would someone go to all that trouble?” “To keep us off track?”
“Um hmm and who has the knowledge and expertise to do that?” Marlena’s frown deepens, “The police department?” John smiles, “You’re on the right track. How about the ISA?” Marlena’s eyes widen in surprise, “The ISA? Why would Eric be involved with them?” “I don’t think he is but we both know his father is and Eric might have stumbled on something he shouldn’t have. We, also, know how good the ISA is at covering their tracks.”
“If that’s true, then the ISA has Eric.” A sudden thought occured to Marlena, “John, you don’t think the ISA took Eric to insure Roman’s cooperation, do you?” John shakes his head, “No, otherwise they’d have done it sooner and I haven’t gotten the impression that Roman was an unwilling participant in the ISA’s plans to bring Stefano down.” “That’s true, Roman hates Stefano as much as we do and he’d do whatever was necessary to end that man’s reign of terror. Do you think Roman knows and that’s why he left the sanitarium?”
John rises to his feet, “It’s a possibility. Maybe we’d better go back to the Agency so I can place a few discreet phone calls to find out if the ISA does have Eric and then we’ll go talk to Laura.” With a nod, Marlena slips her hand into his and they leave Abe’s office.
***
Savannah tears the room apart where her men had found Eric and his brother, only to come up empty handed. Whoever had cleaned the house up must have found the envelope. She needed to find out who that was and fast before the envelope found it’s way into John Black’s hands. Perhaps if she found one of the ISA agents who had been here…then again, they might not be too cooperative if they found out she was responsible for having them knocked out and their *guests* removed from the premises.She turns to leave and sees a man standing in the doorway. She steps back, “You! What are you doing here?”
Alex Marshall flashes her a nasty smile, “What? Not happy to see me after all these years?” “I was happy to see the *last* of you after I was arrested for having those forged ballots in the trunk of my car.”
Alex laughs, “The fact that you hold grudges has worked in our favor.” “I don’t know what you’re talking about, Alex and I don’t have time for this.” Alex smile turns deadly as he pulls a gun from his pocket and aims it at her, “Yes, you do, Savannah. Someone wants to see you.”
***
John hangs up the phone. Marlena looks at him expectantly, “Well?” “We were right, the ISA had Eric.” Marlena isn’t happy to hear the confirmation and then realizes John had used the past tense. “Had?” John nods, “Apparently someone else came along and snatched him out from under their noses, killing two agents in the process. But that isn’t all.”
Marlena sinks down on the edge of the desk, “Why do I get the feeling it isn’t any better news?” John reaches over and takes her hand in his, “TJ is with Eric.” “No!” She says with a catch in her voice and then recovers enough to ask, “But how?” John shakes his head, “I don’t know and the agent I spoke with couldn’t tell me why the boys were together, why the ISA was holding them or who has them now.”
Marlena’s hand tightens on John’s and the fear returns to her eyes, “Then they really are in danger.” John draws her from the desk onto his lap, “We’re going to find them.” She lays her head on his shoulder, “I hope so.”John tilts her chin up with his fingers, “Hey, where’s that spunky Doc who’s been by my side all morning? After all, we’re closer now to finding them than we were before.”
Marlena shakes her head, “No, John, we *were* one step closer. Now we don’t know where to look next.” “Yes, we do – Roman. I think he has some of the answers to our questions. And the sooner we talk to Laura, the sooner we might get that lead on where he is.” She slaps at his chest in frustration, “How can you stay so damned optimistic?”
John threads his hands through her hair, “Because I have you and together we’re an unbeatable team.” Marlena shakes her head again but this time, a ghost of a smile touches her lips, “You’re impossible.” “Why? Because I won’t let you dwell on the what ifs?” Marlena squirms on his lap, “No, because your desire shows at the most inopportune moments.”
John chuckles, “You only have yourself to blame for that one, Doc.” He lifts her from his lap and places her on her feet, “Maybe we’d better get out of here before I *really* embarrass myself.” Marlena’s soft laughter trails behind her as she snatches up her purse and heads for the door. John smiles to himself, happy for the moment that he’d managed to take her mind off TJ and Eric’s dilemma.
Laura looks from John to Marlena in stunned silence. Marlena apologizes, “I’m sorry, Laura. If it’s any consolation, he had us fooled too.” John nods, adding, “Completely.”
Laura slams Roman’s file down on her desk, “That’s still no excuse for why I didn’t see it. I spent *hours* with him every day. If I ever get my hands on Roman…” Marlena exchanges glances with John, then says, “You’ll have to wait in line. He’s ours first. That’s why we’re here, we want to know if you remember anything that Roman might have said that would give us a clue to where he might be right now.”
Laura shakes her head, “No, nothing that would be useful. He mainly talked about you, John, the children and of course, Stefano.” John leans forward, “Did he say anything about Stefano specifically?” Laura sits back in her chair, a thoughtful frown creases her brow, then she shakes her head again. “No, mainly rambled that he was going to get Stefano. I tried to get him to talk about where he’d been staying, where Stefano held him, those type of questions but he always avoided them. I know why now.”
Marlena pleads with her, “Please think harder, Laura. It could be something small and inconsequential. Something you might not have thought was important at the time.” The other woman is silent a moment, then says, “I’m sorry, Marlena. He acted pretty incoherent most of the time.” She can’t help adding with an edge of sarcasm, “He’s definitely in the wrong profession. He should be out winning Oscars. My guess is, he wasn’t even taking the medication I prescribed.”
John confirms her latter suspicion, “He wasn’t. One of the cleaning crew found what was left of the pills in the bathroom. Apparently, he saved them up until the day he left, slipped one to each of the guards in their coffee and disposed of the rest of them.” Laura frowns again, “Seems to me he went to an awful lot of trouble for nothing. I don’t understand why he did it.”
Marlena sighs, “We think it has something to do with the ISA mission he’s on.” Having heard all about the ISA’s past tactics from Marlena, Laura rolls her eyes, “Oh them.” John asks curiously, “Did Roman happen to mention them?”
“As a matter of fact, he did. It was during our meeting yesterday before he made his escape. I only caught part of it, he said something about blanks, but I’m not sure that’s what he said because it didn’t make sense. Then something about blaming the ISA and needing to warn someone but I didn’t catch who. I didn’t think anything of it at the time because I *thought* it was part of his paranoia.”
John and Marlena both think this over for a moment. Suddenly, Marlena jumps to her feet and grabs John’s hand dragging him from the chair. She glances at Laura and says in a rush as she pulls a confused John toward the door, “Thanks, Laura. You’ve just given me an idea. Hurry up, John, we need to take a walk.”
***
Savannah takes her eyes off the road for a moment and glances over at Alex. “You know, Alex, you really don’t have to point that gun at me.” “Yes I do, sweetheart. I don’t trust you as far as I can throw you. Now pay attention to the road.” Savannah tries a different tack, “Come on, lighten up. We were almost lovers once.”
Alex laughs dryly, “If I remember correctly, you said you only slept with men you *liked* and I didn’t get the impression you liked me very well.” She sighs, “You have me there. So are you going to tell me who we’re going to see?” “You’ll find out soon enough and I think I’m going to enjoy this little visit.” “Why?”
Alex laughs again, “I enjoy watching you squirm.” “Some one should have put you out of your misery a long time ago, Alex.” “They did, the day they arrested you.” “You’re still the comedian, aren’t you?” “You can turn here,” Alex indicates with the gun, then adds, “I hope you’ll still think so when you find out what we have in store for you.”
Savannah turns down the dirt road Alex had indicated. “Is this the scenic route?” “It’s the *only* route. So if you’re thinking of trying to pull a fast one, don’t.” “I wouldn’t *dream* of it. I’m enjoying your company way too much.” Alex gets in the final barb before a large house comes into view, “I can see why Chris Kositchek ran in the opposite direction all those years ago. Your tongue scared him off.”
Savannah glares at him just before she pulls the car to a stop. She doesn’t wait for Alex to tell her to get out of the car and he follows her to the house, never lowering the gun. They are led to a study by a maid who closes the door behind them. Savannah turns to Alex, “So where is this mystery person who wants to see me so badly?”
“Right behind you, Miss Wilder.” Savannah spins around to face Stefano seated behind a desk. He smiles, “Why do you look so surprised? Surely you did not think your early release from jail was for your good behavior?”
Savannah quickly pulls herself together, “Are you telling me *you’re* the one I’ve been working for all this time?” “That is correct and I must say, I am most concerned about your recent activities. You have been interfering in my plans.” “Maybe if you’d told me what those plans were, I wouldn’t have interfered. I don’t like surprises, Stefano.”
Stefano looks at Alex, “I am beginning to regret letting you talk me into hiring her, my friend.” Alex grins, “Her bark is worse than her bite.” If looks could kill, Alex would have been dead as Savannah snapped back, “Shut up, Alex.” She turns back to Stefano, “Look, Stefano. I was hired to smuggle diamonds across the country and make a profit doing it using whatever means I thought necessary. Eric Brady was necessary and he was working out fine until he got a back bone. So I gave him a warning. How was I to know he’d run off like that and drag his little brother along with him?”
Stefano rises to his feet and says in a deadly voice, “You, Miss Wilder, were hired for one reason and one reason only. So that I could use Eric Brady to get to his family. You have ruined my plans with your foolish interference.” Savannah’s voice falters as she says in her defense, “I have the boys.”
“I know that. Who do you think cleaned up after your men left behind all those clues for the ISA or Roman Brady to find?” Relief fills Savannah’s face, “Then you found the envelope!” Her relief is short lived as Stefano moves from behind the desk and advances on her, his voice a notch deadlier, “What envelope?”
Savannah swallows nervously, “Eric Brady left an envelope behind. He said it was his insurance.” Alex interjects, “So that’s why you went back to the house.” Savannah nods, “Yes, but it wasn’t there.” “Enough!” Stefano roars.
Alex and Savannah fall silent. Stefano steps up to Savannah, his close proximity intimidating, “Then I suggest, Miss Wilder, that you find that envelope but before you do, you will take Alex to where you are hiding the boys and turn them over to him. Is that understood?” Savannah makes the mistake of saying, “Then you don’t know where I have them hidden.”
Stefano smiles, “Are you thinking of refusing me?” She takes a step backwards, “Of course not. I’m just surprised that the omnipotent Stefano DiMera doesn’t…” Alex warns pleasantly, “You’d better shut up while you’re still breathing, Savannah.”
Stefano turns away from the pair in disgust, “Get her out of here, Alex and I expect Eric Brady and TJ Black to be under my protection within the hour.” Alex waves Savannah towards the door, jabbing the gun in her back to insure her silence on the way out.
***
John stops Marlena on the path along the lake, “Alright, Doc. Are you going to tell me why it was so important for us to rush out of Laura’s office, rush home and take a *walk* along the lake?” Marlena gives an exasperated sigh, “I told you in the car, John. I’m testing a theory.” “Yes, you did but you still haven’t old me what that theory is.” Marlena starts walking again, “We have to keep moving, we’re still in sight of the house.”
John catches up to her, “Why is it so important for us to be away from the house?” Marlena explains patiently, “If Roman is hiding on the grounds, he’s going to wait until we’re alone and out of sight of the house. Which is why I suggested a stroll along the lake.” “What makes you think Roman is here?”
She flashes him a quick grin, “Woman’s intuition.” John shakes his head, “That’s not all it is, Doc. Something Laura said set you off.” “Well, I will admit what she said gave me an idea but it really was intuition that led me here. You’re not the *only* one with instincts, you know.” “Of course I know that but I’d think this would be the last place Roman would show up.”
“Not if *we* were the ones he was trying to warn. Think about it, John. Who else would he be warning? The ISA? Not if he was blaming them for something. Stefano? I don’t think so, he’s been working to bring him down – not help him. Besides, I don’t think I’m wrong in this. Roman *will* show up.” Roman suddenly appears on the path in front of them, “It took the two of you long enough to get here.”
Marlena tosses John and I-told-you-so look before she turns to Roman. Her first instinct is to rush to Roman’s side and hug him in relief but she holds back. Despite her belief in his innocence, he still had to answer for whatever part he played in the trying to murder John and the heartache his actions had caused her family. Not even John knew the depth of her anger at Roman for keeping them in the dark all this time. She finally spoke up, the anger evident in her voice surprising both men, “You could have found a way to get a message to us and we’d have been here *much* sooner. In the meantime, Eric and TJ are in *danger.* The job is still the most important thing with you, isn’t it Roman?”
“That’s not fair, Doc. You don’t know the whole story. As for the boys, they’re safe. I made sure of it.” “Safe? Oh you mean, the ISA. I guess that means you don’t know that the two ISA Agents who were *protecting* them were murdered and the boys are missing.” Roman pales and says quietly, “No, I didn’t know. I’m sorry…”
John couldn’t help feel sorry for Roman when he saw how that news affected him. Roman might deserve her anger, but even *he* didn’t like facing an angry Marlena and it would delay finding the boys. He places his hand on Marlena’s arm and says in a gentle voice, “Honey, maybe we should let him explain everything.” Marlena takes a deep breath to try to calm her temper, “Alright.”
He gives her an encouraging smile and turns his attention to Roman, “I suggest we take this someplace a little less open. We should be safe from interruptions and prying eyes in the gazebo.” Roman nods and proceeds the pair further along the path. John says in a low voice to Marlena as they slow their pace, “I thought I was suppose to be the suspicious, angry one?”
She sighs, “I’m afraid it’s been building up for quite some time. Don’t get me wrong, I don’t doubt Roman was doing what he thought he had to do and I still don’t believe he’s the one responsible for everything that happened but that doesn’t mean I like what he’s done and I especially don’t like the fact that he’s waited until now to confide in us. I almost lost you and two of the children are in danger possibly because of his actions. I can’t overlook that and I’m not sure I can forgive him for it at this point.”
“Will you do me a favor, at least?” “What’s that?” He smiles, “Let him have his say before you rake him over the coals again.” An reluctant smile touches her lips, “I’ll try.” He gives her a brief hug, “That’s my girl.” They fall silent as they reach the gazebo and step inside.
Roman turns from his contemplation of the lake to face them. He could tell that Marlena was still angry with him but despite her anger, she looked as beautiful as ever and…happy…happy and secure within the circle of John’s protective arm. A pang of jealousy struck him. He remembered a time when she was like that with him.
A sigh of regret escapes his lips as he tells himself, all that matters now is that she *is* happy with John. He just wished he hadn’t been responsible for bringing heartache into her life to put a damper on some of that happiness. As a frown appears on Marlena’s brow at his continued silence, Roman clears his throat and says, “Maybe the two of you’d better have a seat. This could take awhile.”
Page 2 of 4John leads Marlena over to the sofa and sits beside her, sliding a protective arm around her shoulders. Marlena looks at Roman and says simply, “We’re ready.”
Roman takes a seat in a chair across from them. Unsure of where to begin, he glances briefly at Marlena and then John. In her present mood, Marlena isn’t going to be happy hearing what he has to say and although John is calm for the moment, that too will change. Maybe they needed a few reassurances from him, first, to help break the tension in the air.
He clears his throat and then begins, “First, I want you both to know that contrary to what you’ve seen and heard since I’ve been back in Salem, I am happy for both of you.” He looks at Marlena, “All I’ve ever wanted is your happiness, Doc.” His gaze travels to John, “And I’m glad you have been able to give it to her, John but then I never had any doubts that you would.” He is relieved to hear the anger absent from Marlena’s voice, for the moment, when she replies, “Then it was all an act.”
Roman nods, “Yes, for Stefano’s benefit. When I heard the two of you were getting married, I approached the ISA about returning to Salem to get Stefano once and for all. I deliberately timed my arrival to coincide with your honeymoon so the two of you would be out of harm’s way. I was hoping to have everything wrapped up before you returned.”
John finally speaks up, “Exactly what *was* the plan?” Roman looks at John, “To set myself up as bait by convincing Stefano that I was angry and bitter and wanted to kill you. I knew he’d save me the trouble of looking for him by coming after me. He fell for it all too easily. His men caught up to me my first day here. Right after I’d met your brother in the pub.”
Marlena leans forward, the anger back in her voice, “*That* was your plan from the beginning and you didn’t warn us?” Roman sighs, “Doc, you know how close Stefano watches everything that is happening in Salem. I couldn’t risk telling anyone before I set my plan in motion. Like I said, I was hoping to wrap it all up before the two of you returned but you cut your honeymoon short. I was going to warn you then, but by then everyone was suspicious of my motives and the harder I tried to find out when the two of you were returning, the less cooperation I got.” He leans back in the chair, “By the time you returned, Stefano was monitoring every move I made.” He looks at John, “I know you and Abe found Stefano’s bug in Abe’s office.”
John nods, “It was after our confrontation.” “Yes. I’d been trying to stall Stefano and he was becoming suspicious. I didn’t have any choice but to force the confrontation between us. He heard every word of it. After that, I overheard him talking to a couple of his goons about setting a trap for you by luring you down to the pier. I hid down there, hoping to way lay them before they got to you but everything happened so quickly. They’d knocked you out just before Eric’s arrival chased them off and I only had enough time to check to make sure you were still alive. I knew by the look on his face he hadn’t seen the others, only me.”
Marlena interrupts him, her voice accusing, “Your should have told him why you were there, Roman. Your children were devastated because they believed you’d attacked John.” Roman shakes his head, “I couldn’t blow my cover.” Marlena glares at him, “But you *could* hurt your children, is that it?” A thread of anger enters Roman’s voice, “You don’t think it hurt like hell to have them believe the worst of me?” Marlena’s cold reply cuts him like knife, “But that still didn’t stop you, did it?”
Roman jumps up from the chair and moves over to stare out the window. John takes Marlena’s hand in his and says quietly, “Sweetheart, I’m not any happier about this than you are but don’t you think Roman has punished himself enough for what’s happened without you adding to it?”Marlena shakes her head, “No, I don’t because if he’d considered his children’s feelings, Eric and TJ might not be in danger now. Not to mention that he’s been playing with *our* lives, all for the sake of his mission.” She glances over at Roman’s rigid back, “In that respect, he hasn’t changed at all.”
John sighs, at a loss for words to heal her anger. A part of him agreed with her because he’d been every bit as angry over the pain and heartache Roman’s actions had caused the children and Marlena, but another part of him sympathized with Roman. He knew what Roman had risked in his plan to bring Stefano down and what it was costing him now. He finally says, “Maybe we’d better let him finish explaining.” Marlena says loud enough for Roman to hear, “I’m not sure I want to hear any more.”
Roman turns to say something but John holds up his hand to stop him, saying to Marlena, “You need to hear the rest every bit as much as he deserves to be heard, especially if it means it will help find the boys. Surely you can put aside your anger until after they’re safe again?” He gives her a cajoling smile and whispers for her ears only, “I won’t even stop you from venting your anger then. It’ll probably save him from getting a black eye from me.” Marlena bites her lip to keep from smiling and nods. She composes her features and looks up at Roman, taking little solace in the misery she sees in his eyes but not able to feel sorry for him at the moment as Eric and TJ’s faces flash before her mind’s eye.
Roman wondered what John had said to Marlena. He hadn’t missed her attempt to keep from smiling and he wasn’t surprised that she’d managed to look at him so calmly after her outburst of anger. She’d always been good at that, too good and now he wasn’t sure what she was thinking. Another pang of regret hit him. In the past, he’d always known.
John breaks the uncomfortable silence, “I think we’d better get this over with before time runs out for the boys.” Roman nods and rather than resume his seat, begins pacing as John asks, “What happened after you left the pier?” “Stefano and his men were waiting for me. The old man was furious that I’d interfered with his plans and someone hit me from behind. I woke up to find myself in a seedy hotel room.” John frowns, “That must be how they got your ISA ID and badge and planted it on the pier.”
Roman nods again, “Yes, but I didn’t know it at the time nor did I know that Stefano had started drugging me. It must be something new he’s come across because you don’t even know you’re under its influence. The first thing I did was call the ISA and tell them we had to move up our plan to shoot you. I realized, too late, that I’d played right into Stefano’s hands when I found the bug attached to the phone. That’s when I called the house and tried to warn you, Doc, but Stefano’s men arrived and cut off our conversation.”
A flicker of anger crosses John’s features, “Let me get this straight. You were planning all along to shoot me?” Roman tosses John an apologetic glance, “I’m afraid so but the ISA was suppose to make sure the bullets were substituted with blanks.” John looks at him in disbelief, “And you *believed* them?”
“I had no reason not to at the time. It wasn’t until later that I found out they had their own agenda because they realized that Stefano was suspicious of me and were convinced if the bullets were real, Stefano’s suspicions would be allayed. What they didn’t know was he knew about the shooting and wasn’t about to stop it from happening.”
It was Marlena’s turn to hold John back as she watched his hands curl into fists and felt his arm muscles harden under her hand. She says in a low voice, “Not now, John, please.” Roman sighs, “I’m sorry, John, I had no idea things would turn out like they did.” A muscle twitches in John’s cheek, “You owe your apologies to my wife and children, Brady.”
Roman nods, “If it’s any consolation, I can’t forgive myself for letting things go as far as they did and I couldn’t do anything to make up for it afterwards. After the shooting, Stefano’s men were waiting for me and I was kept drugged for quite some time after that. I didn’t know what the outcome of the shooting was until Stefano decided it was time for me to be arrested for your murder. Stefano took great delight in telling me the devastation your death had caused and I was more determined than ever to put an end to his reign of terror. I decided to work on my own and managed to escape – that’s when Bo and Hope found me. I needed time to get the drugs out of my system before I went after Stefano again, but knew I wouldn’t be able to escape from jail. So I continued my psycho charade in the hopes that I’d end up in the sanitarium.”
He pauses, stopping behind the chair and placing his hands on it, then continues his narration, “You pretty much know the rest after that, except that I was on my way to get Stefano when I ran into the boys and the ISA caught up with us. As for the boys, all I know is Eric had been beaten up pretty badly and was running from someone and TJ had slipped into his car unseen when Eric stopped here at the house after the two of you had left. I was trying to get Eric to tell me what was going on, but we were interrupted by the ISA. I had Tarrington’s assurances that the boys would be safe and didn’t find out the whole truth behind the shooting incident until they’d been taken away, otherwise I would never have let them go.”
Silence falls in the gazebo as Roman finishes and John and Marlena absorb everything he had told them and try to deal with their anger. Roman watches as they console and support each other with just a touch or a look. Had he and Marlena ever been that in-tune with each other? He didn’t think so. Breaking the silence, Roman says before turning towards the door to the gazebo, “Maybe I should wait outside so you two can discuss….”
John looks up, “No, I still have a few questions for you.” Roman turns back toward them, “Okay.” He’d been expecting more questions about his “mission” but it appeared that John and Marlena had silently agreed to tuck that matter aside until later as John asks, “Did Eric give any clues at all to who beat him up or who he was running from?” “None, he kept bringing the conversation back around to me. Until TJ gave himself away, that is and then he was more concerned about reading his younger brother the riot act for sneaking into his car. And TJ didn’t seem to know what was going on, he was just hell bent on protecting his brother. When I tried to get them to open up, I became the enemy. They’re very close.”
Marlena speaks up this time, “Yes, they *are*, after all they’ve been through emotional hell together these past six months.” Roman flinches. So much for thinking Marlena had completely set aside her anger. John intercedes before Marlena really gets fired up, “Roman, do you know which safe house they took the boys to? If we could find it, we might be able to pick up on a few clues as to who has them now.”
Roman shakes his head, “They wouldn’t tell me but if I had to guess, I’d say outside of Salem. They know we’re both familiar with the ones here. They instituted a few new ones outside of town and I might be able to locate them if I can call a friend in Washington.” John rises to his feet. “I’m not letting you out of my sight again and I don’t want the family to be upset by this any further. We’ll go to the detective agency and use the phone there.” “Fair enough,” Roman agrees.
Marlena looks from one to the other, “I hope you weren’t planning on leaving me behind.” John holds out his hand to her, managing to keep a smile from tugging at his lips, “I don’t suppose I could convince you to stay here?” Slipping her hand into his and moving to her feet, Marlena shakes her head, “Not on your life because I’m not letting *you* out of my sight again.” She leans over and whispers, “We’re partners, remember?” John brushes her ear with his lips, whispering back, “Forever.” Out loud he says for Roman’s benefit, “We’ll take the back way to the garage.”
Roman nods and proceeds them out of the gazebo. John gives Marlena a reassuring hug and they follow, hopeful that they’ll find the boys before the night is over.
Page 3 of 4John joins Marlena in the nursery to help her tuck the twins into their cribs. He gently sets his daughter in her crib and exchanges smiles with Marlena, “I’ll be glad when this is all over, Doc and we can spend every evening like this.”
Marlena pulls the blanket up over the sleeping Conner, “Has there been any news?” John nods as he covers Aly’s tiny form , “I just got off the phone with Abe. They have Savannah and Alex in custody now. Abe’s waiting for Roman and I to come over and question them.”
Moving to his side, Marlena reaches in and caresses her daughter’s head, “Do you think the plan will work?” John turns to her and places his hands on her shoulders and turns her to face him, “That all depends on you. Are you going to stay put like you promised?” Marlena nods, “I trust you and Roman to handle things from here on and I want to be with the children.” She leans into him, “Just promise me you’ll bring Eric and TJ home safely.”
John slides his hands into her hair and brushes her lips with his as he says, “I promise.” He seals his vow with a kiss. Marlena slides her arms up around his neck as their kiss deepens and she molds herself to him. A soft moan of regret escapes her as he lifts his lips from hers to gaze into her eyes as he says quietly, “I have to go now, Doc.” Marlena nods again and says with a catch in her voice, “Be careful and come back home to me soon.” He gives her one more kiss, this one more heated and then he is gone.
Marlena raises her fingers to her lips and turns to look down at the twins. Before her thoughts can assemble themselves and overwhelm her, she hears a whispered chorus of “Mommy” from behind. She turns to see Belle and Brady peeking around the corner. With a last glance at the twins, she joins the two youngsters out in the hallway. They immediately throw their little arms around her legs and hug her, saying in unison “We keep you from being sad, Mommy.” Belle adds impishly, “Daddy said.”
Marlena caresses their heads, “And what do you have planned for me?” Belle giggles, “A movie!” Brady nods, “And popcorn!” Marlena laughs, “Oh boy! Is the movie going to be a surprise?” Belle places her hands on her hips and gives her mother a look, “Mommy, you know we only watch ‘Beauty and Beast’ now.” Brady slips his hand into Marlena’s and gives her a tug. He flashes her a disarming grin, “C’mon, Mommy, be our guest.” Belle leads the way, singing her own rendition of “Be Our Guest.”
***
John enters Abe’s office to find Roman alone. Roman explains, “Abe’s off getting the search warrants. He said we could handle the questioning ourselves. You want Wilder or Marshall?” John grins, “Wilder. It’ll give me great pleasure to let her know she’s going back to jail.”
Roman nods, then asks, “Is Marlena going to stay put?” John picks up Savannah’s file and leafs through it, “She gave me her word and the children are doing their part to keep her busy.” He looks up at Roman, “She’s leaving it in our hands.” Roman remarks wryly, “I guess she trusts us enough not to go at each other’s throats.” John nods in agreement, “She knows we won’t do anything to endanger the boys and that we have bigger fish to fry.” He closes the file and sets it down, “Shall we go see which one of them caves in first?” Roman laughs, “My bet is on Marshall.” John grins, “Mine too.”
***
Savannah looks up as the door opens and says sarcastically, “Well, well, well. If it isn’t the former Roman Brady.” John closes the door, “It’s nice to see you again too, Savannah but I’m sure the pleasure will be all mine.”
“You don’t have anything on me.” John slides out the extra chair, turns it around and sits with his arms crossed on the back. “I’d hardly call smuggling and kidnapping, *nothing*.”
Savannah glares at him, “You can’t prove a thing.” John grins, “No? I have at least two witnesses who are quite willing to testify against you. Savannah sits back and stretches her arms above her head, yawning, “You’re fishing and I’m not biting.” John continues as if she hadn’t spoken, “And then there is the little matter of two dead ISA agents.”
***
Roman sits on the edge of the table and looks at Alex, “What? No hello, long time no see?” Alex crosses his arms and leans back in his chair, “Last I heard, you were dead.” Roman smiles, “Reports of my death were greatly exaggerated.” “What a pity.”
Roman’s smile widens, “You know, Alex, I’m a little surprised at the company you’re keeping these days. I didn’t think you’d have enough guts to get involved in smuggling, kidnapping and murder. Your partner must be some kind of woman to drag you into all that.”
Alex snorts, “If you’re referring to that piece of work Savannah, I just met up with her today. My car broke down and she was the only ride I could get into town.” Roman feigns surprise, “Really? That’s not the story Savannah is telling.”
***
Savannah jumps to her feet, “You’re not pinning those murders on me. I had nothing to do with them.” John shrugs, “I guess that means your partner is double-crossing you then.”
Savannah laughs harshly, “Alex *isn’t* my partner and that snake in the grass would say anything to save his own skin.” John nods in agreement, “Good old, Alex. Nothing ever changes with him.” He pauses, then asks, “What are you going to do if he convinces everyone that you kidnapped two innocent boys, killing the ISA agents protecting them in the process?”
Savannah rests her hands on the table and looks directly at John, “Alex couldn’t convince a dog to sit up and beg.” “Funny. He convinced a local cleaning crew to clean up behind you. From what I’ve heard, you left quite a mess behind and they almost didn’t take the job.”
Savannah plops back into the chair and proceeds to examine her nails, “I have no idea what you’re talking about.” John remarks smoothly, “You must have a lot of confidence in Alex’s ability not to crack under pressure.” Savannah glances up, replying confidently, “It’s his word against mine.”
***
Alex frowns, “That bleached bimbo would say anything to save her own neck.” Roman nods in sympathy, “Yes, she probably would and I understand she’s saying quite a bit. For instance, it was your idea to kidnap the boys, kill two ISA agents, hire the cleaning crew to clean up the mess…need I go on?”
A bead of sweat breaks out on Alex’s brow, but he manages to remark flippantly, “I suppose she said I was involved in the smuggling too.” “I believe you’re right. Almost forgot about that one and I believe she also mentioned your being on Stefano Dimera’s payroll. Things aren’t looking very good for you, are they, Alex?”
Alex says evenly, “I want my lawyer.” A thoughtful expression crosses Roman’s features, “Your lawyer? Does that mean Savannah’s right?” Alex slams his fist on the table, “No, damn it. It means I’m not saying another word until my lawyer gets here.”
“Fair enough,” Roman replies. “However, I’ve been given the authority to offer you a deal.” Alex interest perks up, “A deal?”
***
John gets to his feet, “Okay, Savannah. No more games. I’m going to tell you what we have on you and then I’m going to let you think about it for awhile. I think you’ll realize that we have enough evidence against you and the charges *will* stick.” Savannah waves her hand, “Since I know it won’t do any good to tell you to save your breath, carry on.”
John sits on the edge of the table, “We know you were using Eric Brady to smuggle diamonds across the country. We also know that you kidnapped him and his younger brother from an ISA safe house, killing the two agents. And we know that you’re holding the boys someplace to either demand ransom or hand over to Stefano Dimera.”
Not missing Savannah’s little start of surprise at the mention of Dimera, John says coolly, “Yes, we even know that you and Alex are in cahoots with Stefano. And if you don’t think we have proof, you’re wrong. And if you don’t think Alex will spill his guts to get a lighter sentence, you’re wrong about that too. So I suggest you tell us where the boys are, call your attorney and seriously consider cutting a deal with us.”
Without another word, John leaves the room and isn’t surprised to find Roman waiting for him. “He cave?” Roman smiles, “He’s giving his statement now.” His smile fades, “Unfortunately, he doesn’t know where the boys are. Apparently, he and Savannah were on their way there when the patrol car caught up with them. They were suppose to take the boys to Stefano but Savannah decided she and Alex could make a profit keeping them instead.”
John frowns, “I’m not sure she’s going to tell us either. Did Marshall give you Stefano’s location, at least?” Roman nods, “I think Abe and I should go after Stefano now, before he gets wind of their arrest.” “Good idea and in the meantime, I’ll work on Savannah. Maybe once she knows that Alex made a full confession and Stefano is about to be arrested, she’ll cave too.” Roman holds out his hand to John, “Good luck.” John grasps his hand and shakes it, “You too.”
***
Roman observes Stefano’s hideout through the binoculars as the rest of the men move in to position. He whistles, then says “Well, that certainly explains a few things.” He hands the binoculars over to Abe, “Take a look at Stefano’s guest.”
Abe does and exclaims in surprise, “That’s Chief Tarrington!” He lowers the binoculars, “What’s he doing there?” Roman glances over at the building, “My guess is, he’s been working with Stefano all along. It definitely explains the ISA, or at least Tarrington’s agenda.” Abe’s radio beeps alerting him that his men are all in position. He looks at Roman, “This is it.” Abe sends a return signal. He and Roman draw their guns and advance on the house.
***
TJ sits cross legged on the floor and looks up at his brother who is listening at the door for noises, “I’m hungry.” Eric sighs and joins TJ on the floor, “Now that you mention it, I am too. I wonder why they haven’t tried to feed us or why Savannah isn’t back yet.”
“Do you think she found the letter and this is her way of punishing us?” Eric shakes his head, “No, that’s not Savannah’s style.” Fear enters TJ’s eyes and he asks in a small voice, “You mean she’ll have her men beat us up if she finds the letter?”
Remembering his bruises, Eric slides a reassuring arm around TJ’s shoulders and lies, “No, I don’t think she’ll do that either.” He glances at the barricaded door, “I’m beginning to think something happened and that’s why she hasn’t come back.” A hopeful light enters TJ’s eyes, “Do you think the police caught up to her?”
Eric doesn’t think so but he isn’t about to dash his brother’s hopes, “It’s possible.” TJ hugs Eric in his excitement, “That means our Dads will know where to find us!”
A sudden banging on the door startles them both. TJ moves closer to Eric and whispers, “Is it going to hold?” Eric nods, then says, “Maybe we should go put our weight against the furniture just to make sure.” They scramble to their feet and push their weight against the furniture.
A muted voice, calling their names penetrates the metal door. The boys look at each other and say in unison, “That’s Dad!” They start pulling away the furniture and take turns calling out, “We’re here! We’re here!”
Before they can move the last piece, John shoves the door open with his weight. TJ flies into his arms and Eric gives him a relieved smile. John’s arms close around his son as he looks around at the furniture scattered haphazardly around the doorway and then over at Eric, “Your idea?”
Eric nods. TJ says in defense of his brother, “We didn’t know we were going to be rescued.” John looks from one to the other, his expression unreadable, “Well, you have been and I think we can talk about it later. Your mother is anxious to see you both home safe again.”
A guilty expression settles on TJ’s face, “Is she really mad at us, Dad?” John nods, “But she’ll be relieved and happy to see both of you.” Eric sighs, “What about my Dad? Is he all right?” “He’s fine and he’ll be meeting us at the house.”
Eric and TJ trade glances, hoping they wouldn’t have to face the music until tomorrow. John interprets their glance and smiles to himself. It wouldn’t hurt to let them sweat it out for awhile. It would make them that much more apologetic when they came face to face with their mother. He says gruffly, “Let’s go home.”
Page 4 of 4John and Marlena are awakened the next morning by the sound of little fists pounding on their bedroom door. Marlena moans, rolls over and pulls the pillow over her head saying, “It’s *your* turn.” John chuckles and swats her playfully on the behind as he crawls from the bed, “Come on, Doc. It’s *only* six o’clock. I thought you’d be used to our “wake up” calls by now.” Marlena mumbles something unintelligible as John pulls on his robe. He calls out when the pounding is renewed, “Hold your horses. I’m coming.”
The phone rings as John heads for the door, “Want to get that, Doc?” Marlena’s hand emerges from underneath the pillow as she blindly feels around for the phone. John laughs again as he sees the receiver disappear under her pillow and then turns to open the door.
Brady and Belle, their faces and hands smeared with what looks suspiciously like blueberry syrup, are standing there grinning from ear-to-ear. Brady is the first to get a word in, “Guess what we had for breakfast, daddy?” John looks from one to the other, “Blueberry pancakes?” Belle shakes her head and pronounces triumphantly, “Booberry, cheerios! Best Brady breakfast ever!” She peeks around her father’s leg, “Mommy awake?”
“Yes, she is but she’s on the phone. And before you think about hopping in bed with her, why don’t we get you cleaned up first.” John leads them towards the bathroom, “How did you get away from the nanny this morning.” Brady grins and waves a sticky-blue hand at his mother as she peeks out from under the pillow and winks at the children. He says simply, “Conner needed a bath.” Belle giggles and blows a kiss to her mother before she disappears into the bathroom, followed by her brother and father.
Marlena sits up in the bed and says before hanging up the phone, “Thanks again, Mickey.” There is another knock on the bedroom door. Marlena laughs and shakes her head – it was going to be another one of those mornings. Not ready to emerge from the warm comfort of the bed, she calls out for the knocker to enter. The door swings open to reveal TJ and Eric, carrying two breakfast trays.
Eric smiles tentatively, “We thought we’d surprise you with breakfast.” Marlena smiles, “As part of your penance?” Eric’s smile widens, “No, taking Belle and Brady off your hands so you can enjoy your breakfast is penance.” TJ looks around as he steps into the room, “Where’s dad?”
Marlena points to the bathroom, “Cleaning up the blueberry twins.” Eric smiles, “You should see the mess they left in the kitchen. We’ll be cleaning up blue cheerios for weeks. It’s a good thing we arrived before they decided to get creative with the colorful assortment of food they had sitting on the counter to mix with the cheerios.” TJ nods, “They weren’t happy with us for spoiling their rainbow breakfast.” He joins Eric in moving the dishes and food from the trays onto the table placed before the French doors leading to the balcony.
John and the youngsters emerge from the bathroom. Belle and Brady immediately scramble on to the bed to shower their mother with hugs and kisses. She tickles them in return as John moves to the table, “Well, what do we have here?” Eric replies quietly, “A peace offering. It was the least we could do after what we did.” TJ nods in agreement. Not wanting to put a damper on the boys’ obvious need to make atonements, John smiles, “It smells delicious.”
A look of relief enters their eyes and then their attention is caught by Belle’s laugh of joy as she bounces on the bed calling out, “Belle is a Black now! Belle is a Black now!” John lifts an enquiring eyebrow. Marlena explains, “The phone call was from Mickey. He said the hearing to change Belle’s last name was held late yesterday afternoon but he didn’t get a chance to call us until this morning.”
Belle climbs down from the bed and runs into her daddy’s arms, “I ‘ficial, daddy!” John laughs, scoopsher up into his embrace and hugs her, “Yes, you certainly are.” His daughter squirms to be let down and the moment her feet touch the ground, she calls out to Brady, “’mon, Brady. We have to tell Uncoo Kit!” She is out the door like a shot, Brady fast on her heels. Eric laughs, “I think that’s our cue to leave.” TJ and Eric give chase calling after Belle and Brady.
John closes the door quietly behind them, then cocks an ear. “Do you hear that?” Marlena listens for a moment, then shakes her head, “I don’t hear a thing.” John grins, “Exactly. It’ll probably be our one moment today when it’s absolutely quiet.” He moves to the bed and holds out his hand to her, “Let’s take advantage of it and enjoy our breakfast.” Marlena slips her hand into his and slides from the bed into his arms just as another knock sounds on the door.
John groans, “I spoke too soon!” With a laugh, Marlena dances away from him, “The moment’s gone.” She walks over to the door and opens it. The nanny is standing there with a twin in each arm, “I thought you’d like to say good morning to these two while I try to catch up with Belle and Brady.” John joins Marlena. He cradles Conner in his arms as she takes Aly into her arms, “Yes, I certainly do and if you look for their big brothers, you’ll find the other two.”
Left alone with their youngest offspring, John and Marlena look at the breakfast table and then each other. John grins, “It looks like we’ll be eating one handed again, Doc.” Marlena nods and moves to the table, “I’m getting so used to it, I’m not sure I *can* eat with two hands again.” Aly makes a cooing noise, Marlena smiles at her daughter “You like that, don’t you?” Aly smiles. “Oh look, John, she’s smiling!” John leans over to take a look, “Yea, and it’s your smile. No doubt about it.” Not to be outdone in getting attention, Conner wraps his tiny fingers around his father’s index finger and tries to pull it toward his mouth. Marlena laughs, “Looks like he’s still hungry. Definitely *your* appetite!”
Their breakfast forgotten for the moment, John and Marlena enjoy their time with the twins until Carrie and Sami arrive to take their younger siblings back to the nursery. Sami says in parting, “I think you’d better consider hiring another nanny! This one doesn’t have enough arms and legs!”
Marlena’s eyes widen as the door closes behind them, “Oh no! What do you think Belle and Brady have done now?” John picks up a piece of cold bacon and waves it teasingly before her lips, “I wouldn’t worry about it. There are enough of them out there too look after them long enough for us to eat our cold breakfast.” Marlena laughs softly, grabbing his hand, “Just another normal day in the Black household?” John grins and nods his head. Marlena ignores the bacon and pulls him closer, leaning in to give him a kiss. “I love you.” John savors the taste of her mouth, “Mmmm, I love you too.”
***
They emerge from their room an hour later to find the house is calm for the moment. The twins were sleeping, the nanny had Belle and Brady occupied, Carrie had left for work. TJ was closeted in the library with Kit to resume his studies and Sami and Wil were on their way to meet Austin at the park. Eric was waiting for them in the living room.
“Dad just called. He said he’d be here in half an hour.” He adds with a grin, “That is if he could convince Laura to let him out on good behavior.” His mother smiles, “If I know Laura, she’s not going to make it easy for him.” She changes the subject, “What are your plans for today?”
Eric takes a deep breath, then plunges in, “I’m going over to the campus today to change my major and then I’m going to hook up with Mike. He’s ready to get his own place again and asked me if I’d be interested in sharing an apartment.” Marlena is surprised, “Isn’t this kind of sudden?” Eric shakes his head, “No, I’ve been thinking about moving out on my own for awhile now but couldn’t really afford it on my own. I think it’s time, mom.”
Marlena sighs, “Yes, I guess it is but you are welcome to stay, you know.” Eric nods, “I know and I appreciate it.” John asks, “You mentioned changing your major, what are you switching to?” “Pre-med. That’s the other reason Mike made his offer. He said he’d be able to help me with my studies that way.” He glances at his watch, “I’d better go. I want to make it over to the campus before things get busy over there.” He hugs his mother and dashes off.
Marlena turns to watch him leave. From behind, John circles her waist with his arms and asks gently, “You’re not crying, are you?” She shakes her head no even as she reaches up and brushes the tears from her cheeks. John turns her in his arms, “Hey, you should be happy for him.” Marlena nods, a few more tears chasing themselves down her cheek, “I am. I was just hoping he’d stay here a little longer.” John wipes gently at her tears with his thumbs and smiles, “He’ll be a struggling medical student, we’ll see a lot of him – especially at meal time.” Marlena nods again, “I know but…” John’s thumb settles on her lips, “No buts, Doc. He’ll be happier in his decision if he doesn’t think you’re upset about it.”
Before she can reply, a knock sounds on the door. John grins and gives her a quick kiss on the forehead, “I’ll get it.” By the time he returns with Maggie in tow, Marlena has composed herself. John mentions having to make a phone call and leaves the two women alone.
“Maggie, hi! I didn’t expect to see you today.” The two women hug as Maggie says, “I’m sorry I didn’t call and warn you but after I had a long talk with Mickey this morning, I couldn’t wait to come over here.” They move to the sofa and sit. Marlena asks, “A talk? About what?” “My going back to work.”
“I didn’t know you were considering it.” Maggie laughs, “Well, I wasn’t until we started talking about your dilemma in finding a secretary for the detective agency. I’d like to volunteer for the job.” “You would?” Maggie nods, “I already feel like I’m a part of it after helping Mickey fix the place up for you and John. So what do you think?” Marlena hugs her again, “I think it’s a wonderful idea!” She laughs, “How soon can you start?” “Would Monday be too soon?” “Monday will be perfect.”
John re-enters the room, “Perfect for what?” Marlena smiles up at him, “Maggie is going to be our secretary!” John holds out his hand to Maggie, “Welcome aboard!” Then asks teasingly, “By the way, you do know how to file, don’t you?” Maggie nods, her eyes twinkling, “Yes and you’ll even be able to find what you’re looking for.”
Another knock sounds on the front door. “That should be Roman,” Marlena comments as she heads for the foyer. She opens the door to reveal that it is Roman, accompanied by Laura. Marlena tosses a questioning glance at Laura, who just smiles, then she turns her attention to Roman. Hugging him, she asks, “How are you feeling?” Roman grimaces. “I’d feel a lot better if I could get rid of this shadow that insists on following me around.”
Marlena leads them into the living room, “I’m sure Laura has a valid reason for doing so, Roman.” Laura remains silent as Roman replies, “Oh yes, she says she’s observing me so she can determine whether or not I should be released from her care. You want to tell her I’m as sane as I ever was?” A thread of laughter fills Marlena’s voice. “Sorry, Roman. I make it a point not to intrude on my colleague’s doctor-patient relationship.”
John shakes hands with Roman, “Sounds like they’ve ganged up against you.” Roman grins, “Worse than any ISA situation I ever found myself in.” Laura pulls a notepad out of her purse and writes in it, saying aloud, “Patient exhibits paranoia like symptoms.” She tucks the notepad back in her purse and smiles serenely.
Roman glares at her as Marlena leans closer to Laura and asks in a whisper, “Did you really write that down?” Laura whispers back, “No, but I like to see what kind of reaction I get when he thinks I am. I’ve been driving him crazy all morning.” Marlena chokes on her laughter. Maggie, who had overheard the whispered exchange, turns away to hide her own laughter. Roman rolls his eyes, “See what I have to put up with?”
John, completely sympathetic, suggests, “Maybe we should leave them alone for awhile so they can get it out of their system. We can go to my study and discuss what’s happened with DiMera and Tarrington.” Roman gratefully accepts the offer to escape. Marlena calls after the departing pair, “John, don’t you spoil our surprise by asking Roman that question until we can ask him together.” John tosses her a grin over his shoulder and then disappears around the corner.
Marlena turns to Laura, “So how long *are* you going to torture him?” Laura grins, “I think another day or two will just about do it.” Maggie shakes her head, the laughter still in her voice, “You’re terrible, Laura.” “Aren’t I?” Laura quips, her grin widening. She takes Marlena’s hands in hers, “Now, I just want to tell you again how honored I am that you’ve asked me to be Belle and the twins Godmother.”
Marlena smiles. “Well, I hope you’ll feel the same way when I tell you that we’re going to ask Roman to be their Godfather.” Laura laughs, “Even more so. Just when he thinks he’s gotten rid of me too.” Maggie laughs too. “You’re going to drive that man to murder, Laura.” Laura’s eyes gleam. Maggie and Marlena exchange knowing glances and then the three of them burst out laughing again.
A short time later, John and Roman return. Roman stops dead in his tracks in the doorway when he sees the three women huddled together on the sofa. He groans, “They’re *still* plotting.” At the sound of his voice, the women stop talking and look up. Marlena rises to her feet, “Finished all ready?” John moves to her side. She slips her hand into his as he asks, “We are, how about you?” Marlena looks over at Laura and Maggie, “Are we finished?” Laura and Maggie both smile and nod. Marlena turns her gaze to John and Roman flashing them both a smile. “We’re finished.”
Maggie and Laura rise in unison as Maggie says, “I need to be going anyway. I have a few errands to take care of before I meet Mickey later for lunch. I’ll call you tomorrow, Marlena. Bye John, Roman. Laura, I’ll see you at Alice’s this afternoon.” Laura, ready to accompany Maggie out of the room, says before leaving, “I’ll be waiting for *you* out in the foyer, Roman.” She walks Maggie out.
Roman shakes his head, “That woman….” He glances from John to Marlena, “You *are* going to let me slip out a backdoor, right?” Marlena relents, not wanting to make things *too* easy for her friend, “Yes, but before you leave we have a question we’d like to ask.” Roman nods. Marlena continues, glancing up at John and then back at Roman. “We’re having Belle and the twins christened next Saturday and we’d like you to be their godfather. You are so much a part of our lives and we’d like it to stay that way. We know, too, that if anything ever happened to us, you’d love them as much as we do and would raise them as your own. So, will you be their godfather?”
Tears glisten in Roman’s eyes, “I would love to be their godfather and it means more to me than I can tell you that you’d entrust their care to me.” He chuckles softly and holds his hand out to Marlena. “We certainly have come full circle, haven’t we?” Her own eyes wet with tears, she places her hand in his and gives it a gentle squeeze. “Yes, we have.” Squeezing her hand in return, Roman then holds his hand out to John. The two men shake. “I’m glad you’re in her life, John and that you’ve made her so happy. At one time, I didn’t think I could have accepted Marlena with anyone else but I know you’ll always be there for her and love her like she should be loved.” “Thanks, Roman. That means a lot to me.” John replies as he slides his arm around Marlena’s waist and exchanges tender glances with her.
“And now,” Roman says with a grin, “I think I’m going to make my escape before Laura decides to come back in here. I’ll check back with you tomorrow on the rest of the details for the christening.” John and Marlena watch him disappear through the French doors and then turn to each other. Without a word spoken between them, Marlena melts into his arms as John claims her lips in a kiss of sweet tenderness.
>From the patio, Roman watches the pair for a moment and smiles to himself satisfied that Marlena is right where she belongs. He turns to leave and is confronted by a grinning Laura with hands on hips, her foot tapping. “Going somewhere, Brady?” Roman bows and throws out his uninjured arm, indicating he’d follow her lead. Laura wasn’t so sure she wanted to turn her back to him. Either he’d disappear the moment she did or strangle her. She doesn’t budge as she replies smoothly, “I’m suppose to be following you, remember?” Roman gives a long-suffering sigh, mumbles something under his breath and storms off, Laura following behind him.
Having witnessed the scene from behind the French doors, John gives Marlena’s waist a gentle squeeze. “So how long do you give them, Doc?” Marlena smiles up at him, “Oh, I think they deserve at least a life sentence.”
Marlena stands at the threshold of the living room surveying the large group of family and friends gathered in the Black house for the after-Christening party. Her heart swells as her glance touches on each happy, smiling face. Bursts of merry laughter fill the air and the love that fills the room is a tangible thing. She could almost reach out and hug it to her. The party has been in full swing for hours and it is obvious no one is eager to leave. She sighs contentedly. This moment has been a long time coming and she wants to savor every moment.
Alice, standing only a few feet from Marlena, joins her on the threshold. “You have stars in your eyes, my dear.” Marlena slides her arm around Alice’s shoulders, “And so much joy in my heart, it feels like it’s going to burst. Oh, Alice, I couldn’t be happier.” They exchange smiles as Alice says, “I know and it shows on the faces of everyone here. You’ve brought your family together again, Marlena. This is a very happy day for them too.” Marlena nods as tears gather in her eyes and then she spots her husband across the room. Their glances meet and hold. A moment later he is at her side. Alice discreetly rejoins Mickey and Maggie. John raises Marlena’s hand, turns it over and plants a warm kiss in her palm, then says in a husky voice, “I don’t need to ask you if you’re happy, Mrs. Black. It’s practically pouring out of you.” Marlena’s fingers tighten on his and she smiles, “I could say the same of you, Mr. Black.” Her glance passes over the room again, “Isn’t this wonderful?”
John nods in agreement. “Um hmm, it’s promising to be one of the best days of our lives.” Marlena looks up at him, “You mean there’s more?” John grins, “Let’s just say I have something special planned later on for just the two of us.” He leans over and whispers in her ear, “You did see your doctor this morning, didn’t you?” Marlena laughs, “You know I did and you also know she said my six week check up was perfect.” Her eyes widen suddenly, “Oh! *Those* kind of special plans!” John’s grin widens.
Their intimate moment is broken by a knock on the front door. They look at each other in surprise as Marlena asks, “I wonder who that could be?” John pulls her along behind him, “Let’s go find out.” They open the door to a delivery man. “I have a package here for a Roman Brady.” Roman steps up behind them, “I’m Roman Brady.” The delivery man holds out a clipboard, “If you’ll sign here, Mr. Brady.” Roman scribbles out his signature, gives the man a tip and accepts the package. The delivery man tips his hat before departing. Filled with curiosity, John and Marlena turn to Roman.
Roman apologizes, “I hope you don’t mind my having this delivered here but when I found out about them, I knew you’d want to see them.” “What are they?” Marlena asks. Roman looks down at the package and says quietly, “These are a few of Stefano’s diaries. Apparently he chronicled everything.” He glances up at John, “Including everything about you and your past as he knew it.” He holds out the package to John, “I didn’t get the two of you anything for your wedding, I’m hoping this will do as a belated wedding gift.”
John takes the package in his hands and looks at it in wonder. Marlena hugs Roman, “Thank you, thank you! You couldn’t have given us a better gift.” John nods, and says in a quiet voice laden with emotion, “Yes, thank you. I can’t tell you what this means to me, to both of us and to my brother.” Roman clasps John’s shoulder, “I think I know and the two of you don’t need to thank me. Seeing that you received these diaries is the least I could do after everything I put you through.” “All the same, we do thank you.” John replies firmly.
“I’m sure the two of you would like to be alone now,” Roman says with a conspiratorial wink. “So why don’t you take off while no one is looking and I’ll hold down the forst and explain your absence.” He grins and adds, “It’ll give me a chance to put my god-parenting skills to the test once everyone is gone.” Marlena places a hand on his arm, the laughter dancing in her eyes. “Are you sure, Roman? It’s the nanny’s night off, Kit will be tied up at the church until later tonight and you’re still recovering from a gun shot wound. You don’t know what you’re getting yourself into.” Roman nods, “The wound is merely an annoyance. Besides, Sami will be around to help and I’d enjoy spending the time with her and my grandson too. Now get out of here before someone comes looking for you.”
He didn’t need to say it again. John grabs Marlena’s hand and practically drags her out the front door. Marlena protests as he continues on toward their car, “John, we can’t just leave like this. What about the children? Our friends? What will they think? John!” John opens the car door and tosses the package in the back seat then turns to Marlena and places his hands on her shoulders, “Don’t you want to be alone with me?” “Well, of course, but…” “And didn’t Roman just say he’d take care of everything?” “Yes, but…” “And didn’t I tell you I’d made special plans for us?”
That silences her and she nods. John continues, “I had already made arrangements for Laura and Sami to take care of the children until tomorrow morning so that we could get away tonight. Roman just speeded things up for us and this way, we’ll have even more time alone together. Now, do you want to return to the party or leave while we have a chance for that extra time?” Marlena curls her arms around his neck and presses herself against him. Her voice low and seductive, “I’d *love* to spend some extra time alone with you.” John groans and sets her away from him, “Baby, if you don’t wait until we get where we’re going, we’re going to be christening the back seat of this car.”
Marlena flashes him a sultry smile and walks around to the passenger side of the car, “I’m just warming you up, honey.” John tugs at his shirt collar. His voice a plea, “Marlena!” Her soft laughter reaches out and envelops him as she disappears inside the car. He takes a few steadying breaths of fresh air, then climbs in behind the wheel. He glances over at her and manages to say in a relatively calm voice, “Can you behave yourself long enough to make one stop?” “Does that mean I have to keep my hands to myself?” John leans his head back against the seat and closes his eyes, “Yes!” Marlena sighs, “I suppose.” Her glances sweeps over him, “But you’re awfully inviting.”
Beads of sweat break out on John’s brow. He reaches down with a shaking hand and starts the car. He clears his throat and looks at her, “Marlena, our first stop is going to be the church and I don’t think you want me to attack you in the parking lot. So can you hold that thought for another hour or two?” Marlena smiles sweetly, “Yes, dear.” Not feeling as reassured as he thought he’d be, John takes another deep breath and then backs the car out of the driveway.
***
They find Kit alone in the rectory preparing to perform a wedding ceremony. They share the news of the diaries with him. “Have you read them yet?” He asks eagerly. John shakes his head, “Roman had them delivered to the house and they arrived just moments before we left. Marlena and I will read them through tonight and I’ll call you as soon as we know what they contain.”
Kit sighs sadly, “Maybe we’ll finally find out what happened to our parents.” John nods, “According to Roman, Stefano wrote *everything* down in his diaries. If he had anything to do with our parents death, it’ll be in the diaries.” Marlena adds, “And the missing pieces of your past and why Stefano captured you in the first place.” Kit agrees, “Marlena’s right, John. That’s just as important as what happened to our parents.” He places a comforting hand on his brother’s arm, “And you’ll have Marlena there to help you through it – no matter what you discover.”
John raises a hand to Marlena’s cheek and rests it there, his gaze holding hers. “Yes, just like she’s always been there to help me through things.” Marlena rests her hand over John’s, “And always will be.” Kit clears his throat and the pair give a start, not realizing that they’d gotten totally lost in each other. They look at him, each wearing an apologetic smile. Kit shakes his head and chuckles, “It’s obvious the two of you need to be alone and *I* have a wedding to perform in about five minutes. So what are you waiting for?” He hugs each of them in turn and then watches them leave, knowing they have already forgotten him again. He smiles to himself and then returns to his preparations.
***
As John pulls the car to a stop in front of a very familiar building, Marlena gasps in surprise. “It’s our cabin!” John grins, “I told you I had something special planned.” “Yes, but I didn’t think this is what you had in mind.” John steps out of the car and circles around and opens her door. Marlena reaches into the back seat and grabs the still unopened package, then steps out of the car. He sweeps her up into his arms in one fluid motion and carries her in to the cabin. Once inside he slowly lowers her to her feet, his arms remain firmly around her waist. “Does it meet with your approval, Mrs. Black?”
Marlena looks around at the changes he has made. An intimate table for two now resides near the fireplace. In front of the fireplace rests a bear rug in a rich sable brown and instead of the old sofa, a new overstuffed sofa stands in it’s place. “Oh my, a bear rug! You remembered.” John chuckles in her ear, “We never did get to try out the last one all those years ago.” Marlena nods and sighs contentedly as her gaze takes in the rest of the changes.
The wide spacious bed is the same but sports a new comforter in white eyelet with colorful pillows tossed haphazardly along the top. Everywhere there are spring flowers, including her favorite – lilacs, spilling out of crystal vases adding splashes of color against the gleaming wood paneling. The lacey eyelet curtains fluttering in the breeze of the open window above the kitchen sink, catch Marlena’s attention. The silence drags out and John feels her muscles tense under his hands as the package falls to the floor with a thud. He turns her to face him and his eyes scan her face in concern. “What is it, Marlena?”
She pales and buries her face against his chest, saying, “I remember. Oh God, I remember.” John cradles her closer and strokes her hair gently, “What do you remember, Doc?” She draws in a ragged breath and finally looks up at him, “For months now…I’ve been having these…visions. They started the first time we were in this cabin and then they’d just hit me, out of the blue and they left me feeling…uneasy and confused. I didn’t understand why I was having them.” “And you do now?” She nods and says in a voice of condemnation, “I was remembering seducing you when I was possessed.” She pulls away from him and turns away, “How could I have done that? We believed you were a priest. I was jeopardizing both of our souls.”
John moves up behind her and places his hands on her shoulders, “Baby, you didn’t have any more control over that than anything else you did at that time. It *wasn’t* you and nothing happened. We both found the strength to fight, to resist. As in everything, it was our love and our faith in God that gave us that strength. That’s what you have to cling to, to remember. The rest of it is in the past.” She shakes her head, unconvinced. “Is it? Is there something else that happened that I’m not remembering? Something else that will come back to haunt me later?”
His voice is reassuring, “No, there isn’t anything else. You have to believe that.” She gives a shaky sigh, “I want to.” John folds his arms around her, “Then believe it. Everything about that time is over. We fought that battle and we won. Just like we’ve fought and won every battle we’ve ever faced together.” “But the memories are so vivid now.” “Then let me give you new ones to replace them and in time, they’ll fade.” Marlena nods slowly, sinking back against him letting his love and his warm reassurances wash over her. John offers up a silent prayer of thanks as he feels her relax against him.
***
Marlena rearranges the vase of flowers on the table and glances over at John, leaning against the kitchen counter watching her. The smile that settles on her face tugs at his heart strings. It is that special smile she’d always reserved just for him. He knew she’d come to terms with her memories and was working on putting them behind her, ready to create new ones.
“John.” She indicates the room with her hand, “When did you have time to do all this?” John moves from the counter and walks toward her, “While you and Laura were busy planning the christening party, Maggie helped me redecorate.” He stops before her and reaches up and takes a lock of her hair between his fingers, letting it’s silkiness roll gently through the pads of his thumb and index finger. “After what she did at the agency, I figured she’d work miracles here and she did.” “I’ll have to tell her what a beautiful job she did.” Her hand drops from the vase and encounters the package John had moved to the table. She picks it up, looking down at it and then back up at her husband. “John, I know you’re determined to make the rest of today perfect but I think we need to take care of these before we…”
John takes the package from her hands and tosses it on the sofa, “Marlena, I’ve waited this long to find out, I can wait a little longer.” A light of determination enters his eyes, “Right now, all I want to do is take my beautiful wife to bed and do more than hold her until she falls asleep.” He releases her hair and his hands slide sensuously down her bare arms, “And I think she wants it too.” He bends his head and plants a warm kiss on the curve of her neck, his voice teasing, “Or maybe she’s disappointed because we didn’t christen the back seat of the car after all.”
A shiver of pleasure washes over Marlena at his touch. Her hands snake up around his neck, tugging gently until his face is within inches of hers. His breath is warm against her face and her heart races as she replies in a whisper, “I’ll show you disappointed.” Parting her lips, she raises herself to meet his lips and kisses him with a hunger that belies her outward calm. With a moan of desire John lifts her, weightless in his arms, and carries her to the bed, never breaking contact with her lips.
***
John and Marlena awaken still wrapped in each other’s arms. She smiles up at him and then rests her head on his shoulder. Her index finger traces lazy patterns through the hair on his chest. “John.” “Hmmm?” “Aren’t you the least bit curious what those diaries contain?” John lifts his head and looks at her, a glimmer of laughter in his eyes. “Not at the moment but you aren’t going to be happy until we read them, are you?” She shakes her head, “’fraid not.”
“Okay, go get them.” As Marlena starts to move from his side, he grabs her arm. “Wrap a sheet around yourself or I can’t promise we’ll get to those diaries anytime soon.” He leans over and slides his tongue slowly along the inner side of her forearm. With a soft laugh, Marlena pulls slowly away from him earning a warm moist trail down her arm, across palm all the way to the end of her fingertips. She gasps and quickly snatches up a sheet and wraps it around herself. She isn’t going to let him distract her again. John grins and props himself up on the pillows, watching her cross the room and back. “The sheet didn’t help.” Marlena laughs again and repeats his earlier advice to her, “Put that thought on hold for an hour or two.”
She rejoins him in the bed and sits Indian-fashion next to him. All traces of laughter gone, she holds the package out before her. John shakes his head, “You open them, Doc. This concerns you just as much as it does me.” She nods and carefully unwraps the package to reveal two leather bound diaries, the dates stamped on the cover in gold lettering. She runs her hand over the cover of the top one and says gently, “It’s difficult to believe that all your answers lie within the covers of these two books and that the man who wrote them and terrorized us for so many years is finally out of our lives.”
John reaches out and cups her chin with his hand, his thumb lightly caresses her cheek. “He *is* out of our lives forever, Marlena and even if we didn’t have these diaries, nothing could make me happier than I have been since the first time we made love in this cabin. Whatever those diaries contain isn’t going to change that.” She nods again, “I know but it will give you the closure you need and then we can put Stefano behind us once and for all. And there is Kit to consider, I’m sure he’s just as anxious as you are to discover any news about your parents, if Stefano was involved in their deaths.” John’s hand falls away, “Oh, he was involved in it, I’m sure of it.” Marlena looks at him and asks hopefully, “Do you remember something?”
John shakes his head, “Nothing specific. Just flashes of memory that I still haven’t been able to put together. I do remember that Stefano seems to have been a part of my life for a long time, longer ago than the first time at Maison Blanche.” Marlena holds up the first diary and points to the dates, “Then that would explain this.” For the first time, John takes a closer look at the dates. He sucks in his breath as he realizes the first entries were written when he was only twelve. Marlena opens the diary to the first page and hands it to him. He holds it so that they can read it together. By the time they reach the bottom of the fifth page, they both have tears in their eyes. John sets the journal down. Marlena immediately moves into his arms and holds him. “Oh John, honey, I’m sorry.”
John shakes his head. His tears fall freely as he says angrily, “Isn’t there a woman in my life he didn’t want?” Marlena captures his face in her hands, “She refused him, John. Just like I refused him. Even Stefano realized how much your mother loved your father. Just like he realized how much I love you.” John’s voice is bitter. “It didn’t stop him from pursuing either one of you.” Marlena lowers her hands and picks up the journal, “You *need* to finish this, no matter how painful it is.” John eyes the diary in horror, “I can’t, Doc. This proves he was involved in their deaths. I can’t read about what he did to them. After hearing Kit re-live it, I don’t want to read it from that monster’s perspective.” She nods in understanding and says gently, “Then I’ll finish it for you.”
She curls up against him, his arms holding her close as she silently reads through more of the diary. She stops several times, wiping at the tears on her cheeks as she reads more about John’s parents and Stefano’s torment of them and the twelve-year-old John. She startles John when she turns to him without warning, a light of excitement in her eyes. “John, listen to this.” She flips back several pages and begins reading out loud, “Conner Black came home unexpectedly and confronted me in the living room. The power had been knocked out earlier in the day by a storm and several candles were lit to shed light in the room. In our struggle, one of the candles was tipped over. The fire spread rapidly. I barely escaped with my life. The boy saw me leave as he was making his own escape. As for his parents, I did not see them emerge from the house. I can only assume they died in the fire.”
She stops and turns several pages, “And this. My men have investigated and discovered no bodies were found in the house. The boy was so traumatized, he could not remember what happened. The police and fire records have been taken care of…no one will ever know the truth. As far as the world will know, his parents perished in the fire. I will continue to try and locate them and should the boy ever remember, I will deal with him then.” Marlena lowers the diary, “Do you realize what this means?”
John says slowly as if afraid to believe what he just heard, “They could still be alive.” Marlena nods, “Yes because they didn’t die in the fire.” Still afraid to believe it’s possible John asks, “But what if he did finally catch up to them?” Marlena points to the leather bound books. “We’ll never know if we don’t finish the diaries and there is something else you haven’t considered.” “What’s that?” “You must have remembered what happened when you headed down to Maison Blanche that first time and confronted Stefano with it. If your parents were dead, all proof that he was involved was gone. So why would Stefano bother to go to such lengths to make you forget again? Unless…”
John finishes for her, “…they were alive and he was afraid I’d find them.” Marlena nods again and picks up the diary, silently handing it over to him. They quickly read the rest of it and then the other one. It isn’t until they reach the last page of the second diary that their suspicions are confirmed. It is a recent entry, only four months old. Marlena reads it out loud, “After all this time, the remainder of the Black family still eludes me. I will not rest until I have found them.” She closes the diary and smiles up at her husband, “He never found them, John and he never gave up looking. That must mean they’re still alive.”
John tosses the diaries off the bed and with a whoop of joy, scoops Marlena into her arms and plants wild kisses all over her face. She laughs delightedly and is a little disappointed when he stops suddenly. “Doc, I do believe we’ve found our first case for the detective agency.” Marlena nods then a frown suddenly mars her brow. “There’s just one thing I don’t understand. Why didn’t Stefano ever find out about Kit? There’s no mention of him anywhere in the diaries.” John shakes his head, “I don’t know. Given the time frame, it’s possible things happened quickly and all while Kit was away at camp. It’s obvious Stefano wasn’t as thorough in those days and neglected to learn more about my family.”
Her frown disappearing, Marlena nods again. “That would explain it.” She smiles, “Why don’t you call Kit and give him the good news and I…will see what you’ve stocked in the kitchen and throw something together for us to eat. I’m famished.” John pulls her into his arms, “I have a better idea. I’ll call Kit and then I’ll *help* you throw something together.” Marlena laughs, “Still don’t trust my cooking?” John grins, “I’d like to be able to *eat* what’s been cooked.” Marlena snatches up a pillow and hits him with it. “Make your phone call and I’ll get everything ready.”
***
Later that evening, the cabin is bathed in candle light and a flickering fire dances in the fireplace. John slowly lowers Marlena to the bear rug, his eyes drinking in the creamy smoothness of her skin. Her hands slowly skim along his bare shoulders, her fingers lightly digging in and pulling him closer. John’s mouth hovers just above hers, “Remember the promise we made to each other the last time we were here?” Marlena nods slowly, loving the feel of him against her as she breathes softly her voice barely a whisper, “You and me…now and forever.”
He entwines his fingers in her hair, “This is the beginning of our forever, Marlena. No matter what lies ahead, we’ll be together…always. We’ll face whatever challenges life has to offer us, we’ll raise our children together, watch our grandchildren grow. And when we’re ready, we’ll move those rockers out onto our back porch and enjoy each and every sunrise and sunset that God grants us.” Marlena pulls him closer still, “And we’ll hold and comfort each other, laugh and cry with each other and make love and love each other until we draw our last breaths. And whatever comes after that, we’ll find each other again because we were meant to be together through eternity.”
John brushes her lips with his, “I love you, Marlena Evans-Black.” “And I love you, John Black. So very, very much!” Their breath mingles as they kiss sealing the solemn vows they’ve made to each other again. Their bodies draw closer and their flesh and souls join together in a spiritual symphony as lilac petals from a nearby vase drift lazily down around them.
***
Hi everyone,
It has been almost two years since I began this story and it has been a labor of love and as in all good things, it must come to an end. Yes, this is the final chapter in my John and Marlena saga. It’s time I moved on to a new writing project. I’ve enjoyed writing every moment of this story and hope you’ve enjoyed reading it just as much. Your comments have always been a pleasure to read as you’ve traveled on John and Marlena’s journey along with me.
My very special thanks to CJ, for keeping that “Gator” at my heels and for those long hours of brainstorming! 🙂 To Michelle and Sharon for their editing skills! Thanks for playing cleanup, girls! 🙂 And to all of you who have read the story and gotten back to me, for your encouragement.
Cheryl
~As long as we have imaginations, the story of John and Marlena
will continue to live on – Now and Forever.~
The Jarlena Journal 